Ricoh MP-6002-9002-Service-Manual
Ricoh MP-6002-9002-Service-Manual
Ricoh MP-6002-9002-Service-Manual
SERVICE MANUAL
It is the reader's responsibility when discussing the information contained
within this document to maintain a level of confidentiality that is in the best
interest of Ricoh Americas Corporation and its member companies.
DOCUMENTATION HISTORY
REV. NO. DATE COMMENTS
* 06/2012 Original Printing
D131/D132/D133
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SM i D131/D132/D133
Initializing the Drum Settings .............................................................. 2-15
Tandem Tray ...................................................................................... 2-16
Machine Level .................................................................................... 2-18
Date/Time Setting............................................................................... 2-18
SP Codes ........................................................................................... 2-19
Connecting the Drum Heater Connector and the Tray Heater Connector.
........................................................................................................... 2-19
Installing the Scanner Heater ............................................................. 2-20
2.3 A3/11"X17" TRAY TYPE 9001 (D482) ..................................................... 2-21
2.3.1 ACCESSORY CHECK .................................................................... 2-21
2.3.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ...................................................... 2-22
2.4 LCIT RT4010 (D613) ............................................................................... 2-25
2.4.1 ACCESSORY CHECK .................................................................... 2-25
2.4.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ...................................................... 2-25
Removing Tape .................................................................................. 2-25
Preparing the Main Machine .............................................................. 2-26
Installing the LCT ............................................................................... 2-26
2.5 8 1/2"X14" PAPER SIZE TRAY TYPE 9002 (B474)................................. 2-29
2.5.1 ACCESSORY CHECK .................................................................... 2-29
2.5.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ...................................................... 2-30
2.6 MULTI-FOLDING UNIT FD4000 (D615) .................................................. 2-34
2.6.1 ACCESSORIES .............................................................................. 2-34
2.6.2 INSTALLATION .............................................................................. 2-35
Tapes ................................................................................................. 2-35
Paper Guide, Sponge Strips............................................................... 2-37
Ground Plate ...................................................................................... 2-37
Docking .............................................................................................. 2-38
Power Cord ........................................................................................ 2-39
Finishing the Installation ..................................................................... 2-39
Proof Tray Auxiliary Plate ................................................................... 2-40
2.7 FINISHER SR4080 (D610) ...................................................................... 2-41
2.7.1 ACCESSORY CHECK .................................................................... 2-41
2.7.2 INSTALLATION .............................................................................. 2-42
2.8 PUNCH UNITS (B531/A812) ................................................................... 2-47
2.8.1 ACCESSORY CHECK .................................................................... 2-47
2.8.2 INSTALLATION .............................................................................. 2-48
2.9 OUTPUT JOGGER UNIT TYPE 9002B (B513) ....................................... 2-53
2.9.1 ACCESSORY CHECK .................................................................... 2-53
D131/D132/D133 ii SM
2.9.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ...................................................... 2-53
2.10 FINISHERS SR4060/SR4070 (D611/D612) ....................................... 2-55
2.10.1 ACCESSORIES .......................................................................... 2-55
2.10.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE .................................................. 2-56
Removing Tapes and Retainers ......................................................... 2-57
Docking the Finisher........................................................................... 2-58
Attaching the Trays ............................................................................ 2-61
Leveling the Finisher .......................................................................... 2-62
Selecting the Staple Supply Name ..................................................... 2-62
Enabling Booklet Binding (D612 Only) ............................................... 2-63
Auxiliary Trays.................................................................................... 2-63
2.11 PUNCH UNITS (B702) ....................................................................... 2-65
2.11.1 ACCESSORIES .......................................................................... 2-65
2.11.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE .................................................. 2-66
2.12 OUTPUT JOGGER UNIT TYPE 9002A (B703) .................................. 2-69
2.12.1 ACCESSORIES .......................................................................... 2-69
2.12.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE .................................................. 2-69
2.13 COVER INTERPOSER TRAY CI4000 (D614) ................................... 2-72
2.13.1 ACCESSORIES .......................................................................... 2-72
2.13.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE .................................................. 2-73
Removing Tapes and Retainers ......................................................... 2-74
Preparing the Finisher ........................................................................ 2-75
Attaching the Extensions for the D610 ............................................... 2-76
Prepare the Cover Interposer for the D610 ........................................ 2-77
Attach the Extensions to the D610 ..................................................... 2-77
Attaching the Extensions for the D611/D612...................................... 2-78
Attaching the Interposer Tray (D610/D611/D612) .............................. 2-79
Attaching the Corner Plates for the D610 ........................................... 2-80
Docking the Finisher and Interposer to the Machine (D610/D611/D612)
........................................................................................................... 2-82
2.14 MAILBOX CS4000 (D616) ................................................................. 2-84
2.14.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................ 2-84
2.14.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE .................................................. 2-84
2.15 COPY TRAY TYPE 9002 (B756)........................................................ 2-87
2.15.1 ACCESSORIES .......................................................................... 2-87
2.15.2 INSTALLATION .......................................................................... 2-88
2.16 CARD READER BRACKET (B498), KEY COUNTER BRACKET (B452)
2-90
SM iii D131/D132/D133
Rev. 09/06/2012
D131/D132/D133 iv SM
Rev. 09/06/2012
SM v D131/D132/D133
Punch Unit Type 3260 (B702) for Finisher SR4060/SR4070 (D611/D612)
........................................................................................................... 3-10
Multi Folding Unit FD4000 (D615) ...................................................... 3-11
Related SP Codes .............................................................................. 3-11
D131/D132/D133 vi SM
Scanner Wire Removal ...................................................................... 4-25
Scanner Wire Reinstallation and Scanner Position Adjustment ......... 4-26
4.5 LASER UNIT ............................................................................................ 4-28
4.5.1 CAUTION DECALS ........................................................................ 4-28
4.5.2 LD UNIT, POLYGON MOTOR AND POLYGON MOTOR DRIVE BOARD
4-29
SP Adjustments .................................................................................. 4-30
4.5.3 LASER SYNCHRONIZATION DETECTOR REPLACEMENT ........ 4-31
4.5.4 LASER UNIT ALIGNMENT ............................................................. 4-32
4.6 DRUM UNIT ............................................................................................. 4-34
4.6.1 DEVELOPMENT UNIT REMOVAL ................................................. 4-34
Drum Removal ................................................................................... 4-34
Drum Re-installation ........................................................................... 4-36
Replacement with a Used Development Unit ..................................... 4-37
4.6.2 CHARGE CORONA UNIT .............................................................. 4-38
4.6.3 CHARGE CORONA WIRE, GRID, CLEANING PAD ...................... 4-38
4.6.4 OPC DRUM REMOVAL .................................................................. 4-40
Dusting the Drum Surface .................................................................. 4-41
4.6.5 PTL ................................................................................................. 4-42
4.6.6 QUENCHING LAMP ....................................................................... 4-43
4.6.7 DRUM POTENTIAL SENSOR ........................................................ 4-43
4.6.8 CLEANING FILTER ........................................................................ 4-44
4.6.9 CLEANING BLADE ......................................................................... 4-44
4.6.10 CLEANING BRUSH .................................................................... 4-45
4.6.11 PICK-OFF PAWLS ..................................................................... 4-46
4.6.12 ID SENSOR ................................................................................ 4-47
4.6.13 DRUM MOTOR ........................................................................... 4-48
4.6.14 TONER COLLECTION BOTTLE ................................................ 4-49
4.6.15 TONER SEPARATION UNIT ...................................................... 4-50
4.6.16 OZONE FILTERS ....................................................................... 4-51
4.6.17 OPTICS DUST FILTER .............................................................. 4-52
4.6.18 INTERNAL DUST FILTER .......................................................... 4-52
4.6.19 TONER COOLING FAN.............................................................. 4-53
4.7 DEVELOPMENT UNIT............................................................................. 4-54
4.7.1 DEVELOPER REPLACEMENT ...................................................... 4-54
Preparation......................................................................................... 4-54
Removal ............................................................................................. 4-54
Reinstallation...................................................................................... 4-56
SM vii D131/D132/D133
4.7.2 DEVELOPMENT FILTER ............................................................... 4-57
4.7.3 ENTRANCE SEAL AND SIDE SEALS............................................ 4-58
Removal ............................................................................................. 4-58
Reinstalling......................................................................................... 4-59
4.7.4 TD SENSOR ................................................................................... 4-60
4.7.5 TONER END SENSOR ................................................................... 4-61
4.7.6 TONER SUPPLY MOTOR .............................................................. 4-62
Cleaning Requirement........................................................................ 4-63
4.7.7 DEVELOPMENT MOTOR .............................................................. 4-63
4.8 TRANSFER BELT UNIT .......................................................................... 4-64
4.8.1 TRANSFER BELT UNIT REMOVAL ............................................... 4-64
4.8.2 TRANSFER BELT REMOVAL ........................................................ 4-65
Re-installation .................................................................................... 4-66
4.8.3 TRANSFER ROLLER CLEANING BLADE ..................................... 4-67
4.8.4 DISCHARGE PLATE ...................................................................... 4-68
Reinstallation...................................................................................... 4-68
4.8.5 TRANSFER POWER PACK ........................................................... 4-69
Re-installation .................................................................................... 4-69
4.9 FUSING UNIT .......................................................................................... 4-70
4.9.1 FUSING UNIT REMOVAL .............................................................. 4-70
4.9.2 FUSING UNIT THERMISTORS AND THERMOSTATS ................. 4-71
Reinstallation...................................................................................... 4-72
4.9.3 WEB CLEANING ROLLER ............................................................. 4-72
Web Unit Disassembly ....................................................................... 4-72
Reinstallation...................................................................................... 4-73
Web Unit Re-assembly....................................................................... 4-74
4.9.4 WEB MOTOR AND WEB END SENSOR ....................................... 4-75
Reinstallation...................................................................................... 4-76
4.9.5 PRESSURE ROLLER CLEANING UNIT ........................................ 4-76
Reinstallation...................................................................................... 4-76
4.9.6 FUSING LAMPS, HOT ROLLER, AND PRESSURE ROLLER ....... 4-77
Fusing Lamps ..................................................................................... 4-77
Hot Roller and Pressure Roller........................................................... 4-79
4.9.7 PRESSURE ROLLER ..................................................................... 4-81
Spring Adjustment .............................................................................. 4-81
4.9.8 STRIPPER PAWLS ........................................................................ 4-82
4.9.9 NIP BAND WIDTH ADJUSTMENT ................................................. 4-83
4.9.10 FUSING UNIT EXIT SENSOR .................................................... 4-84
D131/D132/D133 viii SM
4.9.11 FUSING/EXIT MOTOR ............................................................... 4-85
4.9.12 FUSING EXIT SENSOR AND EXIT UNIT ENTRANCE SENSORS
4-87
4.10 DUPLEX UNIT ................................................................................... 4-88
4.10.1 DUPLEX UNIT REMOVAL.......................................................... 4-88
Reinstallation...................................................................................... 4-88
4.10.2 DUPLEX UNIT SIDE-TO-SIDE ADJUSTMENT .......................... 4-89
4.10.3 JOGGER FENCE ADJUSTMENT .............................................. 4-90
4.10.4 DUPLEX MOTORS ..................................................................... 4-91
Duplex Inverter Motor ......................................................................... 4-91
Duplex Jogger and Transport Motors ................................................. 4-92
4.10.5 DUPLEX SENSORS ................................................................... 4-93
Jogger HP Sensor .............................................................................. 4-93
Duplex Entrance Sensor .................................................................... 4-93
Duplex Transport Sensor 3 ................................................................ 4-94
Inverter Exit Sensor, Transport Sensors 1 & 2 ................................... 4-94
4.10.6 DUPLEX JOGGER BELT ADJUSTMENT .................................. 4-96
4.11 PAPER FEED .................................................................................... 4-97
4.11.1 PAPER TRAY ............................................................................. 4-97
Tandem Tray ...................................................................................... 4-97
Universal Tray .................................................................................... 4-99
4.11.2 REAR FENCE RETURN SENSOR REPLACEMENT ................. 4-99
4.11.3 REAR FENCE HP SENSOR REPLACEMENT ......................... 4-100
4.11.4 TANDEM RIGHT TRAY PAPER SENSOR REPLACEMENT ... 4-101
4.11.5 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT WIRE REPLACEMENT........................ 4-102
Reinstallation.................................................................................... 4-103
4.11.6 TANDEM TRAY PAPER SIZE CHANGE .................................. 4-104
4.11.7 TANDEM TRAY SIDE REGISTRATION ................................... 4-107
4.11.8 PICK-UP, FEED, SEPARATION ROLLER REPLACEMENT.... 4-108
4.11.9 FEED UNIT ............................................................................... 4-109
4.11.10 PAPER FEED MOTORS ........................................................ 4-111
For D131 .......................................................................................... 4-111
For D132/D133................................................................................. 4-112
4.11.11 SEPARATION ROLLER PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT ............ 4-114
4.11.12 RELAY SENSOR .................................................................... 4-115
4.11.13 BY-PASS PAPER SIZE DETECTION BOARD ....................... 4-116
Reinstallation.................................................................................... 4-117
4.11.14 BY-PASS TRAY ROLLERS .................................................... 4-117
SM ix D131/D132/D133
4.11.15 BY-PASS SEPARATION ROLLER PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT
4-118
4.11.16 REGISTRATION SENSOR ..................................................... 4-119
4.11.17 REGISTRATION AND BY-PASS UNIT REMOVAL ................ 4-120
4.12 PCBS AND HDD .............................................................................. 4-122
4.12.1 CNT BOARD (CONTROLLER BOARD) ................................... 4-122
Reinstallation of CNT Board ............................................................. 4-125
4.12.2 NVRAM ..................................................................................... 4-125
NVRAM on the BCU ......................................................................... 4-125
NVRAM on the Controller ................................................................. 4-126
4.12.3 IPU ............................................................................................ 4-127
4.12.4 HDD .......................................................................................... 4-128
Reinstallation.................................................................................... 4-129
4.12.5 CTL-PSU .................................................................................. 4-130
4.12.6 BCU .......................................................................................... 4-131
Replace the BCU.............................................................................. 4-132
4.12.7 CNB .......................................................................................... 4-132
4.12.8 PFB ........................................................................................... 4-133
4.12.9 DRB .......................................................................................... 4-134
4.12.10 PSU ........................................................................................ 4-135
Reinstallation of PSU ....................................................................... 4-135
4.13 ADF .................................................................................................. 4-136
4.13.1 ADF COVERS .......................................................................... 4-136
4.13.2 FEED UNIT ............................................................................... 4-137
4.13.3 FEED BELT AND PICK-UP ROLLER ....................................... 4-138
4.13.4 SEPARATION ROLLER ........................................................... 4-139
4.13.5 REGISTRATION SENSOR ....................................................... 4-140
4.13.6 ADF CONTROL BOARD .......................................................... 4-141
4.13.7 ORIGINAL WIDTH, INTERVAL, SEPARATION AND SKEW
CORRECTION SENSORS .................................................................... 4-142
4.13.8 ORIGINAL LENGTH SENSORS ............................................... 4-143
4.13.9 DF POSITION AND APS SENSORS ........................................ 4-144
4.13.10 OTHER ADF SENSORS......................................................... 4-145
4.13.11 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT MOTOR ............................................. 4-146
4.13.12 FEED MOTOR ........................................................................ 4-146
4.13.13 EXIT MOTOR AND TRANSPORT MOTOR............................ 4-147
4.13.14 PICK-UP ROLLER MOTOR AND HP SENSOR ..................... 4-148
4.13.15 CIS UNIT ................................................................................ 4-149
D131/D132/D133 x SM
4.13.16 ADF EXIT SENSOR ............................................................... 4-150
4.13.17 ADF TRANSPORT BELT ASSEMBLY ................................... 4-150
Reinstallation.................................................................................... 4-151
Removing the Belt ............................................................................ 4-151
Reinstalling the Belt.......................................................................... 4-153
Reattaching the White Cover ........................................................... 4-154
4.14 COPY IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS: PRINTING/SCANNING ................ 4-155
4.14.1 IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS: PRINTING ........................................ 4-155
Preparation....................................................................................... 4-155
Registration - Leading Edge/Side-to-Side ........................................ 4-155
Blank Margin .................................................................................... 4-156
Registration Buckle Adjustment ....................................................... 4-158
4.14.2 IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS: SCANNING ...................................... 4-159
Registration: Platen Mode ................................................................ 4-159
Magnification .................................................................................... 4-160
4.14.3 ADF SCANNING ADJUSTMENTS ........................................... 4-160
Vertical Black Lines .......................................................................... 4-160
DIP Switch Settings (ADF Main Board) ............................................ 4-161
ADF Skew Correction ....................................................................... 4-162
4.15 TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION .................................................... 4-164
SM xi D131/D132/D133
5.3.1 PRINTING TEST PATTERN: SP2902-003 ....................................... 5-9
Test Pattern Table ................................................................................ 5-9
5.3.2 IPU FRONT/BACK TEST PATTERNS: SP2902-001,002 ............... 5-11
Test Pattern Table .............................................................................. 5-12
5.3.3 IPU PRINTING TEST PATTERN: SP2902-004 .............................. 5-14
5.4 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE .................................................................. 5-15
5.4.1 SOFTWARE UPDATE .................................................................... 5-15
Software Update Procedure ............................................................... 5-15
Doing the Software Update Procedure ............................................... 5-15
Errors During Firmware Update ......................................................... 5-18
Updating the LCDC for the Operation Panel ...................................... 5-20
Downloading Stamp Data................................................................... 5-20
5.4.2 UPLOADING/DOWNLOADING NVRAM DATA .............................. 5-21
Uploading Content of NVRAM to an SD card ..................................... 5-21
Downloading an SD Card to NVRAM ................................................. 5-21
5.5 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES ................................................... 5-22
5.5.1 SP TABLES .................................................................................... 5-22
5.6 INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK ......................................................................... 5-23
5.7 USING THE DEBUG LOG ....................................................................... 5-24
5.7.1 SETTING UP "SAVE DEBUG LOG" ............................................... 5-24
To Switch Debug Log On ................................................................... 5-24
To Select the Target for the Debug Log File ...................................... 5-25
To Select Events ................................................................................ 5-26
To select one or more memory modules for recording in the debug log file
........................................................................................................... 5-29
5.7.2 RETRIEVING THE DEBUG LOG FROM THE HDD ....................... 5-32
5.7.3 MORE ABOUT DEBUG LOG ......................................................... 5-32
SP5857-015: SD to SD (Any) ............................................................. 5-32
SP5857-016: Make HDD LogFile ....................................................... 5-32
SP5857-017: Make SD Log File ......................................................... 5-33
6. TROUBLESHOOTING................................................................... 6-1
6.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS .................................................................. 6-1
6.2 IMPORTANT SP CODES .......................................................................... 6-2
6.3 JAM DETECTION ...................................................................................... 6-3
6.3.1 SENSOR LOCATIONS ..................................................................... 6-3
6.3.2 FREQUENT PAPER JAMS .............................................................. 6-4
Symptom 1: Jams when paper is fed from a by-pass tray that is not used
frequently ............................................................................................. 6-4
D131/D132/D133 xii SM
Symptom 2: Jams with noise from the paper feed unit ......................... 6-5
Symptom 3: Other ................................................................................ 6-6
6.3.3 JAM CODES ..................................................................................... 6-7
ADF: Paper Jam Errors ........................................................................ 6-7
Main Unit and LCIT RT4010 (D613): Paper Jam Errors ....................... 6-8
Finisher SR4060 (D611): Paper Jam Errors....................................... 6-10
Finisher SR4070 (D612): Paper Jam Errors....................................... 6-11
Finisher SR4080 (D610): Paper Jam Errors....................................... 6-12
Mailbox CS4000 (D616): Paper Jam Errors ....................................... 6-13
Cover Interposer Tray CI4000 (D614): Paper Jam Errors .................. 6-13
Multi Folding Unit FD4000 (D615): Paper Jam Errors ........................ 6-13
6.4 PROGRAM DOWNLOAD ........................................................................ 6-15
6.4.1 RECOVERY METHODS ................................................................. 6-15
6.4.2 DOWNLOAD ERROR CODES ....................................................... 6-16
6.5 TIMING CHARTS ..................................................................................... 6-21
6.5.1 FEED, TRANSPORT, FEED OUT: FACE-UP ................................ 6-21
6.5.2 TRANSPORT, INVERTER, FEED OUT: FACE-DOWN.................. 6-23
6.5.3 DUPLEX TRANSPORT .................................................................. 6-24
6.6 OTHER PROBLEMS ............................................................................... 6-25
6.6.1 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS......................................................... 6-25
6.6.2 COMMON PROBLEMS .................................................................. 6-26
SM xiii D131/D132/D133
READ THIS FIRST
This machine is rated as a Class 1 LED Device. It is safe for both office and EDP
use.
The danger of explosion exists if a battery of this type is incorrectly replaced. Replace
only with the same or an equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Discard
used batteries in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
Laser Safety
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the repair of laser-based optical
units in the field. The optical housing unit can only be repaired in a factory or at a location with the
requisite equipment. The laser subsystem is replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer
Engineer. The laser chassis is not repairable in the field. Customer engineers are therefore
directed to return all chassis and laser subsystems to the factory or service depot when
replacement of the optical subsystem is required.
WARNING
Screw
Connector
E-ring
C-ring
Harness clamp
The notations "SEF" and "LEF" describe the direction of paper feed. The arrows indicate the
direction of paper feed.
In this manual "Horizontal" means the "Main Scan Direction" and "Vertical" means the "Sub Scan
Direction" relative to the paper feed direction.
Obey these guidelines to avoid problems such as misfeeds, damage to originals, loss of
valuable data and to prevent damage to the machine
This information provides tips and advice about how to best service the machine.
Points to Confirm with Operators
At the end of installation or a service call, instruct the user about use of the machine. Emphasize
the following points.
Show operators how to remove jammed paper and troubleshoot other minor problems by
following the procedures described in the operating instructions.
Point out the parts inside the machine that they should never touch or attempt to remove.
Confirm that operators know how to store and dispose of consumables.
Make sure that all operators have access to an operating instruction manual for the machine.
Confirm that operators have read and understand all the safety instructions described in the
operating instructions.
Demonstrate how to turn off the power and disconnect the power plug (by pulling the plug, not
the cord) if any of the following events occur:
1. Something has spilled into the product.
2. Service or repair of the product is necessary.
3. The product cover has been damaged.
Caution operators about removing paper fasteners around the machine. They should never
allow paper clips, staples, or any other small metallic objects to fall into the machine.
Caution operators about storing extra toner cartridges. To prevent clumping on one end of the
toner cartridge, it should always be stored horizontally on a flat service. A toner cartridge
should never be stored on its end vertically.
Trademarks
Microsoft, Windows, and MS-DOS are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in
the United States and /or other countries.
PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.
PCL is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
PowerPC is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and may be trademarks
of their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights involved with those marks.
PRODUCT INFORMATION
R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY
P a ge Date A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew
None
Specifications
1. PRODUCT INFORMATION
Information
Product
1.1 SPECIFICATIONS
SM 1-1 D131/D132/D133
Machine Configuration
1 Mainframe D131/D132/D133
D131/D132/D133 1-2 SM
Machine Configuration
Information
Product
Punch Unit Type 1075 EU 2/4 B531
SM 1-3 D131/D132/D133
Machine Configuration
Note: An IEEE 802.11 interface unit and Bluetooth interface unit cannot be installed and used
together.
D131/D132/D133 1-4 SM
Machine Configuration
Information
Product
Item Code Comment
Fax Options
Item Code
SM 1-5 D131/D132/D133
Guidance for Those Who are Familiar with Predecessor Products
PREDECESSOR PRODUCTS
The D131/D132/D133 series succeeds the D062/D063/D065/D066 series. If you have experience
with the predecessor products, the following information will be of help when you read this
manual.
D062/D063/D065/D066 D131/D132/D133
SD Slot 2 slots
40 mm 50 mm 40 mm 50 mm
40 mm 50 mm 40 mm 50 mm
BW 426.5 472
D131/D132/D133 1-6 SM
Guidance for Those Who are Familiar with Predecessor Products
Information
Product
FC 310.5 708
ADF Cable. The relay connector has been discarded to prevent noise.
Exposure Unit. The exposure lamp has been upgraded. The 3-beam APS sensors have
been replaced with a 2-beam + 1-beam configuration. The exposure unit is spot welded (two
screws have been eliminated).
Web Motor Lock Detection. Three new SC codes (SC540-02, -03, -04) have been added to
detect web motor lock.
Development unit. The color of the pressure release filter has been changed from white to
gray.
Paper Feed. Paper feed has been upgraded. There is no change in the removal or
replacement of the paper feed units.
Controller. The GW controller has been upgraded to the GW+ Controller.
MFP Options. DOS (Data Overwrite Security), Data Encryption, and Scan-to-Media are now
provided as standard.
USB/SD Slots. A USB slot and SD card slot is provided on the right side of the operation
panel. Installation of a device for these slots is no longer required.
Safe Shutdown. After the main power switch of the machine has been turned off, the
machine will not shut down immediately. A message states that shutting down may require up
to two minutes to complete. The SDB (a new board) keeps the power supply to the controller
until the HDD unit has been shutdown safely. When shutting down from normal stand-by
mode, if the safe shutdown takes more than 2 minutes, there is a problem with the controller
board and it may need to be replaced.
Fax Unit. The MBU and FCU are combined on one board. After replacing the FCU, the
SRAM data from the old FCU must be transferred to the new FCU. The following data are
transferred: TTI, RTI, CSI, bit switch settings, RAM address settings, and NCU parameter
settings. For more, see the fax installation manual.
SM 1-7 D131/D132/D133
Guidance for Those Who are Familiar with Predecessor Products
D062/D063/D065/D066 D131/D132/D133
Item Item
Copy Tray Type 2075 (B756) Copy Tray Type 9002 (B756)
Cover Interposer Tray Type 3260 (B704) Cover Interposer Tray CI4000 (D614)
Punch Unit Type 3260 SC (B702 Punch Unit Type 3260 SC (B702)
Output Jogger Unit Type 3260 (B703) Output Jogger Unit Type 9002A (B703)
Punch Unit Type 850 SC (A812) Punch Unit Type 850 SC (A812)
Output Jogger Unit Type 1075 (513) Output Jogger Unit Type 9002B (513)
Key Counter Bracket Type 1027 (B452) Key Counter Bracket Type 1027 (B452)
D131/D132/D133 1-8 SM
Guidance for Those Who are Familiar with Predecessor Products
D062/D063/D065/D066 D131/D132/D133
Information
Product
Item Item
Memory Unit Type B 32MB (G578) Memory Unit Type B 32MB (G578)
Multi Folding Unit FD5000 (D454) Multi Folding Unit FD4000 (D615)
Optional Counter Interface Unit Type A Optional Counter Interface Unit Type A
(B870) (B870)
Tab Sheet Holder Type 9002 (B499) Tab Sheet Holder Type 3260 (B499)
Punch Unit Type 3260 2/4 EU (B702) Punch Unit Type 3260 2/4 EU (B702)
Punch Unit Type 1075 EU 2/4 (B531) Punch Unit Type 1075 EU 2/4 (B531)
Punch Unit Type 3260 NA 3/2 (B702) Punch Unit Type 3260 NA 3/2 (B702)
Punch Unit Type 1075 3/2 (B531) Punch Unit Type 1075 3/2 (B531)
A3/11"x17" Tray Type 9001 (D482) A3/11"x17" Tray Type 9001 (D482)
Controller Options
D062/D063/D065/D066 D131/D132/D133
Item Item
Copy Connector Type 3260 (B328) Copy Connector Type 3260 (B328)
Copy Data Security Unit Type F (B829) Copy Data Security Unit Type F (B829)
SM 1-9 D131/D132/D133
Guidance for Those Who are Familiar with Predecessor Products
D062/D063/D065/D066 D131/D132/D133
Item Item
File Format Converter Type E (D377) File Format Converter Type E (D377)
IEEE 1284 Interface Unit Board Type A IEEE 1284 Interface Unit Board Type A
(B679) (B679)
IEEE 802.11a/g Interface Type J (D377) IEEE 802.11a/g Interface Type J (D377)
PostScript3 Unit Type 9001 (D462) PostScript3 Unit Type 9002 (D620)
Printer/Scanner Unit Type 9001 (D462) Printer/Scanner Unit Type 9002 (D620)
D131/D132/D133 1-10 SM
Guidance for Those Who are Familiar with Predecessor Products
Fax Options
Information
Product
Changes are marked in bold in the right column.
D062/D063/D065/D066 D131/D132/D133
Item Item
Fax Option Type 9001 (D418) Fax Option Type 9002 (D619)
G3 Interface Unit Type 9001 (D418) G3 Interface Unit Type 9002 (D619)
SM 1-11 D131/D132/D133
Overview
1.4 OVERVIEW
D131/D132/D133 1-12 SM
Overview
Information
1. Entrance Roller (ADF) 2. Feed Belt (ADF)
Product
3. Separation Roller (ADF) 4. Pick-up Roller (ADF)
17. Feed Sensor (Paper Tray) 18. Feed Roller (Paper Tray)
19. Separation Roller (Paper Tray) 20. Pick-up Roller (Paper Tray)
SM 1-13 D131/D132/D133
Overview
D131/D132/D133 1-14 SM
Overview
Information
1. Original Paper Path 2. Vertical Transport Path Product
3. LCT Feed 4. Selected Trays
7. Junction Gate (paper goes either up to the 8. Junction Gates (two junction gates control
mailbox or out to the finishers proof tray) the paper path inside the finisher)
SM 1-15 D131/D132/D133
Overview
D131/D132/D133 1-16 SM
INSTALLATION
R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY
P a ge Date A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew
6 08/30/2012 Updated Power Requirements for D133 machine
114 09/05/2012 Correct the Data OverWrite Security Installation instructions
94 96 09/06/2012 Added Key Counter Interface Unit 20 Pin (B870)
97 125 09/06/2012 Page number change only
Installation Requirements
2. INSTALLATION
Installation
1. Temperature Range
Recommended: 15 C to 25 C (59 F to 77 F)
Possible: 10 C to 32 C (50 F to 90 F)
2. Humidity Range:
Recommended: 30% to 70 %RH
Possible: 15% to 80% RH (27 C 80%, 32 C 54%)
3. Ambient Illumination: Less than 1,500 lux (do not expose to direct sunlight or strong light.)
4. Ventilation: Room air should turn over at least 3 times per hour
5. Ambient Dust: Less than 0.10 mg/m 3
6. If the place of installation is air-conditioned or heated, do not place the machine where it will
be:
Subjected to sudden temperature changes
Directly exposed to cool air from an air-conditioner
Directly exposed to heat from a heater
7. Do not place the machine where it will be exposed to corrosive gases.
8. Do not install the machine at any location over 2,000 m (6,500 feet) above sea level.
9. Place the copier on a strong and level base with the front and back of the machine within 5
mm (0.2") of level.
SM 2-1 D131/D132/D133
Installation Requirements
10. Do not place the machine where it may be subjected to strong vibrations.
11. Do not connect the machine to a power source shared with another electrical appliance.
12. The machine can generate an electromagnetic field which could interfere with radio or
television reception.
D131/D132/D133 2-2 SM
Installation Requirements
2.1.4 DIMENSIONS
Installation
2.1.5 PERIPHERAL/OPTION SUMMARY TABLE
The table below summarizes all the peripheral devices and controller options.
B756 Copy Tray Type 9002 1 Small output tray for mainframe
SM 2-3 D131/D132/D133
Installation Requirements
D482 A3/11" x 17" Tray Type 9001 1 Installed in Tray 1 (Tandem Tray)
D614 Cover Interposer Tray CI4000 2 Installed on the D610, D611, D612
B499 Tab Sheet Holder Type 3260 2 Installed in Tray 1 (Tandem Tray)
D131/D132/D133 2-4 SM
Installation Requirements
Installation
Copy Data Security Unit Type
B829 3 IPU Board
F
*1 Key:
Class 1: Peripheral units connected directly to the mainframe
Class 2: Components installed on or in peripheral units (punches, etc.)
Class 3: MFP controller options (SD cards, boards)
SM 2-5 D131/D132/D133
Installation Requirements Rev. 08/30/2012
Make sure that the wall outlet is near the main machine and easily accessible. Make sure
the plug is firmly inserted in the outlet.
Avoid multi-wiring.
Be sure to ground the machine.
Never set anything on the power cord.
Never turn off the main power switch when the power LED is lit or flashing. To avoid
damaging the hard disk or memory, press the operation power switch to switch the power
off, wait for the power LED to go off, and then switch the main power switch off.
The Main Power LED lights or flashes at the following times:
While the platen cover or ADF is open
While the main machine is communicating with the network server
While the machine is accessing the hard disk or memory when reading or writing data.
There are two power switches on the machine:
Main Power Switch: Located on the front left corner of the machine and covered by a plastic
cover. This switch should always remain on unless the machine is being serviced.
Operation Power Switch: Located on the right side of the operation panel. This is the switch
normally used by the customer to power the machine on and off.
D131/D132/D133 2-6 SM
Main Machine
Installation
No. Description Qty
3. Support 2
6. Leveling Shoe 2
SM 2-7 D131/D132/D133
Main Machine
To avoid serious injury, do not connect the power plug to the machine until you are
instructed to do so.
Save the filament tape and shipping retainers to prepare the machine for shipping in
the future.
D131/D132/D133 2-8 SM
Main Machine
6. Raise the ADF and remove all the tapes and shipping retainers around the ADF, exposure
glass, and operation panel.
7. Remove the shipping retaining sheet [B] under the white pad.
Installation
8. Open the front door, open the toner bottle holder [A], then remove all tape and shipping
retainers.
9. Open the right door and remove the tape from the vertical transport plate.
SM 2-9 D131/D132/D133
Main Machine
10. Remove the PCU inner cover [A] ( x 2) and disconnect the fan motor [B] ( x 1).
D131/D132/D133 2-10 SM
Main Machine
Installation
14. Open the tandem tray (top paper tray) and remove the metal retainer bracket [A] ( x 1) and
wire, then the red tags (x2) and all tape.
SM 2-11 D131/D132/D133
Main Machine
6. Remove the face plate [A] of the development unit (knob x 1, x 2).
If the LCT is installed, disconnect it. This lets the front door open far enough for
development unit removal.
8. Close the supply pipe shutter [B].
9. While allowing the development unit [C] to slip to the right, slowly pull it out of the machine.
D131/D132/D133 2-12 SM
Main Machine
D133 Only
10. Remove the pressure release tube [A].
Installation
11. Toner hopper [A] Developer Replacement
12. Rotate the toner hopper slightly 10 to 20 as you slide it up to remove it.
13. While turning the knob [A] slowly, pour in one pack of developer [B] from one end of the
development unit to the other.
14. Make sure that the developer is evenly distributed. Note the developer lot number printed on
the top edge of the bag. You will need the lot number when you execute SP2963 (Installation
Mode).
15. Assemble the development unit, then re-install it in the machine.
16. Follow the instructions printed on the inside of the front door to install the toner bottle.
If the door does not close, make sure that the pipe line shutter is rotated down. (See
Step 8 above.)
SM 2-13 D131/D132/D133
Main Machine
If you cannot move the development unit plate behind the horizontal pin, turn the
front gear of the unit to the left and try again.
6. Make sure the pipeline shutter is rotated down to the open position.
7. Reattach all removed parts.
D131/D132/D133 2-14 SM
Main Machine
Installation
machine power is turned on.
SP2963 must be done before you do sample copying or test printing.
If you do not press Execute in Step 6, the auto process control items (potential sensor
calibration, Vsg, Vref, etc.) will not initialize correctly.
1. Open the front door.
2. Connect the power cord.
3. Turn the main power switch on.
4. Ignore the "Cover Open" message. Do not close the door.
5. Go into the SP mode.
6. Close the front door.
7. Enter SP2963-002, then enter the lot number of the developer.
The lot number should be seven digits.
If seven digits are not entered before you do SP2963-001, the LCD shows error
messages.
8. Do SP2963-001.
It will take 3 or 4 minutes to initialize toner supply and the auto process control
settings.
9. When you see the "Completed" message box, touch "Exit" in the box.
10. Press Exit twice to go out of the SP mode.
11. Attach the applicable decals (supplied with the machine) to the paper trays.
12. Check the copy quality and machine operation.
At installation, use SP2963 to enter the lot number, initialize the developer, and to force
toner supply to the toner hopper.
After you replace developer in a machine that has been already installed, do not use
SP2963; use SP2801 (TD Sensor Initial Setting) instead to enter the lot number and
initialize the TD sensor. p.4-54
SM 2-15 D131/D132/D133
Main Machine
Tandem Tray
Before shipping the machine, the tandem tray is set for A4 or LT LEF and must be adjusted if the
customer wants to use the tandem tray for another paper size.
D131/D132/D133 2-16 SM
Main Machine
Installation
6. Remove the tray cover [A] ( x 3).
7. Remove the motor cover [B] ( x 5).
8. Re-position the side fences [A] ( x 8). The outer slot position is used when loading A4 size
paper.
9. Re-install the motor cover and the tray cover.
SM 2-17 D131/D132/D133
Main Machine
Machine Level
Date/Time Setting
Use the User Tools menu to set the current date and time.
On the operation panel, press the User Tools key.
On the touch-panel, press System Settings.
Press the Timer Setting tab.
Press Set Date to enter the date.
Press Set Time to enter the time.
D131/D132/D133 2-18 SM
Main Machine
SP Codes
Installation
Supply Name
Setting Toner This name appears when the user presses the Inquiry
SP5841-001
Name Setting: on the User Tools screen.
Black
Stamp Data Do SP 5853 to copy stamp data to the hard disk, then
SP5853
Download turn the power off/on.
Connecting the Drum Heater Connector and the Tray Heater Connector.
1. Open the rear upper cover and the rear lower cover.
SM 2-19 D131/D132/D133
Main Machine
8. Connect the harness [C] to the connector [B] on the rear side of the machine.
D131/D132/D133 2-20 SM
A3/11"x17" Tray Type 9001 (D482)
Installation
No. Description Qty
1. A3/DLT Tray 1
2. Short connector 1
SM 2-21 D131/D132/D133
A3/11"x17" Tray Type 9001 (D482)
Switch the machine off and unplug the machine before starting the following procedure.
3. Draw out the tandem tray [A] completely to separate the left and right sides of the tray.
4. Push in the right tandem tray [B].
D131/D132/D133 2-22 SM
A3/11"x17" Tray Type 9001 (D482)
Installation
5. Remove the left tandem tray [A] ( x 5). Keep these screws.
7. Remove the right tandem tray [A] ( x 2). Keep these screws.
SM 2-23 D131/D132/D133
A3/11"x17" Tray Type 9001 (D482)
8. Connect the short connector [A] to the left tandem tray terminal [B].
9. Install the A3/DLT tray [C] on the right rail [D], center rail [E], and left rail [F]. Use the screws
that you removed in Steps 3 and 4.
You must use the short, silver screws on the left and right rails. If you use one of the
longer screws, it will stop the movement of the tray on the rails.
10. .Re-install the front cover.
11. Switch the machine on, enter the SP mode and select the paper size for Tray 1 with
SP5959-001 (Paper Size Tray 1). For details, see SP5959 in Service Tables.
12. Attach the appropriate decal for the selected paper size.
D131/D132/D133 2-24 SM
LCIT RT4010 (D613)
Installation
No. Description Qty
4. Installation Instructions 1
Removing Tape
1. Remove the filament tape from the body [A] and top cover [B] of the LCT.
2. Remove the tape under the lid [C] of the LCT.
SM 2-25 D131/D132/D133
LCIT RT4010 (D613)
Switch the machine off and unplug the machine before starting the following procedure.
1. Remove the LCT installation cover [A] from the right side of the machine ( x 2).
2. Save the screw on the left [B]. You will need it to install the LCT.
3. Remove the LCT connector cover [C] (x 1) and the covers over the holes for the docking pins
[D]. (x 3)
1. Insert the two upper docking pins (grooved) [A] into the upper slots and the lower docking pin
[B] into the lower slot.
D131/D132/D133 2-26 SM
LCIT RT4010 (D613)
Installation
2. Align the holes on the side of the LCT [A] with the docking pins on the side of the machine [B],
then slowly push the LCT onto the pins.
The release button [C] is used to unlock the LCT so it can be disconnected from the
machine.
3. Connect the plug [D] of the LCT power cord to the side of the machine.
4. Insert the flat-head shoulder screw [A] into the hole and fasten it to lock the release lever in
SM 2-27 D131/D132/D133
LCIT RT4010 (D613)
place.
For easier access to the hole for the screw [A], you can remove the right panel [B] (
x 2).
5. Switch the machine on and execute SP5959 005 (Paper Size Tray 4 (LCT)) to select the
paper size. For details, see SP5959 in Service Tables.
D131/D132/D133 2-28 SM
8 1/2"x14" Paper Size Tray Type 9002 (B474)
Installation
No. Description Q"ty
1. Cover 1
2. B4/LG frame 1
4. Rear bracket 1
5. Front bracket 1
6. Harness clamp 1
8. Tapping screws - M4 x 8 4
SM 2-29 D131/D132/D133
8 1/2"x14" Paper Size Tray Type 9002 (B474)
1. If the LCT is connected to the machine, open the cover and remove the paper.
2. Lower the LCT tray. Cover the near end sensor [A], then press the tray down button [B] to
lower the tray bottom plate.
Switch the machine off and unplug the machine before starting the following
procedure.
3. Disconnect the LCT from the machine.
D131/D132/D133 2-30 SM
8 1/2"x14" Paper Size Tray Type 9002 (B474)
Installation
5. Remove the LCT cover [A] ( x 1).
6. Remove the right stay [B] at and re-attach it below at ( x 2).
7. Remove the right cover [C] ( x 2).
8. Attach the front bracket [A] with the beveled corner down ( x 2).
If the brackets are difficult to install, raise the bottom plate with your hand.
9. Attach the rear bracket [B] with the beveled corner down ( x 2).
10. Attach the bottom plate extension [C] with the hex nuts ( x 4).
SM 2-31 D131/D132/D133
8 1/2"x14" Paper Size Tray Type 9002 (B474)
13. Move the front side fence [A] to the LG position and fasten ( x 1).
14. Move the rear side fence [B] to the LG position and fasten ( x 1).
D131/D132/D133 2-32 SM
8 1/2"x14" Paper Size Tray Type 9002 (B474)
Installation
15. Change the position of the lower limit sensor [A] ( x 1).
16. Attach the harness (not shown) to the back of the plate and secure the sensor connector wire.
17. Attach the LCT cover [A] provided with the kit ( x 1).
18. Re-attach the right cover [B] ( x 2).
19. Connect the LCT to the machine.
20. Switch the machine on, enter the SP mode, then use SP5959 005 (Paper Size Tray 4 (LCT)
to select the new paper size. For details, see SP5959 in "Service Tables".
SM 2-33 D131/D132/D133
Multi-Folding Unit FD4000 (D615)
2.6.1 ACCESSORIES
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following illustration
and list.
1. Joint Bracket 1
5. Ground Plate 1
6. Screws M3x6 2
7. Screws M3x6 2
8. Screws M4x20 4
9. Screws M4x14 4
D131/D132/D133 2-34 SM
Multi-Folding Unit FD4000 (D615)
*1
: In China, do not use the power cord provided with this unit. Contact your supervisor and use
Installation
the power cord specified for use in China.
2.6.2 INSTALLATION
The unit must be connected to a power source that is close to the unit and easily
accessible.
Make sure that the main machine is switched off and that its power cord is disconnected
before doing the following procedures.
Tapes
1. Remove all tape and packing material from the front, left, rear, and right sides.
SM 2-35 D131/D132/D133
Multi-Folding Unit FD4000 (D615)
D131/D132/D133 2-36 SM
Multi-Folding Unit FD4000 (D615)
Installation
1. Select the short paper guide [A] and attach it ( x2 M3x6).
2. Peel the tape from the sponge strip [B] and attach the strip to the top right edge of the unit.
Ground Plate
1. Attach the ground plate [A] to the lower right edge of the unit ( x2 M3x6).
SM 2-37 D131/D132/D133
Multi-Folding Unit FD4000 (D615)
Docking
1. Fasten the joint bracket [A] to the left side of the upstream unit ( x4 M4x20).
If you are docking to the main machine, you must first remove the plastic cap at the
I/F cable connection point.
5. Slowly push the unit [C] against the left side of the upstream unit (or main machine) so that
the lock bar is directly and squarely under the arms of the joint bracket.
6. Push in the lock bar so it slides up into the notches in the arms on both ends of the joint
bracket [D].
7. Fasten the lock bar by re-attaching the screw removed in Step 3 ( x1).
8. Connect the I/F cable [E] to the upstream unit (or main machine).
D131/D132/D133 2-38 SM
Multi-Folding Unit FD4000 (D615)
Power Cord
Installation
1. Insert the power cord socket [A] into the power connection point.
In China, do not use this power cord provided with this unit. Contact your supervisor
and use the power cord specified for use in China.
2. Connect the power supply cord plug to a power outlet.
1. Set the leveling shoes and adjust the height of the unit.
2. Load some B4 paper in the 2nd tray of the main machine, and make several copies.
3. Check paper skew and side-to-side registration and correct if necessary.
SM 2-39 D131/D132/D133
Multi-Folding Unit FD4000 (D615)
D131/D132/D133 2-40 SM
Finisher SR4080 (D610)
Installation
No. Description Q"ty
1. Cushion 1
2. Table Extension 1
3. Leveling Shoes 1
7. Grounding Plate 1
SM 2-41 D131/D132/D133
Finisher SR4080 (D610)
2.7.2 INSTALLATION
Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure.
1. Unpack the finisher and remove all tapes and shipping retainers.
D131/D132/D133 2-42 SM
Finisher SR4080 (D610)
Installation
2. Open the front door and remove the shipping retainers. Remove brackets [A], [B], and [C] (
x 2 each).
3. Install the front rear bracket [A] and front joint bracket [B] ( x 2 each) (M4 x 14) on the left
side of the copier.
4. Remove the connector cover [C].
SM 2-43 D131/D132/D133
Finisher SR4080 (D610)
Set the grounding plate so that there is no gap between the grounding plate and the
bottom frame of the finisher (as shown).
The edge of the table extension should be aligned with the edge of the finisher (as
shown).
D131/D132/D133 2-44 SM
Finisher SR4080 (D610)
Installation
7. Attach the cushion [A] to the right side of the upper cover.
If you are installing the cover interposer tray, do not attach the cushion here. Attach it
to the cover interposer tray. The Cover Interposer Tray D614 must be installed before
you dock the finisher and tray with the main machine.
8. Install the entrance guide plate [B] ( x 2) (M3 x 6).
SM 2-45 D131/D132/D133
Finisher SR4080 (D610)
10. Open the front door of the finisher, and remove the screw from the locking lever, then pull out
the locking lever [B].
11. Align the finisher on the joint brackets, and lock it in place by pushing in the locking lever [B].
Before securing the locking lever, make sure that the top edges of the finisher and
the copier are parallel from front to rear as shown [C].
12. Secure the locking lever [B] ( x 1) and close the front door.
13. Connect the finisher cable [D] to the copier.
14. Set the leveling shoes (x 4) under the feet and level the machine.
D131/D132/D133 2-46 SM
Punch Units (B531/A812)
This procedure describes installation of these punch units in the Finisher SR4080.:
Punch Unit Type 1075 3/2 (B531)
Punch Unit Type 1075 EU 2/4 (B531)
Installation
Punch Unit Type 850 SC (A812)
These punch units can be installed and used with the Finisher SR4080 only.
1. Punch unit 1
6. Spacer (2 mm) 1
7. Spacer (1 mm) 2
8. Spring 1
13. Knob 1
SM 2-47 D131/D132/D133
Punch Units (B531/A812)
2.8.2 INSTALLATION
Switch the machine off and unplug the machine before starting the following procedure.
D131/D132/D133 2-48 SM
Punch Units (B531/A812)
Installation
5. Remove the inner cover [A] ( x 3).
6. Behind the inner cover at [B] and [C], press the lock tab to the right to release the inner cover
from the frame.
7. Remove the plastic knockouts [D].
SM 2-49 D131/D132/D133
Punch Units (B531/A812)
9. Install the sensor arm [A] ( x 1, small step screw (M3 x 4).
Make sure that the sensor arm swings freely on the step screw.
10. Attach the spring [B].
11. At the rear, position the 2 mm spacer [A] and attach the punch unit [B] ( x 2, M4 x 10).
At the hole just above the lock lever, use one of the screws from the paper guide
removed above to fasten the remaining two spacers to the frame.
These extra spacers are used to adjust the horizontal position of the punch holes.
D131/D132/D133 2-50 SM
Punch Units (B531/A812)
Installation
12. At the front, secure the punch unit [A] with the large step screw ( x 1, M4 x 10).
13. Attach the punch unit knob [B] ( x 1).
14. Connect the PCB harness connector [A] to CN129 of the finisher PCB and to CN600 of the
punch unit PCB.
15. Connect the HP Sensor 2 harness connector [B] to CN130 of the finisher PCB and to HP
Sensor 2.
16. Connect the single end of the hopper full sensor connector cable [C] to the hopper full sensor
on the arm ( x 1, x 1), then connect the other two connectors to HP Sensor 1 [D] and
CN620 [E] of the punch PCB.
SM 2-51 D131/D132/D133
Punch Units (B531/A812)
No special DIP switch settings are required for this punch unit. The punch unit sends
an identification signal to the machine, so it knows what type of punch unit has been
installed.
D131/D132/D133 2-52 SM
Output Jogger Unit Type 9002B (B513)
Installation
No. Description Qty
2. Tapping Screws - M3 x 6 2
3. Installation Procedure 1
This jogger unit can be installed and used with the Finisher SR4080 only.
1. Turn the main machine switch off and disconnect the finisher from the main frame.
2. Use the flat head of a screwdriver to remove the left upper cover [A] from the finisher and
discard it.
SM 2-53 D131/D132/D133
Output Jogger Unit Type 9002B (B513)
3. Remove the cover plate [A] from the jogger unit ( x 2). Keep the screws.
4. With the jogger unit connector on the left side, hook the frame of the jogger unit [A] into the
holes on the left and right side of the finisher frame.
5. On the left side, fasten the connector [B] to the socket ( x 1).
6. On the left and right side, attach the jogger unit frame to the side of the finisher with the
screws [C] provided ( x 2).
7. Re-attach the jogger unit cover to its frame with the screws removed in step 2 ( x 2).
D131/D132/D133 2-54 SM
Finishers SR4060/SR4070 (D611/D612)
2.10.1 ACCESSORIES
Check the accessories from the box against the following list.
Installation
No. Description Qty
4. Tapping screws - M3 x 8 1
5. Tapping Screws M3 x 6 2
6. Leveling Shoes 3
SM 2-55 D131/D132/D133
Finishers SR4060/SR4070 (D611/D612)
D131/D132/D133 2-56 SM
Finishers SR4060/SR4070 (D611/D612)
Always turn the machine off and unplug the machine before doing any of the following
procedures.
Installation
1. Unpack the machine and remove all the wrapping.
2. Remove all filament tape and shipping retainers from the finisher.
SM 2-57 D131/D132/D133
Finishers SR4060/SR4070 (D611/D612)
D131/D132/D133 2-58 SM
Finishers SR4060/SR4070 (D611/D612)
Install the interposer now. The cover interposer must be installed before you dock the finisher
to the copier.
1. Use a short screwdriver to attach the grounding plate [B] ( x 2, M3 x 6).
Installation
2. Attach the rear bracket [A] ( x 2, M4 x 14).
3. Attach the front bracket [B] ( x 2, M4 x 14).
SM 2-59 D131/D132/D133
Finishers SR4060/SR4070 (D611/D612)
4. Remove the screw [A] to release the lock lever [B] ( x 1).
5. To avoid bending and damaging the paper entrance guide plates [C], slowly push the finisher
against the side of the machine until the brackets [D] enter their slots.
6. Connect connector [E] to the main frame.
7. Attach the gasket seal [F] as shown.
8. Push the finisher against the machine.
9. Push in lock lever [B] then reattach the screw [A].
D131/D132/D133 2-60 SM
Finishers SR4060/SR4070 (D611/D612)
Installation
D612
1. Attach the upper output tray [A] ( x 1, M3 x 8).
3. Use the round-head rivet (provided accessory) to fasten the auxiliary tray storage pocket to
rear cover of the finisher.
4. Place the auxiliary trays for the shift tray and proof tray in the pocket.
D611
1. Attach the output tray [A].
SM 2-61 D131/D132/D133
Finishers SR4060/SR4070 (D611/D612)
D131/D132/D133 2-62 SM
Finishers SR4060/SR4070 (D611/D612)
Installation
2. Touch Copier/Document Server Features.
3. Touch the Input/Output tab, then touch Stapling Position.
4. Touch any Stapling Position button and touch the center (saddle-stitch) stapling symbol.
5. Exit the User Tools mode. Specify the number of copies, touch the center stapling symbol on
the operation panel, then start the print job.
Auxiliary Trays
The auxiliary trays are stored in the auxiliary tray storage pocket mounted on the back cover of
the finisher.
Make sure that the customer understands the following points about these auxiliary trays:
The trailing edges of excessively curled or Z-folded paper can activate the tray full sensors
before the tray is actually full.
Once the "Exit Tray Full" message displays, the job cannot continue until some sheets are
removed from the tray which is only partially full. The trays are designed to prevent this
problem.
The auxiliary tray for the shift tray should be installed for Z-folding jobs.
The auxiliary tray for the proof tray should be installed only when excessively curled paper is
triggering early "Exit Tray Full" alerts.
Normally, both auxiliary trays should be placed in the pocket mounted on the back of the
finisher.
Proof Exit Auxiliary Tray
Follow the procedures below to install the auxiliary tray for the proof tray.
1. First, remove the paper from the paper feed tray, turn it upside down, and continue printing.
This may solve the problem.
SM 2-63 D131/D132/D133
Finishers SR4060/SR4070 (D611/D612)
2. If the "Exit Tray Full" alerts continue, set the proof auxiliary tray [A] on the proof tray on the top
of the finisher.
3. Make sure that the arms of the auxiliary tray fit tightly over the ridges of the proof tray
below.
Shift Auxiliary Tray
1. Open and close the front door of the finisher. This initializes the finisher and moves the shift
tray to the standby position.
2. Open the front door again and leave it open.
3. Set the shift auxiliary tray [A] on the shift tray as shown.
4. Close the front door. This initializes the finisher again and moves the shift tray to the new
standby position with the auxiliary tray installed.
5. After the Z-folding job is finished, remove the tray and store it in the auxiliary tray storage
pocket on the back of the finisher.
6. Open and close the front door to re-initialize the finisher and reset the standby position of the
shift tray.
D131/D132/D133 2-64 SM
Punch Units (B702)
These instructions describe installation of the following punch units for the Finisher
SR4060/SR4070:
Punch Unit Type 3260 SC (B702)
Installation
Punch Unit Type 3260 2/4 EU (B702)
Punch Unit Type 3260 NA 3/2 (B702)
These punch units can be installed and used with the Finishers SR4060 and SR4070
only.
2.11.1 ACCESSORIES
Check the accessories and their quantities against the following list.
4. Screws (M3 x 6) 5
6. Punching Unit 1
SM 2-65 D131/D132/D133
Punch Units (B702)
Always turn the machine off and unplug the machine before doing any of the following
procedures.
1. If the finisher is connected to the copier, disconnect the power connector [A] and separate the
finisher from the copier.
2. Remove the rear cover [B] ( x 2) and open the front door.
At the base of the back cover, be sure to disconnect the tabs that fasten the cover to
the frame.
3. Remove the guide plate [C] ( x 2).
4. Slide the punch unit [A] along its rails into the finisher. Make sure that pin engages correctly at
the front and rear.
5. Connect and fasten the punch unit [B] ( x 2, x 1).
D131/D132/D133 2-66 SM
Punch Units (B702)
The connectors are coiled and tied above the PCB on the right.
Installation
6. Fasten the slide drive unit [A] to finisher and connect it to the punch unit ( x 2, x 1).
Press in on the slide drive unit at when you attach screw .
7. Make sure that the punch unit moves freely and is not blocked by the screws.
8. Insert the side-to-side detection unit [A]. Make sure that the two pins are engaged correctly at
the front.
9. Confirm that the side-to-side detection slides smoothly on its rails. If it does not, make sure
that the rails are aligned with their grooves.
10. Fasten the side-to-side detection unit and connect it at the rear ( x 2, x 1, x 1).
11. Pull the short connector out of the connector [B] then connect it ( x 1).
SM 2-67 D131/D132/D133
Punch Units (B702)
12. At the front, use a pair of nippers to remove the knockout [A]
13. Insert the punch waste transport unit [B] into the finisher.
Make sure that the punch waste transport unit slides smoothly on its rails. If it does
not, make sure that the rails are aligned with the grooves.
14. Remove the short connector from the connector [C].
D131/D132/D133 2-68 SM
Output Jogger Unit Type 9002A (B703)
This jogger unit can be installed and used with the Finishers SR4060/SR4070 only
2.12.1 ACCESSORIES
Installation
Check the accessories and their quantities against the following list.
1. Jogger Unit 1
2. Tapping Screws - M3 x 6 2
Always switch the machine off and unplug the machine before doing any of the following
procedures.
1. Turn the main machine switch off.
2. Disconnect the finisher from the main frame.
SM 2-69 D131/D132/D133
Output Jogger Unit Type 9002A (B703)
3. Use the flat head of a screwdriver to remove the left upper cover [A].
D131/D132/D133 2-70 SM
Output Jogger Unit Type 9002A (B703)
5.
Installation
6. While you hold the jogger unit with the connector on the left, put the hooks of the frame of the
jogger unit [A] into the holes in the left and right side of the finisher frame.
7. Fasten connector [B] to the socket ( x 1).
8. Attach the jogger unit to the finisher ( x 2).
9. Reattach the jogger unit cover [C] to the jogger unit ( x 2).
10. Set SP6118 to 1 after you install the jogger unit.
SM 2-71 D131/D132/D133
Cover Interposer Tray CI4000 (D614)
2.13.1 ACCESSORIES
Check the accessories and their quantities against the following list.
3. Shoulder screws 3
4. Tapping screws M4 x 8 9
5. Tapping screws M3 x 8 2
6. Tapping screws M3 x 6 5
7. Adjuster plates 2
8. Hinge Bracket 1
12. Spacer 1
D131/D132/D133 2-72 SM
Cover Interposer Tray CI4000 (D614)
Installation
2.13.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
The Cover Interposer Tray must be installed with one of the following finishers:
Finisher SR4060 (D611)
Finisher SR4070 (D612)
Finisher SR4080 (D610)
SM 2-73 D131/D132/D133
Cover Interposer Tray CI4000 (D614)
Make sure that the finisher is disconnected from the main machine and that the copier is
switched off and unplugged before starting the following procedure.
D131/D132/D133 2-74 SM
Cover Interposer Tray CI4000 (D614)
Installation
1. Remove the cover [A] of the relay connector.
2. Loosen the screw of the bracket [B] ( x 1) then remove the bracket.
3. Remove the guide plate [C]. (This guide plate will be attached to the cover interposer; do not
discard it.)
If you are installing the cover interposer tray with a previously installed finisher,
remove the sponge strip from the finisher and save it for re-attachment to the
interposer tray.
4. Either:
If you are installing the D611/D612, attach the extensions to the finisher without
modification. Go to "Attaching the Extensions for the D611/D612".
If you are installing the D610, modify the extensions and attach them to the finisher. Go to
"Attaching the Extensions for the D610".
SM 2-75 D131/D132/D133
Cover Interposer Tray CI4000 (D614)
The procedures in this section are for installation of the cover interposer with the D610
only.
If you are installing the cover interposer with the D611/D612, go to the next section.
Modify the Attachments for the D610
D131/D132/D133 2-76 SM
Cover Interposer Tray CI4000 (D614)
Installation
1. Remove spacer [A] ( x 1).
2. Attach spacer [B] ( x 1).
3. Remove the screws from the connector case [C] ( x 2).
4. Push the connector case in the direction of the arrow until the second set of holes is aligned
with the holes below, then attach the screws.
SM 2-77 D131/D132/D133
Cover Interposer Tray CI4000 (D614)
D131/D132/D133 2-78 SM
Cover Interposer Tray CI4000 (D614)
Installation
1. Pick up the cover interposer tray, align the keyholes [A] with the shoulder screws [B], then
slide the cover interposer down onto the screws.
2. Secure the cover interposer with the screw [C] ( x 1, M3 x 6).
3. Either:
If you are installing the cover interposer tray on the D611/D612, skip the next section and
go directly to Docking the Finisher and Interposer to the Machine.
If you are installing the cover interposer tray on the D610, go to the next section, install
the corner plates on the D610, then go to Docking the Finisher and Interposer to the
Machine.
SM 2-79 D131/D132/D133
Cover Interposer Tray CI4000 (D614)
1. Temporarily attach the screws [A] (with about two turns) to the right end of the finisher
extension table [B] ( x 2, tapping M4 x 8)
The holes are not visible because they are covered with tape. Just punch the screws
through the holes.
2. Align the cutouts [C] of the right rear corner plate [D] with the screws and attach the plate.
3. With a long screw driver inserted through the cutouts in the right rear corner plate [D], tighten
the screws to fasten the right rear corner plate to the table extension [B].
4. Temporarily attach the screw [A] (M4 x 8) with about two turns to fasten to the panel at the
right front corner.
D131/D132/D133 2-80 SM
Cover Interposer Tray CI4000 (D614)
The hole is not visible because it is covered with tape. Just punch the screw through
the hole.
5. With the clamp [B] under the edge of the corner, align the cutout [C] in the right front corner
plate with the screw, then snap it into position.
6. With a long screwdriver inserted into the plate cutout [C], tighten the screw to fasten the right
Installation
front corner plate.
SM 2-81 D131/D132/D133
Cover Interposer Tray CI4000 (D614)
4. Attach the sponge strip [A] that is supplied with the finisher.
5. Attach the guide plate (removed from the finisher) to the cover interposer.
Attach the front end [B] of the plate ( x 1).
Attach the rear end of the plate with the anti-static brush [C] ( x 1).
D131/D132/D133 2-82 SM
Cover Interposer Tray CI4000 (D614)
Use the two small tapping screws that are supplied, and not the machine screws
removed from the finisher guide plate.
6. Release the lock lever [D] ( x 1).
7. Attach the pad [E]. (This pad is provided with the finisher.)
8. Slowly push the finisher against the side of the machine until the brackets [F] go into the slots.
Installation
Move the finisher carefully, or you will bend the entrance guide plates.
9. Attach the lock lever [D] ( x 1).
10. Connect the connector [G] to the copier.
SM 2-83 D131/D132/D133
Mailbox CS4000 (D616)
1. Trays 9
2. Guide plate 1
The Mail Box can be installed only in SR4060 (D611) or SR4070 (D612).
The Mail Box and Cover Interposer tray cannot be installed together.
Switch the machine off and unplug the machine before starting the following procedure.
D131/D132/D133 2-84 SM
Mailbox CS4000 (D616)
Installation
1. Remove the filament tape [A].
Handle the mailbox carefully. The corner leaf [B] can be damaged easily.
SM 2-85 D131/D132/D133
Mailbox CS4000 (D616)
2. If the Cover Interposer Tray (D614) is installed on the finisher, remove it.
The cover interposer tray and mailbox cannot be installed on the finisher at the same
time.
3. Remove the top cover [A] of the finisher ( x 1).
4. Remove the bracket [B] ( x 1).
5. Attach the guide plate [A] to the top of the finisher ( x 2, M3x8).
6. Attach the mailbox [B] to the top of the finisher ( x 4, M3x8).
7. Attach the 9 trays [C] to the mailbox.
8. Give the decals [D] to the customer for notation and attaching at the correct location.
D131/D132/D133 2-86 SM
Copy Tray Type 9002 (B756)
2.15.1 ACCESSORIES
Check the accessories and their quantities against the following list.
Installation
No. Description Qty
1. Copy Tray 1
4. Large Cap 1
5. Small Cap 4
7. Harness Clamp 1
SM 2-87 D131/D132/D133
Copy Tray Type 9002 (B756)
2.15.2 INSTALLATION
2. Attach the paper height sensor [A] and harness clamp [B] to the sensor bracket [C].
3. Attach the sensor bracket and actuator arm bracket [D] to the copier ( x 3).
4. Attach the sensor harness [E] ( x 1, x 4).
5. Attach the actuator [F] to the arms of the actuator arm bracket.
D131/D132/D133 2-88 SM
Copy Tray Type 9002 (B756)
Installation
6. Reattach the left upper cover [A] ( x 2).
7. Attach the tray [B].
8. Attach the small caps [C] to the holes , , , .
9. Attach the large cap [D] to cover the finisher power connection point.
SM 2-89 D131/D132/D133
Card Reader Bracket (B498), Key Counter Bracket (B452)
BRACKET (B452)
2. Harness Clamp 1
5. Stud 1
6 Decal 1
D131/D132/D133 2-90 SM
Card Reader Bracket (B498), Key Counter Bracket (B452)
1. Plate nuts 2
Installation
2. Rear Bracket 1
3. Front Bracket 1
7. Harness 1
8. Shoulder Screw 1
SM 2-91 D131/D132/D133
Card Reader Bracket (B498), Key Counter Bracket (B452)
2.16.3 INSTALLATION
1. Hold the key counter plate nuts [A] on the inner surface of the key counter bracket [B].
2. Attach the key counter holder [C] to the key counter bracket ( x2).
3. Attach the key counter bracket cover [D] ( x2).
D131/D132/D133 2-92 SM
Card Reader Bracket (B498), Key Counter Bracket (B452)
Make sure that the machine is turned off and unplugged from its power source before you
do this procedure.
Installation
1. Use a pair of nippers to remove the screw hole cover [A].
2. Use the tip of a small screwdriver to remove plate [B].
3. Attach the assembled key counter to the side of the machine at [A] ( x1 Stepped) and [B]
( x1, x1)
SM 2-93 D131/D132/D133
Key Counter Interface Unit 20 pin (B870) Rev. 09/06/2012
[A]
D131/D132/D133 2-94 SM
Rev. 09/06/2012 Key Counter Interface Unit 20pin (B870)
Installation
[C]
[F]
8. Clamp the harness at the seven points marked by the red arrows in the photo.
9. Connect the harness to the connector on the board circled in red in the photo.
SM 2-95 D131/D132/D133
Key Counter Interface Unit 20pin (B870) Rev. 09/06/2012
[B]
[A]
D131/D132/D133 2-96 SM
Copy Connector Type 3260 (B328)
2.18.1 ACCESSORIES
Installation
1. Copy Connector Board B328 2
5. Ferrite Core 2
SM 2-97 D131/D132/D133
Copy Connector Type 3260 (B328)
2.18.2 PREPARATION
Before you begin the installation procedure:
Measure the distance between the machines to be connected.
Confirm that the printer/scanner option is installed on the machines.
Determine the number of cables and repeater hubs that are necessary based on the distance
measured between the machines.
Install the key labeled Printer/Other Function + Scanner (or its equivalent symbol key-top for
EU) on a machine with the printer/scanner option installed.
Install the key labeled Other Function (or its equivalent symbol key-top for EU) on a machine
without the printer/scanner option.
D131/D132/D133 2-98 SM
Copy Connector Type 3260 (B328)
2.18.3 INSTALLATION
1. Remove these parts:
Rear upper cover ( x2)
Rear lower cover ( x2)
Controller box cover ( x 13)
Installation
2. Remove the cover [A] of Slot B ( x 2).
3. Install the Copier Connection Kit Board B328 [B] in Slot B and fasten it ( x 2).
4. Connect the power repeater cable [C] to:
CN32 on the controller board
CN4 on the copy connector board
5. Reattach the controller box cover, rear upper and lower cover.
Repeat Steps 1 to 5 to install the connector kit on the second machine.
6. Connect the end of the interface cable [D] to the copy connector board.
7. Attach the ferrite cores [E] to both ends of the interface cable.
8. If and additional cable is required, connect the repeater hub [F] and cable [G].
9. Attach the appropriate decal [H] to each machine.
10. Attach the "Printer/Other Function" decal (or its equivalent symbol for EU) if the
printer/scanner option is installed.
-or-
Attach the "Other Function" decal (or its equivalent symbol for EU) if the printer/scanner
option is not installed.
11. Attach the other end of the connection cable to the copy connector board installed in the other
machine.
SM 2-99 D131/D132/D133
MFP Options
Overview
Two slots for boards and two slots for SD cards are provided on the controller box. Each board or
SC card must be inserted into its assigned slot. The slot assignment of each item is listed in the
table below.
If the customer wants to use more than one application on SD cards, applications must
be merged on the same SD card.
D131/D132/D133 2-100 SM
MFP Options
The data necessary for authentication is transferred with the application program to the
target SD card.
Do not use an SD card if it was used with a computer before this time. Correct operation
is not guaranteed if this type of SD card is used.
The SD card is the only evidence that the customer is licensed to use the application
Installation
program. Also, the service technician may occasionally need to check the SD card and its
data to solve problems. For these reasons SD cards must be stored with the machine.
After an SD card has been used to move other applications onto that card, that SD card
cannot be used for a different function.
Never remove the System SD Card from Slot 1
Before uploading to an SD card, always make sure that the write-protect switch is OFF. (It
is very easy to accidentally turn on the write-protect switch when inserting or removing an
SD card.)
Merging Applications
Do this procedure to put more than one application on one SD card.
1. Turn off the main machine.
2. Remove the SD card slot cover ( x 1).
3. Put the Source SD card in Slot 2 (service slot). This card contains the application that you
want to copy.
The PS3 SD card cannot be the source card (it cannot be copied).
4. Check the target SD card and confirm that its write-protect switch is OFF.
5. Insert the Target SD card into the SD card Slot 1.
6. Open the front door.
7. Turn the main machine on.
8. Do SP5873 001.
9. Touch "Execute".
10. Follow the instructions on the display and touch "Execute" to start copying.
11. When the display tells you copying is completed, touch "Exit".
12. Turn the main machine off.
13. Remove the Source SD card from Slot 2. Leave the target SD card in Slot 1.
14. Turn the main machine on.
15. Go into the User Tools mode and check that all the applications on the SD card in Slot 1 are
enabled:
User Tools> System Settings> Administrator Tools> Firmware Version
1. Turn the main machine off again.
SM 2-101 D131/D132/D133
MFP Options
After an SD card has been copied, it can no longer be used. However, it must be stored in
the machine to serve as proof of purchase by the customer.
The original card can also be used to perform an undo procedure (SP 5873 002). Before
you store an SD card, label it carefully so it can be identified easily if you need to do the
undo procedure (see below).
Undo Exec
Do this procedure if you moved an option from the original SD card to another card by mistake
and you need to restore the original SD card.
1. Turn the main switch OFF.
2. Put the SD card holding the merged applications in SD Card Slot 1.
3. Put the original destination SD card (the one removed from storage) into Slot 2
The SD card in Slot 2 must be the original SD card of the application you want to
move from Slot 1 to Slot 2. You cannot use a blank SD card in Slot 1.
4. Turn the main switch ON.
5. Do SP5873-002 (Undo Exec).
6. Follow the instructions of the operation panel messages.
7. Turn the main switch OFF.
8. Remove the SD cards from the slots.
9. Turn the main switch ON.
D131/D132/D133 2-102 SM
MFP Options
Inserting SD Cards
Insert SD cards with the notched corner down.
The insertion point for the SD cards are offset slightly to the left. Make sure the SD card is inserted
correctly before you push it into the slot.
Installation
Pushing in the SD Card also releases it for removal. Make sure the SD Card is inserted and
locked in place. If it is partially out of the slot, push it in gently until it locks in place.
Accessories
1. Caution Decal 1
2. Printer/Scanner SD Card 1
3. EULA Sheet 1
4. FCC Decal 1
Only one Slot 1 is available for applications on SD cards. If more than one application is
will be used, the applications must be moved onto one SD card with SP5873 -1.
SM 2-103 D131/D132/D133
MFP Options
Installation
Make sure that the main machine is switched off and that its power cord is disconnected
before doing the following procedure.
Make sure the SD Card is inserted and locked in place. If it is partially out of the slot,
push it in gently until it locks in place.
6. On the operation panel, attach the "Printer" keytop [A] and the "Scanner" keytop [B]. Select
either the English set or Symbol set for installation.
7. Plug in the power cable and turn the main power switch on.
8. Change SP5985 -1 and -2 from "0" to "1".
9. Turn the main power switch off and on.
10. Follow the procedures in the Operation Instructions to complete the installation for the
printer/scanner option.
D131/D132/D133 2-104 SM
MFP Options
Accessories
Installation
2. Decal 1
Only Slot 1 is available for applications on SD cards. If more than one application will be
used, the applications must be merged onto one SD card with SP5873 -1.
Installation
SM 2-105 D131/D132/D133
MFP Options
Accessories
2. Clamps 8
3. Velcro Fasteners 2
Installation
D131/D132/D133 2-106 SM
MFP Options
Installation
1. Press the "User Tools/Counter" key.
2. On the touch panel, press "System Settings".
The Network I/F (default: Ethernet) must be set for either Ethernet or wireless LAN.
3. Select "Interface Settings".
4. Press "Wireless LAN". Only the wireless LAN options show.
5. Communication Mode. Select either "802.11 Ad hoc" or "Infrastructure".
6. SSID Setting. Enter the SSID setting. (The setting is case sensitive.)
7. Channel. You need this setting when Ad Hoc Mode is selected.
Region A (mainly Europe and Asia)
Range: 1-13, 36, 40, 44 and 48 channels (default: 11)
Region B (mainly North America)
Range: 1-11, 36, 40, 44 and 48 channels (default: 11)
Range: 1-11 channels (default: 11)
In some countries, only the following channels are available:
The allowed range for the channel settings may vary for different countries.
8. WEP (Encryption) Setting. The WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) setting is designed to protect
wireless data transmission. The same WEP key is required on the receiving side in order to
unlock encoded data. There are 64 bit and 128 bit WEP keys.
WEP:
Selects "Active" or "Inactive" ("Inactive" is default.).
Range of Allowed Settings:
64 bit: 10 characters
128 bit: 26 characters
SM 2-107 D131/D132/D133
MFP Options
SP Mode and UP Mode Settings for IEEE 802.11 a/g Wireless LAN
The following SP commands and UP modes can be set for IEEE 802.11 a/g.
5840-011 WEP Key Select Used to select the WEP key (Default: 00).
D131/D132/D133 2-108 SM
MFP Options
Accessories
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories.
Installation
No. Description Q'ty
An IEEE 802.11 interface unit and Bluetooth interface unit cannot be installed and used
together.
SM 2-109 D131/D132/D133
MFP Options
Installation
Switch the machine off and unplug it before you do this procedure.
1. Turn off the machine and unplug it.
2. Insert the Bluetooth USB module into the USB slot on the controller faceplate.
3. Plug the power plug in and turn the machine on.
4. Confirm that Bluetooth is installed correctly:
User Tools> Printer Features> List/Test Print> Configuration Page
D131/D132/D133 2-110 SM
MFP Options
Accessory Check
Check the accessories and their quantities against this list:
Installation
No. Description Q'ty
Installation
1. Switch the machine off.
2. Remove the cover of Slot A ( x 2).
3. Insert the file format converter board into Slot A and fasten it with the screws.
4. Switch the machine on.
5. Set SP5836-3 to "1" to enable the print backup feature.
6. Confirm or set the following SP codes with the values in the table listed below.
5-836-1 1 5-836-73 0
5-836-2 0 5-836-85 1
5-836-3 1 5-836-86 2
5-836-72 0 5-836-91 50
SM 2-111 D131/D132/D133
MFP Options
Selects the TIFF file format for documents copied from the
document server to Palm2.
0 Note: Select this so the backed up files can be used with
other software applications (editing, OCR, etc.) with only
slight loss in image quality.
Does not apply the features of the "1" setting when files are
copied to Palm2.
Note: This setting preserves the quality of the original
0
image, especially with J2K files, but also requires more time
for copying and requires more disk space to store the larger
files.
D131/D132/D133 2-112 SM
MFP Options
Installation
Administrator login password
These settings must be set up by the customer before the encryption option can be
installed.
2. Confirm that "Admin. Authentication" is on:
[User Tools]> "System Settings"> "Administrator Tools"> "Administrator Authentication
Management"> "Admin. Authentication"> "On"
If this setting is "Off" tell the customer that this setting must be "On" before you can do the
installation procedure.
3. Confirm that "Administrator Tools" is selected and enabled:
[User Tools]> "System Settings"> "Administrator Tools"> "Administrator Authentication
Management"> "Available Settings
Enabling Encryption
1. Turn on the main power switch.
2. Enter the SP mode.
3. Select SP5878-2 (Option Setup Encryption Option), and then touch [Execute].
4. Turn off the main power switch.
5. Remove the SD card.
6. Attach the slot cover [A] ( x 1).
7. Switch the machine on.
SM 2-113 D131/D132/D133
MFP Options
D131/D132/D133 2-114 SM
MFP Options
Installation
2. Make the "restore_key" folder in the SD card.
3. Make an "nvram_key.txt" file in the "restore_key" folder in the SD card.
4. Input "nvclear" into the "nvram_key.txt" file.
5. Turn on the main power switch.
6. Confirm that the prompt on the LCD tells you to install the SD card (storing the encryption
key) in the machine.
7. Turn off the main power switch.
8. Insert the SD card that contains "nvclear" into slot 2.
9. Turn on the main power switch, and the machine automatically restores the encryption key in
the flash memory on the controller board.
10. Turn off the main power switch after the machine has returned to normal status.
11. Remove the SD card from slot 2.
12. Turn on the main power switch.
13. Initialize the NVRAM (SP5801-1) and HDD unit (SP5832-1) with SP mode.
14. The user must enable the HDD encryption unit with a user tool.
SM 2-115 D131/D132/D133
MFP Options
These settings must be set up by the customer before the Data Overwrite Security
unit can be installed.
3. Confirm that "Admin. Authentication" is on:
[User Tools]> "System Settings"> "Administrator Tools"> "Administrator Authentication
Management"> "Admin. Authentication"> "On"
If this setting is "Off", tell the customer that this setting must be "On" before you can do the
installation procedure.
4. Confirm that "Administrator Tools" is selected and enabled:
[User Tools]> "System Settings"> "Administrator Tools"> "Administrator Authentication
Management"> "Available Settings
D131/D132/D133 2-116 SM
Rev.
MFP09/05/2012
Options
Installation
The DOS SD card must be inserted in SD card Slot 1. If another SD card option is
installed, the contents of the DOS SD card must be moved to the SC card in SD card Slot
1 with SP5873-1.
1.
Installation
If the machine is OFF, turn ON the Main Power Switch.
2. Do SP5878-001 and push [EXECUTE].
3. Go out of the SP mode.
4. Turn the Operation Switch OFF, then turn the Main Power Switch OFF.
5. Turn ON the Main Power Switch.
6. Do SP5990-5 to print an SMC report.
7. Make sure the ROM number and firmware version in area [a] of the diagnostic report are the
same as those in area [b].
Area [a]: "ROM Number/Firmware Version" "HDD Format Option"
Area [b]: "Loading Program" - "GW4a_zoffyx"
The numbers in the table above may be different for your installation. But the same
two numbers must be listed in both sections of the SMC report.
8. Turn "Auto Erase Memory Setting" on:
[User Tools]> "System Settings"> "Administrator Tools"> "Auto Erase Memory Setting"> "On"
9. Exit User Tools.
SM 2-117 D131/D132/D133
MFP Options
10. Check the display and make sure that the overwrite erase icon [A] is displayed.
11. Make a Sample Copy.
12. Check the overwrite erase icon [A].
The icon [B]: This icon is lit when there is temporary data to be overwritten, and blinks
during overwriting.
The icon [C]: This icon is lit when there is no temporary data to be overwritten.
Accessories
Installation
1. Switch the machine off.
2. Remove the SD card slot cover ( x1).
3. Insert the SD card into SD card Slot 2.
D131/D132/D133 2-118 SM
MFP Options
Installation
16. Switch the machine off.
17. Replace the 6th key slot cover with the "Other Function" key cover.
18. Switch the machine on.
19. After the Copy screen appears, wait 30 sec. then press the "Other Function" key.
20. When you see this message: "The MFP Browser was successfully installed", switch the
machine off and remove the SD card.
SM 2-119 D131/D132/D133
MFP Options
Accessories
Installation
In a new machine, the IPU does not have this application. You must always install a new IPU
board when you install the Copy Data Security Unit option.
IPU
Remove:
Rear upper cover ( x2)
Rear lower cover ( x2)
Remove:
Screws and swing open the controller box ( x 3).
D131/D132/D133 2-120 SM
MFP Options
Installation
5. Touch "Administrator Tools".
6. Touch next 2 or 3 times until you see "Data Security for Copying".
7. Touch "ON".
8. Touch "OK" to enable the setting.
Accessories
2. Decal 1
Only one slot (SD card slot 2) is available for applications on SD cards. If more than one
application is will be used, the applications must be merged onto one SD card with
SP5873 001.
Installation
SM 2-121 D131/D132/D133
MFP Options
7. Set the heap size and stack size for the application.
8. Install the application using the installation procedure provided with the application.
D131/D132/D133 2-122 SM
MFP Options
Accessories
Installation
1. IEEE 1284 Centronics Board 1
Only one PCI slot (A) is available for one of these options:
Centronics 1284
IEEE 802.11a/g, 11g (Wireless LAN)
File Format Converter
If another card is installed in A, you must remove it before installing this card.
Installation
1. Switch the machine off.
SM 2-123 D131/D132/D133
MFP Options
Accessories
1. Gigabit Ethernet 1
2. Ferrite Core 1
3. Screw 2
Installation
1. Switch the machine off.
2. Remove the controller box cover p.4-122
4. Insert the Gigabit Ethernet board [A] in the slot [B] on the controller board.
D131/D132/D133 2-124 SM
MFP Options
Installation
5. Fasten it with the screws [A].
6. Install the Ethernet connector cover (Cap for Network Slot) included in the Gigabit Ethernet
board kit on the 100M bit LAN connector.
7. Reassemble the machine.
8. Attach the ferrite core [A] to the network cable. ([B]: 30 mm or more.)
9. Connect the network cable to the slot for Gigabit Ethernet.
10. Print a configuration page to confirm that the machine recognizes the installed board for
USB2.0: User Tools > Printer Features > List/Test Print > Configuration Page
SM 2-125 D131/D132/D133
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY
P a ge Date A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew
None
PM Tables
3. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
3.1 PM TABLES
The amounts mentioned (K=1,000) as the PM interval indicate the number of prints or copies
unless stated otherwise. These numbers are based on the PM counter.
Symbol key: C: Clean, R: Replace, L: Lubricate, I: Inspect, EM: Emergency Maintenance, AN: As
necessary, Exp.: Expected Life (K)
Turn off the power switch and unplug the power cord before performing any procedure in
Maintenance
Preventive
this section. Laser beams can seriously damage the eyes.
Scanner Optics
SM 3-1 D131/D132/D133
PM Tables
Cleaning Brush R
Blower brush. Do SP
ID Sensor C C
3001 002 after cleaning.
Cleaning Filter R
D131/D132/D133 3-2 SM
PM Tables
Development Unit
Development Filter R I
Maintenance
Side Seals C C Blower brush, dry cloth
Preventive
Entrance Seal C C Blower brush, dry cloth
SM 3-3 D131/D132/D133
PM Tables
Paper Feed
Notes:
Always replace pick-up, feed and separation rollers as a set.
The target service life of the feed, pick-up, and separation rollers is 1000 K. However, they
should be replaced sooner if the machine begins to jam or double-feed.
D131/D132/D133 3-4 SM
PM Tables
Maintenance
Preventive
C
Plate
Discharge Plate R
SM 3-5 D131/D132/D133
PM Tables
Fusing Lamps I
Thermistors x2 R
Cleaning Web R
D131/D132/D133 3-6 SM
PM Tables
Duplex
Maintenance
Preventive
Entrance Anti-Static
C Dry cloth
Brush
ADF
The PM interval is for the number of originals that have been fed.
Pick-up Roller R
Alcohol, belt cleaner to
Separation Roller R clean paper feed belt.
SM 3-7 D131/D132/D133
PM Tables
Entrance Roller C C C
Pre-Scanning Roller C C C
Scanning Roller C C C
Exit Roller C C C
D131/D132/D133 3-8 SM
PM Tables
Feed Belt R R R
Maintenance
Preventive
Separation Roller R R R
Drive rollers I I I
Discharge brush I I I
SM 3-9 D131/D132/D133
PM Tables
D131/D132/D133 3-10 SM
PM Tables
Maintenance
Preventive
Positioning roller I/C Inspect for scratches or nicks
Related SP Codes
This is a list of the PM related SP codes. For details, refer to "Service Tables" in the "Appendices".
SP7803 PM Counter Display Displays the PM count since the last PM.
SM 3-11 D131/D132/D133
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY
P a ge Date A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew
None
General Cautions
Never turn off the power switch while the machine is operating.
If the machine is switched off during operation, the transfer belt, drum, or development
unit could be damaged when it is removed or reinstalled in the machine.
4.1.1 DRUM
An organic photoconductor (OPC) drum is more sensitive to light and ammonia gas than a
selenium drum. Follow the cautions below when handling an OPC drum.
1. Never expose the drum to direct sunlight.
2. Never expose the drum to direct light of more than 1,000 Lux for more than a minute.
Replacement
Adjustment
3. Never touch the drum surface with bare hands. When the drum surface is touched with a
and
finger or becomes dirty, wipe it with a dry cloth or clean it with wet cotton. Wipe with a dry
cloth after cleaning with wet cotton.
4. Never use alcohol to clean the drum; alcohol dissolves the drum surface.
5. Store the drum in a cool, dry place away from heat.
6. Take care not to scratch the drum as the drum layer is thin and is easily damaged.
7. Never expose the drum to corrosive gases such as ammonia gas.
8. Always keep the drum in the protective sheet when keeping the drum unit, or the drum itself,
out of the machine. Doing so avoids exposing it to bright light or direct sunlight, and will
protect it from light fatigue.
9. Dispose of used drums in accordance with local regulations.
10. When installing a new drum, execute SP2962 (Adjustment of Drum Conditions).
SM 4-1 D131/D132/D133
General Cautions
D131/D132/D133 4-2 SM
General Cautions
Replacement
8. Do not touch the charge grid plate with bare hands. Also, do not bend the charge grid plate or
Adjustment
make any dent in it. Doing so may cause uneven charge.
and
4.1.7 DEVELOPMENT
1. Be careful not to nick or scratch the development roller.
2. Place the development unit on a sheet of paper after removing it from the machine.
3. Never disassemble the development roller assembly. The position of the doctor plate is set
with special tools and instruments at the factory to ensure the proper gap between the doctor
blade and the development roller.
4. Clean the drive gears after removing used developer.
5. Dispose of used developer in accordance with local regulations.
6. Never load types of developer and toner into the development unit other than specified for
this model. Doing so will cause poor copy quality and toner scattering.
7. Immediately after installing new developer, the TD sensor initial setting procedure should be
performed with SP2801 (TD Sensor Initialization) to avoid damage to the machine. Do not
perform the TD sensor initial setting with used developer. Do not make any copies before
doing the TD sensor initial setting.
8. When using a vacuum cleaner to clean the development unit casing, always ground the
casing with your fingers to avoid damaging the toner density sensor with static electricity.
9. When replacing the TD sensor, replace the developer, then execute SP2801 (TD Sensor
Initialization) and SP2962 (Adjustment of Drum Conditions).
SM 4-3 D131/D132/D133
General Cautions
4.1.8 CLEANING
1. When servicing the cleaning section, be careful not to damage the edge of the cleaning
blade.
2. Do not touch the cleaning blade with bare hands.
3. Before disassembling the cleaning section, place a sheet of paper under it to catch any toner
falling from it.
D131/D132/D133 4-4 SM
Special Tools and Lubricants
Replacement
Adjustment
and
4.2.2 LUBRICANTS
SM 4-5 D131/D132/D133
Operation Panel and External Covers
D131/D132/D133 4-6 SM
Operation Panel and External Covers
6. Raise the operation panel and lay it on the top of the machine.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
7. Free the harnesses [A] ( x1).
8. Disconnect the ground wire [B] (x1).
SM 4-7 D131/D132/D133
Operation Panel and External Covers
D131/D132/D133 4-8 SM
Operation Panel and External Covers
Replacement
Adjustment
4.3.3 RIGHT COVERS
and
SM 4-9 D131/D132/D133
Operation Panel and External Covers
D131/D132/D133 4-10 SM
Operation Panel and External Covers
Replacement
Adjustment
When re-attaching, before tightening the screws make sure that the tabs on the cover are
and
engaged with the shoulder screws.
SM 4-11 D131/D132/D133
Scanner
4.4 SCANNER
4.4.1 ADF
Remove the following parts:
1. Rear upper cover and rear lower cover p.4-11
D131/D132/D133 4-12 SM
Scanner
1. Rear scale ( x 3)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
2. Left cover ( x 3)
3. Exposure glass
SM 4-13 D131/D132/D133
Scanner
D131/D132/D133 4-14 SM
Scanner
Re-installation
Replacement
Adjustment
1. Make sure that the bosses on the frame fit into the slots as shown. These bosses position the and
sensors correctly for accurate detection.
SM 4-15 D131/D132/D133
Scanner
D131/D132/D133 4-16 SM
Scanner
Replacement
Adjustment
and
2. SIOB cover screws ( x9)
3. SIOB cover.
SM 4-17 D131/D132/D133
Scanner
Never loosen or attempt to remove the four paint-locked screws [A] around the top of
the lens.
4. Disconnect the lens block [B] at the front and rear (d131r113x4).
6. Remove the lens block carefully. Avoid snagging the front ground spring [A] with sensor
harnesses and rear ground spring [B] with the scanner wire.
D131/D132/D133 4-18 SM
Scanner
Replacement
Adjustment
and
SM 4-19 D131/D132/D133
Scanner
Never touch the surface of the exposure lamp with bare fingers.
4.4.6 SIOB
1. Exposure glass p.4-13
3. Grip the right edge plate firmly, push it to the rear and then pull it away .
D131/D132/D133 4-20 SM
Scanner
Replacement
Adjustment
and
6. Right side of SIOB cover [A] ( x2)
7. Top of SIOB cover [B] ( x2).
Never remove any of the white paint-locked screws around the frame.
SM 4-21 D131/D132/D133
Scanner
D131/D132/D133 4-22 SM
Scanner
Replacement
Adjustment
and
3. Release a screw, move down the bracket [A], release the timing belt [B] and then remove the
scanner motor bracket [C] ( x 1).
SM 4-23 D131/D132/D133
Scanner
D131/D132/D133 4-24 SM
Scanner
Replacement
Adjustment
and
1. Disconnect ground wire [1] ( x1)
2. Disconnect the head of the wire [2] from tension bracket 1.
3. Remove spring [3].
4. Loosen the screw [4] of tension bracket 1.
5. Disconnect the end of the wire at [A].
6. Remove lock bracket [B] of the 1st scanner ( x1).
7. Disconnect the wire from the pulley [C] ( x1).
8. Remove the wire from the scanner.
SM 4-25 D131/D132/D133
Scanner
1. Place the beads [A] on the middle of the wire in the openings in the pulley.
2. Wind the ball end of the wire [B] 4 times.
3. Wind the other end of the wire [C] 5 times.
4. Attach tape [D] across the pulley to temporarily hold the wires in place.
D131/D132/D133 4-26 SM
Scanner
5. Position the 1st scanner [A] so that the holes are aligned, and insert the positioning pins [B]
(x4).
6. Position the 2nd scanner [C] so that its holes are aligned, and insert the positioning pins [D].
Replacement
Adjustment
7. Attach the lock bracket [E] to fasten the wire to the 1st scanner.
and
8. Tighten the screw of the tension bracket.
9. Attach the pulley and tighten its lock screw.
10. Remove the positioning pins (x4).
11. Remove the tape from the pulley.
12. Slowly push the scanner left and right to confirm that the wires are engaged correctly. The 1st
and 2nd scanners should move smoothly.
SM 4-27 D131/D132/D133
Laser Unit
Turn off the machine and unplug its power cord before performing any procedure in this
section. Laser beams can seriously damage the eyes.
This laser unit uses four laser beams produced by a Class IIIb LDA with a wavelength of
660 nm and intensity of 15 mW. Direct exposure to the eyes could cause permanent
blindness.
Before performing any replacement or adjustment of the laser unit, push the machine
power switch to switch the machine off. Then unplug the machine from the power source.
Do not touch the machine for 10 minutes. This allows enough time for the fusing unit to
cool and for the polygon motor to stop rotating.
Never power on the machine with any of these components removed: 1) LD unit, 2)
polygon motor cover, 3) synchronization detector.
D131/D132/D133 4-28 SM
Laser Unit
Replacement
An accidental static discharge could damage the LDB (Laser Diode Board). Touch a
Adjustment
metal surface to discharge any static electricity from your hands.
and
The polygon motor rotates at extremely high speed and continues to rotate after
switching the machine off. To avoid damaging the motor, never remove the polygon
motor within three minutes of switching off the machine and disconnecting its power
plug.
3. Remove;
LD unit [B] ( x 2, x 3)
Polygon motor [C] ( x 3, x 1)
Polygon motor drive board [D] ( x 3, x 3)
SM 4-29 D131/D132/D133
Laser Unit
Before fastening the polygon motor in place ( x 3, x 1), make sure that the
glass panel of the laser port is facing to the right (toward the mirrors in the optical
path).
SP Adjustments
1. Execute SP2962 (Automatic Adjustment of Drum Conditions) after replacing the LD unit, but
only if SP3901 - Auto Process Control - is on.
2. Read the label [A] attached to the LD unit [B]. Execute SP2115 (Main Scan Beam Pitch
Adjustment) and enter the numbers printed on the label.
D131/D132/D133 4-30 SM
Laser Unit
Replacement
3. Development unit fans [A] ( x 5, x 2)
Adjustment
4. Synchronization detector [B] ( x 1, x 1)
and
5. After replacement, set SP1002-001 to 007 (Side-to-Side Registration) to the defaults.
SM 4-31 D131/D132/D133
Laser Unit
If you have just disassembled the LD unit, to avoid serious damage to the eyes from
accidental exposure to laser beams you must confirm that the machine has been
re-assembled completely before operation.
This adjustment corrects the parallelogram pattern to the desired rectangular pattern for printing; it
does not correct the skew of scanned images.
1. Execute SP2902-003 (Test Pattern - Printing Test Pattern) 018 to print the A4 LEF pattern.
Check the printed patterns and estimate the angle of adjustment required.
2. Remove the exposure glass. p.4-13
3. Remove the polygon motor cover. p.4-29
4. Remove the right cover. p.4-9
D131/D132/D133 4-32 SM
Laser Unit
Replacement
Adjustment
and
7. Adjust the position of the laser exposure unit.
If the pattern is skewed at the corner of the leading edge [C], move the unit so it moves
the pointer on the scale toward the back.
If the pattern is skewed at the lower left corner of the trailing edge [D], move the unit so it
moves the pointer on the scale toward the front.
The scale is set for increments of 1 mm.
8. After adjustment, tighten the screws on the laser exposure unit, re-assemble the machine and
print the pattern again with SP2902-003 No.18.
9. Check the pattern. Repeat the procedure if more adjustment is required.
SM 4-33 D131/D132/D133
Drum Unit
Drum Removal
D131/D132/D133 4-34 SM
Drum Unit
After re-installation, the tab [F] in the first illustration should be behind the stay and its
pin below should be in the open track below.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
7. Close the supply pipe shutter [G].
8. Development unit [H] ( x 2 [I])
Allow the unit to slip to the right, then slowly pull it out of the machine.
If the LCT is installed, you may need to disconnect it so the front door can open far
enough to allow removal of the development unit.
SM 4-35 D131/D132/D133
Drum Unit
Drum Re-installation
If you cannot move the development unit plate behind the horizontal pin, turn the
front gear of the unit to the left and try again.
Make sure the pipeline shutter is rotated down to the open position.
6. Reattach all removed parts.
D131/D132/D133 4-36 SM
Drum Unit
Replacement
Adjustment
and
SM 4-37 D131/D132/D133
Drum Unit
1. Pull the toner bottle holder out and swing the bottle to the right.
2. Charge corona unit [A] ( x 1, x 1)
D131/D132/D133 4-38 SM
Drum Unit
Replacement
Adjustment
6. Corona wire [F]
and
7. Disconnect the wire behind the grid bracket.
Never touch the charge corona wire with bare hands. Always protect it from dust, oil,
etc.
Never bend or knot the wire. Charge will not distribute evenly on a bent wire.
Make sure that the wire seam [G] is as close as possible to the wire hook at the rear.
At the front and back, make sure that the wire is threaded correctly into the grooves
in the end blocks.
After replacing the charge corona wire, make sure that the wire cleaner pads are
engaged correctly with the wires.
After replacing the wire, set SP2001-001 (Charge Roller Bias Adjustment Applied
Voltage for Image Processing) to the default.
SM 4-39 D131/D132/D133
Drum Unit
Remove
Development unit p.4-34
Charge corona unit p.4-38
1. Drum unit [A] ( x 1, x 2)
Grasp the drum unit by the knob to remove it from the machine.
D131/D132/D133 4-40 SM
Drum Unit
To avoid fingerprints on the surface of the OPC drum, never touch the surface of the
drum with bare fingers.
Never use alcohol to clean the surface of the OPC drum. Blow dry the OPC drum,
then wipe clean with a clean, slightly damp cloth.
Before installing a new drum, dust the surface of the OPC drum carefully with setting
powder. (See below.)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
The surface of a new drum is less smooth, so you must apply Drum Setting Powder (P/N:
54429101) to the drum surface before installation.
Failure to apply the drum powder before installation could damage the drum cleaning
blade or scour the drum surface.
1. Apply the setting powder by tapping the powder bag [A] across the surface of the drum [B].
2. Cover the entire length of the drum over a 45-90 degree portion [C] (about 1/4 of the total
drum surface). Apply enough powder so the area turns white.
If setting powder is not available, use waste toner instead of drum setting powder.
However, this could cause dirty backgrounds on the first copies.
SM 4-41 D131/D132/D133
Drum Unit
3. Install the new drum in the OPC unit so that the powdered surface [D] faces the cleaning
blade [E].
4. Rotate the drum once clockwise [F] until it stops again at the same position.
4.6.5 PTL
D131/D132/D133 4-42 SM
Drum Unit
Remove:
OPC drum p.4-40
1. Quenching lamp [A] ( x 1)
Replacement
Adjustment
At the center, push back the hook to release the quenching lamp.
and
Use only a blower brush to clean the quenching lamp.
Remove:
OPC drum p.4-40
1. Drum potential sensor [A] ( x 2, x 1)
2. After replacing the drum potential sensor, do SP2962 (Adjustment of Drum Conditions), only if
SP3901 (Auto Process Control) is on).
SM 4-43 D131/D132/D133
Drum Unit
Remove:
OPC drum p.4-40
1. Cleaning filter [A]
Remove:
OPC drum p.4-40
1. Drum cleaning blade [A] ( x 2)
Clean the blade edge carefully with only a soft, clean cloth.
Handle the blade carefully to avoid nicking its edge.
New blades are treated with special setting powder, so avoid touching the edge of a
new cleaning blade. If the edge of a new blade is accidentally wiped clean, dust it
lightly with some toner before installing it.
Before installing a new blade, make sure that the blade side seals are not pinched by
the blade.
D131/D132/D133 4-44 SM
Drum Unit
Remove:
OPC drum p.4-40
Drum cleaning blade p.4-44
Replacement
Adjustment
1. Coupling [A] ( x 1)
and
2. Inner bushing [B] ( x 1)
3. Cleaning brush [C]
Pull the shaft toward the rear to disengage the front of the shaft, then pull out.
After replacing the cleaning brush, clean the ID sensor to make sure that it is clean
and free of toner.
Avoid touching the cleaning brush with bare hands.
Check the entrance seals and confirm that they are not bent.
SM 4-45 D131/D132/D133
Drum Unit
Remove:
OPC drum p.4-40
1. Pick-off pawl bracket [A] ( x 2)
2. Pick-off pawl [B] (spring x 1)
D131/D132/D133 4-46 SM
Drum Unit
4.6.12 ID SENSOR
Remove:
Replacement
OPC drum p.4-40
Adjustment
Pick-off pawls p.4-46
and
1. ID sensor [A] ( x 2, x 1)
2. After replacing the sensor, do the following SPs:
SP2962 (Adjustment of Drum Conditions), only if SP3901 (Auto Process Control) is on.
SP3001-002 (ID Sensor Initialization Setting).
SM 4-47 D131/D132/D133
Drum Unit
Remove:
Rear covers p.4-11
Controller/IPU panel ( x 3) (not shown). The panel swings open like a door. You do not need
to remove it.
Flywheel ( x 3) (not shown)
1. Three gears [A] [B]( x 1, x 2, Timing belt x 1)
Gears [A] are different in each model. D131/D132 have black gears, but D133 has
white gears.
2. Spring [C]
3. Timing belt [D]
4. Drum motor [E] ( x 1, x 5)
D131/D132/D133 4-48 SM
Drum Unit
Replacement
Adjustment
1. Open the front door [A].
and
2. Remove the lock pin [B], then pull out the toner collection bottle [C] and its base [D].
3. Detach the bottle from the base clamp [E] and replace it.
SM 4-49 D131/D132/D133
Drum Unit
D131/D132/D133 4-50 SM
Drum Unit
Reinstallation
1. When you re-attach the toner end sensor cover, make sure that the toner end sensor harness
is not pinched between the cover and the unit.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
1. On the back of the machine, remove the cover of the ozone filter box ( x1).
SM 4-51 D131/D132/D133
Drum Unit
D131/D132/D133 4-52 SM
Drum Unit
Replacement
Adjustment
and
SM 4-53 D131/D132/D133
Development Unit
Preparation
For D133 only, the pressure release tube [A] should be removed before removing the
development unit.
Removal
1. Remove the toner hopper [A] ( x 2)
2. Rotate the toner hopper very slightly (10 to 20) as you slide it up to remove it. To avoid toner
spill, hold the hopper level as you remove it
D131/D132/D133 4-54 SM
Development Unit
3. Hold the development [B] unit over a large sheet of paper, then slowly turn it upside down to
empty the developer.
4. Turn the knob [C] through several complete rotations to empty all the developer in the
development unit.
5. Clean the development sleeve and its side seals.
6. Turn the unit over and set it on another sheet of clean paper.
7. Note the developer lot number printed on the top edge of the bag. You will need the lot
Replacement
Adjustment
number when you input SP2801-2.
and
8. Clean the development roller shaft with a clean cloth and blower brush.
9. While turning the knob [D] slowly, pour in one pack of developer [E] from one end of the
development unit to the other.
10. Make sure that the developer is evenly distributed.
11. Continue to turn the knob several times to prevent clumping in the developer.
SM 4-55 D131/D132/D133
Development Unit
Reinstallation
1. Hold the hopper perfectly level when re-attaching it, to prevent toner from entering the rails of
the development filter.
Automatic process control starts automatically after the machine is switched on, so
after replacing the developer, you should enter the SP mode and initialize the
developer with SP2801 as soon as possible after switching the machine on.
2. Do SP2801 (TD Sensor Initial Setting).
Open the front door.
Turn the machine on
If you open the front door, auto process control will not start. SP2801 must be done
before auto process control starts.
Push [Clear Modes]
Enter the SP mode.
Close the front door.
Push "System SP" on the touch-panel.
Enter 2801-002 to select SP2801-002.
On the soft keys, enter the lot number from the pack of developer, then push [#].
Do SP2801-1.
D131/D132/D133 4-56 SM
Development Unit
Remove:
Development unit p.4-40
Pressure release tube, only for D133 p.4-54
1. Toner hopper [A]
2. Filter bracket top [B]
Replacement
3. Development filter [C]
Adjustment
4. Filter bracket [D]
and
Make sure that the rails where the development filter bracket [C] connects to the
development unit are clean and free of toner. If there is any toner in the rails, wipe them
clean.
When installing a new filter, set the filter snug inside the filter case, and then place the
case over the top of the filter bracket [C].
The filter case seals any gaps at the filter edges to prevent toner scatter.
After vacuum cleaning, always check the gaps at the ends of the filters to make sure that
they are flat and sealed and not open.
SM 4-57 D131/D132/D133
Development Unit
Removal
Development unit p.4-34
D131/D132/D133 4-58 SM
Development Unit
Reinstalling
Replacement
Adjustment
and
1. Attach the seals [A] as shown in the above diagrams.
2. Reinstall the entrance seal bracket.
[B] is incorrect.
[C] is correct.
SM 4-59 D131/D132/D133
Development Unit
4.7.4 TD SENSOR
Remove:
Development unit p.4-34
1. TD sensor ( x 1) [A]
2. Before installing a new TD sensor, clean the TD sensor port [B].
3. After replacing the TD sensor, do these SPs:
SP2801 TD Sensor Initial Setting
SP2962 Auto Process Control (only if SP3901 Auto Process Control is on).
D131/D132/D133 4-60 SM
Development Unit
Replacement
Adjustment
and
3. Toner hopper [A] ( x 2)
4. Toner end sensor [B] ( x 2)
Remove the screws carefully to avoid stripping the holes.
Before installing a new toner end sensor, clean the toner end sensor port [C].
Reinstallation
1. When you re-attach the toner end sensor cover, make sure that the toner end sensor harness
is not pinched between the cover and the unit.
SM 4-61 D131/D132/D133
Development Unit
After re-installation, the tab [C] should be behind the stay and its pin below should be
in the open track below.
D131/D132/D133 4-62 SM
Development Unit
Cleaning Requirement
The toner pan [E] must be cleaned at every PM interval (300 K).
Replacement
Adjustment
and
1. Flywheel [A] ( x 3)
2. Waste toner pump tube [B] ( x 1, x 1)
3. Drive rod [C]
Lift the toner pump tube to disengage the drive rod, pull out the rod, and push the rubber
tube aside.
SM 4-63 D131/D132/D133
Transfer Belt Unit
Before you begin, spread a mat or some clean paper on the floor where you intend to set
the transfer belt unit.
Remove:
OPC drum unit p.4-40
1. Disconnect the transfer belt unit [A] ( x 1).
2. Remove the transfer belt unit stay [B] ( x 1).
3. While supporting the transfer belt unit with your hand, turn the release lever [C]
counter-clockwise to release it, then pull the transfer belt unit out of the machine.
The transfer belt unit can be removed without removing the OPC drum unit.
However, the transfer belt unit must be removed carefully to avoid scratching the
surface of the transfer belt on the OPC drum unit [D].
Avoid touching the belt with bare hands.
D131/D132/D133 4-64 SM
Transfer Belt Unit
Remove:
Replacement
Adjustment
Transfer belt unit p.4-64
and
1. Disconnect the earth terminal [A] and transfer current terminal [B] ( x 2). While doing this,
hold the transfer belt unit [C] by its knobs [D].
2. Raise and stand the belt perpendicular to the unit and remove it.
To avoid scratching the belt on the guide, never rotate the belt unit farther than 90
degrees.
SM 4-65 D131/D132/D133
Transfer Belt Unit
Re-installation
Before re-assembling the transfer belt unit, use a clean cloth and alcohol to clean the contact
points of the drive roller, idle roller, and transfer roller. Make sure these areas are clean and
free from toner, paper dust, etc.
Never touch the surface of the belt with bare hands and never apply alcohol to the surface of
the belt. Clean it with a blower brush. Check the underside of the transfer belt and clean with
the blower brush.
When re-assembling the transfer belt unit, make sure that the transfer belt is centered
between the triangular marks [A] on either side of the unit.
After re-assembly, make sure that the transfer belt is inside the transfer current terminal. The
belt could be cut if it is not positioned correctly.
Confirm that both the ground and transfer current terminal are connected and that the
harnesses are not touching the release lever.
After re-installing the transfer belt unit, turn the belt and confirm that the toner collection coil
turns.
The transfer belt and transfer roller cleaning blade must always be replaced together.
D131/D132/D133 4-66 SM
Transfer Belt Unit
Remove:
Transfer belt unit p.4-64
Replacement
Adjustment
Disassemble the transfer belt unit p.4-64
and
1. Transfer roller cleaning blade [A] ( x 2)
Never remove the inner lock screws [B] of the transfer roller cleaning blade.
When re-assembling, make sure that the clamps [C] and [D] are arranged as shown
above to avoid contact with the release lever.
The transfer roller cleaning blade should always be replaced when the transfer belt is
replaced.
Never touch the edge of a new transfer roller cleaning blade. The edge of the blade
is dusted with setting powder. If the setting powder is removed accidentally, dust the
edge of the blade with toner. This is especially important when only the transfer roller
cleaning blade must be replaced without replacing the transfer roller.
Work carefully around the transfer power pack located inside the transfer belt unit,
especially when cleaning with a vacuum cleaner, to avoid damaging the power pack
with static electricity.
SM 4-67 D131/D132/D133
Transfer Belt Unit
Reinstallation
1. Set the discharge plate and make sure that it is perfectly flat before re-connecting the tabs.
2. Before re-attaching the bracket [C], make sure that all the tabs are connected.
D131/D132/D133 4-68 SM
Transfer Belt Unit
Remove:
Transfer belt unit p.4-64
Replacement
1. Wire ( x 1) [A] (all wire guides)
Adjustment
2. Ground terminal wire [B] (wire guide x 1)
and
This terminal wire does not disconnect from the power pack.
Loosen the two left screws of the transfer belt lift solenoid [C], and remove the top screw
[D] to free the ground terminal wire.
3. Transfer current terminal wire [E] (wire guides x 2)
4. Transfer power pack [F] ( x 1)
Disconnect the two standoffs on the right edge of the power pack and remove.
Re-installation
Confirm that the left edge of the power pack is below the tabs on the left.
Confirm that the transfer current terminal wire is below the wire guides on the right.
Pass the ground terminal wire under the top connector of the solenoid bracket and tighten all
the screws of the solenoid bracket.
Make sure the wire is below all the wire guides at the top.
SM 4-69 D131/D132/D133
Fusing Unit
Switch off the machine, remove the plug from the power source, then allow sufficient time
for the fusing unit to cool before you remove it from the machine.
Before you begin, spread a mat or some clean paper on the floor where you intend to set
the fusing unit.
D131/D132/D133 4-70 SM
Fusing Unit
Replacement
Adjustment
Support the bottom of the fusing unit with your hand as you remove it.
and
4.9.2 FUSING UNIT THERMISTORS AND THERMOSTATS
Make sure that the pawls [B] engage correctly when you reinstall the unit.
The thermistor-thermostats are replaced as one unit. A disassembly procedure is not required.
SM 4-71 D131/D132/D133
Fusing Unit
Reinstallation
If the harness is not positioned between the between the bracket ribs , (as shown
under "Incorrect" below), this could cause an error (SC542 or SC545).
1. Open the front door and pull out the fusing unit on its support rails.
2. Web unit [A] ( x 2, x 2)
The web unit can be removed without removing the fusing unit from the machine.
D131/D132/D133 4-72 SM
Fusing Unit
Replacement
Adjustment
and
4. Web shafts [C] ( x 2)
5. Remove the web cleaning rollers from the shaft driver pins [D].
6. Web bushing [E] (spring x 1)
7. Cleaning roller [F]
Reinstallation
After replacing the web with a new one, you must execute SP1902-001 (Fusing Web Used
Area Display/Setting) to reset the web consumption count to zero. This SP code must be
executed to release SC550.
Be sure to print an SMC report before executing Memory All Clear (SP5801). After executing
SP5801, be sure to re-enter the value recorded for SP1902-001 in the SMC report.
SM 4-73 D131/D132/D133
Fusing Unit
4. Set the web [D] under the feeler [E] of the web end sensor .
5. Attach bushing 2 [F] .
6. Attach the new web roll [G] and wind it tight so no slack remains .
D131/D132/D133 4-74 SM
Fusing Unit
Before reassembling the machine, confirm that 1) there is no slack in the web roll, 2)
the web is below the feeler of the web end sensor.
7. Attach the upper cover.
8. After installing a new web roll, reset SP1902-001 to zero.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
Remove:
Web unit and end cover p.4-72
1. Bracket [A] ( x 1)
2. Web motor positioning bracket [B] ( x 1)
3. Web motor [C]
SM 4-75 D131/D132/D133
Fusing Unit
Reinstallation
Make sure that the harness of the web driver motor is not pinched by the fusing inner cover
Remove:
Fusing unit p.4-70
1. Cover [A] ( x 1)
2. Cleaning roller [B] ( x 2)
3. Cleaning roller [C] ( x 1)
Reinstallation
When attaching the lower cover of the pressure roller cleaning roller, make sure that the tab
[D] engages with the groove [E].
If the bushings are noisy after replacement, lubricate them on both ends and the holes where
the bushings are attached with Barrierta Grease L553R.
D131/D132/D133 4-76 SM
Fusing Unit
If you wish to remove the pressure roller only, without removing the hot roller and fusing
lamps, please do not use this procedure. Use the procedure in the next section.
Fusing Lamps
1. Fusing unit p.4-70
Replacement
Adjustment
and
2. Rear terminal connector bracket [A] ( x 2, metal clamp x 3, [B] x 6)
SM 4-77 D131/D132/D133
Fusing Unit
4. Plate [D] ( x 1)
5. Disconnect two harnesses [E]
D131/D132/D133 4-78 SM
Fusing Unit
Be careful when you move the fusing lamps. Do not break them. Do not touch them
with bare hands.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
2. Pressure arm [A]
Insert the tips of two screwdrivers and press down to release.
SM 4-79 D131/D132/D133
Fusing Unit
The pressure roller and pressure roller bearing should always be replaced together.
10. Lubricate the inner and outer surfaces [C] of the bushings with Barrierta S552R grease.
If the bushings are warm, allow them to cool before applying the Barrierta grease.
Applying the grease while the bushings are hot could generate gas.
D131/D132/D133 4-80 SM
Fusing Unit
Replacement
Adjustment
and
Remove:
Fusing unit p.4-70
1. Turn the fusing unit upside down.
2. Lower cover [A] ( x 1)
3. Pressure roller cleaning unit [B] ( x 2)
4. Release the pressure arms [C]
5. Use screw driver to lower the pressure arms on both ends of the pressure roller.
6. Pressure roller springs [D]
7. Pressure roller [E]
The fusing lamps are fragile. Work carefully to avoid breaking them.
During assembly, handle the roller carefully to avoid scratching it on the bracket.
Make sure the tabs and grooves of the lower cover are engaged correctly before
tightening the screw.
Spring Adjustment
Two holes [F] are provided on each pressure arm for the springs.
Normally the springs should be attached to the lower holes.
Attaching the springs to the upper holes exerts less pressure on the hot roller. Attach the
springs to the upper holes only for especially thin paper.
SM 4-81 D131/D132/D133
Fusing Unit
Remove:
Fusing unit p.4-70
1. Top cover [A]
2. Bracket [B] ( x 1, spring x 1)
D131/D132/D133 4-82 SM
Fusing Unit
1. After the machine is powered on with the main switch, make an A4/LT LEF copy, then stop the
machine while the paper is still in the fusing unit by switching it off.
This is easier with an OHP sheet. Use an OHP sheet if you have one available.
Replacement
Adjustment
2. Open the front door, then turn the fusing knob to feed out the copy.
and
3. Measure the width of the band on the part of the image where it is particularly black. The band,
called the nip band [A], should be 9.0 0.7 mm at the center.
When the fusing is incorrect (wrinkles, offset, curl), measure the nip band width.
The nip band width can be adjusted by changing the position of the springs [B] on
either end of the pressure roller.
The fusing temperature can also be adjusted with SP1105 (Fusing Temperature
Adjustment) for Normal, OHP, and Thick Paper.
SM 4-83 D131/D132/D133
Fusing Unit
Remove:
Fusing unit p.4-70
1. Open the hot roller stripper pawl unit [A]
2. Exit guide plate [B] ( x 2)
3. Fusing exit sensor holder [C] ( x 2)
4. Plate spring [D]
5. Fusing exit sensor [E] ( x 1, x 3)
D131/D132/D133 4-84 SM
Fusing Unit
Remove:
Replacement
Rear upper cover p.4-11
Adjustment
1. Open the BCU ( x 4)
and
2. CNB bracket [A] ( x 4, x1, x all)
SM 4-85 D131/D132/D133
Fusing Unit
D131/D132/D133 4-86 SM
Fusing Unit
1. Open the front door and pull out the exit/inverter unit.
Replacement
Adjustment
2. Fusing exit sensor bracket [A] ( x 2)
and
3. Fusing exit sensor [B] ( x 1)
4. Exit unit entrance sensor bracket [C] ( x 2)
5. Exit unit entrance sensor [D] ( x 1)
SM 4-87 D131/D132/D133
Duplex Unit
1. Open the front door and pull out the duplex unit.
2. Remove the slide rail roller on the left [A] and on the right [B] ( x 1).
3. Lift out the duplex unit [C].
Reinstallation
To re-install the duplex unit, insert the duplex unit partially, only until it enters the black guide
rail, then re-attach each slide rail roller.
Next, push the duplex unit into the machine completely. This method prevents interference
from the guide plate during installation.
D131/D132/D133 4-88 SM
Duplex Unit
Replacement
Adjustment
2. Move the handle lock screw [B] from the right to the center.
and
3. Loosen the left lock screw [C], then adjust the position of the duplex unit.
SM 4-89 D131/D132/D133
Duplex Unit
D131/D132/D133 4-90 SM
Duplex Unit
Replacement
Adjustment
and
2. Inverter motor bracket [B] ( x 3)
3. Inverter motor [C] ( x 1, x 1, x 2, timing belt x 1)
SM 4-91 D131/D132/D133
Duplex Unit
D131/D132/D133 4-92 SM
Duplex Unit
Jogger HP Sensor
Replacement
Adjustment
and
Duplex Entrance Sensor
1. Bracket [A] ( x 2)
2. Duplex entrance sensor [B] ( x 1)
SM 4-93 D131/D132/D133
Duplex Unit
1. Cross-stay [A] ( x 4)
2. Reverse trigger roller shaft [B]
D131/D132/D133 4-94 SM
Duplex Unit
Replacement
Adjustment
To avoid breaking the tabs under the left edge of the table, pull the table to the right to
and
disengage the tabs and then remove.
5. Inverter exit sensor [E] ( x 1, x 1, x 1)
6. Transport sensor 1 [F] ( x 1, x 1)
7. Transport sensor 2 [G] ( x 1, x 1)
SM 4-95 D131/D132/D133
Duplex Unit
Remove:
Cross stay p.4-94
Reverse trigger roller shaft p.4-94
Left half of the table
Jogger motor bracket
Slip the one end of the belt around the gear below the jogger motor.
Slip the other end of the belt around the gear at the other side of the duplex unit.
1. If you are replacing the belt, set both jogger fence brackets at the center of the belt and
tighten the screw [A].
2. If you are adjusting the belt, loosen the screw and slide the plastic piece [B] on the belt to the
left or right to adjust the position of the front fence, then tighten the screw.
D131/D132/D133 4-96 SM
Paper Feed
Tandem Tray
Replacement
Adjustment
and
1. Open the front door.
2. Pull out the tandem tray drawer [A] completely to separate the left [B] and right [C] sides of the
tandem tray.
SM 4-97 D131/D132/D133
Paper Feed
When re-installing the right tandem tray, make sure that the wheels [A] ride on the slide rail
[B].
When re-installing the right tandem tray, make sure that the tandem tray stopper [C] is set
behind the stopper [D] on the frame.
D131/D132/D133 4-98 SM
Paper Feed
Universal Tray
Replacement
Adjustment
4.11.2 REAR FENCE RETURN SENSOR REPLACEMENT
and
SM 4-99 D131/D132/D133
Paper Feed
D131/D132/D133 4-100 SM
Paper Feed
Replacement
Adjustment
and
5. Bottom plate [C] ( x 4)
6. Connector [D] ( x 1)
7. Sensor [E] ( x 1)
SM 4-101 D131/D132/D133
Paper Feed
Remove:
Right tandem tray p.4-97
1. Remove the inner cover [A] ( x 2)
D131/D132/D133 4-102 SM
Paper Feed
Reinstallation
1. Set the positioning pin [A] in the hole [B], and set the projection [C] in the hole [D].
2. Position the wire as shown [E].
3. Do not cross the wires.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
SM 4-103 D131/D132/D133
Paper Feed
D131/D132/D133 4-104 SM
Paper Feed
Replacement
Adjustment
and
8. Remove the rear side fence [G] ( x 4) and re-position the rear cover [H] ( x 2).
SM 4-105 D131/D132/D133
Paper Feed
D131/D132/D133 4-106 SM
Paper Feed
Replacement
Adjustment
and
1. Pull out the tray and remove the right inner cover [A] ( x 2).
2. Loosen the screws and adjust the position of the plate [B].
Adjustment range: 0 2.0 mm adjustment step: 1.0 mm/step
SM 4-107 D131/D132/D133
Paper Feed
The operation of the FRR mechanisms for the tandem tray (Tray 1) and universal
trays (Tray 2, Tray 3), are similar. These rollers are interchangeable.
Do not touch the surface of new rollers during replacement.
D131/D132/D133 4-108 SM
Paper Feed
Remove:
Front door p.4-9
Replacement
LCT entrance guide cover and right lower cover p.4-115
Adjustment
If the LCT is connected, disconnect it and pull it away from the machine.
and
Pull out all three trays (do not remove).
1. Nylon peg [A]
2. Toner collection bottle [B]
SM 4-109 D131/D132/D133
Paper Feed
Reinstallation
When re-installing the vertical transport guide, remove the lower right cover then insert
from [E].
D131/D132/D133 4-110 SM
Paper Feed
For D131
Replacement
Adjustment
1. Feed unit [A] p.4-109
and
Paper feed motor [B]
2. Remove two screws and the connector bracket [C]. When removing bracket [C], no
connectors need to be disconnected.
SM 4-111 D131/D132/D133
Paper Feed
4. Remove two screws and a spring, and then remove the paper feed motor [E] ( x 1).
For D132/D133
1. Right lower cover p.4-9
2. Feed unit p.4-109
Remove the feed unit corresponding to the motor which will be removed.
D131/D132/D133 4-112 SM
Paper Feed
The positions of the two screws which fasten the paper feed motor are different for
each motor.
Paper feed motor 1: Left upper and right lower.
Paper feed motor 2 and 3: Right upper and left lower.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
SM 4-113 D131/D132/D133
Paper Feed
Remove:
Feed unit p.4-109
1. Loosen the hex screw [A].
2. The separation roller gear [B] is positioned at the groove before shipping.
3. Do one of the following:
To adjust for thick paper, move the separation roller gear [B] to the left to decrease the
pressure.
To correct misfeeds, move the separation roller gear to the right to increase the pressure.
D131/D132/D133 4-114 SM
Paper Feed
Replacement
Adjustment
1. Remove the LCT entrance guide cover [A].
and
2. Relay sensor bracket [B] ( x 1)
3. Relay sensor [C] ( x 1)
SM 4-115 D131/D132/D133
Paper Feed
D131/D132/D133 4-116 SM
Paper Feed
Reinstallation
After installation, execute SP1904 to calibrate the maximum and minimum paper sizes for the side
fences:
SP1904-001 By-pass Tray Paper Size Detection Minimum Size: Move the side fences to
the minimum size, then execute this SP.
SP1904-002 By-pass Tray Paper Size Detection Maximum Size: Move the side fences to
the maximum size, then execute this SP.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
1. Right covers p.4-9
2. By-pass tray p.4-116
3. By-pass cover [A] ( x 2)
4. Feed roller [B] ( x 1)
5. Pick-up roller [C] ( x 1)
6. Separation roller [D] ( x 1)
Even though the FRR mechanisms for the tandem tray (Tray 1), universal trays (Tray
2, Tray 3) by-pass tray and ADF are similar, the only rollers that are interchangeable
are the tandem and universal trays (Trays 1, 2, 3).
Do not touch the surface of new rollers during replacement.
SM 4-117 D131/D132/D133
Paper Feed
D131/D132/D133 4-118 SM
Paper Feed
Replacement
Remove:
Adjustment
Development unit p.4-34
and
Charge corona unit p.4-38
OPC drum unit p.4-40
SM 4-119 D131/D132/D133
Paper Feed
D131/D132/D133 4-120 SM
Paper Feed
Replacement
Adjustment
and
9. Remove the by-pass unit [D] ( x 4).
When removing and installing the by-pass unit:
Make sure that the unit does not catch on any harnesses.
On re-installation, make sure that no harnesses are pinched between the unit and the
machine frame.
You must re-install the by-pass unit with the duplex unit open.
SM 4-121 D131/D132/D133
PCBs and HDD
D131/D132/D133 4-122 SM
PCBs and HDD
Replacement
Adjustment
and
4. Disconnect the controller board ( x3). The top and bottom screws are marked with a sharp
angle bracket "<".
SM 4-123 D131/D132/D133
PCBs and HDD
D131/D132/D133 4-124 SM
PCBs and HDD
Replacement
Adjustment
In this case, replace the CNT with the correct board.
and
4.12.2 NVRAM
This machine has an electronic counting device that uses software to monitor the number of
copies. In addition to the electronic counter of the NVRAM on the CNT board, the machine is also
equipped with a mechanical counter.
SM 4-125 D131/D132/D133
PCBs and HDD
D131/D132/D133 4-126 SM
PCBs and HDD
4.12.3 IPU
1. Controller box cover p.4-122
2. Swing open the controller box ( x 3) p.4-122
3. Behind the IPU on the back of the controller box, remove the IPU connector cover ( x 2).
Replacement
Adjustment
and
4. Disconnect all the harnesses on the back of the IPU.
SM 4-127 D131/D132/D133
PCBs and HDD
4.12.4 HDD
1. Controller box cover p.4-122
D131/D132/D133 4-128 SM
PCBs and HDD
Reinstallation
Explain to the customer that the following information stored on the HDD is lost when the
HDD is replaced: (1) Document server documents, (2) Custom-made stamps, (3)
Replacement
Adjustment
Document server address book.
and
The address book and document server documents (if needed) must be input again.
If the customer is using the Data Overwrite Security feature, the DOS function must be
set up again. For more, see "Installation".
The browser unit must also be installed again.
1. After reinstalling a HDD, execute SP5832-011 (HDD Format All) to format the hard disk.
2. Download the browser. For more details, see the installation instructions for the controller
options (in this manual).
SM 4-129 D131/D132/D133
PCBs and HDD
4.12.5 CTL-PSU
1. Controller box cover p.4-122
D131/D132/D133 4-130 SM
PCBs and HDD
4.12.6 BCU
1. Rear upper cover and rear lower cover p.4-11
Replacement
Adjustment
and
3. Open the BCU bracket [A] ( x 4, all s, all s)
4. Do not forget to release the clamp [B].
SM 4-131 D131/D132/D133
PCBs and HDD
1. Remove the NVRAM from the old BCU, and then install it on the new BCU.
2. Install the BCU.
3. Turn on the machine, so that SC995-01 occurs.
4. Enter the SP mode (SP5-811-004), and then enter the machine code.
5. Exit the SP mode, and then reboot the machine.
When installing a new NVRAM, SC195 occurs. In this case, do SP5-811-001 and
input the machine code.
4.12.7 CNB
1. Open the BCU bracket. BCU
It is not necessary to release all the clamps and harnesses.
D131/D132/D133 4-132 SM
PCBs and HDD
4.12.8 PFB
1. Open the controller box p.4-122
Replacement
Adjustment
and
SM 4-133 D131/D132/D133
PCBs and HDD
4.12.9 DRB
1. Open the controller box p.4-122
D131/D132/D133 4-134 SM
PCBs and HDD
4.12.10 PSU
1. Open the controller box p.4-122
Replacement
Adjustment
Reinstallation of PSU
and
Make sure the white cable and black cables are connected correctly.
SM 4-135 D131/D132/D133
ADF
4.13 ADF
D131/D132/D133 4-136 SM
ADF
Replacement
Adjustment
and
1. Open the feed cover [A].
2. Remove the snap fitting [B].
3. Push the feed unit slowly to the left to disengage the shaft [C] on the right, then lift it out.
SM 4-137 D131/D132/D133
ADF
At re-assembly, make sure that the tab on the front guide plate is above the pick-up
roller.
5. Hold the feed belt holder [A] by the left and right sides, then carefully pull it off the bushing. Do
not let the springs [B] fall.
6. Remove the feed belt [C].
When re-assembling, set the pick-up roller springs first, then follow this procedure in
reverse.
D131/D132/D133 4-138 SM
ADF
Replacement
Adjustment
and
1. Open the feed cover.
2. Remove the feed unit. p.4-137
3. Separation roller cover [A]
Use the tip of a screwdriver to push up the cover.
4. Clip [B] ( x 1)
5. Separation roller [C]
6. Torque limiter clutch [D]
SM 4-139 D131/D132/D133
ADF
D131/D132/D133 4-140 SM
ADF
Replacement
Adjustment
1. ADF rear cover p.4-136
and
2. ADF board [A] ( x 4, all s)
SM 4-141 D131/D132/D133
ADF
D131/D132/D133 4-142 SM
ADF
Replacement
Adjustment
and
1. Open the original tray [A].
2. Lower cover [B] ( x 4)
3. Original length sensor 1 B5 [C] ( x 1)
4. Original length sensor 2 A4 [D] ( x 1)
5. Original length sensor 3 LG [E] ( x 1)
SM 4-143 D131/D132/D133
ADF
D131/D132/D133 4-144 SM
ADF
Replacement
1. Open the feed cover.
Adjustment
2. Open the front door
and
3. Rear covers ( x 4) p.4-11
4. Clips [A] ( x 1)
5. Original tray [B] ( x 1)
6. Bottom plate [C] ( x 1)
7. Original set sensor [D] ( x 1)
8. Feed cover sensor [E] ( x 1)
SM 4-145 D131/D132/D133
ADF
D131/D132/D133 4-146 SM
ADF
Replacement
Adjustment
and
1. Open the feed cover.
2. ADF rear cover p.4-136
3. Bottom plate lift motor p.4-146
4. Timing belt [A]
5. Exit/transport motor unit [B] ( x 3, x 2)
6. Transport motor [C] ( x 2)
7. Exit motor [D] ( x 2)
SM 4-147 D131/D132/D133
ADF
D131/D132/D133 4-148 SM
ADF
Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before performing this
procedure.
1. Open the feed cover.
2. Feed unit p.4-137
3. Guide plate p.4-140
Replacement
Adjustment
4. Guide plate mylar [A] ( x 1)
and
5. CIS unit [B] ( x 2, x 3)
Pull out the CIS unit carefully to avoid scratching the glass.
SM 4-149 D131/D132/D133
ADF
D131/D132/D133 4-150 SM
ADF
Replacement
Adjustment
Reinstallation
and
Attach the timing belt as shown, then insert the pin screw [F] as shown.
SM 4-151 D131/D132/D133
ADF
7. Release the belt and make sure that the belt is loose and that the rollers do not move. Repeat
Steps 5 and 6 if the rollers expand and tighten the belt.
17. Make sure that studs on the underside of the belt [H] are aligned with the grooves in the
Teflon rollers on each end of the shaft below.
D131/D132/D133 4-152 SM
ADF
Replacement
Adjustment
and
The special tool [B] is attached to the front side plate. It is used to adjust the tension
on the belt on both ends of the shaft.
3. Fit the special tool onto the front (see "FRONT" in the above diagram).
4. Slowly loosen the front lock screw [C] until you see the tip of the shaft aligned with the
hole , then tighten the screw.
To avoid stripping the threads of the screws, do not apply excessive torque.
5. Remove the special tool and fit it onto the rear (see "REAR" in the above diagram).
If the Teflon sleeve has been reattached at [D], remove it. Do not reattach the sleeve
until after adjusting the belt tension. (The special tool does not fit over the rear end
with the Teflon sleeve attached.)
SM 4-153 D131/D132/D133
ADF
6. Slowly loosen the rear lock screw [E] until you see the tip of the shaft aligned with the hole
, then tighten the screw.
7. Re-install the Teflon sleeve.
8. Re-install the front and rear plastic cover.
9. Reinstall the transport belt assembly in the ADF.
1. With its white side down, set the cover [A] on the exposure glass.
2. Make sure the upper left corner is aligned with the arrow at the corner of the exposure glass.
3. Close the ADF [B] on top of the cover.
D131/D132/D133 4-154 SM
Copy Image Adjustments: Printing/Scanning
These adjustments must be performed after replacing any of the following parts:
Scanner wires
Lens block
Scanner motor
Polygon motor
Tandem tray side fences
Memory All Clear
Preparation
1. Make sure paper is installed correctly in each paper tray before you start these adjustments.
2. Use the Trimming Area Pattern (SP2-902-3, No. 18 to print the test pattern for the following
Replacement
Adjustment
procedures.
and
3. After completing these printing adjustments, be sure to set SP 2-902-3 to 0 again.
SM 4-155 D131/D132/D133
Copy Image Adjustments: Printing/Scanning
SP mode Specification
Blank Margin
If the leading edge/side-to-side registration cannot be adjusted within specifications, adjust the
leading/left side edge blank margin.
1. Check the trailing edge and right edge blank margins, and adjust them with the following SP
modes.
D131/D132/D133 4-156 SM
Copy Image Adjustments: Printing/Scanning
SP mode Specification
Replacement
Trailing Edge SP2101-002
Adjustment
and
Left edge SP2101-003
21.5 mm
Right edge SP2101-004
SM 4-157 D131/D132/D133
Copy Image Adjustments: Printing/Scanning
D131/D132/D133 4-158 SM
Copy Image Adjustments: Printing/Scanning
Replacement
Adjustment
1. Place the test chart on the exposure glass and make a copy from one of the feed stations.
and
2. Check the leading edge and side-to-side registration, and adjust them with the following SP
modes if necessary.
SM 4-159 D131/D132/D133
Copy Image Adjustments: Printing/Scanning
Magnification
Use an S-5-S test chart to perform the following adjustment.
Main Scan Magnification
1. Place the test chart on the exposure glass and make a copy from one of the feed stations.
2. Check magnification, and then SP2909-001 (Main Scan Magnification - Copy) to adjust
magnification if required. Specification: 2%.
Sub Scan Magnification
1. Place the test chart on the exposure glass and make a copy from one of the feed stations.
2. Check the magnification ratio. Use SP4008 (Scanner Sub Scan Magnification) to adjust if
necessary. Specification: 0.9%.
D131/D132/D133 4-160 SM
Copy Image Adjustments: Printing/Scanning
1 2 3 4
ON OFF OFF OFF Free run (Simplex: each sheet stopped for registration)
ON ON OFF OFF Free run (Duplex: no registration) SP6009 (ADF Free Run)
OFF ON ON OFF
Replacement
Adjustment
ON ON ON OFF
and
OFF OFF OFF ON
*1: The entrance mode disregards paper size. Skew correction is performed at the scanning roller.
SM 4-161 D131/D132/D133
Copy Image Adjustments: Printing/Scanning
If the skew with A4 SEF paper is more than 0.5/200 mm in the main scan direction, you can adjust
the position of the ADF hinge [A] or adjust the appropriate SP codes below.
D131/D132/D133 4-162 SM
Copy Image Adjustments: Printing/Scanning
Replacement
Adjustment
007 [20 to +20/1 mm]
and
-20 = -10 mm
+20 = +10 mm
Normally, the interval sensor detects the leading edge of small originals (B6, A5, HLT), or
originals for duplex copying, and delays the start of the scanning roller for the prescribed
number of pulses to buckle the paper and correct skew. This feature can be switched on
for all paper sizes with SP6020 (ADF Contact Mode In/Out). However, switching this
feature on for all sizes reduces scanning speed slightly.
SM 4-163 D131/D132/D133
Touch Screen Calibration
After clearing the memory, or if the touch screen detection function is not working correctly, follow
this procedure to calibrate the touch screen.
Do not attempt to use items [2] to [9] on the Self-Diagnostic Menu. These items are for
design use only. To avoid causing an error, do not touch the Reset key while doing this
procedure.
1. Press [Reset], press [1] [9] [9] [3], and then press [Clear/Stop] 5 times to open the
Self-Diagnostics menu.
2. On the touch screen press Touch Screen Adjust (or press [1]).
3. Use a pointed (not sharp!) tool to press the upper left mark .
4. Press the lower right mark after it appears.
5. Touch a few spots on the touch screen to confirm that the marker (+) appears exactly where
the screen is touched.
If the + mark does not appear where the screen is touched, press Cancel and repeat from
Step 2.
6. When you are finished, press [#] OK on the screen (or press [#]).
7. Touch [#] Exit on the screen to close the Self-Diagnostic menu and save the calibration
settings.
D131/D132/D133 4-164 SM
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY
P a ge Date A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew
None
Resets
5. SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
5.1 RESETS
SP5907 Plug & Play Brand Name and Production Name Setting
Maintenance
System
1. Execute SP5990 to print out all SMC Data Lists.
2. Open SP mode 5801.
3. Press the number for the item that you want to initialize. The number you select determines
which application is initialized. For example, press 1 if you want to initialize all modules.
Memory Clear
5801 Resets NVRAM data to the default settings. Before executing any of these SP
SM 5-1 D131/D132/D133
Resets
Initializes the fax reset time, job login ID, all TX/RX
007 Fax application
settings, local storage file numbers, and off-hook timer.
014 Clear DCS Setting Initializes the DCS (Delivery Control Service) settings.
D131/D132/D133 5-2 SM
Resets
019 LCS Clear Initializes the LCS (Log Count Service) settings.
4. Press Execute, then follow the prompts on the display to complete the procedure.
5. Make sure that you perform the following settings:
Execute SP2115 Laser Beam Pitch Adjustment
Do the printer and scanner registration and magnification adjustments (See
"Replacement and Adjustment Copy Image Adjustments: Printing/Scanning").
Do the touch screen calibration (See "Replacement and Adjustment Touch Screen
Calibration").
Referring to the SMC data lists, re-enter any values, which had been changed from their
factory settings.
Execute SP3001-002 ID Sensor Initial Setting
Make sure that SP 5112 is set to 'enabled', or the user will not be able to use
non-standard paper sizes.
Set SP 1902 001 (amount of fusing unit web used so far) to the most recent setting (see
the SMC list).
6. Check the copy quality and the paper path, and do any necessary adjustments.
Maintenance
System
SM 5-3 D131/D132/D133
Resets
Software Reset
The software can be rebooted when the machine hangs up. Do one of these two steps.
Turn the main power switch off and on.
-or-
Push and hold down [./*][#] together for over 10 seconds. When the machine beeps once, release
both buttons. After "Now loading. Please wait" is displayed for a few seconds, the copy window
will open. The machine is ready for operation.
D131/D132/D133 5-4 SM
Service Program Mode
Never turn off the main power switch when the power LED is lit or flashing. To avoid
damaging the hard disk or memory, press the operation power switch to switch the power
off, wait for the power LED to go off, and then switch the main power switch off.
Maintenance
necessary to ask the Administrator to log in again each time the machine is turned on.
System
2. If you must use the printer bit switches, go into the SP mode and set SP 5169 to "1".
3. After machine servicing is completed:
Change SP 5169 from "1" to "0".
Turn the machine off and on. Tell the administrator that you completed servicing the
machine.
The Administrator will then set the "Service Mode Lock" to ON.
SM 5-5 D131/D132/D133
Service Program Mode
Direct Entry
SP5831 (Initial Setting Clear) an executable SP that initializes the User Tools settings, can be
executed immediately by just entering the numbers.
1. Press [5] [8] [3] [1]
2. Press [#].
3. Press "Execute" on the touch panel.
If you know all seven digits of the SP code, enter the seven numbers and press Execute.However,
if you do not know all the numbers, enter only the first four numbers of the seven-digit SP and
press [#]. The display goes immediately to the first SP of that group. Then you can use the buttons
to browse to the desired selection.
D131/D132/D133 5-6 SM
Service Program Mode
Maintenance
System
SM 5-7 D131/D132/D133
Service Program Mode
In the SP mode, push "Copy Window" to move to the copy screen, select the
5990 paper size, then push Start. Select A4/LT (Sideways) or larger to make sure
that all the information is printed. Push "SP Window" to go back to the SP
mode, select the necessary SP Print Mode, and push Execute.
006 Non-Default (Prints only SPs that are set to values other than defaults.)
022 Scanner SP
D131/D132/D133 5-8 SM
Test Pattern Printing
Do not operate the machine until the test pattern is printed out completely. Otherwise, an
SC may occur.
1. Enter the SP mode and select SP2902-003.
2. Enter the number for the test pattern that you want to print and press [#]. (See the table
below.)
3. When you are prompted to confirm your selection, press Yes to select the test pattern for
printing.
4. Press Copy Window to open the copy window, then select the settings for the test print (paper
size, etc.)
5. Press [Start] twice (ignore the Place Original messages) to start the test print.
6. After checking the test pattern, press SP Mode (highlighted) to return to the SP mode display.
7. Exit the SP mode.
Maintenance
Test Pattern Table
System
These patterns can be selected for SP2902-003
0 None
SM 5-9 D131/D132/D133
Test Pattern Printing
17 Argyle Pattern
18 Trimming Area
22 Stair
23 Blank Image
27 Outside Data
D131/D132/D133 5-10 SM
Test Pattern Printing
Maintenance
7. Press SP Mode (highlighted) to return to the SP mode display.
System
Patterns 6, 8, 9, and 11 are the best choices for testing and confirming the operation
of the IPU.
SM 5-11 D131/D132/D133
Test Pattern Printing
0 None
7 Vertical Stripes
11 Cross Pattern
12 Argyle Pattern
15 Trimming Area
16 Bandwidth (Vertical)
17 Bandwidth (Horizontal)
D131/D132/D133 5-12 SM
Test Pattern Printing
Maintenance
System
SM 5-13 D131/D132/D133
Test Pattern Printing
No. Pattern
0 Off
1 Vertical Grayscale 20
2 Horizontal Grayscale 40
3 Horizontal Grayscale 20
4 Horizontal Grayscale 25
5 Caterpillar
3. When you are prompted to confirm your selection, press Yes to select the test pattern for
printing.
4. Press Copy Window to open the copy window, then select the settings for the test print (paper
size, etc.)
5. Press [Start] twice (ignore the Place Original messages) to start the test print.
6. Press SP Mode (highlighted) to return to the SP mode display.
7. Switch the machine off and on.
D131/D132/D133 5-14 SM
Updating the Firmware
Never connect or remove an IC card or SD card with the machine power turned on.
Maintenance
Never turn the power off while the machine is downloading data from an IC card or SD
System
card.
The IC cards and SD card are precision items. Use them carefully.
Never store IC cards or SD cards in a location where they are exposed to high
temperature, high humidity, or direct sunlight.
Never bend an IC card or SD card, scratch it, or expose it to strong vibration.
Before uploading data to an SD card, always confirm that its write-protect switch is off.
SM 5-15 D131/D132/D133
Updating the Firmware
6. To select the item for upgrade, touch the selection on the touch panel, or push the
corresponding key on the 10-key pad (1 to 5) of the operation panel. The number in
parentheses tells you which key to push. When you make a selection, the [Verify(./*)] and
[Update(#)] buttons come on the screen.
If you push [Exit] (or the [0] key), you go back to the usual operation screen.
Push the [Start] key on the operation panel to select and download all the options shown
on the screen.
Push the [Clear] key on the operation panel if you want to cancel your selections and
make new ones.
"ROM": This is the number and other version information of the ROM firmware installed in
the machine at this time.
"NEW": This is the number and other version information of the firmware on the SD card.
7. With the selected items shown in reverse color, push the [Update] button or the [#] key on the
operation panel to start the update.
After you push [Update]:
The middle bar shows the name of the module that the machine updates at this time.
(The example above shows that the machine updates the "Printer" module at this time.)
D131/D132/D133 5-16 SM
Updating the Firmware
The bottom bar is a progress bar. The "_" marks in the progress bar are replaced by "*"
marks. This progress bar cannot be displayed during the firmware update for the
operation panel. But, the LED of the [Start] key on the operation panel changes from red
to green to show that the update of the operation panel firmware continues.
When the update is completed, you will see this screen.
After the firmware update, you will see "Update Done" in the first bar. The name of the module
in the bottom bar is the name of the last module that was updated (only the name of the last
module is shown, if several modules were been updated).
8. Turn the power off and on. Then, select the items that you updated, and then push the [Verify]
button. This is to check that the modules were updated correctly.
9. If you see "Verify Error" in the first bar on the screen, then you must do the procedure again
for the module shown in the bottom bar.
Maintenance
System
SM 5-17 D131/D132/D133
Updating the Firmware
If an error occurs during a download, an error message will appear. The error code consists of the
letter "E" and a number ("E20", for example).
Error Message Table
21 Cannot access memory HDD connection not correct, or replace hard disk.
Data incorrect after download Do the recovery procedure for the module, then
32
interrupted repeat the installation procedure.
D131/D132/D133 5-18 SM
Updating the Firmware
Engine module download Replace the data for the module on the SD card
40
failed and try again, or replace the BCU board.
Operation panel module Replace the data for the module on the SD card
42
download failed and try again, or replace the LCDC.
Stamp data module download Replace the data for the module on the SD card
43
failed and try again, or replace the hard disk.
Controller module download Replace the data for the module on the SD card
44
failed and tray again, or replace the controller board.
Maintenance
System
SD update data is not correct. The data on the SD
Electronic confirmation check
50 card is for a different machine. Get the correct
failed
data then install again.
SM 5-19 D131/D132/D133
Updating the Firmware
D131/D132/D133 5-20 SM
Updating the Firmware
Always upload this data to an SD card before you replace the NVRAM.
1. Before you turn the machine off, do SP5990 001 (SMC Print). This gives you a record of the
NVRAM settings if the upload fails.
2. Turn the copier main power switch off.
3. Put the SD card into slot 2, then turn the copier on.
4. Do SP5824 001 (NVRAM Data Upload) then push the "Execute" key
When uploading is completed, a file is coped to the NVRAM folder on the SD card. The file is
saved to this path and filename:
NVRAM<serial number>.NV
Here is an example for Serial Number "B0700017":
NVRAMB0700017.NV
5. To prevent an error during the download, write the serial number of the machine on the SD
card.
This is necessary because NVRAM data from more than one machine can be
Maintenance
uploaded to the same SD card.
System
Downloading an SD Card to NVRAM
Do this procedure to download SP data from an SD card to the NVRAM in the machine.
If the SD card with the NVRAM data is damaged, or if the connection between the controller
and BCU is defective, the NVRAM data download will not complete correctly.
If the download does not complete correctly, do the download procedure again.
If this does not complete correctly, input the NVRAM data manually from the SMC print that
you made before you uploaded the NVRAM data.
1. Turn the copier main power switch off.
2. Put the SD card with the NVRAM data into slot 2.
3. Turn the copier main power switch on.
4. Do SP5825-001 (NVRAM Data Download) and push the "Execute" key.
This procedure also downloads the C/O, P/O Count data to the NVRAM:
The serial number of the file on the SD card must match the serial number of the
machine. If the serial numbers do not match, the download will not complete
correctly.
SM 5-21 D131/D132/D133
Service Program Mode Tables
5.5.1 SP TABLES
See "Appendices" for the following information:
System SP Tables
Printer SP Tables
Scanner SP Tables
D131/D132/D133 5-22 SM
Input/Output Check
Maintenance
System
SM 5-23 D131/D132/D133
Using the Debug Log
This machine provides a debug log feature that allows the service technician to save and retrieve
error information for analysis.
Every time an error occurs, debug information is recorded in RAM but this information is lost when
the machine is switched off and on.
To capture this debug information, the Save Debug Log feature provides two main features:
Switching on the debug feature so error information is saved directly to the HDD for later
retrieval.
Copying the error information from the HDD to an SD card.
When a user is experiencing problems with the machine, follow the procedures below to set
up the machine so the error information is saved automatically to the HDD. Then attempt to
duplicate the problem so the error data will be stored.
SP5857 >>
Save Debug Log
3. Push [#Enter].
SP5857-001
On/Off
4. Push [#Enter].
<On/Off>
*OFF
D131/D132/D133 5-24 SM
Using the Debug Log
5. Push .
<On/Off>
ON
6. Push [#Enter].
<On/Off>
*ON
7. Push [Esc].
SP5857-001
On/Off
Maintenance
System
You can select either the HDD (default) or the SD card as the target. This procedure shows you
how to select the SD card.
1. Push .
SP587-002
Target
2. Push [#Enter].
<Target>
*2:HDD
3. Push .
<Target>
3:SD
SM 5-25 D131/D132/D133
Using the Debug Log
4. Push [#Enter].
<Target>
*3:SD
SP5857 >>
Save Debug Log
6. Do the next procedure to select the events that you want to record in the debug log file.
To Select Events
1. Push .
SP5858 >>
DebugSaveWhen
2. Push [#Enter].
SP5858-001
EngineSC Error
Here is a list of the events that you can select. Any number of events can be selected.
D131/D132/D133 5-26 SM
Using the Debug Log
SP5858-001
EngineSC Error
Maintenance
2. Push [#Enter].
System
<EngineSC Error>
*OFF
3. Push .
<EngineSC Error>
ON
4. Push [#Enter].
<EngineSC Error>
*ON
5. Push [Esc].
SM 5-27 D131/D132/D133
Using the Debug Log
SP5858-001
EngineSC Error
For details about SC code numbers, please refer to the SC tables in Section "4.
Troubleshooting".
1. Select "SP5858-003".
SP5858-003
Any SC Code
2. Push [#Enter].
0000000
_
3. Push [#Enter] to toggle the on the number display in the 2nd line.
0000000
0
0000000
2
0000002
_
D131/D132/D133 5-28 SM
Using the Debug Log
. 0000002
_
. 0000072
_
. 0000672
_
SP5858 >>
Maintenance
DebugSaveWhen
System
10. Do the next procedure to select one or more memory modules for the debug error data
recording.
To select one or more memory modules for recording in the debug log file
1. Select SP5859.
SP5859 >>
LogSaveKey No.
2. Push [#Enter].
SP5859
Key 1
3. Push [#Enter].
SM 5-29 D131/D132/D133
Using the Debug Log
0000000
_
0002222
_
[#Enter] Enters the number entry mode (displays a "0" at the cursor).
Enters the selected number in the line above and exits the
[#Enter]
entry mode you can select the next position with or
5. Refer to the table below for the 4-digit numbers to enter for each key. (The acronyms in
parentheses indicate the names of the modules.)
4-Digit Entries for Keys 1 to 10
1 2222 (SCS)
2 2223 (SRM)
3 256 (IMH)
4 1000 (ECS)
5 1025 (MCS)
D131/D132/D133 5-30 SM
Using the Debug Log
Key to Acronyms
Acronym Meaning
Maintenance
NCS Network Control Service
System
NFA Net File Application
The machine is now set to record the debugging information automatically on the SD card or HDD
(the target selected with SP5857-002) for the events that you selected SP5858 and the memory
modules selected with SP5859.
Please keep the following important points in mind when you are doing this setting:
The initial settings are all zero.
These settings remain in effect until you change them. Be sure to check all the settings,
especially the settings for Keys 6 to 10. To switch off a key setting, enter a zero for that key.
SM 5-31 D131/D132/D133
Using the Debug Log
You can select any number of keys from 1 to 10 (or all) by entering the corresponding 4-digit
numbers from the table.
One area of the disk is reserved to store the debug log. The size of this area is limited to 4
MB.
SP5857-015: SD to SD (Any)
This SP copies the log on an SD card (the file that contains the information written directly from
shared memory) to a log specified by key number. The copy operation is executed in the log
directory of the SD card inserted in the same slot. (This function does not copy from one slot to
another.)
Each SD card can hold up to 4 MB of file data. Unique file names are created for the data
during the copy operation to prevent overwriting files of the same name. This means that log
data from more than one machine can be copied onto the same SC card.
This command does not execute if there is no log on the HDD for the name of the specified
key.
D131/D132/D133 5-32 SM
Using the Debug Log
Maintenance
System
SM 5-33 D131/D132/D133
TROUBLESHOOTING
R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY
P a ge Date A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew
None
Service Call Conditions
6. TROUBLESHOOTING
shooting
Trouble-
SM 6-1 D131/D132/D133
Important SP Codes
For more information about these and other SP codes, see Service Tables.
D131/D132/D133 6-2 SM
Jam Detection
shooting
Trouble-
SM 6-3 D131/D132/D133
Jam Detection
Symptom 1: Jams when paper is fed from a by-pass tray that is not used
frequently
If the customer does not use the by-pass tray frequently, the rollers can become worn.
1. Visually check the by-pass tray pick-up, feed, and separation rollers.
2. If these rollers are paler than the rollers in paper trays that are more frequently used, replace
the rollers in the by-pass tray.
For more details, see Replacement and Adjustment - By-Pass Tray Rollers.
D131/D132/D133 6-4 SM
Jam Detection
shooting
Trouble-
SM 6-5 D131/D132/D133
Jam Detection
Symptom 3: Other
If none of the two symptoms 1 or 2 applies, do this procedure.
1. Use SP7504 to check the jam counts and find which SPs have high counts.
2. From the table and illustration below, find which gears must be replaced.
Example: For tray 1, if SP7504-012 is high, replace gear A, or if SP7504-008 is high, replace
gear B.
5. When you replace Gear [A] or Gear [B], be sure to put the metal face on the outer side, and
the arrow must be in view.
6. If a replacement gear is not available, do this as a temporary procedure:
Remove the paper feed unit.
Remove the gear.
D131/D132/D133 6-6 SM
Jam Detection
shooting
057 Exit Sensor: Off P2 Trouble-
SM 6-7 D131/D132/D133
Jam Detection
D131/D132/D133 6-8 SM
Jam Detection
- - -
shooting
Trouble-
69 Duplex Entrance SN: Lag E
- - -
- - -
SM 6-9 D131/D132/D133
Jam Detection
D131/D132/D133 6-10 SM
Jam Detection
SM 6-11 D131/D132/D133
Jam Detection
D131/D132/D133 6-12 SM
Jam Detection
shooting
Trouble-
SM 6-13 D131/D132/D133
Jam Detection
D131/D132/D133 6-14 SM
Program Download
Here are some important points to keep in mind when downloading software:
If an error interrupts download processing, the machine cannot operate normally with the
program software only partially downloaded.
When download processing execution starts, a progress bar (***____) is displayed until the
download completes successfully.
If the download is interrupted while the asterisks are displayed, the machine does not attempt
a re-try.
The program that downloads firmware from an SD card is part of the GW controller software.
If downloading this software is interrupted, the program stored in the machine may become
corrupted. If this occurs, it may not be possible to restart the downloading program.
If the GW controller software cannot be downloaded, software on other SD cards cannot be
downloaded as well.
If such problems occur, it may be possible to restart the program without replacing the
controller board by setting controller DIP SW 1 to ON and then re-starting.
shooting
Trouble-
SM 6-15 D131/D132/D133
Program Download
01
insert E01 stored in NVRAM, the break module Use the correct
Module ID Card No. information and the decompression card
xx/xx module capable of writing do not
match.
D131/D132/D133 6-16 SM
Program Download
defective board
shooting
Trouble-
System error 3 (+SC991) Turn the machine
Download Error off/on and re-try.
E22 Module ID Data fails to decompress. Card Replace card
Card No xx/xx defective. Replace controller
board
SM 6-17 D131/D132/D133
Program Download
Download dysfunction 2
Reboot After Card Set the correct
31 Insert E31 Module Download continuity error with more cards in the
ID Card No. xx/xx than one card. The second or later correct order
card is not compatible.
Download dysfunction 4
Download dysfunction 5
Use the correct
34 No Valid Data E34 Specification error. DOM card set in card
EXP machine, or vice versa.
Download dysfunction 6
Use the correct
35 No Valid Data E35 Wrong model. The inserted card is card
for another model.
D131/D132/D133 6-18 SM
Program Download
Download dysfunction 8
Use an unused
37 No Valid Data E37 Edit option card error. You card
attempted to employ a used card.
shooting
displayed. Trouble-
SM 6-19 D131/D132/D133
Program Download
Download invalid
Use the correct
50 No Valid Data E50 The source data for the update SD card.
could not be authenticated.
The source data received for the Try again with the
52 (no display) ROM update is corrupted; it failed a correct data.
SUM check due to its abnormal
length.
D131/D132/D133 6-20 SM
Timing Charts
(1): Paper feed motor ON > Paper feed sensor does not switch ON at the correct time.
Paper feed motor ON > Vertical transport sensor does not switch ON at the correct
(2):
time.
shooting
Trouble-
Vertical transport sensor ON> Paper feed sensor does not switch OFF at the
(3):
correct time.
Vertical transport sensor ON > Vertical transport sensor does not switch OFF at the
(4):
correct time.
(5): Lower relay motor ON> Relay sensor does not switch ON at the correct time.
Vertical transport sensor OFF > Relay sensor does not switch OFF at the correct
(6):
time.
(7): Relay sensor ON > Registration sensor does not switch ON at the correct time.
(8): Relay sensor OFF> Registration sensor does not switch OFF at the correct time.
SM 6-21 D131/D132/D133
Timing Charts
Registration motor ON > Fusing unit paper exit sensor does not switch ON at the
(9):
correct time.
Fusing unit paper exit sensor ON > Exit unit entrance sensor does not switch ON at
(10):
the correct time.
Exit unit entrance sensor ON> Paper exit sensor does not switch ON at the correct
(11):
time.
Registration motor OFF > Paper exit sensor does not switch OFF at the correct
(12):
time.
D131/D132/D133 6-22 SM
Timing Charts
From the registration sensor to the fusing unit exit, jam detection is the same as
(1):
face-up feed out.
Exit unit entrance sensor ON > Duplex entrance sensor does not switch OFF at the
(2):
correct time.
Registration sensor OFF > Duplex entrance sensor does not switch OFF at the
(3):
correct time.
Duplex entrance sensor ON > Inverter exit sensor does not switch OFF at the
(4):
correct time.
shooting
(5): Inverter exit sensor ON > Paper exit sensor does not switch ON at the correct time. Trouble-
Duplex entrance sensor OFF > Paper exit sensor does not switch OFF at the
(6):
correct time. (Paper remains at the duplex unit exit.)
SM 6-23 D131/D132/D133
Timing Charts
Duplex entrance sensor ON > Inverter exit sensor does not switch ON at the
(1):
correct time.
Inverter exit sensor ON > Duplex transport sensor 1 does not switch on at the
(2):
correct time.
Duplex transport sensor 1 ON> Duplex transport sensor 2 does not switch on at the
(3):
correct time.
Duplex entrance sensor ON > Duplex transport sensor 2 does not switch OFF at
(4):
the correct time.
Duplex transport sensor 2 ON > Duplex transport sensor 3 does not switch ON at
(5):
the correct time.
Duplex transport sensor 2 OFF > Duplex transport sensor 3 does not switch OFF at
(6):
the correct time.
Duplex transport sensor 3 ON > Relay sensor does not switch on at the correct
(7):
time.
D131/D132/D133 6-24 SM
Other Problems
Rating
Fuse Symptom at Power On
115 V 210~230V
shooting
FU111 6.3A/125V 6.3A/250V SC530-00 Trouble-
SM 6-25 D131/D132/D133
Other Problems
Lines (black or white) Around the Drum Cleaning blade, cleaning brush
Misfeed Fusing
Fusing Unit Hot roller
Unit
Poor separation Transfer Belt Unit Transfer belt, transfer belt cleaning blade
Toner on transfer belt Transfer Belt Unit Transfer belt, transfer belt cleaning blade
D131/D132/D133 6-26 SM
ENERGY SAVE
R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY
P a ge Date A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew
None
Energy Save
7. ENERGY SAVE
The area shaded grey in this diagram represents the amount of energy that is saved when the
timers are at the default settings. If the timers are changed, then the energy saved will be different.
For example, if the timers are all set to 240 min., the grey area will disappear, and no energy is
saved before 240 min. expires.
Timer Settings
The user can set these timers with User Tools (System settings > Timer setting)
Energy Save
Energy saver timer (1 240 min): Low Power Mode. Default setting: 1 to 240 minute
Sleep Mode (1 to 240 min.): Default setting 1 min.
Auto off timer (1 240 min): Off/Sleep Mode Default settings:
D131 1 min.
D132 1 min.
D133 15 min.
SM 7-1 D131/D132/D133
Energy Save
Normally, Energy Saver timer < Auto Off timer. But, for example, if Auto Off timer < or = Energy
Saver timer, the machine goes immediately to Off mode when the Auto Off timer expires. It skips
the Panel Off and Energy Saver modes.
Example
Panel off: 1 min.
Low power: 15 min.
Auto Off: 1 min.
The machine goes to Off mode after 1 minute. Panel Off and Low Power modes are not used.
Recommendation
We recommend that the default settings should be kept.
If the customer requests that these settings should be changed, please explain that their
energy costs could increase, and that they should consider the effects on the environment of
extra energy use.
If it is necessary to change the settings, please try to make sure that the Auto Off timer is not
too long. Try with a shorter setting first, such as 30 min., then go to a longer one (such as 60
min.) if the customer is not satisfied.
If the timers are all set to the maximum value, the machine will not begin saving energy until
240 minutes has expired after the last job. This means that after the customer has finished
using the machine for the day, energy will be consumed that could otherwise be saved.
If you change the settings, the energy consumed can be measured using SP8941, as
explained below.
D131/D132/D133 7-2 SM
Energy Save
Ready
mode 002:
(stand by) 214.0 Standby Time 306163.0 308046.0 1883.0 402962.0
SM 7-3 D131/D132/D133
Energy Save
Energy
mode 003:
(Panel Energy Save
off) 214.0 Time 71386.0 75111.0 3725.0 797150.0
Low
power 004:
mode 153.0 Low power Time 154084.0 156340.0 2256.0 345168.0
Off/Sleep 005:
mode 7.0 Off mode Time 508776.0 520377.0 11601.0 81207.0
D131/D132/D133 7-4 SM
Paper Save
1. Duplex:
Reduce paper volume in half!
2. Combine mode:
Reduce paper volume in half!
3. Duplex + Combine:
Energy Save
Using both features together can further reduce paper volume by 3/4!
SM 7-5 D131/D132/D133
Paper Save
To check the paper consumption, look at the total counter and the duplex counter.
The total counter counts all pages printed.
For one duplex page, the total counter goes up by 2.
For a duplex job of a three-page original, the total counter goes up by 3.
The duplex counter counts pages that have images on both sides.
For one duplex page, the duplex counter goes up by 1.
For a duplex job of a three-page original, the duplex counter will only increase by 1, even
though two sheets are used.
1 1 1 0 1 0
2 2 1 1 2 1
3 3 2 1 3 1
4 4 2 2 4 2
5 5 3 2 5 2
10 10 5 5 10 5
20 20 10 10 20 10
If combine mode is used, the total and duplex counters work in the same way as explained
previously. The following table shows paper savings and how the counters increase for some
simple examples of duplex/combine jobs.
2 in 1 mode:
D131/D132/D133 7-6 SM
Paper Save
1 1 1 0 1 1
2 2 1 1 1 1
3 3 2 1 2 2
4 4 2 2 2 2
5 5 3 2 3 2
10 10 5 5 5 5
20 20 10 10 10 10
Duplex + 2 in 1 mode:
1 1 1 0 1 1
2 2 1 1 1 1
3 3 1 2 2 2
4 4 1 3 2 2
5 5 2 3 3 3
6 6 2 4 3 3
7 7 2 5 4 4
Energy Save
8 8 2 6 4 4
9 9 3 6 5 5
10 10 3 7 5 5
11 11 3 8 6 6
12 12 3 9 6 6
SM 7-7 D131/D132/D133
D131/D132/D133
SERVICE MANUAL APPENDICES
D131/D132/D133 APPENDICES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SM Appendix i D131/D132/D133
Folding Mode FM1 ............................................................................. 1-29
Folding Mode FM2 ............................................................................. 1-30
Folding Mode FM3 ............................................................................. 1-31
Folding Mode FM4 ............................................................................. 1-32
Folding Mode FM5 ............................................................................. 1-33
Folding Mode FM6 ............................................................................. 1-34
D131/D132/D133 ii SM Appendix
3.7 SP5000 MODE: SP5821 TO SP5990 .................................................... 3-128
3.8 SP6000 PERIPHERALS ........................................................................ 3-165
3.9 SP7000 DATA LOGS ............................................................................. 3-194
3.10 SP8000 DATA LOG2 ....................................................................... 3-215
Key for Abbreviations ....................................................................... 3-217
3.11 PRINTER SP TABLES ..................................................................... 3-273
3.12 SCANNER SP TABLES ................................................................... 3-280
3.12.1 SP-1XXX SYSTEM AND OTHERS ........................................ 3-280
3.12.2 SP1-XXX SCANNING IMAGE QUALITY ............................... 3-282
3.13 INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK ................................................................. 3-283
3.13.1 COPIER INPUT CHECK: SP5803 ......................................... 3-283
3.13.2 COPIER OUTPUT CHECK: SP5804 ..................................... 3-293
SP5804 Output Check Table............................................................ 3-293
3.13.3 ADF INPUT CHECK: SP6007 ................................................ 3-297
3.13.4 ADF OUTPUT CHECK: SP6008 ............................................ 3-298
3.13.5 FINISHER 1 INPUT CHECK: SP6121 ................................... 3-299
3.13.6 FINISHER 1 OUTPUT CHECK: SP6124 ............................... 3-302
3.13.7 FINISHER 2 INPUT CHECK: SP6122 ................................... 3-304
3.13.8 FINISHER 2 OUTPUT CHECK: SP6125 ............................... 3-306
3.13.9 FOLDER INPUT CHECK: SP6309......................................... 3-307
3.13.10 FOLDER OUTPUT CHECK: SP6310..................................... 3-308
Specifications
Appendix:
1.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
1.1.1 COPIER
Engine
Configuration Console
Original: Sheet/Book/Objects
Original Size
Max. A3/11" x 17"
Min. B6 SEF/5.5" x 8.5" (using ADF)
Original Alignment: Rear left corner
By-pass
Copy Paper Weight
Standard: 52.3 to 157 g/m 2
(14 to 43 lb.)
Thick Paper mode: 52.3 to
216 g/m 2 (14 to 58 lb.)
D131: 60 ppm
Copying Speed D132: 75 ppm
D133: 90 ppm (A4, LT LEF)
D131 3.9 s
(Tray 1, A4/LT LEF face-up,
First Copy Time D132 3.2 s
contact glass mode, APS off)
D133 2.9 s
D131/D132: <1.8 KW
Specifications
Power Consumption Full System NA
Appendix:
D133: <1.9 KW
ADF
Specifications
Power Consumption
Appendix:
NA
Complete system*1
EU/AA
Complete system*1
Specifications
Noise Emission
Appendix:
Noise Power Operator Bystander
No. Test Mode dB (A)
Level Position Position Max.
The above measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779. Full system
measurements include the Mainframe + Finisher + LCT + Cover Interposer + Punch.
A3, B4, 11" x 17", 8.5" x 14", A4 SEF, A4 LEF, 8.5" x 11" SEF, 11" x 8.5"
Paper Size
LEF
52 to 163 g/m 2
Paper 16 to 40 lb. Bond
Weight 50 to 60 lb. Cover
90 lb. Index (no Tab)
Tray
1,000 sheets (80 g/m 2, 20lb)
Capacity
*1: In platen mode, APS (Auto Paper Select) with the original length and original width sensors are
not used.
Specifications
Appendix:
Upper Tray
Shift Tray
Stapler
A3 to B5
Stapling Paper Size
11" x 17" to 8.5" x 11"
4 Modes
Staple Position 1 Staple: Front, Rear, Rear-Oblique
2 Stapes: 2 locations
10 to 50 150 to 30
A3, B4, 11" x 17", 8.5" x 14"
2 to 9 150
Specifications
Appendix:
This punch unit is installed in the Finisher SR4080.
Paper Weight
DIP SW Settings
The correct DIP SW settings of the Punch Unit 531 are provided in the table below for your
reference only. The DIP switches of these punch units do not need to be changed at installation,
or adjusted for operation.
DIP SW Settings
Punch Unit Unit No.
1 2 3 4
0: OFF, 1: ON
Specifications
1.2.5 PUNCH UNIT TYPE 850 SC (A812)
Appendix:
This punch unit is installed in the Finisher SR4080..
Paper Weight
2-Hole 40K
Power Consumption 60 W
DIP SW Settings
The correct DIP SW settings of the Punch Unit A812 are provided in the table below for your
reference only. The DIP switches of these punch units do not need to be changed at installation,
or adjusted for operation.
DIP SW Settings
Punch Unit Unit No.
1 2 3 4
0: OFF, 1: ON
Power Consumption 24 W
Specifications
1.2.7 8 1/2"X14" PAPER SIZE TRAY TYPE 9002 (B474)
Appendix:
Paper Size B4, 8.5" x 14", A4 SEF, 8.5" x 11" SEF
Finisher
Dimensions
657 x 613 x 960 mm
(W x D x H)
Less than 54 kg
Weight
Less than 56 kg with Punch Unit
Power
Less than 96 W
Consumption
250
A4, 8.5"x11" or smaller
Stack sheets
Capacity* 50
B4, 8.5"x14" or larger
sheets
Proof Tray
A5-A3 SEF, A6 SEF, A6 SEF
Paper Size
5.5"x8.5"-11"x17"SEF, 12"x18" SEF
3,000
A4 LEF, 1/2" x11" LEF
sheets
Capacity* 500
A5 LEF**
sheets
Shift Tray
100
A5 SEF, B6 SEF, A6 SEF, 51/2" x 81/2",SEF
sheets
Specifications
Stapler
Appendix:
B5-A3
Paper Size
8.5"x11"-11"x17", 12"x18"
64 g/m-90 g/m
Paper Weight
17 lb Bond-28 lb Bond
Staple
Cartridge exchange / 5000 pins per cartridge
Replenishment
Finisher
Dimensions
657 x 613 x 960 mm (25.9 x 24.1 x 37.8")
(W x D x H)
Power
Less than 96 W
Consumption
52 g/m-163 g/m
Paper Weight
14 lb Bond- 43 lb Bond / 90 lb Index / 60 lb Cover
2,000
A4 LEF, 8.5"x11" LEF
sheets
Specifications
Paper Size
Appendix:
51/2" x81/2" to 11" x 17" SEF, 12" x 18" SEF
52 g/m-256 g/m
Paper Weight
14 lb Bond- 68 lb Bond / 140 lb Index / 90 lb Cover
Stapler
Staples Mixed Paper Size 30 sheets B4 SEF, 81/2"x11" LEF & 11"
10-30 pages
Corner Staple Others
2-9 pages
Capacity
A4 LEF + A3
SEF
B5 LEF + B4
Mixed Size 2-30 pages
SEF
8.5"x11" LEF +
11" x17" SEF
A4 SEF, A3 SEF, B5
Specifications
Appendix:
SEF, B4 SEF
2-5 pages
Booklet Staple 8.5"x11" SEF,
6-10 pages
Capacity 8.5"x14" SEF,
11-15 pages
11"x17" SEF
12"x18" SEF
A3 SEF
B4 SEF
A4 SEF
A4 LEF
B5 SEF
B5 LEF
A5 SEF
A5 LEF
B6 SEF
B6 LEF
12" x 18"
SEF
11" x 17"
SEF
81/2" x 14"
81/2" x 11"
SEF
81/2" x 11"
LEF
51/2" x 81/2"
51/2" x 81/2"
Specifications
1.2.10 PUNCH UNIT TYPE 3260 (B702)
Appendix:
This punch unit is designed for use with the Finisher SR4060 and Finisher SR4070. There are
three variations of this punch unit:
Punch Unit Type 3260 SC (B702)
Punch Unit Type 3260 2/4 EU (B702)
Punch Unit Type 3260 NA 3/2 (B702)
Scandinavia 4 holes
A5. A4, A3
Paper Size
51/2" x 81/2", 81/2" x11", 81/2" x14", 11"x17"
52 - 128g/m
Paper Weight
14 lb 34 lb Bond
Specifications
1.2.12 COVER INTERPOSER TRAY CI4000 (D614)
Appendix:
Dimension (W x D x H) 500 x 600 x 600 mm (19.7 x 23.6 x 23.6 in.)
General
Specifications
Appendix:
Paper Sizes (Folding) FM1 A3, B4, DLT, LG, A4, LT, 12x18", 8-kai
FM3
FM4
A3, B4, DLT, LG, A4, LT, B5, 12x18", 8-kai
FM5
FM6
FM2
FM3
64 to 105 g/m 2
FM4
FM5
FM6
FM5
Not allowed
FM6
1 Sheet: Same as main machine as far as 3rd Stopper. At 3rd stopper feeds
50 mm at 100 mm/sec.
FM6
350 mm/sec. to top tray (paper 420 mm long)
250 mm/sec. to top tray (paper < 420 mm long)
Specifications
Appendix:
Weight 92 kg (203 lb)
Tray Capacity
The capacity of the tray on top of the unit for folded paper is determined by these variables:
Folding Methods (FM1 to FM6)
Paper size
Paper weight
8-kai 35 20
12x18" 35 20
A3 SEF 35 20
DLT 35 20
B4 SEF 35 20
LG SEF 35 20
A4 SEF 30 20
LT SEF 30 20
13x19.2" 40 25
13x19" 40 25
12.6x19.2" 40 25
12.6x18.5" 40 25
13x18" 40 25
226x310 mm 40 25
310x432 mm 40 25
8-kai 40 25
12x18" 40 25
A3 SEF 40 25
DLT 40 25
B4 SEF 40 25
LG SEF 40 25
A4 SEF 50 50
LT SEF 50 50
B5 SEF 50 50
Specifications
Appendix:
Weight (Standard) Weight (Heavy)
Size 2
64 to 80 g/m 64 to 80 g/m2
8-kai 30 20
12x18" 30 20
A3 SEF 30 20
DLT 30 20
B4 SEF 30 20
LG SEF 30 20
A4 SEF 40 30
LT SEF 40 30
B5 SEF 40 30
8-kai 40 20
12x18" 40 20
A3 SEF 40 20
DLT 40 20
B4 SEF 40 20
LG SEF 40 20
A4 SEF 50 40
LT SEF 50 40
B5 SEF 50 40
Specifications
Folding Mode FM5
Appendix:
Weight (Standard) Weight (Heavy)
Size 2
64 to 80 g/m 64 to 80 g/m2
8-kai 30 20
12x18" 30 20
A3 SEF 30 20
DLT 30 20
B4 SEF 30 20
LG SEF 30 20
A4 SEF 30 30
LT SEF 30 30
B5 SEF 30 30
8-kai 50 20
12x18" 50 20
A3 SEF 50 20
DLT 50 20
B4 SEF 50 20
LG SEF 50 20
A4 SEF 30 30
LT SEF 30 30
B5 SEF 30 30
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
At locations where the machine contains sensitive data, the customer engineer cannot operate
the machine until the Administrator turns the service mode lock off. This function makes sure that
work on the machine is always done with the permission of the Administrator.
1. If you cannot go into the SP mode, ask the Administrator to log in with the User Tool and then
set "Service Mode Lock" to OFF. After he or she logs in:
User Tools > System Settings > Administrator Tools > Service Mode Lock > OFF
This unlocks the machine and lets you get access to all the SP codes.
The CE can do servicing on the machine and turn the machine off and on. It is not
necessary to ask the Administrator to log in again each time the machine is turned on.
2. If you must use the printer bit switches, go into the SP mode and set SP 5169 to "1".
3. After machine servicing is completed:
Change SP 5169 from "1" to "0".
Turn the machine off and on. Tell the administrator that you completed servicing the
machine.
The Administrator will then set the "Service Mode Lock" to ON.
Notation Finisher
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
D610 Finisher SR4080 (D610)
Only one of these finishers can be installed in the system. Many of the SC codes apply to more
than one finisher because they have nearly identical parts and part names.
Example'
725 B The status of the exit guide sensor did not change at the prescribed time
during operation of the exit guide.
SC725 applies to the exit guide motor of whichever finisher is installed: The SR4080, the SR4060,
or the SR4070
If a problem concerns electrical circuit boards, always disconnect then reconnect the
connectors before replacing the PCBs.
If a motor lock error occurs, first check the mechanical load before replacing motors or
sensors.
When a Level "A" or "B" SC occurs while in an SP mode, the display does not display the
SC number. If this occurs, check the SC number after leaving the SP mode.
2.2.1 SC100
D The scanner HP sensor does not detect the OFF condition during
initialization or copying.
Service Call
Conditions
SC121
Appendix:
Scanner motor defective
Scanner HP sensor defective
-
Harness between BCU, SIOB, scanner motor disconnected
Harness between scanner HP sensor and BCU disconnected
Scanner wire, timing belt, pulley or carriage installed incorrectly.
The black level cannot be adjusted within the target during auto gain
control.
D The white level cannot be adjusted to the second target level within the
target during auto gain control.
After the SBU switches on, the BCU detects one of the following
conditions on the SBU:
D 1 s after power on, the SYDO signal does not go high, even after 1
retry.
1 s after power on, the SYDO signal goes high, but the SBU ID
SC144 could not be read after 3 attempts.
SBU defective
SIOB defective
BCU defective
-
Harness between the SBU - SIOB is disconnected
Harness between the SIOB - BCU is disconnected
Harness between the SIOB PSU is disconnected
Defective BICU
Defective connection between BICU and SBU
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Check the connection between BICU and SBU.
Replace the BICU.
D When the exposure lamp is triggered on, the inverter fan motor does not
rotate.
SIOB defective
SC181
BCU defective
Inverter fan motor defective
-
Harness between the inverter fan motor - SIOB is disconnected
Harness between the SIOB BCU is disconnected
Harness between the SIOB PSU is disconnected
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Make sure CN210 and CN220 are connected firmly.
Turn on the machine.
The adjustment error occurs during the test after adjusting the gray
balance.
2.3.1 SC200
D The polygon mirror motor unit did not enter "Ready" status within 20
sec. after the motor was turned on,
D The polygon mirror motor did not leave "Ready" within 3 sec. after the
motor was switched off. (The XSCRDY signal did not go HIGH (inactive)
within 3 sec.)
SC203
The polygon mirror motor PCB connector is loose, broken, or
defective
- Polygon mirror motor PCB defective
Polygon mirror motor defective
IPU defective
D The polygon mirror motor "Ready" signal goes inactive (HIGH) while
images are being produced or the synchronization signal is being
SC204 output.
The 1st laser synchronization detection unit could not detect the line
Service Call
Conditions
SC220 the 10th attempt fails to detect the signal.
Appendix:
Laser synchronization board connector loose, broken, defective
Laser synchronization detection board is not installed correctly (out
- of alignment)
Laser synchronization board defective
IPU defective
SC221 Harness between the laser synchronizing detector and I/F unit is
disconnected, defective
Check all connections between LD unit, LDB, IPU
-
LD unit
LDB defective
IPU defective
FGATE ON error: K
Defective ASIC
SC230 D Poor connection between controller and BICU.
Defective BICU
Check the connection between the controller board and the BICU.
Replace the BICU.
Replace the controller board.
LD error
The BICU detects LDB error a few times consecutively when LDB unit
turns on after LDB initialization.
SC240 C Worn-out LD
Disconnected or broken harness of the LD
2.4.1 SC300
Service Call
Conditions
Charge corona output error
Appendix:
D The feedback voltage from the charge corona unit is detected too
high 9 times.
SC300-00
Charge corona power pack defective
- Charge corona harness disconnected
Poor charge corona unit connection
The charge cleaner pad does not arrive at the home position:
D Motor locked within 4 s after switching on, or does not lock within
30 s.
SC305-00
Motor locked within 10 s after reversing, or does not lock within 30
s.
D minimum value (PWM = 0). When this error occurs, SP2-906-1 reads
Service Call
Conditions
0.00V.
Appendix:
Note: This SC is released only after correct adjustment of the TD
sensor has been achieved. Switching the machine off and on will
SC360-01 cancel the SC display, but does not release ID sensor toner supply.
TD sensor defective
TD sensor harness disconnected
TD sensor connector disconnected or defective
- IOB defective
Toner bottle motor defective
Note: When the TD sensor is defective, the toner supply is
controlled using pixel count and the ID sensor.
TD sensor defective
TD sensor harness disconnected
-
TD sensor connector disconnected or defective
IOB defective
TD sensor defective
SC361-00 TD sensor harness disconnected
TD sensor connector disconnected or defective
- IOB defective
Toner bottle motor defective
Note: When the TD sensor is defective, the toner supply is
controlled using pixel count and the ID sensor.
TD sensor defective
SC362-00 TD sensor harness disconnected
TD sensor connector disconnected or defective
- IOB defective
Toner bottle motor defective
Note: When the TD sensor is defective, the toner supply is
controlled using pixel count and the ID sensor.
Service Call
Conditions
applied to the ID sensor.
Appendix:
Vsg greater than or equal to 4.0V when the minimum PWM
input (0) is applied to the ID sensor.
SC370-01
ID sensor defective
ID sensor harness disconnected
ID sensor connector defective
IOB defective
-
ID sensor pattern not written correctly
Incorrect image density
Charge power pack defective
ID sensor dirty
C Vsg falls out of the adjustment target (4.0 0.2V) during Vsg
checking within 20 sec.
ID sensor defective
ID sensor harness disconnected
SC370-11
ID sensor connector defective
IOB defective
-
ID sensor pattern not written correctly
Incorrect image density
Charge power pack defective
ID sensor dirty
C The ID sensor output voltage is 5.0V and the PWM signal input to
the ID sensor is 0 when checking the ID sensor pattern.
ID sensor defective
ID sensor harness disconnected
SC375-00
ID sensor connector defective
IOB defective
-
ID sensor pattern not written correctly
Incorrect image density
Charge power pack defective
ID sensor dirty
ID sensor defective
SC376-00 ID sensor harness disconnected
ID sensor connector defective
IOB defective
-
ID sensor pattern not written correctly
Incorrect image density
Charge power pack defective
ID sensor dirty
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
SC377-00 Potential sensor harness defective
Potential sensor disconnected
- IOB defective
OPC unit connector defective
Charge corona power pack defective
Charge corona wire dirty, broken
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
SC380-31 Potential sensor defective
Potential sensor harness disconnected
Potential sensor connector defective or disconnected
-
IOB defective
OPC connector defective
Development power pack defective
SC396-01 D The main motor lock signal remains low for 2 seconds while the main
motor is on.
2.5.1 SC400
Service Call
Conditions
Quenching lamp error
Appendix:
SC410-00 C At the completion of auto process control initialization, the potential
of the drum surface detected by the potential sensor is more than
-400V, the prescribed value.
SC495-00 D Encoder pulse does not change for 3 s after the main motor
switches on.
SC496-00 D The toner collection bottle set switch remains off when the front
door is closed.
2.6.1 SC500
Service Call
Conditions
Tray 1 lift malfunction
Appendix:
The lift sensor is not activated within 10 s after the tray lift motor
starts lifting the bottom plate.
SC501 B When the tray lowers, the tray lift sensor does not go off within 1.5
s.
Tray overload detected when the tray is set.
The lower limit sensor of the LCT does not detect the lower limit
within 10 s.
The lift sensor is not activated within 10 s after the tray lift motor
The lift sensor is not activated within 10 s after the tray lift motor
Service Call
Conditions
s.
Appendix:
Tray overload detected when the tray is set.
The lift sensor is not activated within 10 s after the tray lift motor
SC515-00 C When the jogger fence moves to the home position, the jogger HP
sensor does not turn on even if the jogger fence motor has moved
the jogger fence 153.5 mm.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Sensor connector disconnected or defective
Sensor defective
SC516-00 C When the jogger fence moves from the home position, the jogger
fence HP sensor does not turn off even if the jogger motor has
moved the jogger fence 153.5 mm.
SC540-02 has occurred three times and the machine has shut down
automatically due to failure of the web motor.
SC540-03 A
Web motor harness loose, broken, defective
Web motor disconnected
Web motor defective
Thermistor open
Thermistor connector defective
Thermistor damaged, or out of position
Fusing temperature 15% less than the standard input voltage
SC542-001 A The center thermistor that touches the hot roller determined that
the hot roller failed to reach the warm-up temperature within the
prescribed time.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Fusing lamp disconnected
Thermistor warped, out of position
Thermostat has opened
SC542-002 A The center thermistor that touches the hot roller determined that
the hot roller failed to reach 100o within the prescribed time.
SC542-003 A The center thermistor that touches the hot roller determined that
the hot roller failed to reach 100o within the prescribed time.
PSU defective
IOB defective
BICU defective
PSU defective
IOB defective
BICU defective
SC545 A After hot roller reaches warm-up temperature, the fusing lamps
remained on at full capacity for 11 samplings (1.8 s. duration) while
the hot roller was not rotating.
SC547-01 D At power on and with the fusing relay off, 3 samplings detected that
SC547-02 D No zero cross signal was detected within 3 sec. after power on or
SC547-03 D After 11 samplings the power supply was not within 50 to 60 Hz,
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Fusing thermistor error 1: End thermistor
SC551 A The end thermistor (contact type) was less than 0C (32F) for more
than 7 seconds.
SC552-03 A The hot roller did not reach the prescribed temperature within 3 sec,
SC553 A The end thermistor (contact type) was at 240C (464F) for more than
1 second. The temperature is read 10 times every second. (at 0.1 s
intervals).
PSU defective
IOB control board defective
BICU control board defective
SC555 A After the start of the warmup cycle, a fusing lamp was at full power for
1.8 s but the hot roller did not turn.
SC559 A At the fusing exit sensor the paper was detected late for three pulse
counts (lag error), and SP1159 was on.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
technician cancels the SC code.
This SC occurs only if SP1159 has been set to "1" (On).
(Default: 0 (Off)).
SC569 D During copying, the HP sensor could not detect the actuator, tried
again 3 times and could not detect.
SC590-00 D The toner collection motor sensor output does not change for 3 s
while the toner collection motor is on.
2.7.1 SC600
SC621-01 D During communication with the finisher MBX, the BICU received a
break (Low) signal from the finisher.
SC621-02 D During communication between the finisher MBX and the BCU, no
ACK signal was detected for 100 ms, even after three attempts.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Breaker switch defective
Power cord loose, broken, defective
Peripheral unit control board defective
BCU defective
Serial line level unstable, external noise on the line
SC623 D More than 2 in communication errors between the BCU and PFB
were detected after startup, or more than 3 errors were detected
after settings were initialized.
SC626-01 D During communication with the LCT, the BICU received a break
(Low) signal.
SC626-02 D After 1 data frame is sent to the LCT, an ACK signal is not received
within 100 ms, and is not received after 3 retries.
Serial line between the optional counter device, the relay board
and copier control board is disconnected or damaged.
Make sure that SP5113 is set to enable the optional counter
device.
Serial line between the optional counter device, the relay board
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Replace the counter device.
02 Version error
The correct "usercode" file could not be found in the root folder of
the SD card because the file is not present, or the existing file is
corrupted or the wrong type file.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
SC641-3: Download error
SC641-4: UART error
Check and set the correct user name (SP5-816-156) and password
(SP5-816-157).
Check and set the correct user name (SP5-816-156) and password
(SP5-816-157).
05 No modem board
Check and set the correct user name (SP5-816-156) and password
(SP5-816-157).
For more details about this SC code error, execute SP5990 to print an SMC report so you can
read the error code. The error code is not displayed on the operation panel. Here is a list of error
codes:
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
whether the setting for the AT command is correct. If
4 Illegal modem setting
this SP setting is correct, then the problem is a bug in
the software.
Poor connection due to low The problem is on the external power supply line, so
5
power supply on the line. there is no corrective action on the machine.
No action required
This SC does not interfere with operation of the machine.
The BCU failed to respond within the prescribed time when the
machine was turned on.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
disconnected, or damaged.
SC671 D An illegal engine board was detected by the firmware at power on.
Replace BICU
SC672 D line with the controller at 30-second intervals, the controller failed to
respond twice.
Controller stalled
Controller board installed incorrectly
Controller board defective
Operation panel connector loose, broken, or defective
The controller did not completely shut down when the switch was
turned off.
Service Call
Conditions
ARDF bottom plate lift motor
Appendix:
The bottom plate HP sensor does not detect the home position
of the bottom plate after the bottom plate lift motor switches on
and lowers the bottom plate.
The bottom plate position sensor does not detect the position
SC700-01 D
of the plate after the lift motor switches on and raises the
bottom plate.
Bottom plate position sensor does not detect the plate after
the bottom plate lift motor switches on to lift the plate.
Bottom plate HP sensor does not detect the plate after the
SC700-02 D bottom plate motor reverses to lower the plate.
SC720-24 B The status of the exit guide sensor did not change at the
prescribed time during operation of the exit guide.
After the punch operation, the punch HP sensor did not detect the
punch unit at the home position.
SC720-25
Punch motor connection loose, broken, defective.
Punch overload (blocked by obstruction)
Home position sensor connection loose, broken, defective
HP sensor defective
The stack feed-out belt HP sensor does not activate within the
SC720-41 D specified time after the stack feed-out belt motor turns on. The 1st
detection failure causes a jam error, and the 2nd failure causes this
Service Call
Conditions
SC code.
Appendix:
If the motor is operating
Stack feed-out HP sensor harness loose, broken, defective
Stack feed-out HP sensor defective
If the motor is not operating:
Feed-out motor blocked by an obstruction
Feed-out motor harness loose, broken, defective
Feed-out motor defective
Booklet finisher main board defective
SC720-42 B The stapler HP sensor is not activated within the specified time
after the stapler motor turned on. The 1st detection failure issues a
jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code.
SC720-43 B The stapler does not return to its home position within the specified
time after stapling. The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and
the 2nd failure issues this SC code.
SC720-44 B The stapler motor does not switch off within the prescribed time
after operating. The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the
2nd failure issues this SC code.
Staple jam
Number of sheets in the stack exceeds the limit for stapling
Stapler motor disconnected, defective
SC720-52 B The folder plate moves but is not detected at the home position
within the specified time. The 1st detection failure issues a jam
error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code.
SC720-53 B The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure
issues this SC code.
SC720-55 B The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure
issues this SC code.
SC720-57 B Occurs during operation of the punch unit. The 1st detection failure
issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Motor overload
Motor defective
SC720-60 B The front stapler unit saddle-stitch motor does not start operation
within the specified time. The 1st detection failure issues a jam
error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code.
SC720-61 B The rear stapler unit saddle-stitch motor does not start operation
within the specified time. The 1st detection failure issues a jam
error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code.
SC720-70 B The upper tray paper height sensor does not change its status with
the specified time after the tray raises or lowers. The 1st detection
failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code.
SC720-71 D Failed twice to detect the shift tray at the home position at the
specified time.
-or-
Failed twice to detect that the shift tray had left the home position.
SC720-72 B The sides fences do not retract within the prescribed time after the
shift jogger motor switches on. The 1st detection failure issues a
jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code.
SC720-73 B The side fences do not retract within the prescribed time after the
shift jogger motor switches on. The 1st detection failure issues a
jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code.
SC720-74 B The side fences do not retract within the prescribed time after the
retraction motor switches on. The 1st detection failure issues a jam
error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Motor harness disconnected, loose, defective
Motor defective
Motor overload
HP defective
SC720-80 D Occurs during operation of the punch unit. The 1st detection failure
issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code.
SC720-81 D Occurs during operation of the punch unit. The 1st detection failure
issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code.
SC720-87 D The punch HP sensor is not activated within the specified time
after the punch motor turned on. The 1st detection failure issues a
jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code.
A pulse signal from the transport motor could not be detected within
the prescribed time. The first detection triggers a jam code, and the
SC722-10 B second detection triggers this SC.
SC722-24 B The status of the exit guide sensor did not change at the
prescribed time during operation of the exit guide.
After the punch operation, the punch HP sensor did not detect the
punch unit at the home position.
SC722-25
Punch motor connection loose, broken, defective.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Punch overload (blocked by obstruction)
Home position sensor connection loose, broken, defective
HP sensor defective
The staple hammer motor did not return to the home position
within the prescribed time (340 ms).
SC722-33 B
Staple hammer HP sensor loose, broken, defective
Electrical overload on the stapler drive PCB elect
Staple hammer motor defective
Finisher main board defective
SC722-35 D The stack plate HP sensor (front) does not activate within 500 ms
after the motor turns on. The 1st detection failure causes a jam
error, and the 2nd failure causes this SC code.
SC722-36 D The stack plate HP sensor (center) does not activate within 500 ms
after the motor turns on. The 1st detection failure causes a jam
error, and the 2nd failure causes this SC code.
SC722-37 D The stack plate HP sensor (rear) does not activate within 500 ms
after the motor turns on. The 1st detection failure causes a jam
error, and the 2nd failure causes this SC code.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
If the motor is operating
Rear stack plate HP sensor harness loose, broken, defective
Rear stack plate HP sensor defective
If the motor is not operating:
Motor blocked by an obstruction
Motor harness loose, broken, defective
Motor defective
Booklet finisher main board defective
The stack feed-out belt HP sensor does not activate within the
SC722-41 D specified time after the stack feed-out belt motor turns on. The 1st
detection failure causes a jam error, and the 2nd failure causes this
SC code.
SC722-42 B The stapler HP sensor is not activated within the specified time
after the stapler motor turned on. The 1st detection failure issues a
jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Stapler movement motor disconnected, defective
Stapler movement motor overloaded due to obstruction
Stapler HP sensor disconnected, defective
SC722-43 B The stapler does not return to its home position within the specified
time after stapling. The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and
the 2nd failure issues this SC code.
SC722-44 B The stapler motor does not switch off within the prescribed time
after operating. The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the
2nd failure issues this SC code.
Staple jam
Number of sheets in the stack exceeds the limit for stapling
Stapler motor disconnected, defective
SC722-70 B The upper tray paper height sensor does not change its status with
the specified time after the tray raises or lowers. The 1st detection
failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code.
SC722-71 D Failed twice to detect the shift tray at the home position at the
specified time.
-or-
Failed twice to detect that the shift tray had left the home position.
SC722-72 B The sides fences do not retract within the prescribed time after the
shift jogger motor switches on. The 1st detection failure issues a
jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code.
SC722-74 B The side fences do not retract within the prescribed time after the
retraction motor switches on. The 1st detection failure issues a jam
error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Motor defective
Motor overload
HP defective
SC722-81 D The encoder pulse of the finisher transport motor does not change
state (high/low) within 600 ms and does not change after 2 retries.
SC722-83 D The punch HP sensor is not activated within the specified time
after the punch motor turned on. The 1st detection failure issues a
jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code.
SC724-71 D Failed twice to detect the shift tray at the home position at the
specified time.
-or-
Failed twice to detect that the shift tray had left the home position.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Dynamic Roller Transport Motor Error Multi Folder (D615)
Motor over-current
Motor driver overheat
Motor harness loose
The 2nd stopper HP sensor did not detect the 2nd stopper in (or
out of) its home position within the prescribed time. The 1st
occurrence causes a jam, and the 2nd occurrence causes this SC
code.
SC725-31 B
2nd stopper HP sensor dirty
Sensor harness or connector loose, broken, defective
2nd stopper motor harness or connector loose, broken,
defective
Sensor defective
Motor or motor drive board defective
The 3rd stopper HP sensor did not detect the 3rd stopper in (or out
of) its home position within the prescribed time. The 1st occurrence
causes a jam, and the 2nd occurrence causes this SC code.
The jogger fence HP sensor did not detect the jogger fence in (or
out of) its home position within the prescribed time. The 1st
occurrence causes a jam, and the 2nd occurrence causes this SC
Service Call
Conditions
code.
Appendix:
SC725-33 B
Jogger fence HP sensor dirty
Sensor harness or connector loose, broken, defective
Jogger fence motor harness or connector loose, broken,
defective
Sensor defective
Motor or motor drive board defective
The dynamic roller HP sensor did not detect the dynamic roller in
(or out of) its home position within the prescribed time. The 1st
occurrence causes a jam, and the 2nd occurrence causes this SC
code.
SC725-34 B
Dynamic roller HP sensor dirty
Sensor harness or connector loose, broken, defective
Dynamic roller lift motor harness or connector loose, broken,
defective
Sensor defective
Motor or motor drive board defective
The FM6 pawl HP sensor did not detect the FM6 pawl in (or out
of) its home position. The 1st occurrence causes a jam, and the
2nd occurrence causes this SC code.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
SC725-37 B FM6 pawl HP sensor dirty
Sensor harness or connector loose, broken, defective
FM6 pawl motor harness or connector loose, broken,
defective
Sensor defective
Motor or motor drive board defective
The fold plate HP sensor did not detect the fold plate in (or out of)
its home position within the prescribed time. The 1st occurrence
causes a jam, and the 2nd occurrence causes this SC code.
The entrance junction gate HP sensor did not detect the entrance
junction gate at (or out of) its home position. The 1st occurrence
causes a jam, and the 2nd occurrence causes this SC code.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
SC725-74 D Entrance JG HP sensor dirty
Sensor harness or connector loose, broken, defective
Entrance JG motor harness or connector loose, broken,
defective
Sensor defective
Motor or motor drive board defective
After the motor starts to raise the bottom plate, the bottom plate
SC740-10 B position sensor does not detect the plate at the specified time (3 s).
After the motor starts to lower the bottom plate, the bottom plate
HP sensor does not detect the bottom plate.
2.9.1 SC800:
Monitor error GW
SC817 D items on the SD card in the controller slot are false or corrupted.
Error Codes
Code Meaning
Example: Data in the self-diagnostic module, system kernel, or root system files are corrupted or
do not exist in OS flash ROM or on the SD card
Files in the self-diagnostic module, kernel, or root file system on the SD card have been falsified
or altered
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Before discarding the SD card, try to update the data on the card. If the error occurs again,
the card may be defective.
Be sure to use an SD card that contains the correct electronic signature.
Other
For more details about this SC code error, execute SP5990 to print an SMC report so you
can read the error code. The error code is not displayed on the operation panel.
For more details about this SC code error, execute SP5990 to print an SMC report so you
can read the error code. The error code is not displayed on the operation panel.
HDD timeout
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
A diagnostic command was set for the HDD, but the device
remained busy for over 6 seconds.
HDD device was busy for over 31 seconds, or Mandolin was not
detected. A diagnostic command is set for the HDD, but the device
remains was busy for over 6 seconds.
The result of the MAC address check sum did not match the check sum
stored in ROM.
[6101]
Defective SEEP ROM
Defective I2C bus (connection)
PHY IC error
An error occurred during the loop-back test for the PHY IC on the
controller.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
No NVRAM device
[1401] Damaged NVRAM device
NVRAM backup battery exhausted
NVRAM socket damaged
For more details about SC 833, SC834 and other errors, execute SP5990 to print an
SMC report so you can read the error code. The error code is not displayed on the
operation panel. The additional error codes (0F30, 0F31, etc. are listed in the SMC
report.
ASIC (Mandolin) for engine control could not be detected. After the PCI
was configured, the device ID for the ASIC could not be checked.
A verify error occurred when setting data was read from the clock
generator via the I2C bus
A read error occurred during I/O processing. The failure of the 3rd
Defective EEPROM
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Replace the EEPROM.
SC841 D EEPROM.
A write error for the module written in Nand-Flash occurred while the
Damaged Nand-Flash
The Bluetooth interface unit was installed while the machine was turned
on.
SC853 B
Cycle the machine off/on
Confirm that the Bluetooth interface unit was installed correctly.
Cycle the machine off/on again.
The Bluetooth interface unit was removed while the machine was
turned on.
SC854 B
Cycle the machine off/on
Confirm that the Bluetooth interface unit was installed correctly.
Cycle the machine off/on again.
The wireless LAN board can be accessed, but an error was detected.
The USB driver is unstable and caused an error. The USB I/F cannot
SC857 D
be used.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Data encryption conversion error GW
SC858 B
These are errors of the HDD Data Encryption Option D377.
00 Key Acquisition
The key was acquired but the HDD could not be set.
31 Other Error
HDD defective
Format HDD with SP5832-1
Replace HDD
SC860 B HDD is connected but a driver error is detected. The driver did not
respond with the status of the HDD within 30 sec.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Level data is corrupted
Initialize the HDD with SP5-832-001.
HDD is defective
The hard disks were detected at power on, but the disks were not
detected within 30s after recovery from the energy conservation mode.
SC861 B Cable between the hard disks and controller board disconnected
or loose
Hard disk power connector loose
One of the hard disks is defective
Controller defective
SC863 D The data written to the HDD cannot be read normally, due to bad
sectors generated during operation.
HDD defective
Controller defective
Note: If the bad sectors are generated at the image partition, the bad
sector information is written to NVRAM, and the next time the HDD is
accessed, these bad sectors will not be accessed for read/write
operation.
SC864 D During HDD operation, the HDD cannot respond to a CRC error query.
Data transfer did not execute normally while data was being written to
the HDD.
Format HDD
HDD defective
HDD defective.
No SD card
SC867 D When the machine was turned on, there was no SD card in the boot
slot.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Cycle the machine off/on
Address book data stored on the hard disk was detected as abnormal
when it was accessed from either the operation panel or the network.
An error was detected on the HDD immediately after the machine was
SC873 D turned on, or power was turned of while the machine used the HDD.
A data error was detected for the HDD/NVRAM after the "Delete All"
option was used.
Note: The source of this error is the Data Overwrite Security Unit
SC874 D
running from an SD card.
An error occurred while the machine deleted data from the HDD
SC875 D Note: The source of this error is the Data Overwrite Security Unit
running from an SD card.
SC876 D An error was detected in the handling of the log data at power on or
during machine operation. This can be caused by switching the
machine off while it is operating.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Log Data Error 1
02 TPM error
03 TCSD error
A request for access to the file format converter board (MLB) was not
SC880 D
answered within the specified time.
Board defective
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Software defective
2.10.1 SC900
Display Meaning
(-3) No level
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
(-12) Specified partition does not exist
Recovery Procedure 1
If the machine returns SC codes for HDD errors (SC860 ~ SC865), please follow the recovery
procedures described for these SC codes.
Recovery Procedure 2
If the machine does not return one of the five HDD errors (SC860 ~ SC865), turn the machine off
and on. If this does not solve the problem, then initialize the NetFile partition on the HDD with
SP5832 011 (HDD Formatting Ridoc I/F).
NetFiles: Jobs printed from the document server using a PC and DeskTopBinder
Before initializing the NetFile partition on the HDD please inform the client that:
1. Received faxes on the delivery server will be lost
2. All captured documents will be lost
3. DeskTopBinder/Print Job Manager/Desk Top Editor job history will be cleared
4. Documents stored on the document server will not be lost.
5. The first time the network accesses the machine, the management information must be
reconfigured (this will require a significant amount of time).
6. Execute SP5832 011 then turn the machine off and on.
Recovery Procedure 3
If "Procedure 2" does not solve the problem, execute SP5832 001 (HDD Formatting - All), then
turn the machine off and on.
Executing SP5832 001 erases all document and address book data stored on the hard disks. Be
sure to consult with the customer before executing this SP code.
Recovery Procedure 4
If "Recovery Procedures 1 to 3" fail to correct the problem, replace the HDD.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
02 Working memory error
Defective software
Unexpected hardware resource (e.g., memory shortage)
00 HDD is defective
Display Meaning
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
(-3) No label
The first time that the network gets access to the machine, the management information must
be configured again (this will use a lot of time).
Before you initialize the Netfile partition with SP5832-011, do these steps:
1. Go into the User Tools mode and do "Delivery Settings" to print all received fax documents
that are scheduled for delivery. Then erase them.
2. In the User Tools mode, do Document Management> Batch Delete Transfer Documents.
3. Do SP5832-011, then turn the machine power off and on.
Procedure 3
If "Procedure 2" is not the solution for the problem, do SP5832-001 (HDD Formatting All), then
turn the machine power off and on.
SP5832-001 erases all document and address book data on the hard disks. Ask the customer
before you do this SP code.
Procedure 4
If "Procedure 3" is not the solution for the problem, replace the HDD.
SC953 D The settings required for image processing using the scanner are not
sent from the IPU.
Software defective
SC954 D The settings required for image processing using the printer controller
are not sent from the IPU.
Software defective
SC955 D The settings that are required for image processing using the memory
are not sent from the IPU.
Software defective
SC964 D The print ready signal is not generated for more than 17 seconds after
the IPU received the print start signal.
Software defective
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Print Start Error
Software bug
SC984 D After a data transfer begins from the controller to the engine via the
PCI bus, the transfer does not end within 15 s.
SC985 D After a data transfer begins from the engine to the controller via the
PCI bus, the transfer does not end within 3 s.
Software error 1
SC986 D The write parameter received by the write module at the beginning of
the setting table is NULL.
Defective software
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
name, line number, and so on. Of these two methods, 1) is the recommended method,
because another SC could write over the information for the previous SC.
An error not controlled by the system occurred (the error does not
come under any other SC code).
SC992 C
Software defective
Turn the machine power off and on. The machine cannot be used
until this error is corrected.
Re-install firmware
Defective BCU
NVRAM Replacement error
Defective NVRAM
Defective controller
03 Defective controller
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
An option required by the application (RAM, DIMM, board) is not
installed.
Nesting of the fax group addresses is too complicated.
SC997 B
Check the devices necessary for the application program. If
necessary devices have not been installed, install them.
Check that application programs are correctly configured.
For a fax operation problem, simplify the nesting of the fax group
addresses.
Take necessary countermeasures specific to the application
program. If the logs can be displayed on the operation panel, see
the logs.
Note 1
If a problem always occurs in a specific condition (for example. printer driver setting, image file),
the problem may be caused by a software error. In such a case, the following data and information
need to be sent back to your product specialist. Please understand that it may take some time to
get a reply on how to solve the problem, because in some cases the design staff in Japan must
analyze the data.
Symptom / Possible Causes / Action taken
Summary sheet (SP mode "Printer SP", SP1-004 [Print Summary])
SMC - All (SP5-990-001)
SMC - Logging (SP5-990-004)
Printer driver settings used when the problem occurs
All data displayed on the screen (SC code, error code, and program address where the
problem is logged.)
Image file which causes the problem, if possible
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
820 0013 Allocation 3 error
CPU defective
820 00FF Non-initialization allocation error Local bus defective
Controller board defective
HDD defective
HDD connector
822 3003 HDD timeout disconnected, defective
ASIC device error
(controller board defective)
823 6101 MAC address SUM error NIB (PHY) board defective
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Incompatible NVRAM
826 15FF RTC non-detection error installed
NVRAM battery defective
Memory on controller
826 0201 Resident memory verify error board defective
RAM DIMM defective
SC870 B Format the address book by using SP5-832-008 (all data in the
address bookincluding the user codes and countersis initialized)
Initialize the user data by using SP5-832-006 and -007 (the user
codes and counters are recovered when the main switch is turned
on).
Replace the hard disk (the user codes and counters are recovered
when the main switch is turned on).
Data corruption
Defective hard disk
Defective software
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
NVRAM data corrupted
Printer error
SC920 D
The printer program cannot be continued.
Defective hardware
Data corruption
Defective software
The management file for net files is corrupted; net files are not normally
SC925 D read.
Note: Netfile are jobs to be printed from the document server using a PC
and the Desk Top Binder software
Defective hardware
Data corruption
Defective software
Network error
SC993 D
The ASIC program of GW controller cannot be continued.
Defective ASIC
Defective GW controller
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
Italics Comments added for reference.
An asterisk marks the SP's that are reset to their factory default
*
settings after an NVRAM reset.
Japan Only The feature or item is for Japan only. Do not change this value.
Adjusts the printing leading edge registration using the trimming area pattern
(SP2902-003, No.18).
[9 to +9/0/0.1mm]
Specification: 32mm
Adjusts printing side-to-side registration for each feed station, using test
pattern (SP2902-003, No.18).
These SP's should be adjusted after replacing the laser synchronization
detector or the laser optical unit.
1 Tray-1
2 Tray-2
3 Tray-3
5 By-pass Tray
6 LCT
7 Duplex Tray
Adjusts the registration motor timing. This timing determines the amount of
paper buckle at registration. (A higher setting causes more buckling.)
[9 to +9/0/1 mm]
1 Tray LCT
2 Duplex Tray
3 By-pass Tray
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
4 Thick Paper Tray
Service
5 Thick Paper Duplex Tray
Use this SP to confirm the size of the paper detected in the by-pass tray if
paper is skewing during feeding.
Adjusts the distance between front and rear fences. A smaller value shortens
the distance. If the fences are too far apart, skewing may occur in the duplex
tray. If the fences are too close, the paper may be creased in the duplex unit.
[5 to +5/0/0.1 mm]
IdlingTime (Normal)
IdlingTime (Low)
IdlingTime (LowPower)
Adjusts the fusing temperature of the hot roller for plain paper, OHP or thick
paper.
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
5 Thick Paper (Center Thermistor)
1 Center Temperature
Shows the temperature of the hot roller detected by the thermistor at the
center of the hot roller.
2 End Temperature
Shows the temperature of the hot roller detected by the thermistors at the
ends of the hot roller.
Shows the temperature of the hot roller detected by the thermistors at the
pressure roller.
This SP allows you to set when to start the fusing temperature adjustment for
the center and end heating lamps.
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
D133: [150 to 190/190/1 deg C]
Service
3 Center Lamp Actual Time
[0 to 120/0/1 sec.]
[0 to 120/0/1 degree C]
[0 to 120/0/1 degree C]
[0 to 120/0/1 degree C]
[0 to 120/0/1 degree C]
[0 to 120/60/1 degree C]
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
22 End Lamp Actual Time
[0 to 120/60/1 degree C]
[0 to 120/0/1 degree C]
1 Execute 0 or 1
Sets the temperature of the hot roller for auto process control to start.
[70 to 150/140/1C] DFU
This SP determines what the machine does if paper jams occur in the fusing
unit for three consecutive sheets of paper.
0: (default): A jam alert is shown on the screen. The customer can remove the
jam and the machine works normally after that.
1: SC559 occurs. The technician must remove the jam.
[0 to 255/80/1 Step]
Selects the speed (copies per minute) for copying on thick paper or tab
sheets. A slower speed makes fusing better. This setting has no effect on
fusing temperature.
[0 to 4/0/1 step]
0: 25 cpm 1: 35 cpm 2: 40 cpm 3: 45 cpm 4: 55 cpm
[0 to 4/0/1 step]
0: 25 cpm 1: 35 cpm 2: 40 cpm 3: 45 cpm 4: 55 cpm
[0 to 4/0/1 step]
0: 25 cpm 1: 35 cpm 2: 40 cpm 3: 45 cpm 4: 55 cpm
Adjusts the interval of copy operation time (seconds) after which the web
Mode Tables
motor is driven.
Appendix:
Program
Service
D131: [5 to 50/18/1 s]
D132: [5 to 50/15/1 s]
D133: [5 to 50/14/1 s]
Adjusts the timing of the web near end alert by changing the amount of web
that has been used before the alert is triggered.
[0 to 100/80/1 %]
Determines the coefficient of the web take-up time from cleaning toner from
the roller while taking into consideration the take-up time for web buckle. DFU
[10 to 20/9/1]
[0 to 255/0/1 Step]
[0 to 255/0/1 Step]
1 Yes/No
This determines whether the web motor is driven at the end of a job.
[0 to 1/1]
0: Off
1: On
Enable when too much paper dust is causing copies to blacken.
At the end of a job, the web motor is driven if the job lasted longer than the
value of this SP mode. Only valid if SP1903-001 is set to 'On'.
[1 to 99/7/1s]
If the web motor is driven at the end of a job, this SP determines how many
times the web motor operation is executed.
[1 to 5/2/1]
Minimum Size
1 Calibrates the minimum paper width position of the sensor (100 mm). Move
Maximum Size
2 Calibrates the maximum paper width position of the sensor (A3). Move the
This setting switches the by-pass feed clutch on for 30 ms when the
registration motor turns on. It only happens when thick paper is selected, to
help this paper pass through the registration rollers.
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
1906 Temperature/Humidity Sensor
Temperature Sensor
Pre-fusing idling: The hot roller turns freely to increase its temperature before
thick paper or OHP goes through the fusing unit.
[0 to 1/1/1]
0: Pre-fusing idling is not done.
1: The fusing motor turns the hot roller with no paper in the fusing unit. This
ensures that the hot roller reaches the correct temperature. It is only done for
thick paper or OHP. In this mode, the paper stops at the registration roller, then
roller resumes its rotation after the hot roller reaches the correct temperature.
7 Label (1:ON/0:OFF)
Label
8 Envelope (1:ON/0:OFF)
Envelope
1 1:ON/0:OFF
[0 to 180/60/ 1sec]
1909 LowSpeedMode
1 Latest Capacity
2 Current Voltage
3 Charge Time
4 Worn-out Counter
5 Charged Power
[1 to 20/7/1 Step]
[0 to 50/100/1 Step]
2 Worn-out Counter
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
[30 to 255/30/1]
3 AC Input Voltage
4 Capacitor Capacity
0: OFF/1: ON
Temperature Sensor
[15 to 25/20/1]
Power On Thick
2
0 or 1
[5 to 60/60/1]
[0 to 1/1/1]
[0 to 1/0/1]
[1 to 5/2/1]
1 1:ON 0:OFF
[0 to 1/0/1]
2 Capacitor Voltage
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
Adjusts the voltage applied to the grid plate during copying when auto process
control is off.
[600 to 1500/900/10 V]
After replacing the charge corona wire or the drum, reset to the factory default
setting.
Adjusts the voltage applied to the grid plate when the ID sensor pattern is
created.
[600 to 1500/800/10 V]
Adjusts the total current applied to the charge corona wire. DFU
[900 to 1500/1300/10 A]
Adjusts the voltage applied to the grid plate during copying when auto process
control is on.
[600 to 1500/900/10 V]
This voltage changes every time auto process control starts up (every time the
machine is switched on).
Adjusts the voltage applied to the grid plate when OHP mode is selected.
[600 to 1500/650/10 V]
Use this if there is a copy quality problem when making OHP's.
Adjusts the voltage applied to the grid plate when Photo mode is selected.
[1400 to 2800/1500/10 A]
These settings adjust the erase margin for the leading, trailing, left, and right
edges.
1 Leading Edge
2 Trailing Edge
Mode Tables
3 Left Edge
Appendix:
Program
Service
[0 to 9/2/0.1 mm], Specification: 21.5 mm
4 Right Edge
1 Reduction Mode 0
Switches on/off the setting that corrects uneven images generated during 1200
dpi printing.
[0 to 1/1]
1: On
0: Off
Unevenness may appear in dot patterns or narrowly spaced horizontal lines,
i.e. some areas may appear lighter or darker than others.
2 Reduction Mode 0
Adjusts the amount of correction for uneven images generated during 1200 dpi
printing.
[20 to +10/0/1]
3 Reduction Mode 0
Switches on/off the setting that corrects uneven images generated during 1200
dpi copying.
[0 to 1/0/1]
1: On
0: Off
4 Reduction Mode 0
Adjusts the amount of correction of uneven image generated during 1200 dpi
copying.
[20 to +10/0/1]
Allows setting a parameter for binary edge processing for the printer
application with FCI switched off. The value for this SP is enabled only when
the printer is initialized. In all other cases, the data registered in the software
are enabled. This SP allows adjustment of image quality if the desired effect
cannot be achieved with the default settings for edge processing. However,
some settings could cause defective images on white paper.
Mode Tables
Appendix:
2 Trailing Edge Pixel (Level - 1200 dpi) [2 to 15/14/1]
Program
Service
3 Continuous Pixel (Level - 1200 dpi) [2 to 15/15/1]
A label attached to the LD unit service part lists the correct settings. Refer to
these settings when adjusting the beam pitch for LD0 to LD3.
4 Main Scan: Front Between LD0 and LD1 [-100 to 100/0/1 um]
5 Main Scan: Rear Between LD0 and LD1 [-100 to 100/0/1 um]
Adjusts the development bias for copying when process control is off
[100 to 800/550/10 V]
Adjust as a temporary measure to compensate for an aging drum until the old
drum can be replaced.
2 ID Sensor Pattern
Adjusts the development bias used to create the ID sensor pattern. DFU
[100 to 800/360/10 V]
This SP and SP2201-004 must be changed together by the same amount.
3 OHP
5 Vb Target Voltage
Rotates the toner bottle to supply toner to the toner supply unit. Press Execute
to force toner supply.
Use to determine if toner supply is operating correctly. If forcing toner supply
with this SP does not darken the image, then toner supply is not operating
correctly.
Selects the toner supply mode: Sensor Control or Image Pixel Count.
[0 to 1/0/1]
0: Sensor Control
1: Pixel Count
Select Image Pixel Count only if the TD sensor has failed and cannot be
replaced immediately, so that the customer can use the machine. Return the
setting to Sensor Control after replacing the sensor.
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
2209 Toner Supply Rate
Adjusts the time interval between making ID sensor patterns onto the drum for
Vsp/Vsg detection.
[0 to 200/10/1]
Reduce the interval for copies that contain a high proportion of black.
2223 Vt Display
[10 to 200/165/1 A]
5 Paper Interval
[10 to 200/15/1 A]
6 Tab Paper
Mode Tables
7 Thick Paper: Front Side
Appendix:
Program
Service
[10 to 200/120/1 A]
[10 to 200/120/1 A]
[10 to 200/165/1 A]
[10 to 200/165/1 A]
[10 to 200/120/1 A]
[10 to 200/120/1 A]
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
D131/D132: [10 to 200/75/1 A]
Service
D133: [10 to 200/80/1 A]
[10 to 200/120/1 A]
[10 to 200/120/1 A]
27 Label
30 Envelope
1 Operation Setting
Determines whether multiple copy jobs are stopped at regular intervals for: 0)
Stopping and reversing the drum motor to clean the cleaning blade edge, and
1) creating an ID sensor pattern to correct toner density control.
[0 to 1/1]
0: No
1: Yes
The interval is set with SP2506-002. Use if the drum gets dirty or images get
too pale or too dark during a long job.
2 Time Setting
1 Operation Setting
2 No. of Sheets
Mode Tables
Selects the interval (number of copies) between ID sensor patterns when 1 is
Appendix:
Program
Service
selected for SP2507-001
[1 to 10,000/100/1]
Turns the PTL off and on. The PTL (Pre-Transfer Lamp) decreases the charge
on the drum to make better separation of the paper from the drum, and
prevents stripper pawl marks on the leading edges of copies.
Note:
The PTL operates only when copying with plain paper or translucent paper.
It does not operate when copying with OHP, index sheets, or thick paper.
If blurring occurs in images at the leading edges of copies, switch
SP2602-001 off (set to "0").
Turns the PTL lamp on/off during transfer to the front side of the paper at
normal speed. This setting is always off when thick paper or OHPs are fed.
[0 to 1/1]
0: Off
1: On
The timing can be adjusted with SP2602-002.
Adjusts the length of the space from the leading edge where PTL quenching is
applied to the front side at normal speed. For example, if you select +3, then
quenching will be done 3 mm from the leading edge on the front side.
[-10 to 20/3/1 mm]
Turns the PTL lamp on/off during transfer to the front side of the paper at
normal speed.
[0 to 1/1]
0: Off
1: On
Adjusts the length of the space from the leading edge where PTL quenching is
applied to the back side at normal speed. For example, if you select +3, then
quenching will be done 3 mm from the leading edge on the back side.
[-10 to 20/3/1 mm]
Press the EXECUTE button to do the TD sensor initial setting. This SP mode
controls the voltage applied to the TD sensor to make the TD sensor output
1 about 3.0 V.
When SP2967 is on, the TD sensor output is set to about 2.5 V.
Note: Execute this SP only after replacing the TD sensor or developer.
Use this SP to enter the developer lot number embossed on the developer
package when installing developer in a new machine, or replacing developer in
a used machine.
1 Operation Mode
Mode Tables
[0 to 1/1]
Appendix:
Program
Service
0: No
1: Yes
The time interval between cleaning is set with SP2804-002.
2 Number of Sheets
Sets the interval (number of sheets printed) between charge corona wire
cleanings.
[100 to 10,000/5000/100]
0: OFF 1:ON
1
[0 or 1/ 0 / -]
Test Pattern
Produces the printer test patterns. (See "Test Pattern Printing" in the Main
Chapters.)
[0 to 26 / 0 / 1]
Displays the TD sensor data stored when SP2801 (TD Sensor Initial Settings)
is executed.
[4.0 to 12.0/9.7/0.1 V]
Checks if the LD turns off or on when the front door is opened. DFU
[0 to 1/1]
0: On
1: Off
When resolution changes from 400 to 600 dpi, the LD writes a pattern on the
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
drum. Toner is applied, and this must be cleaned off the belt. This SP mode
Service
determines whether bias is applied to the transfer belt cleaning bias roller at
this time. DFU
[0 to 1/1] 0: Off 1: On
Switching this function on adds 3 s to the job time.
2 La1f (Front)
Adjusts the area where the transfer is applied for the leading edge during front
side copying.
[0 to +20/0/1 mm]
3 Lc1r (Front)
Adjusts the area where the transfer current is applied for the trailing edge
during front side copying.
[0 to +20/0/1 mm]
Adjusts the transfer current OFF timing for front side copying.
[30 to +30/20/1 mm]
Adjusts the area where the transfer current is applied for the leading edge
during back side copying.
[0 to +20/0/1 mm]
Adjusts the area where the transfer current is applied for the trailing edge
during back side copying.
[0 to +20/0/1 mm]
Adjusts on transfer current ON timing for copying thick paper from the LCT.
[30 to +30/0/1 mm]
Adjusts the area where the transfer current is applied for the leading edge
during copying with thick paper from the LCT.
[0 to +20/0/1 mm]
Adjusts the area where the transfer current is applied for the trailing edge
during copying with thick paper from the LCT.
[0 to +20/0/1 mm]
Adjusts the transfer current OFF timing for copying thick paper from the LCT.
[30 to +30/15/1 mm]
13 On Timing: M-Thick
Adjusts the transfer current ON timing for copying with M-thick paper from the
LCT.
[30 to +30/0/1 mm]
Adjusts the area where the transfer current is applied for the leading edge
during copying with M-thick paper from the LCT.
[0 to +20/0/1 mm]
Mode Tables
15 Trailing Edge:M-Thick
Appendix:
Program
Service
Adjusts the area where the transfer current is applied for the trailing edge
during copying with M-thick paper from the LCT.
[0 to +20/0/1 mm]
Adjusts the transfer current OFF timing for copying with M-thick paper from the
LCT.
[30 to +30/15/1 mm]
Adjusts the transfer current ON timing for copying with punch from the LCT.
[30 to +30/20/1 mm]
Adjusts the area where transfer current is applied for the leading edge during
copying with punch.
[0 to +20/0/1 mm]
Adjusts the area where transfer current is applied for the trailing edge during
copying with punch.
[0 to +20/0/1 mm]
Adjusts the transfer current OFF timing for copying with punch from the LCT.
[30 to +30/-16/1 mm]
2 La1f (Front)
Adjusts the area where the transfer is applied for the leading edge during front
side copying.
[0 to +20/0/1 mm]
3 Lc1r (Front)
Adjusts the area where the transfer current is applied for the trailing edge
during front side copying.
[0 to +20/0/1 mm]
Adjusts the transfer current OFF timing for front side copying.
[30 to +30/20/1 mm]
Adjusts the area where the transfer current is applied for the leading edge
during back side copying.
[0 to +20/0/1 mm]
Adjusts the area where the transfer current is applied for the trailing edge
during back side copying.
[0 to +20/0/1 mm]
Mode Tables
9 On Timing: Thick Paper
Appendix:
Program
Service
Adjusts on transfer current ON timing for copying thick paper f.
[30 to +30/0/1 mm]
Adjusts the area where the transfer current is applied for the leading edge
during copying with thick paper.
[0 to +20/0/1 mm]
Adjusts the area where the transfer current is applied for the trailing edge
during copying with thick paper..
[0 to +20/0/1 mm]
Adjusts the transfer current OFF timing for copying thick paper.
[30 to +30/15/1 mm]
13 On Timing: M-Thick
Adjusts the transfer current ON timing for copying with M-thick paper.
[30 to +30/0/1 mm]
Adjusts the area where the transfer current is applied for the leading edge
during copying with M-thick paper.
[0 to +20/0/1 mm]
15 Trailing Edge:M-Thick
Adjusts the area where the transfer current is applied for the trailing edge
during copying with M-thick paper.
[0 to +20/0/1 mm]
Adjusts the transfer current OFF timing for copying with M-thick paper.
[30 to +30/15/1 mm]
Adjusts the area where transfer current is applied for the leading edge during
copying with punch.
[0 to +20/0/1 mm]
Adjusts the area where transfer current is applied for the trailing edge during
copying with punch.
[0 to +20/0/1 mm]
Adjusts the transfer current OFF timing for copying with punch.
[30 to +30/-16/1 mm]
2 La1f (Front)
Adjusts the area where the transfer is applied for the leading edge during front
side copying.
Mode Tables
[0 to +20/0/1 mm]
Appendix:
Program
Service
3 Lc1r (Front)
Adjusts the area where the transfer current is applied for the trailing edge
during front side copying.
[0 to +20/0/1 mm]
Adjusts the transfer current OFF timing for front side copying.
[30 to +30/20/1 mm]
Adjusts the area where the transfer current is applied for the leading edge
during back side copying.
[0 to +20/0/1 mm]
Adjusts the area where the transfer current is applied for the trailing edge
during back side copying.
[0 to +20/0/1 mm]
Adjusts the area where the transfer current is applied for the leading edge
during copying with thick paper.
[0 to +20/0/1 mm]
Adjusts the area where the transfer current is applied for the trailing edge
during copying with thick paper..
[0 to +20/0/1 mm]
Adjusts the transfer current OFF timing for copying thick paper.
[30 to +30/15/1 mm]
13 On Timing: M-Thick
Adjusts the transfer current ON timing for copying with M-thick paper.
[30 to +30/0/1 mm]
Adjusts the area where the transfer current is applied for the leading edge
during copying with M-thick paper.
[0 to +20/0/1 mm]
15 Trailing Edge:M-Thick
Adjusts the area where the transfer current is applied for the trailing edge
during copying with M-thick paper.
[0 to +20/0/1 mm]
Adjusts the transfer current OFF timing for copying with M-thick paper.
[30 to +30/15/1 mm]
Adjusts the area where transfer current is applied for the leading edge during
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
copying with punch.
Service
[0 to +20/0/1 mm]
Adjusts the area where transfer current is applied for the trailing edge during
copying with punch.
[0 to +20/0/1 mm]
Adjusts the transfer current OFF timing for copying with punch.
[30 to +30/-16/1 mm]
2 La1f (Front)
Adjusts the area where the transfer is applied for the leading edge during front
side copying.
[0 to +20/0/1 mm]
3 Lc1r (Front)
Adjusts the area where the transfer current is applied for the trailing edge
during front side copying.
[0 to +20/0/1 mm]
Adjusts the transfer current OFF timing for front side copying.
[30 to +30/20/1 mm]
Adjusts the area where the transfer current is applied for the leading edge
during back side copying.
[0 to +20/0/1 mm]
Adjusts the area where the transfer current is applied for the trailing edge
during back side copying.
[0 to +20/0/1 mm]
Adjusts the transfer current OFF timing for back side copying.
[30 to +30/20/1 mm]
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Adjusts the area where the transfer current is applied for the leading edge
Service
during copying with thick paper.
[0 to +20/0/1 mm]
Adjusts the area where the transfer current is applied for the trailing edge
during copying with thick paper..
[0 to +20/0/1 mm]
Adjusts the transfer current OFF timing for copying thick paper.
[30 to +30/15/1 mm]
13 On Timing: M-Thick
Adjusts the transfer current ON timing for copying with M-thick paper.
[30 to +30/0/1 mm]
Adjusts the area where the transfer current is applied for the leading edge
during copying with M-thick paper.
[0 to +20/0/1 mm]
15 Trailing Edge:M-Thick
Adjusts the area where the transfer current is applied for the trailing edge
during copying with M-thick paper.
[0 to +20/0/1 mm]
Adjusts the transfer current OFF timing for copying with M-thick paper.
[30 to +30/15/1 mm]
Adjusts the area where transfer current is applied for the leading edge during
copying with punch.
[0 to +20/0/1 mm]
Adjusts the area where transfer current is applied for the trailing edge during
copying with punch.
[0 to +20/0/1 mm]
Adjusts the transfer current OFF timing for copying with punch.
[30 to +30/-16/1 mm]
2 La1f (Front)
Adjusts the area where the transfer is applied for the leading edge during front
side copying.
Mode Tables
[0 to +20/0/1 mm]
Appendix:
Program
Service
3 Lc1r (Front)
Adjusts the area where the transfer current is applied for the trailing edge
during front side copying.
[0 to +20/0/1 mm]
Adjusts the transfer current OFF timing for front side copying.
[30 to +30/20/1 mm]
Adjusts the area where the transfer current is applied for the leading edge
during back side copying.
[0 to +20/0/1 mm]
Adjusts the area where the transfer current is applied for the trailing edge
during back side copying.
[0 to +20/0/1 mm]
Adjusts the area where the transfer current is applied for the leading edge
during copying with thick paper.
[0 to +20/0/1 mm]
Adjusts the area where the transfer current is applied for the trailing edge
during copying with thick paper..
[0 to +20/0/1 mm]
Adjusts the transfer current OFF timing for copying thick paper.
[30 to +30/20/1 mm]
13 On Timing: OHP
Adjusts the area where the transfer current is applied for the leading edge
during copying with OHP.
[0 to +20/0/1 mm]
Adjusts the area where the transfer current is applied for the trailing edge
during copying with OHP.
[0 to +20/0/1 mm]
Adjusts the transfer current OFF timing for copying with OHP.
[30 to +30/20/1 mm]
17 On Timing: M-Thick
Adjusts the transfer current ON timing for copying with M-thick paper.
[30 to +30/0/1 mm]
Adjusts the area where the transfer current is applied for the leading edge
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
during copying with M-thick paper.
Service
[0 to +20/0/1 mm]
Adjusts the area where the transfer current is applied for the trailing edge
during copying with M-thick paper.
[0 to +20/0/1 mm]
Adjusts the transfer current OFF timing for copying with M-thick paper.
[30 to +30/15/1 mm]
Adjusts the area where transfer current is applied for the leading edge during
copying with punch.
[0 to +20/0/1 mm]
Adjusts the area where transfer current is applied for the trailing edge during
copying with punch.
[0 to +20/0/1 mm]
Adjusts the transfer current OFF timing for copying with punch.
[30 to +30/-16/1 mm]
[-30 to 30/20/1]
26 Label La1
[0 to 20/0/1]
[0 to 20/0/1]
[-30 to 30/20/1]
[-30 to 30/20/1]
30 Envelope La1
[0 to 20/0/1]
31 Envelope Lc1
[0 to 20/0/1]
[-30 to 30/20/1]
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Creates the Vh pattern (standard drum potential for half-tone) on the drum
Service
during process control.
1 Exposure Level
[0 to 15/7/1]
[-100 to 0/-45/1]
Use the keyboard display to enter the lot number of the developer. (The lot
number is embossed on the top edge of the developer pack.)
Press "Execute" to initialize the developer and force toner supply to the toner
hopper at machine installation.
Important: After you replace developer in a machine that has been already
installed, do not use SP2963 to initialize the developer. Use SP2801 (TD
Sensor Initial Setting) to initialize the TD sensor.
1 Execute
Press Execute to force used toner into the toner collection bottle. The moving
components of the cleaning and toner collection areas will rotate for about 60
sec. with the transfer belt released.
Mode Tables
Sets the standard number of copies by using the number of toner bottle
Appendix:
Program
Service
rotations. DFU
[500 to 112/100/1]
2 Count Reset
[0 to 0xFFFF/0/0]
[0 to 0xFFFF/0/0]
[0 to 0xFFFF/0/0]
[0 to 0xFFFF/0/0]
[0 to 0xFFFF/0/0]
[0 to 0xFFFF/0/0]
[0 to 0xFFFF/0/0]
1 Voltage
[0 to 0xFFFF/0/0 V]
2 Current
[0 to 0xFFFF/0/0 A]
[0 to 3/0/1]
[0 to 1/0/1]
[0 to 1/0/1]
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
[0 to 1/0/1]
Service
2977 Main Exhaust Fan Drive Setting
[0 to 2/1/1]
[80 to 500/170/10]
1 Interval
Sets the number of prints between refresh mode executions (even during a
job). If set to "0" refresh mode does not execute.
[0 to 25/0/1]
2 Level
3 Repetitions
Sets the number of times toner is consumed during refresh mode execution.
[1 to 3/2/1]
4 Execute Mode
Applies the settings of SP2986-2 and SP2986-3 for execution of the refresh
mode. These settings do not take effect until this SP code is set.
[0 to 4/2/1]
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
2 ID Sensor Initialization
Performs the ID sensor initial setting. The ID sensor output for the bare drum
(VSG) is adjusted to 4.0 0.2V.
Press "Execute".
This SP mode should be performed after:
(1) Replacing or cleaning the ID sensor, (2) Replacing the NVRAM, (3)
Clearing NVRAM, (4) Replacing the BICU board.
1 Vsg
Displays the current value of the ID sensor output after checking the bare drum
surface.
[0 to 5/0/0.01 V]
2 Vsp
Displays the current value of the ID sensor output after checking the ID sensor
pattern image.
[0 to 5/0/0.01 V]
3 Vpdp
Displays the current value of the ID sensor output immediately after Vsp is
output when the charge potential drops. This reading is used to test and
determine characteristics for design.
[0 to 5/0/0.01 V]
If the ID sensor output is abnormal, an SC is logged:
SC378-00 logged: Vsp/Vsg/Vsdp = 0.00/0.00/0.00, or 5.00/5.00/5.00
Determines whether the machine checks and corrects the drum potential (Vd)
and LD power when the fusing temperature is lower than 100C at power-on.
[0 to 1/1/1]
0: Off
1: On
This setting attempts to change the Vd setting consistent with the OPC, the
charge corona unit, and environment to improve the reliability of the system.
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
2 Vd
Displays drum dark potential, the standard potential, electrical potential of the
black areas after exposure.
[100 to 970/800/1]
3 Vh
Displays standard halftone drum potential, used for laser power adjustment.
[100 to 500/300/1]
4 Vg
Displays the charge grid voltage resulting from the latest Vd adjustment.
[0 to 0xFFFF/0/1]
5 LD Level
Displays Vid, the latest drum surface voltage measured on the ID sensor
pattern.
[0 to 0xFFFF/0/1]
7 Vql
8 Vl
Shows the standard electrical potential of white areas on the drum after
exposure.
[-32767 to 32768/0/1]
1 (0:OFF/1:ON)
Turns on the drum rotation mode. This increases the time that the drum turns
freely after the machine is turned on. After this function is turned on with this
SP, it will be enabled only when SP3904 001 is set to "2". If SP3904 001 is set
to "0" or "1", the extra drum rotation mode will not be enabled.
[0 to 1/0/1]
0: Extra drum rotation mode is off (default)
1: After auto process control, the drum continues to turn until the fusing unit
gets to its operation temperature. Use this setting to decrease out-of-focus
copy images when the machine is used immediately after power-on.
Sets the amount of time the drum turns in the drum rotation mode before the
first copy after the machine is turned on. SP3903-001 must be on or this
setting has no effect.
[120 to 600/240/1]
Controls when corona wire cleaning is done to adjust the length of time that is
necessary for startup.
D131/D132: [0 to 2/0/1]
D133: [0 to 2/2/1]
0: Charge corona wire not cleaned when the machine is turned on.
Warmup Time: 30 sec. (Short Process Control is done)
1: Charge corona wire cleaned only when the machine is turned on.
Warmup Time: 30 sec. + 40 sec. (for cleaning) = 70 sec. (Short Process
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Control is done)
Program
Service
2: Normal startup procedure at power on:
Warmup Time: 240 sec. (Full process control is done)
Potential sensor calibrated
Drum starts to turn when fusing unit gets to the warmup temperature (not
done during Short Process Control)
Potential sensor readings are used to adjust development bias, grid
voltage, laser diode.
ID sensor calibrated (not done during Short Process Control)
TD sensor calibrated (not done during Short Process Control)
Sets the length of time for the machine to wait before executing process
control after the the machine recovers from the Off Mode
[0 to 24/2/1]
Fine adjusts the magnification in the sub scan direction for scanning by
changing the speed of the scanner motor.
Adjust the registration of the leading edge for scanning in the sub scan direction.
[-3.0 to +3.0/0.1mm]
4010 This setting ensures that the point where the original strikes the registration
roller matches the point where the F-GATE signal will trigger the start of
scanning in the main scan direction.
Setting a larger value shifts the image away from the leading edge, and a
smaller value shifts the image toward the leading edge.
Adjusts the side-to-side registration for scanning in the main scan direction
4012 These settings adjust the margins (erase margins) of the scanned area on the
sheet. The leading, trailing, right, and left margins can be set independently.
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
5 ADF: Sub Scan: Leading Edge
4013 Switches on/off a scanner free run. The scanning area is A3.
Press "On" or "Off".
4014 Scan
DF Dust Check
4020 This feature checks the ADF exposure glass for dust that can cause black lines
in copies. If dust is detected, a message is displayed, but the process does not
stop.
Issues a warning if there is dust on the narrow scanning glass of the ADF when
the original size is detected before a job starts. This function can detect dust on
the white plate above the scanning glass, as well as dust on the glass.
Adjusts the sensitivity for dust detection on the ADF scanning glass. This SP is
available only after SP4020-1 is switched on.
[0 to 8/1]
If you see black streaks in copies and no warning has been issued, raise
2 the setting to increase the level of sensitivity.
If warnings were issued and you see no black streaks in copies, lower the
setting.
Dust that triggers a warning could move be removed from the glass by the
originals in the feed path. If the dust is removed by passing originals, this is
not detected and the warning remains on.
Sets the level for vertical line correction (the black vertical lines caused by dust
on the ADF exposure glass).
3 [0 to 4/1]
0: No vertical line correction.
1-7: Enables and sets the level for vertical line correction. If you select a higher
number, this can decrease the unwanted lines caused by dust. But, it can also
erase thin vertical lines of the original.
Adjusts the sensitivity for dust detection on the ADF scanning glass. This SP is
available only after SP4020-2 is switched on.
[0 to 1/1]
If you see black streaks in copies when no warning has been issued, raise
11 the setting to increase the level of sensitivity.
If warnings are issued when you see no black streaks in copies, lower the
setting.
Dust that triggers a warning could move be removed from the glass by the
originals in the feed path. If the dust is removed by passing originals, this is not
Mode Tables
Appendix:
detected and the warning remains on.
Program
Service
12 Detect Level: Rear
Sets the level for vertical line correction (the black vertical lines caused by dust
on the ADF exposure glass).
[0 to 8/1]
0: No vertical line correction.
1-7: Enables and sets the level for vertical line correction. If you select a higher
number, this can decrease the unwanted lines caused by dust. But, it can also
erase thin vertical lines of the original.
4301 Displays the APS sensor output signals when an original is placed on the
exposure glass. If a non-standard size is placed on the glass, asterisks (*) are
displayed.
Selects whether or not the copier determines that the original is A5/HLT size
when the APS sensor does not detect the size.
[0 to 1/1]
4303 0: Not detected
1: A5 SEF (5 1/2" x 8 1/2")
If "1" is selected, paper sizes that cannot be detected by the APS sensors are
detected as A5 SEF. If "0" is selected, "Cannot detect original size" will be
shown.
4400 This SP sets the mask area to remove shadows when scanning originals from
the exposure glass in Book mode.
Note: "LE" denotes "leading edge" and "TE" denotes "trailing edge".
0 Scanned Image
Mode Tables
2 Gradation: Main Scan B
Appendix:
Program
Service
3 Gradation: Main Scan C
8 Gradation K
9 Check Pattern 16
12 Gray Patch 64
14 Color Patch K
18 Shading Pattern
Copying
1
[0 to 3/ 3 / 1]
Scanning
2
[0 to 3/ 3 / 1]
Fax Operation
3
[0 to 3/ 3 / 1]
2 SH ON/OFF
Digital AE
4460 This SP sets the lower limit and level for background removal when background
removal is selected with a scanner application.
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
4551 Scanning: Text
Service
4552 Scanning: Test Dropout Color
Sets the MTF level (Modulation Transfer Function) designed to improve image
contrast. Set higher for stronger effect, lower for weaker effect.
[0 to 15/8/1]
7 Brightness: 1-255
8 Contrast: 1-255
Set higher for more contrast, set lower for less contrast.
[1 to 255/128/1]
This SP sets the level for removing dots when a color original is scanned with a
scanner software application. The higher the setting, the greater the effect
applied for removing background dots.
[0 to 7/0/1]
Sets the MTF level (Modulation Transfer Function) designed to improve image
contrast. Set higher for stronger effect, lower for weaker effect.
[0 to 15/8/1]
7 Brightness: 1-255
8 Contrast: 1-255
Set higher for more contrast, set lower for less contrast.
[1 to 255/128/1]
This SP sets the level for removing dots when a color original is scanned with a
scanner software application. The higher the setting, the greater the effect
applied for removing background dots.
[0 to 7/0/1]
4600
1 SBU_ID
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
Displays the SBU ID code confirmed by reading the SBU after the SBU
adjusts automatically at power on.
[0 to FFh/1]
2 GASBU_N_ID
Displays the GASBU_N ID code confirmed by reading the SBU after the
SBU adjusts automatically at power on.
[0 to FFh/1]
3 VSP_F_ID
Displays the VSB5100_F ID code confirmed by reading the SBU after the
SBU adjusts automatically at power on.
[0 to FFh/1]
4 VSP_L_ID
Displays the VSB5100_L ID code confirmed by reading the SBU after the
SBU adjusts automatically at power on.
[0 to FFh/1]
[0 to 0xFFF/0/1]
This SP affects gray balance adjustment for both sides of the paper.
1 Execute
2 Confirm
[0 to 1023/512/1]
1 SBU:R
2 SBU:G
3 SBU:B
4 CIS:R
5 CIS:G
6 CIS:B
Displays the reference voltage for Red adjusted by gray balance adjustment.
Displays the reference voltage for Green adjusted by gray balance adjustment.
Displays the reference voltage for Blue adjusted by gray balance adjustment.
1 Book Scan
2 DF Scan
[0 to 16383/0/1]
1 R:FE
2 R:FO
3 R:LE
4 R:LO
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
4624 Black Level Ad Value DFU
[0 to 16383/0/1]
1 G:FE
2 G:FO
3 G:LE
4 G:LO
[0 to 16383/0/1]
1 B:FE
2 B:FO
3 B:LE
4 B:LO
1 R:F
2 R:L
1 G:F
2 G:L
1 B:K
2 B:L
1 R:FE
2 R:F0
3 R:LE
4 R:LO
1 R:FE
2 R:FO
3 R:LE
4 R:LO
1 B:FE
2 B:FO
3 B:LE
4 B:LO
1 Correction ON/OFF
2 Ad ON/OFF
1 Execution
2 Error Flag
Mode Tables
3 SSCG Result Apply Execution
Appendix:
Program
Service
4 SSCG Result Apply Execution
1 R:FE
2 R:FO
3 G:FE
4 G:FO
5 B:FE
6 B:FO
7 R:LE
8 R:LO
9 G:LE
10 G:LO
11 B:LE
12 B:LO
1 Last: R:FE
2 Last: R:FO
3 Last: G:FE
4 Last: G:FO
5 Last: B:FE
6 Last: B:FO
7 Last: R:LE
8 Last: R:LO
9 Last: G:LE
10 Last: G:LO
11 Last: B:LE
12 Last: B:LO
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
7 Before Adj: R:LE
Service
8 Before Adj: R:LO
1 White Level: F
2 White Level: L
3 Black Level: F
4 Black Level: L
5 FL Correction
[0 to 1023/0/1]
[0 to 16383/0/1]
[0 to 16383/0/1]
[0 to 16383/0/1]
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
4677 Analog Gain Range Adj Value DFU
1 R:FE
2 R:FO
3 R:LE
4 R:LO
1 G:FE
2 G:FO
3 G:LE
4 G:LO
1 B:FE
2 B:FO
3 B:LE
4 B:LO
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
1 R:FE
2 R:FO
3 R:LE
4 R:LO
1 G:FE
2 G:FO
3 G:LE
4 G:LO
1 B:FE
2 B:FO
3 B:LE
4 B:LO
CIS ID Display
4700
Reads and displays the ID of the CIS board at power.
[-512 to 512 / 0 / -]
Leading Edge
1 Displays the average level of the main scan white for the leading edge of Red
signal.
[0 to 255 / - / 1 digit]
Trailing Edge
2 Displays the average level of the main scan white for the trailing edge of Red
Mode Tables
signal.
Appendix:
Program
Service
[0 to 255 / - / 1 digit]
Leading Edge
1 Displays the average level of the main scan white for the leading edge of Green
signal.
[0 to 255 / - / 1 digit]
Trailing Edge
2 Displays the average level of the main scan white for the trailing edge of Green
signal.
[0 to 255 / - / 1 digit]
Leading Edge
1 Displays the average level of the main scan white for the leading edge of Blue
signal.
[0 to 255 / - / 1 digit]
Trailing Edge
2 Displays the average level of the main scan white for the trailing edge of Blue
signal.
[0 to 255 / - / 1 digit]
Pattern Cycle
[0 to 127/47/1]
[0 to 1023/120/1]
[0 to 1023/120/1]
[0 to 1023/120/1]
[0 to 1023/120/1]
[0 to 1023/120/1]
[0 to 1023/120/1]
[0 to 15/8/1]
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
4768 CIS Pixel Interporlation DFU
[0 to 3/2/1]
Factory Setting
[0 to 255/0/1]
Factory Setting
[0 to 255/0/1]
Factory Setting
[0 to 255/0/1]
[0 to 255/0/1]
[0 to 255/0/1]
[0 to 255/0/1]
Displays the current red data of black level for each color signal and
Chip 1 to 24 chip.
[0 to 255 / - / 1 digit]
1 Select
[0 to 4 / 0 / 1]
Mode Tables
[0 to 4095/0/1]
Appendix:
Program
Service
4800 DF Density Adj Value DFU
2 DF mode :Lamp On
FL Correction ON/OFF
1 RED
2 GREEN
3 BLUE
[0 to 7 / 0 / 1]
0:Softest 1:Soft Mode 4:Normal 6:Sharp Mode 7: Sharpest
[0 to 7 / 0 / 1]
0:Softest 1:Soft Mode 4:Normal 6:Sharp Mode 7:Sharpest
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
[0 to 9/4/1]
Service
1 Sensitivity Selection
2 Range Selection
Sets the detection level for blank paper. The higher the setting that you enter,
the greater the sensitivity of detection.
[0 to 6/3/1]
5024 Note: After selecting the number, you must turn the main power switch off and
on.
Europe/Asia model: [0 = mm / 1 = inch]
American model: [0 = mm / 1 = inch]
0: OFF / 1: ON
Accounting Counter
Selects the counting method if the meter charge mode is enabled with
SP5-930-1.
Note: You can change the setting only one time.
5045 [0 to 1/ 1]
0: Development counter. Shows the total counts for color (Y, M, C) and black
(K).
1: Paper counter. Shows the total page counts for: Black Total, Black Copies,
Black Prints.
Display IP Address
5055 Switches the banner display of MFP device display on and off.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
[OFF] ON
When this SP is enabled, a pop-up will appear and tell the operator whether
the size of the paper in the bypass tray matches the size of the paper selected
on the operation panel display.
[0 to 1/0/1] 0:Disabled 1:Enables
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
91 (0:OFF 1:SDK 2:Reserve)
92 Product ID
Enter the type of application registered under SP5075-1. This registers the
SDK product ID or the legacy ID.
93 Application Screen ID
001 Sets whether the LED will blink or remain OFF at Toner End.
[0 to 1/0/1] 0:LED Remains OFF 1:LED Blinks
Determines whether a non-standard paper size can be input for the universal
cassette trays (Tray 2, Tray 3)
5112 [0 to 1/1]
0: No
1: Yes. If "1" is selected, the customer will be able to input a non-standard
paper size using the UP mode.
4: Coin Lock
5: MF Key Card
11: Exp Key Card (Add)
12: Exp Key Card (Deduct)
Note: Items 1, 2, 3, 5, 5 are for Japan Only
Enables the SDK application. This lets you select a number for the external
device for user access control.
Note: "SDK" refers to software on an SD card.
2 [0 to 3/1]
0: None
1: Expansion Device 1
2: Expansion Device 2
3: Expansion Device 3
Disable Copying
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
1: Prohibit access to machine
Service
Mode Clear Opt. Counter Removal
5120 [0 to 2/ 0 / 1]
0: Yes. Normal reset
1: Standby. Resets before job start/after completion
2: No. Normally no reset
Sets the original size that the machine detects for F sizes.
[0 to 2/1]
5126 0: 8hf x 13
1: 8hf x 13qr
2: 8 x 13
Note: hf = 1/2, qr = 1/4
This SP can be used to switch APS (Auto Paper Select) off when a coin lock or
5127 pre-paid key card device is connected to the machine.
[0 to 1/1]
0: On, 1: Off
Sets the paper size that the machine detects when the 8 x 13 dial setting on a
paper cassette is used (LT/DLT version).
[0 to 2/1]
0: 8 x 13
1: 8hf x 13
2: 8qr x 13
Note: hf = 1/2, qr = 1/4
Selects the paper size type (for originals and copy paper). (Only needs to be
adjusted if the optional printer controller is installed)
[0 to 3/1]
0: JP
1: NA
2: EU, AA, TWN, KOR
3: CH (China)
After changing the value, turn the power switch off and on.
[0 to 1/1]
0: Soft Key Set, 1: Hard Key Set
1 A3T
2 B4T
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
NA: [2.5 to 40.6/2.5/1 mm]
Service
Other: [2 to 40/2/1 mm]
3 A4T
4 DLTT
5 LGT
6 LTT
7 12x18
8 Other
5167 Determines the Fax print mode when the optional counter is off.
0: Print automatically.
1: Not do auto-print.
CE Login
If you will change the printer bit switches, you must 'log in' to service mode with
This setting determines whether the machine is allowed to move into energy
save mode.
1: Allowed
0: Not allowed
5195 Limitless SW
Selects the paper feed mode priority (productivity or tray). This is activated only
when a customer selects the "Auto paper Select".
Productivity priority. Changes the feed station as soon as the machine
detects the priority tray even the paper still remains in the current tray.
Tray priority. This changes the feeding tray after the paper in the tray
where the machine has been feeding paper has run out of paper.
[0 to 1/0/1]
0: Productivity priority
Mode Tables
Appendix:
1: Tray priority
Program
Service
5196 90 Degree Rotation (Copy)
0: OFF
Paper feeds out with stapling at the maximum number of the finishing stapling
when the machine gets a multiple printing job (over maximum number).
1: ON
Paper feeds out without stapling at the maximum number of the finisher
stapling when the machine gets a multiple printing job (over maximum number)
Vertically positions the page numbers printed on both sides during duplexing.
[-10 to +10/1 mm]
0 is center, minus is down, + is up.
This SP specifies the number of digits to display for the entry of the starting
page number.
[2 to 9/9/1]
This setting determines whether page numbers are prefixed with excess zeros
when the number is smaller than the number of assigned digits. For example,
with this setting on and 3 digits have been specified, the number "3" appears as
"003". With this setting off, the number "3" will appear as a "3" without the
zeros.
[0 to 1/0/1] 0:No zero surplus 1:Zero surplus allowed
Sets the time clock for the local time. This setting is done at the factory before
delivery. The setting is GMT expressed in minutes.
[1440 to 1440/1 min.]
Mode Tables
Appendix:
AS: +480 (Hong Kong)
Program
Service
Summer Time
Lets you set the machine to adjust its date and time automatically with the
change to Daylight Savings time in the spring and back to normal time in the
fall. This SP lets you set these items:
Day and time to go forward automatically in April.
Day and time to go back automatically in October.
Set the length of time to go forward and back automatically.
The settings for 002 and 003 are done with 8-digit numbers:
Digits Meaning
5307 1st, 2nd 0 cannot be input, so the eight-digit setting for 002 or 003
becomes a seven-digit setting)
The number of the week for the day selected at the 3rd digit.
If "0" is selected for "Sunday", for example, and the selected
4th
Sunday is the start of the 2nd week, then input a "2" for this
digit.
5401 This SP adjusts the settings below when installing and SDK application.
Note: "SDK" is the "Software Development Kit". This data can be converted
from SAS (VAS) when installed or uninstalled.
Used to assign the default access user access privileges to their own
documents on the document server.
5404 Clears the counts for the user codes assigned by the key operator to restrict
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
the use of the machine. Press [Execute] to clear.
Service
5411 LDAP Certification
4 Simplified Certification
6 Detail Option
1 Lockout On/Off
2 Lockout Threshold
3 Cancellation On/Off
Determines whether the system waits the prescribed time for input of a correct
user ID and password after an account lockout has occurred.
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: Off (no wait time, lockout not cancelled)
1: On (system waits, cancels lockout if correct user ID and password are
entered.
4 Cancellation Time
Determines the length of time that the system waits for correct input of the user
ID and password after a lockout has occurred. This setting is used only if
SP5413-3 is set to "1" (on).
[1 to 999 / 60 / 1 min./step]
1 Mitigation On/Off
Switches on/off masking of continuously used IDs and passwords that are
identical.
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: Off, 1: On
2 Mitigation Time
Mode Tables
Sets the length of time for excluding continuous access for identical user IDs
Appendix:
Program
Service
and passwords.
[0 to 60 / 15 / 1 min./step]
1 Permissible Number
Sets limit on the number of attacks on the system with random passwords to
gain illegal access to the system.
[0 to 100 / 30 / 1 attempt/step]
2 Detect Time
Sets the time limit to stop a password attack once such an attack has been
detected.
[1 to 10 / 5 / 1 sec./step]
Limits the number of users used by the access exclusion and password attack
detection functions.
[50 to 200 / 200 / 1 users/step]
Limits the number of passwords used by the access exclusion and password
attack detection functions.
[50 to 200 / 200 / 1 password/step]
3 Monitor Interval
Sets the processing time interval for referencing user ID and password
information.
[1 to 10 / 3 / 1 sec./step]
Sets the length of time when the frequency of access to MFP features are
monitored.
[10 to 30 / 10 / 1 sec./step]
Sets the wait time to slow down the speed of certification when an excessive
number of access attempts have been detected.
[0 to 9 / 3 / 1 sec./step]
Sets a limit on the number of requests received for certification in order to slow
down the certification speed when an excessive number of access attempts
have been detected.
[50 to 200 / 200 / 1 attempt/step]
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Note: These functions are enabled only after the user access feature has been
Service
enabled.
1 Copy
Determines whether certification is required before a user can use the copy
applications.
[0 or 1/ 0 /1]
0: On, 1: Off
11 Document Server
21 FAX
31 Scanner
Determines whether certification is required before a user can use the scanner
applications.
[0 or 1/ 0 /1]
0: On, 1: Off
41 Printer
Determines whether certification is required before a user can use the printer
applications.
[0 or 1/ 0 /1]
0: On, 1: Off
51 SDK1
Determines whether certification is required before a user can
61 SDK2 use the SDK application.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1] 0: ON. 1: OFF
71 SDK3
81 Browser
3 Message Text ID
[0 to 1/0/1
0: OFF
1: ON
10 Tag
11 Entry
12 Group
20 Mail
30 Fax
31 FaxSub
32 Folder
33 ProtectCode
34 SmtpAuth
35 LdapAuth
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
37 AcntAcl
Service
38 Document Acl
40 CertCrypt
Determines whether an error code appears in the system log after a user
authentication failure occurs.
[0 or 1/ 0 /1]
0: Off, 1: On
2 Panel Disp
Determines whether an error code appears on the operation panel after a user
authentication failure occurs.
[0 or 1/ 0 /1]
0: Off, 1: On
PM Alarm
5501 [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1]
0: Alarm disabled
The PM alarm goes off when the print count reaches this value multiplied by
1,000.
Sets the alarm to sound for the specified jam level (document misfeeds are not
included). RSS use only
5504 [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 step]
0: Zero (Off)
1: Low (2.5K jams)
2: Medium (3K jams)
3: High (6K jams)
Error Alarm
Switches the control call on/off for the paper supply. DFU
0: Off, 1: On
0: No alarm.
1: Sets the alarm to sound for the specified number transfer sheets for each
paper size (A3, A4, B4, B5, DLT, LG, LT, HLT)
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
Switches the control call on/off for the stapler installed in the finisher. DFU
0: Off, 1: On
0: No alarm
1: Alarm goes off for every 1K of staples used.
Switches the control call on/off for the toner end. DFU
0: Off, 1: On
If you select "1" the alarm will sound when the copier detects toner end.
Changes the timing of the "Toner Supply Call" via the NRS, when the following
conditions occur.
0: Toner is replaced (default)
1: Toner near end or End
132 Interval: A3
133 Interval: A4 The "Paper Supply Call Level: nn" SPs specify the
paper control call interval for the referenced paper
134 Interval: A5
sizes.
141 Interval: B4 [00250 to 10000 / 1000 / 1 Step]
142 Interval: B5
164 Interval: LG
166 Interval: LT
1 Jam Remains
Enables/disables initiating a call.
2 Continuous Jams [0 to 1/1]
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
3 Continuous Door Open
Sets the length of time to determine the length of an unattended paper jam.
[03 to 30/1]
This setting is enabled only when SP5508-4 is enabled (set to 1).
Sets the length of time the remains opens to determine when to initiate a call.
[03 to 30/1]
This setting is enabled only when SP5508-4 is enabled (set to 1).
Normal
1 Sets the parts replacement alarm counter to sound for the number of copies.
[1 to 9999 / 350 / 1]
DF
2 Sets the parts replacement alarm counter to sound for the number of scanned
originals.
Mode Tables
[1 to 9999 / 350 / 1]
Appendix:
Program
Service
SC/Alarm Setting
5515 With NRS (New Remote Service) in use, these SP codes can be set to issue an
SC call when an SC error occurs. If this SP is switched off, the SC call is not
issued when an SC error occurs.
1 SC Call
4 User Call
This SP limits the types of files that can be used with Scan-to-File,
Scan-toFax, and Web Download.
[0 to 1/0/1] 0:Setting not fixed 1:Setting fixed
0: Allows setting clear write PDF, PDF/A, or encoded PDF on the application
screen.
1: PDF/A can be selected on the application screen, but PDF, Clear Write PDF,
or encoded PDF are grayed-out and cannot be selected.
This is the SP that sets the length of time that the machine waits for a
response from NCS after the machine sends a request for authentication from
its hook-up module.
[1 to 255/60/1 sec.]
Returns the current setting for the network security level. Returns one of the
following five possible levels:
Custom
Level 0
Level 1
FIPS
Level 2
Returns the current setting for the network system security level. Returns one
of the following five possible levels:
Custom (default)
Level 0
Level 1
FIPS
Level 2
5749 Import/Export
1 Export
101 Import
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
252 Import Result Print (SP)
Memory Clear
5801 Resets NVRAM data to the default settings. Before executing any of these SP
codes, print an SMC Report.
1 All Clear
2 Engine
Initializes all registration settings for the engine and copy process settings.
3 SCS
4 IMH
Clears Image Memory Handler which manages memory and HDD access.
5 MCS
6 Copier application
7 Fax application
Initializes the fax reset time, job login ID, all TX/RX settings, local storage file
numbers, and off-hook timer.
8 Printer application
Initializes the printer defaults, programs registered, the printer SP bit switches,
and the printer CSS counter.
9 Scanner application
Initializes the defaults for the scanner and all the scanner SP modes.
10 Web Service
Deletes the Netfile (NFA) management files and thumbnails, and initializes the
Job login ID. Netfiles are jobs to be printed from the document server using a
PC and the DeskTopBinder software
Initializes the system defaults and interface settings (IP addresses also), the
SmartNetMonitor for Admin settings, WebStatusMonitor settings, and the
TELNET settings.
12 R-FAX
16 MIRS Setting
17 CCS
Mode Tables
18 Memory Clr
Appendix:
Program
Service
Initializes the SRM (System Resource Manager) settings.
19 LCS
20 Web Uapl
21 ECS
23 ACIS
24 Browser
5802 [0 to 1/0/1]
0: Release free run mode, 1:Enable free run mode
Return this setting to off (0) after testing is completed.
Finisher connectors should be disconnected and duplex mode should be off.
[1 to 7/1/1 Step]
1:Japan 2:NA 3:EU 4:China 5:Taiwan 6:Asia 7:Korea
When the machine detects a serious problem in the fusing unit, it will issue a
Level A (fatal error) SC code. The machine is disabled and the operator
cannot reset the SC until the machine has been released from the error with
this SC code. Touch [EXECUTE] to release the machine for servicing.
Use this SP to the serial number for the machine and BICU, and to display the
ID number for Novita.
1 Set (machine)
[0 to 255/0/1]
4 Set BICU
[0 to 255/0/1]
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
5 Display: Novita
[0 to 255/0/1]
1 Service
Inputs the telephone number of the CE (displayed when a service call condition
occurs.)
2 Facsimile
Use this to input the fax number of the CE printed on the Counter Report (UP
mode).
3 Supply
4 Operation
I/F Setting
1 [0 to 2 / 2 / 1 /step]
0: Remote service off
1: CSS remote service on
2: @Remote service on
CE Call
2 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Start of the service
1: End of the service
Note: This SP is activated only when SP 5816-1 is set to "2".
Function Flag
3 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Note: This SP setting is changed to "1" after @Remote registor has been
completed.
This executes a test call from the machine to the service center after all the
@Remote settings have been completed.
Passes all the information about internal settings of the machine to the
@Remote service center.
SSL Disable
Uses or does not use the RCG certification by SSL when calling the RCG.
7 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
[1 to 90 / 10 / 1 second /step]
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
[1 to 100 / 60 / 1 second /step]
Service
Port 80 Enable
Displays the cause of an RCG error. Where Cumin is used, normally displays
"0".
[0 to 1/0/1] 0:Normal condition 1:Error
If "1" is displayed, this means that the authentication from client to server failed
when the network re-booted. To restore normal operation, cycle the machine
off/on to return a "0" (normal condition).
RCG C Registed
0: Internet connection
1: Dial-up connection
Use Proxy
62 This SP setting determines if the proxy server is used when the machine
Proxy Host
This SP sets the address of the proxy server used for communication between
Embedded RC Gate-N and the gateway. Use this SP to set up or display the
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
This SP sets the port number of the proxy server used for communication
beyond the 31st character is ignored. This name is customer information and
is not printed in the SMC report.
Proxy Password
66 Note:
The length of the password is limited to 31 characters. Any character
beyond the 31st character is ignored.
This name is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report.
CERT: Up State
The certification update failed, and the GW URL is being notified of the
3
failed update.
The period of the certification has expired and new request for an
4
update is being sent to the GW URL.
67
The rescue certification setting is completed and the GW URL is being
12
notified of the certification update request.
The notification of the certification request has been received from the
14
rescue GW controller, and the certification is being stored.
The certification has been stored, and the GW URL is being notified of
15
the successful completion of this event.
The storing of the certification has failed, and the GW URL is being
16
notified of the failure of this event.
The certification update request has been received from the GW URL,
the GW URL was notified of the results of the update after it was
17
completed, but a certification error has been received, and the rescue
certification is being recorded.
The rescue certification of No. 17 has been recorded, and the GW URL
18
is being notified of the failure of the certification update.
CERT: Error
Displays a number code that describes the reason for the request for update of
the certification.
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
68 An SSL error notification has been issued. Issued after the certification
Service
2
has expired.
69 CERT: Up ID
83 Firmware Up Status
This SP setting determines if the operator can confirm the previous version of
the firmware before the firmware update execution. If the option to confirm the
previous version is selected, a notification is sent to the system manager and
the firmware update is done with the firmware files from the URL.
86 Firmware Size
Allows the service technician to confirm the size of the firmware data files
during the firmware update execution.
90 CERT: Subject
Displays serial number for the @Remote certification. Asterisks (*) indicate
that no @Remote certification exists.
92 CERT: Issuer
Displays the start time of the period for which the current @Remote
certification is enabled.
Displays the end time of the period for which the current @Remote
certification is enabled.
95 Server ON Check
96 GW Host DFU
A debug tool.
Mode Tables
97 GW URL Path DFU
Appendix:
Program
Service
A debug tool.
A debug tool.
Selection Country
150
Not used
Selection Dial/Push
153
Not used
Dial Up Password
157
Not used
Access Point
163
Not used
Line Connecting
164
Not used
Retransmission Limit
174
Not used
A debug tool.
FAX TX Priorit
187
Not used
Not used
Regist: Status
Displays a number that indicates the status of the @Remote service device.
0: Neither the @Remote device nor Embedded RCG Gate is set.
1: The Embedded RCG Gate is being set. Only Box registration is completed.
201 In this status, @Remote device cannot communicate with this device.
2: The Embedded RCG Gate is set. In this status, the @Remote device cannot
communicate with this device.
3: The @Remote device is being set. In this status the Embedded RCG Gate
cannot be set.
4: The @Remote module has not started.
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
202 Letter Number
Allows entry of the request number needed for the Embedded RCG Gate.
Displays a number that indicates the result of the confirmation executed with
SP5816-203.
0: Succeeded
1: Confirmation number error
2: Registration in progress
3: Proxy error (proxy enabled)
4: Proxy error (proxy disabled)
5: Proxy error (Illegal user name or password)
6: Communication error
7: Certification update error
8: Other error
9: Confirmation executing
Confirm Place
205 Displays the result of the notification sent to the device from the Gateway in
answer to the confirmation request. Displayed only when the result is
registered at the Gateway.
Register Result
Error Code
208 Displays a number that describes the error code that was issued when either
Mode Tables
Appendix:
-2385 correct international prefix for the
Program
Service
telephone number.
Releases the setting on a machine that has been set for use with Cumin.
2 RCG IP Address
Sets the RCG port number of the destination for processing calls to the
@Remote service center.
[0 to 65 535/443/1]
Sets the URL path of the destination for processing calls to the @Remote
service center.
17 Numeric characters allowed (0 to 17)
Uploads the UP and SP mode data (except for counters and the serial
5824 number) from NVRAM on the control board to an SD card.
Note: While using this SP mode, always keep the front cover open. This
prevents a software module accessing the NVRAM during the upload.
5825 Downloads data from an SD card to the NVRAM in the machine. After
downloading is completed, remove the SD card and turn the machine power
off and on.
Allows you to confirm and reset the IPv4 address for Ethernet and wireless
LAN (802.11): aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
Allows you to confirm and reset the IPv4 subnet mask for Ethernet and
wireless LAN (802.11): aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
3 Default Gatewary (Ethernet/IEEE 802.11)
Service
Allows you to confirm and reset the IPv4 default gateway used by the network
for Ethernet and wireless LAN (802.11): aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
Allows you confirm and change the setting that determines whether the IP
address is used with DHCP on an Ethernet or wireless (802.11) LAN network.
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1] 0: Not used (manual setting) 1: Used
Allows you to confirm the IPv4 address that was used when the machine
started up with DHCP.
Allows you to confirm the IPv4 subnet mask setting that was used when the
machine started up with DHCP.
Allows you to confirm the IPv4 default gateway setting that was used when
the machine started up with DHCP.
52 ECP (Centro)
65 Job Spooling
This is the IPv6 local address link referenced on the Ethernet or wireless LAN
in the format:
"Link Local Address" + "Prefix Length"
The IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits configured in 8 blocks of 16 bits
Mode Tables
Appendix:
each.
Program
Service
147 Active IPv6 Stateless Address 1
SP codes 147 to 155 are the IPv6 status addresses (1 to 5) referenced on the
Ethernet or wireless LAN in the format:
"Status Address" + "Prefix Length"
The IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits configured in 8 blocks of 16 bits
each.
Displays or does not display the link to Net RICOH on the top page and link
page of the web system.
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
0: Not display, 1:Display
Displays or does not display the link to Consumable Supplier on the top page
and link page of the web system.
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
0: Not display, 1:Display
This SP confirms or changes the URL1 name on the link page of the web
system. The maximum characters for the URL name are 31 characters.
This SP confirms or changes the link to URL1 on the link page of the web
system. The maximum characters for the URL are 127 characters.
Displays or does not display the link to URL1 on the top page of the web
system.
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
0: Not display, 1:Display
5831 Press [EXECUTE] to restore the inisial settings of all SP codes to their initial
(factory) settings.
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Note: This SP does not reset time settings or user tool settings.
Service
HDD
5832 Enter the SP number for the partition to initialize, then press #. When the
execution ends, cycle the machine power off and on.
7 Mail RX Data
8 Mail TX Data
With this function disabled, the settings related to the capture feature cannot
1 be initialized, displayed, or selected.
[0 to 1/1]
0: Disable, 1: Enable
Panel Setting
101 Sets the IP address of the PC designated to operate as the primary capture
server (CS).
[000.000.000.000]
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
Primary srv scheme
Max. characters: 6
[1 to 65535/80/1]
Max. characters: 16
Max. characters: 6
Max. characters: 6
Max. characters: 6
[0 to 1/0/1]
Expands the scope of used resources and performance. Switch this off if this
142 Expands the scope of used resources and performance. Switch this off if this
feature is not being used.
[0 to 1/1/1] 1: ON 2: OFF
6 Channel Max
Sets the maximum number of channels available for data transmission via
Mode Tables
the wireless LAN. The number of channels available varies according to
Appendix:
Program
Service
location. The default settings are set for the maximum end of the range for
each area. Adjust the upper 4 bits to set the maximum number of channels.
DFU
Note: Do not change the setting.
[1 to 11 or 13 / 11 or 13 / 1 /step]
Europe/Asia: 1 to 13
NA/ Asia: 1 to 11
Channel Min
Sets the minimum number of channels available for data transmission via
the wireless LAN. The number of channels available varies according to
location. The default settings are set for the minimum end of the range for
7 each area. Adjust the lower 4 bits to set the minimum number of channels.
DFU
Note: Do not change the setting.
[1 to 11 or 13 / 1 / 1 /step]
Europe: 1 to 13
NA/ Asia: 1 to 11
8 Transmission Speed
0 x 00 to 0 x FF / 0 x FF to Auto / -]
0 x FF to Auto [Default]
0 x 11 - 55M Fix
0 x 10 - 48M Fix
0 x 0F - 36M Fix
0 x 0E - 18M Fix
0 x 0D - 12M Fix
0 x 0B - 9M Fix
0 x 0A - 6M Fix
0 x 07 - 11M Fix
0 x 05 - 5.5M Fix
0 x 08 - 1M Fix
0 x 13 - 0 x FE (reserved)
0 x 12 - 72M (reserved)
0 x 09 - 22M (reserved)
42 Fragment Thresh
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
Supply Name Setting
5841 Press the [User Tools] key. These names appear when the user presses the
7 Org Stamp
11 Staple Std 1
12 Staple Std 2
13 Staple Std 3
14 Staple Std 4
21 Staple Bind 1
22 Staple Bind 2
23 Staple Bind 3
5842 This settings select the output mode for debugging information as each
network file is processed.
1 Setting 1
2 Setting 2
5844 USB
Transfer Rate
Vendor ID
Product ID
Sets the device release number of the BCD (binary coded decimal) display.
4 [0000 to 9999/1]
Mode Tables
Appendix:
0: Disable
Program
Service
1: Level 1
2: Level 2
1 Sets the FTP port number used when image files to the Scan Router Server.
IP Address (Primary)
2 Use this SP to set the Scan Router Server address. The IP address under the
transfer tab can be referenced by the initial system setting.
Range: 000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255
Use this setting to determine the length of time the prompt message is
6 displayed when a test error occurs during document transfer with the NetFile
IP Address (Secondary)
Allows changing the model of the delivery server registered by the I/O device.
[0 to 4/ 0 / 1 /step]
9 0: Unknown
1: SG1 Provided
2: SG1 Package
3: SG2 Provided
4: SG2 Package
Changes the capability of the registered that the I/O device registered.
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
Bit3 = 1 Fax RX delivery function exists
Changes the capability of the registered that the I/O device registered.
11 [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
Bit7 = 1 Address book usage limitation (Limitation for each authorized user)
Bit6 = 1 RDH authorization link
Bit5 to 0: Not used
Enables or disables the prevention function for the continuous data sending
22 error.
[0 to 1 / 0 / -]
0: Disable, 1: Enable
Displays the unique device ID in use by the delivery server directory. The
1 value is only displayed and cannot be changed. This ID is created from the
NIC MAC or IEEE 1394 EUI. The ID is displayed as either 6-byle or 8-byte
binary.
Clears the unique ID of the device used as the name in the file transfer
2 directory. Execute this SP if the connection of the device to the delivery
server is unstable. After clearing the ID, the ID will be established again
automatically by cycling the machine off and on.
Maximum Entries
6 Sets the interval for retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire
the delivery server address book.
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
7 Sets the number of retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire
the delivery server address book.
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
Delivery Server Maximum Entries
8 Sets the maximum number account entries of the delivery server user
information managed by UCS.
[2000 to 50000 / 2000 / 1/step]
10 Sets the length of the timeout for the search of the LDAP server.
[1 to 255 / 60 / 1 /step]
47 Clears the local address book information, including the user code.
48 Clears the distribution address book information, except the user code.
49 Clears the LDAP address book information, except the user code.
50 Clears all directory information managed by UCS, including all user codes.
Deletes the address book data from the SD card in the service slot.
Mode Tables
Deletes only the files that were uploaded from this machine.
Appendix:
Program
Service
This feature does not work if the card is write-protected.
53
Note: After you do this SP, go out of the SP mode, and then turn the power
off.
Do not remove the SD card until the Power LED stops flashing.
Search Option
This SP uses bit switches to set up the fuzzy search options for the UCS local
address book.
Bit: Meaning
0: Checks both upper/lower case characters
60 1: Japan Only
2: Japan Only
3: Japan Only
4 to 7: Not Used
Complexity Option 1
Use this SP to set the conditions for password entry to access the local
address book. Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to upper case
and sets the length of the password.
[0 to 32 / 0 / 1 /step]
62 Note: This SP does not normally require adjustment.
This SP is enabled only after the system administrator has set up a group
password policy to control access to the address book.
Specifies the FTP port for getting a distribution server address book that is
91 used in the identification mode.
[0 to 65535 / 3671 / 1 /step]
Encryption Stat
94 Shows the status of the encryption function for the address book data.
Resolution Reduction
5847-002 through 5847-006 changes the default settings of image data sent
externally by the Net File page reference function. [0 to 2/1]
5847 5847 21 sets the default for JPEG image quality of image files controlled by
NetFile.
"Repository" refers to jobs to be printed from the document server with a PC
and the DeskTopBinder software.
Sets the default value for the quality of JPEG images sent as NetFile pages.
21 This function is available only with the MLB (Media Link Board) option
installed.
[5 to 95/1]
Web Service
5847 2 sets the 4-bit switch assignment for the access control setting. Setting
5848 of 0001 has no effect on access and delivery from Scan Router.
5847 100 sets the maximum size of images that can be downloaded. The
default is equal to 1 gigabyte.
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
3 Acc. Ctrl.: Doc. Svr. Print (Lower 4 Bits)
[1 to 1024/1 K]
Specifies the maximum size of the image data that the machine can
download.
[1 to 1024 / 1024 / 1 MB /step]
Installation Date
5849
Displays or prints the installation date of the machine.
1 Display
The "Counter Clear Day" has been changed to "Installation Date" or "Inst.
Date".
2 Switch to Print
Determines whether the installation date is printed on the printout for the total
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
counter.
Service
[0 to 1/1]
0: No Print, 1: Print
3 Total Counter
Displays the total count from the day set with SP5849-001.
[0 to 9999 9999]
Bluetooth Mode
5851 Sets the operation mode for the Bluetooth unit. Press either key.
[0: Public] [1: Private]
Push [Execute] to download the fixed stamp data from the machine ROM onto
the hard disk. Then these stamps can be used by the system. If this is not
5853 done, the user will not have access to the fixed stamps ("Confidential",
"Secret", etc.).
You must always execute this SP after replacing the HDD or after formatting
the HDD. Always switch the machine off and on after executing this SP.
When set to "1" allows reception of firmware data via the local port (IEEE
1284) during a remote ROM update. This setting is reset to zero after the
5856 machine is cycled off and on. Allows the technician to upgrade the firmware
using a parallel cable.
[0 to 1/1]
0: Not allowed, 1: Allowed
1 Switches the debug log feature on and off. The debug log cannot be captured
until this feature is switched on.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Selects the storage device to save debug logs information when the
2 conditions set with SP5-858 are satisfied.
[ 2 to 3 / 2 / 1 /step]
2: HDD, 3: SD Card
Save to HDD
Saves the debug log of the input SC number in memory to the HDD.
5 A unique file name is generated to avoid overwriting existing file names on the
Save to SD Card
6
Saves the debug log of the input SC number in memory to the SD card.
17 Make SD Debug
5858 These SPs select the content of the debugging information to be saved to the
destination selected by SP5857-002.
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
SP5858-003 stores one SC specified by number.
Service
1 Engine SC Error (0:OFF 1:ON)
[0 to 65535 / 0 / 1 ]
1 Key 1
2 Key 2
3 Key 3
These SPs allow you to set up to 10 keys for log files for
4 Key 4 functions that use common memory on the controller board.
[-9999999 to 9999999/1]
5 Key 5
6 Key 6
7 Key 7
8 Key 8
9 Key 9
10 Key 10
5860 SMTP/POP3/IMAP4
[1 to 168/72/1]
20 Sets the amount of time to wait before saving a mail that breaks up during
reception. The received mail is discarded if the remaining portion of the mail is
not received during this prescribed time.
Determines whether the FROM item of the mail header is switched to the
Occasionally, all SMTP certifications may fail with SP5860 006 set to "2" to
enable encryption during SMTP certification for the SMTP server. This can
occur if the SMTP server does not meet RFC standards. In such cases you
can use this SP to set the SMTP certification method directly. However, this
25 SP can be used only after SP5860 003 has been set to "1" (On).
Bit0: LOGIN
Bit1: PLAIN
Bit2: CRAM_MD5
Bit3: DIGEST_MD5
Bit4 to Bit 7: Not Used
26 [0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
0: Microsoft Outlook Express standard
1: Internet Draft standard
2: RFC standard
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
E-Mail Report
5866
This SP controls operation of the email notification function.
1 Report Validity
Disables and re-enables the addition of a date field to the email notification.
[0 to 1/0/1]
5870 Writes to flash ROM the common proof for validating the device for NRS
specifications.
1 Writing
3 Initialize
Wrties the authentication data used for @Remote into the flash ROM.
1 Move Exec
2 Undo Exec
SC Auto Reboot
1 Reboot Setting
[0 to 1/0/1]
0: On, 1: Off
On: default: 0 (Reboots automatically) The machine reboots automatically
Mode Tables
Appendix:
when the machine issues an SC error and logs the SC error code. If the same
Program
Service
SC occurs again, the machine does not reboot.
OFF: 1 (Does not reboot automatically. Changing this setting to "0" sets the
machine to reboot automatically after an SC occurs.
2 Reboot Type
This setting determines how the machine reboots after an SC code is issued.
[0 to 1/0/1]
0: Allows manual reboot, 1: Automatic reboot
This SP clears all security settings, security settings for NCS only, or security
settings for UCS only.
1 All Clear
Option Setup
5878 This SP enables the DOS application (Data Overwrite Security). Do this SP
2 HDD Encryption
5881 Touch [EXECUTE] on the operation panel. Then erase all the fixed phase
block.
Bit Meaning
7 Reserved
Determines whether the scanned documents with the WIM are encrypted when
they are transmitted by an e-mail.
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
Mode Tables
0: Not encrypted, 1: Encrypted
Appendix:
Program
Service
200 Detect Memory Leak
This SP sends a text file to an SD card inserted in SD card Slot 2 (lower slot).
The operation stores. The file is stored in a folder created in the root directory
5887
of the SD card called SD_COUNTER. The file is saved as a text file (*.txt)
prefixed with the number of the machine.
1. Insert the SD card in SD card Slot 2 (lower slot).
2. Select SP5887 then touch [EXECUTE].
3. Touch [Execute] in the message when you are prompted.
1 SDK-1
2 SDK-2
3 SDK-3
4 SDK-4
5 SDK-5
6 SDK-6
PM Double Count
This SP sets the PM counter to count double for paper longer than 420 mm.
5899 [0 to 1/0/1]
0: OFF
1: PM registers a double-count for paper longer than 420 mm in the sub scan
direction.
Selects the brand name and the production name for Windows Plug & Play.
5907 This information is stored in the NVRAM. If the NVRAM is defective, these
names should be registered again.
After selecting, press the "Original Type" key and "#" key at the same time.
When the setting is completed, the beeper sounds five times.
5913 the specified time as elapse. This SP switches the switchover permission
timer on/off.
[0 to 1/1/1]
0: OFF
1: ON
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mechanical Counter Detection
5915 [0 to 2]
0: Not detected
1: Detected
2: Unknown
1 Tray 1
6 Cover Sheet
Enables and disables the document server. This is a security measure that
prevents image data from being left in the temporary area of the HDD. After
5967 changing this setting, you must switch the main switch off and on to enable
the new setting.
[0 to 1/1]
0: ON, 1: OFF
Cherry Server
Selects which version of the Scan Router application program, "Light" or "Full
Device Setting
5985 The NIC and USB support features are built into the GW controller. Use this
SP to enable and disable these features. In order to use the NIC and USB
functions built into the controller board, these SP codes must be set to "1".
1 On Board NIC
0: Disable, 1: Enable
2 On Board USB
SP Print Mode
Prints the SMC report. In the SP mode, press Copy Window to move to the
5990 copy screen, select the paper size, then press Start. Select A4/LT (Sideways)
or larger to ensure that all the information prints. Press SP Window to return
to the SP mode, select the desired print, and press Execute.
Mode Tables
3 User Program Data
Appendix:
Program
Service
4 Logging Data
5 Diagnostic Report
7 NIB Summary
8 Capture Log
22 Scanner SP
24 SDK/J Summary
26 Printer SP
SP Text Mode
5992 Prints the SMC report to a file on an SD card inserted into the SD card slot onr
the right side of the machine operation panel.
4 Logging Data
5 Diagnostic Report
7 NIB Summary
8 Capture Log
22 Scanner SP
24 SDK/J Summary
26 Printer SP
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
[3 to +3/0/0.1 mm]
DF Free Run
6009
Performs an ADF free run in duplex original mode.
1 Simplex
2 Simplex (Stamp)
6016 Allows selection of alternate settings for automatic original size detection.
[0 to 255/0/1]
If the original is small (B6, A5, HLT), the delay sensor detects the leading edge
of the sheet and delays the original at the entrance roller for the prescribed
6020 number of pulses to buckle the leading edge and correct skew.
[0 to 1/1]
0: Delay skew correction only for small originals
1: Delay skew correction for all originals, regardless of size. (May reduce the
scanning speed of the ADF)
Mode Tables
3 EU: 4-Hole
Appendix:
Program
Service
4 NEU: 4-Hole
5 NA: 2-Hole
6 JPN: 1-1Hole
1 JPN: 2-Hole
JPN/NA:
2
3-Hole
3 EU: 4-Hole
4 NEU: 4-Hole
5 NA: 2-Hole
This SP corrects punch hole alignment by correcting the skew of each sheet.
To do this, it adjusts the amount of time the finisher entrance roller remains off
while the exit roller of the machine remains on. This buckles the leading edge
of the sheet slightly against the finisher entrance roller while it remains off.
2 B4 SEF
3 A4 SEF
4 A4 LEF
5 B5 SEF
6 B5 LEF + Value: Increases the time that the finisher entrance roller
remains off.
7 DLT SEF
- Value: Descreases the time that the finisher entrance
8 LG SEF roller remains off.
9 LT SEF
10 LT LEF
11 12*18
12 Other
This SP determines whether the finisher entrance roller stops to correct skew
when paper enters the finisher.
1 A3 SEF
2 B4 SEF
3 A4 SEF
4 A4 LEF
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
5 B5 SEF [0 to 1/0/1]
9 LT SEF
10 LT LEF
11 12*18
12 Other
This SP adjusts the distance between the jogger fences and the sides of the
stack on the finisher stapling tray. The adjustment is done perpendicular to the
direction of paper feed.
1 A3 SEF
2 B4 SEF
[-1.5 to +1.5/0/0.5 mm]
6 B5 LEF
7 DLT SEF
8 LG SEF
9 LT SEF
10 LT LEF
11 12*18
12 Other
Use this SP code to adjust the positions of the jogger fences when the pages
are aligned (jogged) horizontally in the optional output jogger unit. The jogger
fences close in on the sides of the stack on the paper tray. These side fences
move in and out perpendicular to the direction of paper feed.
[-1.5 to +1.5 / 0 / 0.5 mm]
The higher the setting, the narrower the jogger span and the smaller the
gaps between the fences and the edges of the paper. Stacking is tighter.
The lower the setting, the wider the jogger span and the wider the gaps
between the fences and the edges of the paper. Stacking is not as tight.
1 A3 SEF
2 B4 SEF
3 A4 SEF
4 A4 LEF
5 B5 LEF
The settings are done for each paper size.
6 A5 LEF SEF denotes "Short Edge Feed".
LEF denotes "Long Edge Feed".
7 DLT SEF
8 LG SEF
9 LT SEF
10 LT LEF
11 HLT LEF
12 Other
Use this SP to shift the position of the stapling done by the corner stapler of the
finisher. This SP shifts the staple position forward and back across the
direction of paper feed.
Use the " " key to toggle between + and .
A larger value shifts the stapling position to shift forward.
A smaller value shifts the stapling position backward.
Mode Tables
The settings are done for each paper size.
Appendix:
Program
Service
[-3.5 to +3.5 / 0 / 0.5 mm]
1 A3 SEF
2 B4 SEF
3 A4 SEF
4 A4 LEF
5 B5 SEF
8 LG SEF
9 LT SEF
10 LT LEF
11 12*18
12 Other
This SP corrects the folding postion when paper is stapled and folded.
1 A3 SEF
5 DLT SEF
6 LG SEF
7 LT SEF
8 12*18
9 Other
1 A3 SEF
This SP sets the number of times the folding rollers are
2 B4 SEF
driven forward and reverse to sharpen the crease of a folded
3 A4 SEF booklet before it exits the folding unit of the Booklet Finisher.
When set at the default (0):
4 B5 SEF
The folding blade pushes the center of the stack into the
5 DLT SEF nip of the folding roller.
The folding rollers rotate ccw to crease the booklet,
6 LG SEF
reverse cw, then rotate ccw again to crease the booklet
7 LT SEF fold twice before feeding to the folding unit exit rollers.
[1 to 6/0/1]
8 12*18
0:2, 1:5, 2:10, 3:15, 4:20, 5:25, 6:30 (passes)
9 Other
1 A4 LEF This SP sets the number of sheets sent to the pre-stack tray.
With this SP set to the default (3):
2 LT LEF
3 sheets are sent to the pre-stack tray.
3 B5 LEF When the 4th sheet feeds, the 4th sheet and 3 sheets from
the pre-stack tray are sent to the stapling tray together.
4 10.5"x7.25"
Note: You may need to adjust this setting or switch it off
5 A4 SEF when feeding thick or slick paper.
[0 to 4/3/1]
Mode Tables
6 LT SEF
Appendix:
Program
0: None
Service
7 B5 SEF 1: 1 sheet
2: 2 sheets
8 10.5*7.25
3: 3 sheets
9 Other 4: 4 sheets
1 A3 SEF
2 B4 SEF
3 A4 SEF
4 A4 LEF
7 DLT SEF Note: After installation of the Output Jogger Unit B703, this
SP must be set to "1" for the jogging motor to operate the
8 LG SEF jogging fences.
9 LT SEF
10 LT LEF
11 HLT LEF
12 Other
Packing Mode: Before you move the finisher to a new location, do this SP.
When you switch on the machine after you moved it, the finisher automatically
goes to the ready condition
This SP corrects the folding position when paper is stapled and folded in the
D612Booklet Finisher.
1 A3 SEF
[-3 to +3/0/0.2 mm]
2 B4 SEF
+ Value: Shifts staple position toward the crease.
3 A4 SEF - Value: Shifts staple position away from the
crease.
4 B5 SEF
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
5 DLT SEF
6 LG SEF
7 LT SEF
8 12*18 SEF
9 Custom Size
Touch [1:+1 Time] to have the jogger fences press against the sides of the
stack on the staple tray one more time to align the stack for corner stapling.
[0:Default] or [1:+1 Time]
2 B4 SEF 8 LG SEF
3 A4 SEF 9 LT SEF
4 A4 LEF 10 LT LEF
5 B5 SEF 11 Other
6 B5 LEF
Turn on the electrical components of the finisher individually for test purposes.
Mode Tables
6 1st Fold LT SEF
Appendix:
Program
Service
7 1st Fold 12*18
1 Free Run 1
2 Free Run 2
3 Free Run 3
4 Free Run 4
1 A3 SEF
2 B4 SEF
3 A4 SEF
4 DLT SEF
6 LT SEF
7 12*18
8 8-Kai
19 Other
1 A3 SEF
2 B4 SEF
3 A4 SEF
4 DLT SEF
Mode Tables
6 LT SEF
Appendix:
Program
Service
7 12*18
8 8-Kai
19 Other
2 B4 SEF
3 A4 SEF
4 DLT SEF
5 LG SEF
6 LT SEF
7 12x18
8 8-Kai
9 B5 SEF
11 13"x19"
12 12.6"x19.2"
13 12.6"x18.5"
14 13"x18"
15 SRA3
16 SRA4
17 226x310
18 310x432
19 Other
2 B4 SEF
3 A4 SEF
4 DLT SEF
5 LG SEF
Mode Tables
6 LT SEF
Appendix:
Program
Service
7 12*18
8 8-Kai
9 B5 SEF
19 Other
2 B4 SEF
3 A4 SEF
4 DLT SEF
5 LG SEF
6 LT SEF
7 12*18
8 8-Kai
9 B5 SEF
19 Other
2 B4 SEF
3 A4 SEF
4 DLT SEF
5 LG SEF
Mode Tables
6 LT SEF
Appendix:
Program
Service
7 12*18
8 8-Kai
9 B5 SEF
19 Other
2 B4 SEF
3 A4 SEF
4 DLT SEF
5 LG SEF
6 LT SEF
7 12*18
8 8-Kai
9 B5 SEF
19 Other
1 A3 SEF
2 B4 SEF
3 A4 SEF
4 DLT SEF
5 LG SEF
[-4 to 4 / 0 / 0.2 mm]
Mode Tables
6 LT SEF
Appendix:
Program
Service
7 12*18
8 8-Kai
9 B5 SEF
19 Other
1 A3 SEF
2 B4 SEF
3 A4 SEF
4 DLT SEF
5 LG SEF
[-4 to 4 / 0 / 0.2 mm]
6 LT SEF
7 12*18
8 8-Kai
9 B5 SEF
19 Other
1 A3 SEF
2 B4 SEF
3 A4 SEF
4 DLT SEF
6 LT SEF
8 8-Kai
9 B5 SEF
19 Other
1 A3 SEF
2 B4 SEF
3 A4 SEF
4 DLT SEF
6 LT SEF
8 8-Kai
9 B5 SEF
19 Other
1 A3 SEF
2 B4 SEF
3 A4 SEF
4 DLT SEF
5 LG SEF
[-4 to 4 / 0 / 0.2 mm]
Mode Tables
6 LT SEF
Appendix:
Program
Service
7 12*18
8 8-Kai
9 B5 SEF
19 Other
1 A3 SEF
2 B4 SEF
3 A4 SEF
4 DLT SEF
5 LG SEF
[-2 to 2 / 0 / 0.5 mm]
6 LT SEF
7 12*18
8 8-Kai
9 B5 SEF
19 Other
1 A3 SEF
2 B4 SEF
3 A4 SEF
4 DLT SEF
5 LG SEF
[-4 to 2 / 0 / 1 mm]
6 LT SEF
7 12*18
8 8-Kai
9 B5 SEF
19 Other
Adjusts the registration motor timing. This timing determines the amount of
paper buckle at registration. (A higher setting causes more buckling.)
Limits the number of pages to be on the top tray to trigger the the tray full alert.
[0 to 250/0/1]
1 Paper Detect Sn 1
3 Paper Overflow Sn 1
4 Paper Detect Sn 2
Mode Tables
6 Paper Overflow Sn 2
Appendix:
Turn on the electrical components of
Program
Service
7 Paper Detect Sn 3 the finisher individually for testing.
8 Paper Overflow Sn 3
9 Paper Detect Sn 4
11 Paper Overflow Sn 4
12 Paper Detect Sn 5
13 Paper Overflow Sn 5
14 Paper Detect Sn 6
16 Paper Overflow Sn 6
Turn on the electrical components of
17 Paper Detect Sn 7
the finisher individually for testing.
18 Paper Overflow Sn 7
19 Paper Detect Sn 8
21 Paper Overflow Sn 8
22 Paper Detect Sn 9
23 Paper Overflow Sn 9
Free Run 1
1 All A3 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
3 NA: 8.5x14 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
4 NA: 11x8.5 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
5 NA: 8.5x11 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
Mode Tables
6 EU, CHN: 8K [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
Appendix:
Program
Service
7 EU, CHN: 16K (267x195) [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6 Grip Sensor [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
8 Exit Sensor [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
10 Width Sensor 1 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
11 Width Sensor 2 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
12 Width Sensor 3 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
13 Length Sensor 1 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
14 Length Sensor 2 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
15 Length Sensor 3 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
Stamp Unit
Extra Staples
0 to 50 (Initial: 0)
1
[0 to 50 /0/1]
0 to 50 (Initial: 0)
2
[0 to 50 /0/1]
6900 Sets the timing for raising and lowering the bottom plate of the ADF.
[0 to 1/1]
0: Original set, 1: Copy start
1 ON/OFF
Mode Tables
Select ON or OFF of the intermittent shading in running the copy app.
Appendix:
Program
Service
0: OFF (do shading every time) / 1: ON
2 Interval
Total SC Counter
7401
Displays the total number of SCs logged.
1 SC Counter
2 Total SC Counter
SC History
7403
Displays the latest 10 service call codes
1 Latest
2 Latest 1
3 Latest 2
4 Latest 3
5 Latest 4
6 Latest 5
7 Latest 6
8 Latest 7
9 Latest 8
10 Latest 9
1 Jam Counter
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
Total Original Jam
7503
Displays the total number of copy jams.
Displays the list of possible locations where a jam could have occurred. These jams are
caused by the failure of a sensor to activate. These are jams when the paper does not
activate the sensor.
Paper late error: Paper failed to arrive at prescribed time.
Paper lag error: Paper failed to leave at prescribed time.
1 At Power On
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
72 Duplex Transport SN 3: Lag
Service
74 LCT Relay SN: Lag
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
173 Fin: Stack Feed-Out Belt Motor
Service
174 Fin: Punch Motor
Displays the list of possible locations where an original jam could have
occurred. These jams are caused by the failure of a sensor to activate.
1 At Power On
54 Registration Sensor: On
55 Interval Sensor: On
5 A4 LEF
6 A5 LEF
38 LT LEF
44 HLT LEF
132 A3
134 A5 SEF
141 B4 SEF
142 B5 SEF
164 LG SEF
255 Others
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
7507 Plotter Jam History
1 Last
2 Latest 1
Displays the copy jam history (the most recent 10 jams)
5 Latest 4 TOTAL:0000334
DATE:Mon Mar 15 11:44:50 2000
6 Latest 5 where:
10 Latest 9
Displays the original jam history of the transfer unit in groups of 10, starting
with the most recent 10 jams. Display contents are as follows:
7508 CODE is the SP7-505-* number.
SIZE is the paper size code in hex. (See "Paper Size Hex Codes" below.)
TOTAL is the total jam error count (SP7003)
DATE is the date the previous jam occurred
1 Last
2 Latest 1
3 Latest 2
8 Latest 7
9 Latest 8
10 Latest 9
A4 LEF 05 B4 SEF 8D
A5 LEF 06 B5 SEF 8E
LT LEF 26 LG SEF A4
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
A4 SEF 85 Others FF
Service
A5 SEF 86
60 Brushless Motor
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
7617 Parts PM Counter Display
1 Normal
2 DF
1 Normal
2 DF
Display PM Count
7621
0 to 99999999
Clear PM Count
7622
This SP clears the PM counts for the components below.
0 to 99999999
0 to 99999999
0 to 99999999
0 to 99999999
1 Developer
2 Hot Roller
3 Pressure Roller
7 Cleaning Roller
9 Web Roll
11 Web Bushings
12 Development Filter
16 Grid Plate
17 Cleaning Pad
18 Cleaning Blade
19 Cleaning Brush
20 Transfer Belt
22 Ozone Filter
Mode Tables
23 ADF Pick-up Roller
Appendix:
Program
Service
24 ADF Feed Belt
26 Feed Roller-Tray1
27 Pick-up Roller-Tray1
28 Separation Roller-Tray1
29 Feed Roller-Tray2
30 Pick-up Roller-Tray2
31 Separation Roller-Tray2
32 Feed Roller-Tray3
33 Pick-up Roller-Tray3
34 Separation Roller-Tray3
35 Feed Roller-Tray4
36 Pick-up Roller-Tray4
37 Separation Roller-Tray4
38 Feed Roller-LCT
39 Pick-up Roller-LCT
40 Separation Roller-LCT
47 Dust Filter
48 Custom 1
49 Custom 2
50 Custom 3
51 Custom 4
52 Custom Tray 1 1
53 Custom Tray 1 2
54 Custom Tray 2 1
55 Custom Tray 2 2
56 Custom Tray 3 1
57 Custom Tray 3 2
58 Custom Tray 4 1
59 Custom Tray 4 2
62 Custom ADF 1
63 Custom ADF 2
Mode Tables
Appendix:
7628
Program
Service
Clear the PM counter of all the PM parts that exceed the timing of exchanging.
Displays firmware information for main machine and all other connected
devices.
PM Counter Display
7803
Displays the PM counter since the last PM.
PM Counter Reset
7804
Resets the PM counter.
1 Error Total
A request for the count total failed at power on. This error will occur if the
device is installed but disconnected.
2 Error Staple
The request for a staple count failed at power on. This error will occur if the
device is installed but disconnected.
7832 Push [#] to display a list of error codes. Nothing is displayed if no errors have
occurred.
Mode Tables
255 All Clear
Appendix:
Program
Service
Total Memory Size
7836
Displays the contents of the memory on the controller board.
1 File Name
2 Number of Lines
3 Location
1 Developer
2 Hot Roller
3 Pressure Roller
7 Cleaning Roller
9 Web Roll
11 Web Bushings
12 Development Filter
16 Grid Plate
17 Cleaning Pad
18 Cleaning Blade
19 Cleaning Brush
20 Transfer Belt
22 Ozone Filter
Mode Tables
27 Pick up Roller Tray1
Appendix:
Program
Service
28 Separation Roller Tray 1
47 Dust Filter
48 Custom 1
49 Custom 2
50 Custom 3
51 Custom 4
52 Custom Tray 1 1
53 Custom Tray 1 2
54 Custom Tray 2 1
55 Custom Tray 2 2
56 Custom Tray 3 1
57 Custom Tray 3 2
58 Custom Tray 4 1
59 Custom Tray 4 2
62 Custom ADF 1
63 Custom ADF 2
Many of these counters are provided for features that are currently not available, such as sending
color faxes, and so on. However, here are some Group 8 codes that when used in combination
with others, can provide useful information.
SP8401 to SP8406 The number of pages printed from the document server
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
SP8691 to SP8696 The number of pages sent from the document server
C: Copy application.
Totals (pages, jobs, etc.) executed for each
P: Print application. application when the job was not stored on the
document server.
S: Scan application.
The Group 8 SP codes are limited to 17 characters, forced by the necessity of displaying them on
the small LCDs of printers and faxes that also use these SPs. Read over the list of abbreviations
below and refer to it again if you see the name of an SP that you do not understand.
Apl Application
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
B/W Black & White
Service
Bk Black
C Cyan
Comb Combine
Comp Compression
Deliv Delivery
Emul Emulation
FC Full Color
Get Print Counter. For jobs 10 pages or less, this counter does not count
up. For jobs larger than 10 pages, this counter counts up by the number
GPC
that is in excess of 10 (e.g., for an 11-page job, the counter counts up
11-10 =1)
Image Edit performed on the original with the copier GUI, e.g. border
ImgEdt
removal, adding stamps, page numbers, etc.
K Black (YMCK)
Mag Magnification
Print Job Manager/Desk Top Editor: A pair of utilities that allows print jobs
Palm 2 to be distributed evenly among the printers on the network, and allows
files to moved around, combined, and converted to different formats..
PC Personal Computer
Pages. A page is the total scanned surface of the original. Duplex pages
PGS count as two pages, and A3 simplex count as two pages if the A3/DLT
counter SP is switched ON.
Ppr Paper
Red (Toner Remaining). Applies to the wide format model A2 only. This
R
machine is under development and currently not available.
Rez Resolution
Scn Scan
Mode Tables
S-to-Email Scan-to-E-mail
Appendix:
Program
Service
SMC report printed with SP5990. All of the Group 8 counters are
SMC
recorded in the SMC report.
Svr Server
All of the Group 8 SPs are reset with SP5 801 1 Memory All Clear, or the Counter Reset
SP7 808.
8005 S:Total Jobs server, plus the number of times a file already on the
document server is used.
8006 L:Total Jobs
These SPs reveal the number of times an application is used, not the number of pages
processed.
When an application is opened for image input or output, this counts as one job.
Interrupted jobs (paper jams, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.
Only jobs executed by the customer are counted. Jobs executed by the customer engineer
using the SP modes are not counted.
When using secure printing (when a password is required to start the print job), the job is
counted at the time when either "Delete Data" or "Specify Output" is specified.
When a copy job on the document server is printed, SP8022 also increments, and when a
print job stored on the document server is printed, SP8024 also increments.
When an original is both copied and stored on the document server, the C: and L: counters
both increment.
When a print job is stored on the document server, only the L: counter increments.
When the user presses the Document Server button to store the job on the document server,
only the L: counter increments.
When the user enters document server mode and prints data stored on the document server,
only the L: counter increments.
When an image received from Palm 2 is received and stored, the L: counter increments.
When the customer prints a report (user code list, for example), the O: counter increments.
8011 T:Jobs/LS
8012 C:Jobs/LS
These SPs count the number of jobs stored to the document
8013 F:Jobs/LS server by each application, to reveal how local storage is
being used for input.
8014 P:Jobs/LS
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8015 S:Jobs/LS The L: counter counts the number of jobs stored from within
the document server mode screen at the operation panel.
8016 L:Jobs/LS
Mode Tables
8017 O:Jobs/LS
Appendix:
Program
Service
When a scan job is sent to the document server, the S: counter increments. When you enter
document server mode and then scan an original, the L: counter increments.
When a print job is sent to the document server, the P: counter increments.
When a network application sends data to the document server, the O: counter increments.
When an image from Palm 2 is stored on the document server, the O: counter increments.
8021 T:Pjob/LS
8022 C:Pjob/LS
These SPs reveal how files printed from the document server
8023 F:Pjob/LS
were stored on the document server originally.
8024 P:Pjob/LS [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
The L: counter counts the number of jobs stored from within
8025 S:Pjob/LS
the document server mode screen at the operation panel.
8026 L:Pjob/LS
8027 O:Pjob/LS
When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with another application, the C:
counter increments.
When an application like DeskTopBinder merges a copy job that was stored on the document
server with a print job that was stored on the document server, the C: and P: counters both
increment.
When a job already on the document server is printed with another application, the L: counter
increments.
When a scanner job stored on the document server is printed with another application, the S:
counter increments. If the original was scanned from within document server mode, then the
L: counter increments.
When images stored on the document server by a network application (including Palm 2), are
printed with another application, the O: counter increments.
When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with a network application (Web
Image Monitor, for example), the C: counter increments.
8031 T:Pjob/DesApl
8032 C:Pjob/DesApl
8033 F:Pjob/DesApl
8034 P:Pjob/DesApl
8035 S:Pjob/DesApl
8036 L:Pjob/DesApl
8037 O:Pjob/DesApl
These SPs reveal what applications were used to output documents from the
document server.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
The L: counter counts the number of jobs printed from within the document
server mode screen at the operation panel.
When documents already stored on the document server are printed, the count for the
application that started the print job is incremented.
When the print job is started from a network application (Desk Top Binder, Web Image Monitor,
etc.) the L: counter increments.
Mode Tables
8047 O:TX Jobs/LS
Appendix:
Program
Service
These SPs count the applications that stored files on the document server
that were later accessed for transmission over the telephone line or over a
network (attached to an e-mail).
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
Note: Jobs merged for sending are counted separately.
The L: counter counts the number of jobs scanned from within the document
server mode screen at the operation panel.
When a stored copy job is sent from the document server, the C: counter increments.
When images stored on the document server by a network application or Palm2 are sent as
an e-mail, the O: counter increments.
These SPs count the applications used to send files from the document server
over the telephone line or over a network (attached to an e-mail). Jobs merged
for sending are counted separately.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
The L: counter counts the number of jobs sent from within the document server
mode screen at the operation panel.
If the send is started from Desk Top Binder or Web Image Monitor, for example, then the O:
counter increments.
T:FIN Jobs
8061 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs total the finishing methods. The finishing method is specified by the
application.
C:FIN Jobs
8062 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for copy jobs only. The finishing method is
specified by the application.
F:FIN Jobs
8063 [0 to 9999999/ 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for fax jobs only. The finishing method is
specified by the application.
P:FIN Jobs
8064 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for print jobs only. The finishing method is
specified by the application.
S:FIN Jobs
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8065 These SPs total finishing methods for scan jobs only. The finishing method is
specified by the application.
Note: Finishing features for scan jobs are not available at this time.
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
L:FIN Jobs
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8066 These SPs total finishing methods for jobs output from within the document
server mode screen at the operation panel. The finishing method is specified
from the print window within document server mode.
O:FIN Jobs
8067 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for jobs executed by an external application,
over the network. The finishing method is specified by the application.
8 Inside-Fold
9 Three-in-Fold
10 Three-Out-Fold
11 Four-Fold
12 Kannon-Fold
13 Perfect Bind
14 Ring Bind
T:Jobs/PGS
8071 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of jobs broken down by the number of pages in
the job, regardless of which application was used.
C:Jobs/PGS
8072 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of copy jobs by size based on the
number of pages in the job.
F:Jobs/PGS
8073 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of copy jobs by size based on the
number of pages in the job.
P:Jobs/PGS
8074 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of print jobs by size based on the
number of pages in the job.
S:Jobs/PGS
8075 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of scan jobs by size based on the
number of pages in the job.
L:Jobs/PGS
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8076 These SPs count and calculate the number of jobs printed from within the
document server mode window at the operation panel, by the number of pages
Mode Tables
Appendix:
in the job.
Program
Service
O:Jobs/PGS
8077 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of "Other" application jobs (Web
Image Monitor, Palm 2, etc.) by size based on the number of pages in the job.
1 1 Page 8 21 to 50 Pages
For example: When a copy job stored on the document server is printed in document server
mode, the appropriate L: counter (SP8076 0xx) increments.
Interrupted jobs (paper jam, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.
If a job is paused and re-started, it counts as one job.
If the finisher runs out of staples during a print and staple job, then the job is counted at the
time the error occurs.
For copy jobs (SP 8072) and scan jobs (SP 8075), the total is calculated by multiplying the
number of sets of copies by the number of pages scanned. (One duplex page counts as 2.)
The first test print and subsequent test prints to adjust settings are added to the number of
pages of the copy job (SP 8072).
When printing the first page of a job from within the document server screen, the page is
counted.
T:FAX TX Jobs
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8111 These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent by
fax, either directly or using a file stored on the document server, on a telephone
line.
F:FAX TX Jobs
8113 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent by fax
directly on a telephone line.
1 B/W
2 Color
T:IFAX TX Jobs
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8121 These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent,
either directly or using a file stored on the document server, as fax images
using I-Fax.
F:IFAX TX Jobs
8123 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent (not stored
Mode Tables
Appendix:
on the document server), as fax images using I-Fax.
Program
Service
1 B/W
2 Color
The counters for color are provided for future use; the color fax feature is not available at this
time.
The fax job is counted when the job is scanned for sending, not when the job is sent.
T:S-to-Email Jobs
8131 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of jobs scanned and attached to an
e-mail, regardless of whether the document server was used or not.
S:S-to-Email Jobs
8135 These SPs count the number of jobs scanned and attached to an e-mail,
without storing the original on the document server.
T:Deliv Jobs/Svr
8141 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of jobs scanned and sent to a Scan Router
server.
S:Deliv Jobs/Svr
8145 These SPs count the number of jobs scanned in scanner mode and sent to a
Scan Router server.
T:Deliv Jobs/PC
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8151 These SPs count the total number of jobs scanned and sent to a folder on a
PC (Scan-to-PC).
Note: At the present time, 8151 and 8155 perform identical counts.
S:Deliv Jobs/PC
8155
These SPs count the total number of jobs scanned and sent with Scan-to-PC.
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
1 B/W Count for the number of jobs with black-and-white.
001 B/W
002 Color
003 ACS
These SPs count the pages scanned by each application that uses the
scanner to scan images.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
SP 8191 to 8196 count the number of scanned sides of pages, not the number of physical
pages.
These counters do not count reading user stamp data, or reading color charts to adjust color.
Previews done with a scanner driver are not counted.
A count is done only after all images of a job have been scanned.
Scans made in SP mode are not counted.
Examples:
If 3 B5 pages and 1 A3 page are scanned with the scanner application but not stored, the S:
count is 4.
If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server using the Store File
button in the Copy mode window, the C: count is 6 and the L: count is 6.
If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied but not stored, the C: count is 6.
If you enter document server mode then scan 6 pages, the L: count is 6.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of large pages input with the scanner for scan
and copy jobs.
Note: These counters are displayed in the SMC Report, and in the User Tools
Mode Tables
Appendix:
display.
Program
Service
8203 F:LSize Scan PGS
This SP counts the total number of large pages input with the scanner for fax
jobs only.
Note: These counters are displayed in the SMC Report, and in the User Tools
display.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of large pages input with the scanner for scan
jobs only.
Note: These counters are displayed in the SMC Report, and in the User Tools
display.
These SPs count the number of pages scanned into the document server.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
The L: counter counts the number of pages stored from within the document
server mode screen at the operation panel, and with the Store File button from
within the Copy mode screen
8221 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages fed through the ADF for front and
back side scanning.
1 Front
Mode Tables
Appendix:
scanning.
Program
Service
With an ADF that cannot scan both sides simultaneously, the Front side
count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex front side
scanning. (The front side is determined by which side the user loads face
up.)
2 Back
When 1 sheet is fed for duplex scanning the Front count is 1 and the Back count is 1.
If a jam occurs during the job, recovery processing is not counted to avoid double counting.
Also, the pages are not counted if the jam occurs before the first sheet is output.
Scan PGS/Mode
8231 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by each ADF mode to
determine the work load on the ADF.
1 Large Volume
Selectable. Large copy jobs that cannot be loaded in the ADF at one time.
2 SADF
3 Mixed Size
4 Custom Size
5 Platen
Book mode. Raising the ADF and placing the original directly on the platen.
If the scan mode is changed during the job, for example, if the user switches from ADF to
Platen mode, the count is done for the last selected mode.
If the user selects "Mixed Sizes" for copying in the platen mode, the Mixed Size count is
enabled.
In the SADF mode if the user copies 1 page in platen mode and then copies 2 pages with
SADF, the Platen count is 1 and the SADF count is 3.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of scanned pages by original type for all
jobs, regardless of which application was used.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Copy jobs.
Mode Tables
8243 F:Scan PGS/Org
Appendix:
Program
Service
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Fax jobs.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Scan jobs.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned and stored from within the
document server mode screen at the operation panel, and with the Store File
button from within the Copy mode screen
If the scan mode is changed during the job, for example, if the user switches from ADF to
Platen mode, the count is done for the last selected mode.
These SPs show how many times Image Edit features have been selected at
the operation panel for each application. Some examples of these editing
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
features are:
Service
Erase> Border
Erase> Center
Image Repeat
Centering
Positive/Negative
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
Note: The count totals the number of times the edit features have been used. A
detailed breakdown of exactly which features have been used is not given.
The L: counter counts the number of pages stored from within the document server mode
screen at the operation panel, and with the Store File button from within the Copy mode
screen.
These SPs count the number of pages scanned using a TWAIN driver. These
counters reveal how the TWAIN driver is used for delivery functions.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
Note: At the present time, these counters perform identical counts.
T:Scan PGS/Size
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8301 These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by all applications.
Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and output (printing)
page size [SP 8-441].
C:Scan PGS/Size
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8302 These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Copy
application. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and
output (printing) page size [SP 8-442].
F:Scan PGS/Size
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8303 These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Fax
application. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and
output page size [SP 8-443].
S:Scan PGS/Size
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8305 These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Scan
application. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and
output page size [SP 8-445].
L:Scan PGS/Size
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8306 These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned and stored from
within the document server mode screen at the operation panel, and with the
Store File button from within the Copy mode screen. Use these totals to
compare original page size (scanning) and output page size [SP 8-446].
1 A3
2 A4
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
3 A5
4 B4
5 B5
6 DLT
7 LG
8 LT
9 HLT
10 Full Bleed
T:Scan PGS/Rez
8311 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by resolution setting the total number of pages scanned by
applications that can specify resolution settings.
S:Scan PGS/Rez
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8315 These SPs count by resolution setting the total number of pages scanned by
applications that can specify resolution settings.
Note: At the present time, 8311 and 8315 perform identical counts.
1 1200dpi to
2 600dpi to 1199dpi
3 400dpi to 599dpi
4 200dpi to 399dpi
5 to 199dpi
Mode Tables
8387 O:Total PrtPGS
Appendix:
Program
Service
These SPs count the number of pages printed by the customer. The counter for
the application used for storing the pages increments.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
The L: counter counts the number of pages stored from within the document
server mode screen at the operation panel. Pages stored with the Store File
button from within the Copy mode screen go to the C: counter.
When the A3/DLT double count function is switched on with SP5104, 1 A3/DLT page is
counted as 2.
When several documents are merged for a print job, the number of pages stored are counted
for the application that stored them.
These counters are used primarily to calculate charges on use of the machine, so the
following pages are not counted as printed pages:
Blank pages in a duplex printing job.
Blank pages inserted as document covers, chapter title sheets, and slip sheets.
Reports printed to confirm counts.
All reports done in the service mode (service summaries, engine maintenance reports, etc.)
Test prints for machine image adjustment.
Error notification reports.
Partially printed pages as the result of a copier jam.
LSize PrtPGS
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8391 These SPs count pages printed on paper sizes A3/DLT and larger.
Note: In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these counters are
also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine.
8401 T:PrtPGS/LS
8402 C:PrtPGS/LS
8403 F:PrtPGS/LS
8404 P:PrtPGS/LS
8405 S:PrtPGS/LS
8406 L:PrtPGS/LS
These SPs count the number of pages printed from the document server. The
counter for the application used to print the pages is incremented.
The L: counter counts the number of jobs stored from within the document
server mode screen at the operation panel.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the L: count.
8411 Prints/Duplex
This SP counts the amount of paper (front/back counted as 1 page) used for
duplex printing. Last pages printed only on one side are not counted.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
8421 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of
pages processed for printing. This is the total for all applications.
C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
8422 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of
pages processed for printing by the copier application.
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
F:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
8423 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of
pages processed for printing by the fax application.
P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
8424 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of
pages processed for printing by the printer application.
S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
8425 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of
pages processed for printing by the scanner application.
L:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8426 These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of
pages processed for printing from within the document server mode window
at the operation panel.
O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
8427 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of
pages processed for printing by Other applications
1 Simplex> Duplex
2 Duplex> Duplex
3 Book> Duplex
4 Simplex Combine
5 Duplex Combine
12 Booklet
13 Magazine
14 2-in-1 + Booklet
15 4-in-1 + Booklet
16 6-in-1 + Booklet
17 8-in-1 + Booklet
18 9-in-1 + Booklet
19 2-in-1 + Magazine
20 4-in-1 + Magazine
21 6-in-1 + Magazine
22 8-in-1 + Magazine
23 9-in-1 + Magazine
24 16-in-1 + Magazine
These counts (SP8421 to SP8427) are especially useful for customers who need to improve
their compliance with ISO standards for the reduction of paper consumption.
Pages that are only partially printed with the n-Up functions are counted as 1 page.
Here is a summary of how the counters work for Booklet and Magazine modes:
Booklet Magazine
1 1 1 1
Mode Tables
Appendix:
2 2 2 2
Program
Service
3 2 3 2
4 2 4 2
5 3 5 4
6 4 6 4
7 4 7 4
8 4 8 4
T:PrtPGS/ImgEdt
8431 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features
below, regardless of which application was used.
C:PrtPGS/ImgEdt
8432 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features
below with the copy application.
P:PrtPGS/ImgEdt
8434 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features
below with the print application.
L:PrtPGS/ImgEdt
8436 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of pages output from within the document
server mode window at the operation panel with the three features below.
O:PrtPGS/ImgEdt
8437 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features
below with Other applications.
1 Cover/Slip Sheet
Total number of covers or slip sheets inserted. The count for a cover printed on
both sides counts 2.
2 Series/Book
The number of pages printed in series (one side) or printed as a book with
booklet right/left pagination.
3 User Stamp
The number of pages printed where stamps were applied, including page
numbering and date stamping.
T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
8441 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by all
applications.
C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
8442 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the copy
application.
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
8443 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the fax
application.
P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
8444 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the printer
application.
S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
8445 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the
scanner application.
L:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
8446 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed from within
the document server mode window at the operation panel.
O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
8447 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by other
applications.
1 A3
2 A4
3 A5
4 B4
5 B5
6 DLT
7 LG
8 LT
9 HLT
10 Full Bleed
PrtPGS/Ppr Tray
8451 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of sheets fed from each paper feed station.
2 Tray 1 Copier
3 Tray 2 Copier
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
12 Tray 11 Currently not used.
Service
13 Tray 12 Currently not used.
T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by all applications.
These counters are not the same as the PM counter. The PM counter is
8461 based on feed timing to accurately measure the service life of the feed
rollers. However, these counts are based on output timing.
Blank sheets (covers, chapter covers, slip sheets) are also counted.
During duplex printing, pages printed on both sides count as 1, and a page
printed on one side counts as 1.
C:PrtPGS/Ppr Type
8462 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the copy
application.
F:PrtPGS/Ppr Type
8463 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the fax
application.
P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type
8464 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the printer
application.
L:PrtPGS/Ppr Type
8466 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed from within the
document server mode window at the operation panel.
1 Normal
2 Recycled
3 Special
4 Thick
5 Normal (Back)
6 Thick (Back)
7 OHP
8 Other
PrtPGS/Mag
8471 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by magnification rate the number of pages printed.
1 - 49%
2 50% to 99%
3 100%
4 101% to 200%
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
5 201% -
Counts are done for magnification adjusted for pages, not only on the operation panel but
performed remotely with an external network application capable of performing magnification
adjustment as well.
Magnification adjustments done with printer drivers with PC applications such as Excel are
also counted.
Magnification adjustments done for adjustments after they have been stored on the document
server are not counted.
Magnification adjustments performed automatically during Auto Reduce/Enlarge copying are
counted.
The magnification rates of blank cover sheets, slip sheets, etc. are automatically assigned a
rate of 100%.
8481 T:PrtPGS/TonSave
8484 P:PrtPGS/TonSave
These SPs count the number of pages printed with the Toner Save feature
switched on.
Note: These SPs return the same results as this SP is limited to the Print
application.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
T:PrtPGS/Emul
8511 These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of pages
printed.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
P:PrtPGS/Emul
8514 These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of pages
printed.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
1 RPCS
2 RPDL
3 PS3
4 R98
5 R16
6 GL/GL2
7 R55
8 RTIFF
9 PDF
10 PCL5e/5c
11 PCL XL
12 IPDL-C
14 Other
15 IPDS
SP8511 and SP8514 return the same results as they are both limited to the Print application.
Print jobs output to the document server are not counted.
T:PrtPGS/FIN
8521 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by all
applications.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
C:PrtPGS/FIN
8522 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the
Copy application.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
Mode Tables
F:PrtPGS/FIN
Appendix:
Program
Service
8523 [0 to 9999999/ 1]
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the
Fax application.
P:PrtPGS/FIN
8524 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the
Print application.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
S:PrtPGS/FIN
8525 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the
Scanner application.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
L:PrtPGS/FIN
8526 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed from
within the document server mode window at the operation panel.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
1 Sort
2 Stack
3 Staple
4 Booklet
5 Z-Fold
6 Punch
7 Other
If stapling is selected for finishing and the stack is too large for stapling, the unstapled
pages are still counted.
The counts for staple finishing are based on output to the staple tray, so jam recoveries
are counted.
8531 Staples
1 Perfect-Bind
2 Ring-Bind
Mode Tables
8564 P: A Sheet of Paper
Appendix:
Program
Service
8566 L: A Sheet of Paper
2 Total: UnderA3/DLT
3 Duplex: OverA3/DLT
T:Counter
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total output broken down by color output, regardless of
8581 the application used. In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these
counters are also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine.
Note: This SP is expanded for color MFP and color LP machines. For this
machine, the count is done for black only.
O:Counter
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8591 These SPs count the totals for A3/DLT paper use, number of duplex pages
printed, and the number of staples used. These totals are for Other (O:)
applications only.
1 A3/DLT
2 Duplex
1 B/W
T:FAX TX PGS
8631 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to a
telephone number.
F:FAX TX PGS
8633 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to a
telephone number.
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
1 BW
2 Color
If a document has color and black-and-white pages mixed, the pages are counted separately
as B/W or Color.
At the present time, this feature is provided for the Fax application only so SP8631 and
SP8633 are the same.
The counts include error pages.
If a document is sent to more than one destination with a Group transmission, the count is
done for each destination.
Polling transmissions are counted but polling RX are not.
Relay, memory, and confidential mailbox transmissions and are counted for each destination.
T:FAX TX PGS
8641 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to as fax
images using I-Fax.
F:FAX TX PGS
8643 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by Fax as fax
images using I-Fax.
1 BW
2 Color
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages attached to an
e-mail for both the Scan and document server applications.
Note: This SP is expanded for color MFP and color LP machines. For this
machine, the count is done for black only.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages attached to an
e-mail for the Scan application only.
Note: This SP is expanded for color MFP and color LP machines. For this
machine, the count is done for black only.
1 B/W
For SP8651 and SP8655 the count for B/W and Color pages is done after the document is
stored on the HDD. If the job is cancelled before it is stored, the pages are not counted.
If Scan-to-Email is used to send a 10-page document to 5 addresses, the count is 10 (the
pages are sent to the same SMTP server together).
If Scan-to-PC is used to send a 10-page document to 5 folders, the count is 50 (the document
is sent to each destination of the SMB/FTP server).
Due to restrictions on some devices, if Scan-to-Email is used to send a 10-page document to
a large number of destinations, the count may be divided and counted separately. For
example, if a 10-page document is sent to 200 addresses, the count is 10 for the first 100
destinations and the count is also 10 for the second 100 destinations, for a total of 20.).
T:Deliv PGS/Svr
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8661 These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a Scan
Router server by both Scan and LS applications.
Note: This SP is expanded for color MFP and color LP machines. For this
machine, the count is done for black only.
S:Deliv PGS/Svr
Mode Tables
Appendix:
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
Program
Service
8665 These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a Scan
Router server by the Scan application.
Note: This SP is expanded for color MFP and color LP machines. For this
machine, the count is done for black only.
The B/W and Color counts are done after the document is stored on the HDD of the Scan
Router server.
If the job is canceled before storage on the Scan Router server finishes, the counts are not
done.
The count is executed even if regardless of confirmation of the arrival at the Scan Router
server.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a folder
on a PC (Scan-to-PC) with the Scan and LS applications.
Note: This SP is expanded for color MFP and color LP machines. For this
machine, the count is done for black only.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent with
Scan-to-PC with the Scan application.
Note: This SP is expanded for color MFP and color LP machines. For this
machine, the count is done for black only.
1 B/W
2 Color
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages sent by PC Fax. These SPs are
provided for the Fax application only, so the counts for SP8681 and SP8683
are the same.
This counts pages sent from a PC using a PC fax application, from the PC through the copier
to the destination.
When sending the same message to more than one place using broadcasting, the pages are
only counted once. (For example, a 10-page fax is sent to location A and location B. The
counter goes up by 10, not 20.)
Mode Tables
These SPs count the number of pages sent from the document server. The
Appendix:
Program
Service
counter for the application that was used to store the pages is incremented.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
The L: counter counts the number of pages stored from within the document
server mode screen at the operation panel. Pages stored with the Store File
button from within the Copy mode screen go to the C: counter.
Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the count.
If several documents are merged for sending, the number of pages stored is counted for the
application that stored them.
8701 TX PGS/Port
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages sent by the physical port used to send
them. For example, if a 3-page original is sent to 4 destinations via ISDN G4,
the count for ISDN (G3, G4) is 12.
1 PSTN-1
2 PSTN-2
3 PSTN-3
4 ISDN (G3,G4)
5 Network
[0 to 9999999/ 1]
These SPs count the number of compressed pages scanned into the
document server, counted by the formats listed below.
1 JPEG/JPEG2000
2 TIFF (Multi/Single)
3 PDF
4 Other
5 PDF/Comp
6 PDF/A
[0 to 9999999/ 1]
These SPs count the number of compressed pages scanned by the scan
application, counted by the formats listed below.
1 JPEG/JPEG2000
2 TIFF (Multi/Single)
3 PDF
4 Other
Total number of pages sent via WSD (WS-Scanner for Web Services
Devices).
001 B/W
002 Color
Total number of pages sent via WSD (WS-Scanner for Web Services
Devices).
001 B/W
002 Color
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
8731 T: Scan PGS/Media
1 B/W
2 Color
RX PGS/Port
8741 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages received by the physical port used to
receive them.
1 PSTN-1
2 PSTN-2
3 PSTN-3
4 ISDN (G3,G4)
5 Network
8781 This SP displays the number of toner bottles used. The count is done based on
the equivalent of 1,000 pages per bottle.
LS Memory Remain
8791 This SP displays the percent of space available on the document server for
storing documents.
[0 to 100/ 0 / 1]
This SP displays the percent of toner remaining for each color. This SP allows
the user to check the toner supply at any time.
[0 to 100/ 0 / 1]
This precise method of measuring remaining toner supply (1% steps) is better than other
machines in the market that can only measure in increments of 10 (10% steps).
This SP is expanded for color MFP and color LP machines. For this machine, the count is
done for black only
1 Eco Total
4 Duplex
5 Combine
8 Duplex (%)
9 Combine (%)
Mode Tables
10 Paper Cnt (%)
Appendix:
Program
Service
101 Eco Total: Last
[0 to 9999999]
These SPs count the percentage of dot coverage for black.
11 0 2% Bk
21 3 4% Bk
31 5 7% Bk
41 8 10% Bk
[0 to 9999999]
These SPs count the percentage of dot coverage for black and other color
toners
[0 to 9999999]
These SPs count the percentage of dot coverage for black and other color
toners.
1 K Black toner
2 M Magenta toner
4 Y Yellow toner
[0 to 9999999]
These SPs count the percentage of dot coverage for black and other color
toners.
1 K Black toner
2 M Magenta toner
4 Y Yellow toner
Machine Status
Mode Tables
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
Appendix:
Program
Service
8941 These SPs count the amount of time the machine spends in each operation
mode. These SPs are useful for customers who need to investigate machine
operation for improvement in their compliance with ISO Standards.
1 Operation Time
Engine operation time. Does not include time while controller is saving data to
HDD (while engine is not operating).
2 Standby Time
Engine not operating. Includes time while controller saves data to HDD. Does
not include time spent in Energy Save, Low Power, or Off modes.
Includes time in Energy Save mode with Engine on. Includes time while
machine is performing background printing.
6 SC
7 PrtJam
8 OrgJam
AddBook Register
8951 These SPs count the number of events when the machine manages data
registration.
1 User Code
2 Mail Address
4 Group
6 F-Code
7 Copy Program
9 Printer Program
10 Scanner Program
Mode Tables
8961 Electry Status
Appendix:
Program
Service
1 Ctrl Standby Time
2 STR Time
5 Printing Time
6 Reading Time
1 Total
3 Copy: BW
7 Printer: BW
10 Fax Print: BW
12 A3/DLT
13 Duplex
15 Coverage: BW (%)
bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 DFU - -
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
bit 3 No I/O Timeout 0: Disable 1: Enable
Enable: The MFP I/O Timeout setting will have no effect. I/O Timeouts will
never occur.
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 DFU - -
Enable: The machine prints all RPCS and PCL jobs with a border on the
edges of the printable area.
bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 DFU - -
A collation type (shift or normal) will be applied to all jobs that do not
already have a "Collate Type" configured.
Note: If #5-0 is enabled, this Bit Switch has no effect.
bit 4 DFU - -
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 DFU - -
bit 7 DFU - -
bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 3 DFU - -
bit 4 DFU - -
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 DFU - -
bit 7 DFU - -
Mode Tables
4 Bit Switch 4 Settings DFU - -
Appendix:
Program
Service
1001 Bit Switch
bit 0 If enabled, users will be able to configure a Collate Type, Staple Type, and
Punch Type from the operation panel. The available types will depend on
the device and configured options.
After enabling the function, the settings will appear under:
"User Tools > Printer Features > System"
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 DFU - -
bit 4 Increase max number of the stored jobs to Disable Enable (1000)
1000 jobs. (100)
Enable: Changes the maximum number of jobs that can be stored on the
HDD via Job Type settings to 1000. The default is 100.
Enable: All print jobs will be output face-up in the destination tray.
bit 7 Enable
Letterhead mode printing Disable
(Duplex)
Enable: Simplex pages (in mixed simplex/duplex PS/PCL5 jobs only) and
Mode Tables
Appendix:
bit 0
Program
the last page of an odd paged duplex job (PS, PCL5, PCL6), are always
Service
routed through the duplex unit. Not having to switch paper paths increases
the print speed slightly.
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 DFU - -
bit 3 DFU - -
bit 4 DFU - -
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 DFU - -
bit 7 DFU - -
bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 DFU - -
bit 4 DFU - -
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 DFU - -
bit 7 DFU - -
Print Summary
1004
Touch [Execute] to print the printer summary sheets.
Sample/Locked Print
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
The bypass tray is "0".
[0 to 4/1/1] 0: Bypass 1:Tray 1 2:Tray 2 3:Tray 3 4:LCT
This switch determines whether all SCS jobs in progress are included in the
SMC report when SP5990 is executed.
Displays the scanner firmware version stored in NVRAM in a 9-digit format: Func.
Name_Model Name_History No.
1005 Creates an erase margin for all edges of the scanned image.
If the machine has scanned the edge of the original, create a margin.
[0 to 5/ 0 /1 mm]
This SP switches the TWAIN scanner function on/off. This is one of the scanner
This SP code sets the machine to release or not release the following items at
job end]
Destination (E-mail/Folder/CS)
Sender name
1012 Mail Text
Subject line
File name
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1]
Mode Tables
Appendix:
1: Release
Program
Service
0: Do not release
Determnes whether the date and time are added to the ends of he names of
files sent by email.
[0 to 1/1/1] 0:Disable adding 1:Enable adding
1 Comp 1: 5-95
[5 to 95 / 20 / 1]
2 Comp 2: 5-95
[5 to 95 / 40 / 1]
3 Comp 3: 5-95
[5 to 95 / 65 / 1]
4 Comp 4: 5-95
[5 to 95 / 80 / 1]
5 Comp 5: 5-95
[5 to 95 / 95 / 1]
2024 Selects the compression ratio for clearlight PDF for the two settings that can be
selected at the operation panel.
Mode Tables
The meaning of the display is as follows.
Appendix:
Program
Service
Bit 76543210
Setting 11001010
3. Check the status of each item against the corresponding bit numbers listed in the table below.
5-803-001 BCU-eIO1-PORTA
Bit Description 0 1
5-803-002 BCU-eIO1-PORTB
Bit Description 0 1
3 - - -
2 - - -
1 - - -
0 - - -
5-803-003 BCU-eIO1-PORTE
Bit Description 0 1
6 - - -
4 - - -
3 - - -
5-803-004 BCU-eIO2-PORTB
Bit Description 0 1
7 - - -
5 - - -
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
2 Cooling box fan lock Locked -
Prevention
0 Charge power pack leak -
operating
5-803-005 BCU-eIO2-PORTC
Bit Description 0 1
2 - - -
Short
1 Grid power pack leak prevention
operating
0 - - -
5-803-006 BCU-eIO3-PORTC
Bit Description 0 1
5 Aux. input - -
4 Backlight ON OFF
5-803-007 BCU-eIO3-PORTD
Bit Description 0 1
5-803-008 BCU-eIO3-PORTE
Bit Description 0 1
7 DIP SW 1 ON OFF
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
2 DIP SW6 ON OFF
5-803-009 BCU-eIO3-PORTF,P
Bit Description 0 1
4 - - -
3 - - -
2 BCU ID3 - -
1 BCU ID2 - -
0 BCU ID1 - -
5-803-010 BCU-eIO2-IMON
Bit Description 0 1
7 - - -
6 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
1 - - -
0 - - -
5-803-011 PFB-eIO1-PORTB
Bit Description 0 1
5-803-012 PFB-eIO1-PORTC
Bit Description 0 1
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
2 Toner collection motor lock Locked
5-803-013 PFB-eIO1-PORTD
Bit Description 0 1
5-803-014 PFB-eIO1-PORTE
Bit Description 0 1
0 -
5-803-015 PFB-eIO1-PORTF
Bit Description 0 1
5 -
4 -
3 -
2 -
1 -
0 -
5-803-016 PFB-eIO1-PORTG
Bit Description 0 1
3 - - -
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
2 - - -
1 - - -
0 - - -
5-803-017 PFB-eIO1-PORTM
Bit Description 0 1
5-803-018 PFB-eIO1-PORTP
Bit Description 0 1
Motors keep turning in this mode regardless of upper or lower limit sensor signals. To
prevent mechanical or electrical damage, do not keep an electrical component on for a
long time.
1. Open SP mode 5804.
2. Select the SP number that corresponds to the component you wish to check. (Refer to the
table on the next page.)
3. Press On then press Off to test the selected item.
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
You cannot exit and close this display until you press off to switch off the output check
currently executing. Do not keep an electrical component switched on for a long time.
Turns on the electrical components individually for testing. This is the output
check for the main machine.
1 Feed Motor 1
2 Feed Motor 2
3 Feed Motor 3
4 Feed Motor 4
9 Pick-up SOL 1
10 Pick-up SOL 2
11 Pick-up SOL 3
12 Pick-up SOL 4
27 Relay Motor
28 Main Motor
39 Registration Motor
47 Duplex Transport CL
48 Duplex Jogger
52 Toner Supply CL
53 Development Motor
55 Web Motor
57 Transfer/Separation SOL
62 Quenching Lamp
63 Charge Corona
64 Grid Wire
67 Development Bias
69 Transfer Bias
70 ID Sensor LED
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
73 Toner Bottle Fan
Service
74 Development Unit Fan
79 OPC Fan
84 Total Counter
90 LD DC Lamp
100 PTL
Reading
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Description
Program
Service
0 1
Not Correct
22 Bottom Plate Posirion Sensor Correct Position
Position
8 Stamp Solenoid
Reading
6121 Bit Description
0 1
Paper not
1 Entrance Sensor Paper detected
detected
Paper not
Mode Tables
2 Proof Exit Sensor Paper detected
Appendix:
Program
detected
Service
3 Proof Full Detection Sensor Not Full Full
Paper not
5 Staple Exit Sensor Paper detected
detected
Paper not
7 Shift Exit Sensor Paper detected
detected
Paper not
9 Paper Detection Sensor: Staple Paper detected
detected
Paper not
10 Paper Detection Sensor: Shift Paper detected
detected
Paper not
15 Staple Tray Paper Sensor Paper detected
detected
Reading
6121 Bit Description
0 1
Staple not
21 Staple Detection Staple detected
detected
Staple not
22 Staple Leading Edge Detection Staple detected
detected
27 Punch HP Not HP HP
Paper not
31 Leading Edge Detection Sensor Paper detected
detected
Paper not
33 Arrival Sensor Paper detected
detected
Reading
6121 Bit Description
0 1
Paper not
37 Folder Pass Sensor Paper detected
detected
Paper not
38 Saddle Full Sensor: Front Paper detected*2
detected*2
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
Paper not
39 Saddle Full Sensor: Rear 2
Paper detected*2
detected*
Staple not
41 Saddle Stitch Detection: Front Staple detected
detected
Staple not
44 Saddle Stitch Detection: Rear Staple detected
detected
0 0 Japan
1 0 Europe
0 1 North America
1 1 North Europe
*2: Please refer to "Lower Tray (B804 Only)" in the Service Manual for the "2000/3000 (Booklet)
Finisher".
4 Exit Motor
6 Shift Motor
10 Jogger Motor
17 Knock Solenoid
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
23 Saddle Stitch Staple Motor: Rear
Service
24 Folder Plate Motor
27 Punch Motor
1 Entrance Sensor
8 Jogger HP Sensor
9 Shift HP Sensor
11 Staple HP Sensor
14 Door Sensor
25 Hold HP Sensor
28 Stapler Sensor
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
30 Rear Hold HP Sensor
Service
31 Knock Hold HP Sensor
33 Paper Sensor
35 Punch HP 2 Sensor
1 Main Motor
8 Punch Motor
9 Stapler Solenoid
12 Shift Motor
18 Guide Solenoid
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
6309 Fold Unit (D615) Input Check
1 Entrance Sensor
2 Entrance JG HP Sensor
4 Registration Sensor
16 Direct-Send JG HP Sensor
16 Direct-Send JG Motor
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
21 Bypass JG Solenoid
Service
22 Exit JG Solenoid
25 Reverse JG Solenoid
1. INSTALLATION ................................................................................ 1
1.1 FAX OPTION TYPE 9002 (D619) ..................................................................1
1.1.1 ACCESSORIES ....................................................................................1
1.1.2 BEFORE YOU BEGIN ..........................................................................1
1.1.3 INSTALLATION ....................................................................................2
FCU Installation........................................................................................2
Decal Attachment .....................................................................................8
Line Connection and Settings ..................................................................9
1.2 G3 INTERFACE UNIT TYPE 9002 (D619) ..................................................10
1.2.1 ACCESSORIES ..................................................................................10
1.2.2 BEFORE YOU BEGIN ........................................................................11
1.2.3 INSTALLATION ..................................................................................13
One G3 Interface Unit Installation ..........................................................13
Two G3 Interface Units Installation.........................................................21
Decal Attachment ...................................................................................26
Line Connection and Settings ................................................................27
1.3 FAX UNIT OPTIONS ...................................................................................28
1.3.1 MEMORY UNIT (G578) ......................................................................28
1.4 FAX CONNECTION UNIT TYPE E (D621) ..................................................30
1.4.1 ACCESSORIES ..................................................................................30
1.4.2 OVERVIEW ........................................................................................30
1.4.3 GENERAL PRECAUTIONS ................................................................31
1.4.4 INSTALLATION ..................................................................................32
Before You Begin: Checklists .................................................................32
Slave Procedure I ...................................................................................32
Slave Procedure 2 ..................................................................................33
Master Machine Procedure 1 .................................................................34
Master Machine Procedure 2 .................................................................35
Master Procedure 3 ................................................................................36
Master Machine: Add Fax Icon for Remote Fax .....................................40
1.4.5 INITIALIZING THE FAX DEFAULT PROGRAM .................................42
Fax Scan Setting Information on the Normal Fax Screen ......................42
SM i D619
Density Settings .....................................................................................43
Original Setting.......................................................................................43
Fax Header Print (TTI) ...........................................................................44
Line Select .............................................................................................46
Fax Scan Setting Information on the Normal Fax Screen ......................47
Simplex/Duplex ......................................................................................48
Default Program Initialization Flow .........................................................48
1.4.6 IMPORTANT NOTES .........................................................................49
General Notes ........................................................................................49
Functions Available on the Initial Fax Screen of a Connected Machine .50
Sending with Fax Connection.................................................................50
Transaction results for fax connected transmissions ..............................50
3. TROUBLESHOOTING.................................................................... 60
3.1 ERROR CODES ..........................................................................................60
3.2 IFAX TROUBLESHOOTING ........................................................................82
3.3 IP-FAX TROUBLESHOOTING ....................................................................85
3.3.1 IP-FAX TRANSMISSION ....................................................................85
Cannot send by IP Address/Host Name .................................................85
Cannot send via VoIP Gateway .............................................................86
Cannot send by Alias Fax number. ........................................................87
3.3.2 IP-FAX RECEPTION ..........................................................................89
Cannot receive via IP Address/Host Name. ...........................................89
Cannot receive by VoIP Gateway...........................................................90
Cannot receive by Alias Fax number......................................................91
D619 ii SM
4.2.5 SP5-XXX (RAM CLEAR) ....................................................................99
4.2.6 SP6-XXX (REPORTS) ...................................................................... 100
4.2.7 SP7-XXX (TESTS) ............................................................................ 102
4.3 BIT SWITCHES - 1 .................................................................................... 105
4.3.1 SYSTEM SWITCHES ....................................................................... 105
4.4 BIT SWITCHES - 2 .................................................................................... 121
4.4.1 I-FAX SWITCHES ............................................................................. 121
4.4.2 PRINTER SWITCHES ...................................................................... 129
4.5 BIT SWITCHES - 3 .................................................................................... 137
4.5.1 COMMUNICATION SWITCHES ....................................................... 137
4.6 BIT SWITCHES - 4 .................................................................................... 147
4.6.1 G3 SWITCHES ................................................................................. 147
4.7 BIT SWITCHES - 5 .................................................................................... 157
4.7.1 G3-2 AND G3-3 SWITCHES ............................................................ 157
4.7.2 G4 INTERNAL SWITCHES .............................................................. 165
4.7.3 G4 PARAMETER SWITCHES .......................................................... 165
4.8 BIT SWITCHES - 6 .................................................................................... 166
4.8.1 IP FAX SWITCHES........................................................................... 166
4.9 NCU PARAMETERS ................................................................................. 175
4.10 DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS ................................... 190
4.10.1 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE ............................................... 190
4.10.2 PARAMETERS .......................................................................... 191
Fax Parameters .................................................................................... 191
E-mail Parameters................................................................................ 195
4.11 SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES ............................................................. 199
SM iii D619
5.4 FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES ........................................................ 216
5.4.1 MULTI-PORT .................................................................................... 216
5.4.2 DOCUMENT SERVER ..................................................................... 216
5.4.3 INTERNET MAIL COMMUNICATION............................................... 217
Mail Transmission ................................................................................ 217
Mail Reception ..................................................................................... 220
Handling Mail Reception Errors............................................................ 221
Secure Internet Reception.................................................................... 222
Transfer Request: Request By Mail...................................................... 222
E-Mail Options (Sub TX Mode) ............................................................ 223
5.5 IP-FAX ....................................................................................................... 227
5.5.1 WHAT IS IP-FAX? ............................................................................ 227
5.5.2 T.38 PACKET FORMAT ................................................................... 227
UDP Related Switches ......................................................................... 227
5.5.3 SETTINGS ........................................................................................ 228
D619 iv SM
READ THIS FIRST
Before installing the fax unit, switch off the main switch, and disconnect the power cord.
The fax unit contains a lithium battery. The danger of explosion exists if a battery of this
type is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or an equivalent type
recommended by the manufacturer. Discard batteries in accordance with the
manufacturers instructions and local regulations.
Screw
Connector
E-ring
Clip ring
Clamp
Obey these guidelines to ensure safe operation and prevent minor injuries.
Obey these guidelines to avoid problems such as misfeeds, damage to originals, loss of
valuable data and to prevent damage to the machine.
Always obey these guidelines to avoid serious problems such as misfeeds, damage to
originals, loss of valuable data and to prevent damage to the machine. bold is added for
emphasis.
This document provides tips and advice about how to best service the machine.
1. INSTALLATION
1.1.1 ACCESSORIES
Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list.
1. FCU 1
2. Interface Board 1
4. Ferrite Core 1
5. Screws (Blue M3 x 6) 7
6. Speaker Unit 1
7. Clamp 2
13. Gasket
*1 EU only
SM 1 D619
1.1.3 INSTALLATION
FCU Installation
4. The fax unit is installed in the shaded area above (below the IPU and the controller board).
D619 2 SM
5. Attach the interface board to the edge connector of the controller board ( x1).
SM 3 D619
7. Locate the jumper [A] on the FCU. There are two bare pins visible next to the "ON" notation
on the board. (This is the OFF position.)
8. Remove the jumper [B].
9. Move the jumper one set of pins to the right and re-set it on the pins so that a bare set of pins
[C] is visible next to the "OFF" notation. (This is the ON position.)
If the jumper is not moved from the OFF to the ON position, the machine will return
SC672 (Controller Startup Error) when the machine is powered on.
D619 4 SM
12. Move the harnesses to the left.
SM 5 D619
15. Re-connect the bottom edge of the IPU ( x1, x3).
16. Use a flathead screwdriver to break out cutouts [A] ("LINE 1") and [B] ("TEL").
17. Set the speaker unit in the corner of the controller box, and then fasten it to the frame ( x2).
D619 6 SM
18. Connect the top harnesses ( x2).
SM 7 D619
Decal Attachment
After fax installation, the fax function is assigned to F5. This is the default. You can
change the function key assignment with User Tools.
2. Attach the multi-language decal [B] (EU only).
3. Attach the serial number decal under the copier serial number decal on the rear cover of the
machine.
4. Attach the FCC decal to the rear cover of the machine (NA only).
5. Connect the power plug to an outlet.
D619 8 SM
Line Connection and Settings
1. Loop one end of the telephone cable [A] once, then clamp it with the ferrite core (K3
NF-75(N)BK0) [B] as shown.
Attach the ferrite core at least 9 cm (3.5 in.) from the connector.
2. Connect the telephone cable to the "LINE 1" jack.
SM 9 D619
1.2 G3 INTERFACE UNIT TYPE 9002 (D619)
1.2.1 ACCESSORIES
Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list.
1. G3 Interface Unit 1
2. G3 Connector Bracket 1
3. CCUIF Harness 1
4. Screws (Blue M3 x 6) 5
6. Clamp 1
D619 10 SM
1.2.2 BEFORE YOU BEGIN
Before installing this fax unit:
Print out all data in the printer buffer.
Turn off the main power switch and disconnect the power cord and the network cable.
These installation instructions describe how to install the fax option with one G3 option unit and
two G3 option units.
If you are adding one (or two) G3 options units to a fax unit that has already been installed, you
must first remove the FCU [A] unit and the speaker unit [B]. Once both units have been removed,
you can follow either installation below for one G3 interface unit or two G3 interface units.
SM 11 D619
3. Remove the speaker unit and set it on a flat clean surface.
D619 12 SM
1.2.3 INSTALLATION
4. The fax unit is installed in the shaded area above (below the IPU and the controller board).
SM 13 D619
5. Attach the interface board to the edge connector of the controller board.
D619 14 SM
7. Locate the jumper [A] on the FCU. There are two bare pins visible next to the "ON" notation
on the board. (This is the OFF position.)
8. Remove the jumper [B].
9. Move the jumper one set of pins to the right and re-set it on the pins so that a bare set of pins
[C] is visible next to the "OFF" notation. (This is the ON position.)
If the jumper is not moved from the OFF to the ON position, the machine will return
SC672 (Controller Startup Error) when the machine is powered on.
SM 15 D619
14. The FCU [A] and G3 unit [B] are connected with an FFC.
15. Lower the FFC connector tab on the G3 unit [C] and raise the FFC connector tab on the FCU
[D].
16. With its green side facing up, set one edge of the FFC into the slot of the FCU [A] and lock it
( x1).
17. With its green side facing down, set the other edge of the FFC into the slot of the G3 interface
unit [B] and lock it ( x1).
18. Confirm that both green sides on either edge of the FFC are facing one another.
D619 16 SM
19. Attach the small ferrite core to the cable.
20. Set the FCU in the machine and then push it slowly to the right until its edge connector locks
into the interface board edge connector.
SM 17 D619
22. Reattach the bottom edge of the IPU ( x3, x1).
23. Remove the three cut-outs from the controller box with a flat-headed screwdriver: LINE 1,
TEL, and LINE 2.
24. Set the modular jack in the groove of the G3 connector bracket.
25. Push the head of the jack down so it locks in place.
D619 18 SM
26. Attach the saddle clamp [A] to the G3 bracket.
27. Attach the post of the other clamp [B] to the slanted arm of the bracket.
28. Attach the modular jack bracket to the speaker unit ( x2).
29. Attach the large ferrite core and clamp the modular jack harness ( x2)..
SM 19 D619
30. Set the two small clamps provided with the fax unit.
31. Set the speaker unit in the lower right corner (below the controller board) and fasten it to the
back of the machine ( x2).
D619 20 SM
32. Connect the harnesses between the speaker unit and the FCU/G3 ( x4, x2).
33. Reattach:
Controller box cover ( x 13).
Rear lower cover ( x 2).
Rear upper cover ( x 2).
3. Remove the G3 board [A] from the second G3 interface unit [B] ( x 2).
4. Push the G3 board [A] into the edge connector of the first G3 interface unit [B] ( x1).
5. Make sure that the edge connection is secure.
6. Fasten the board from the 2nd G3 unit ( x2).
SM 21 D619
7. Clamp both harnesses ( x 3).
8. Attach one small ferrite core to each harness running across the front plate.
9. With its green side facing up [A], connect one end of the FFC to the FCU below ( x1).
10. Loop the other end up [B] and connect it to the G3 interface unit above ( x1).
11. Confirm that both green edges are facing one another.
D619 22 SM
12. Attach the gasket to the G3 bracket.
13. Install the FCU and G3 unit assembly [A] in the interface board ( x3).
14. Reconnect the bottom of the IPU ( x3, x1).
15. Remove the four cut-outs from the controller box with a flat-head screwdriver: LINE 1, TEL,
LINE 2, LINE 3.
SM 23 D619
16. Attach the two modular jacks to the G3 connector bracket.
D619 24 SM
20. Wrap the large ferrite core [A] around both harnesses and lock it.
21. Close the clamps on either end of the ferrite core [B] ( x2).
22. Set the two small clamps provided with the fax unit.
23. Set the speaker unit in the lower right corner (below the controller board) and fasten it to the
back of the machine ( x2).
24. Connect the harnesses between the FCU/G3 speaker unit and the fax unit ( x5, x2).
SM 25 D619
On the left, the upper harness is LINE 2 and the lower harness is LINE 3.
Make sure these harnesses are matched and connected with the LINE 2 and LINE 3
harnesses on the right. (The modules are clearly marked "LINE 2" and "LINE 3".
25. Reattach:
Controller box cover ( x 13).
Rear lower cover ( x 2).
Rear upper cover ( x 2).
Decal Attachment
After fax installation, the fax function is assigned to F5. This is the default. You can
change the function key assignment with User Tools.
2. Attach the multi-language decal [B] (EU only).
3. Attach the FCC decal to the rear cover of the machine (NA only).
4. Connect the power plug to an outlet.
D619 26 SM
Line Connection and Settings
1. Loop one end of the telephone cable [A] once, then enclose it with the ferrite core (K3
NF-75(N)BK0) [B] as shown.
Attach the ferrite core at least 9 cm (3.5 in.) from the connector.
Attach a ferrite core to the 2nd G3 line if two G3 boards are installed.
2. Connect the telephone cable to "LINE 2" jack.
-or-
If two G3 boards are installed, connect the cables to "LINE 2" and "LINE 3" jacks.
3. Connect the machine power cord to the power supply, then turn on the main power switch.
4. Enter the Service Mode.
5. Touch "Fax SP"
6. Do these communication switch settings:
7. Exit the Service Mode and turn the machine off/on with the main power switch.
8. Do SP5990-001 to print the system parameter list, then confirm that "G3" is listed as an
option.
9. Enter the Service Mode and set the items required for PSTN communication.
If one G3 line is installed, use SP3103 (PSTN-1 Port Settings) to do the PSTN settings.
If two G3 lines are installed, use SP3103 (PSTN-1 Port Settings) and SP3104 (PSTN-2
Port Settings) to do the PSTN settings for the first and second G3 line.
SM 27 D619
1.3 FAX UNIT OPTIONS
D619 28 SM
4. Set the memory board in the slot on the FCU.
SM 29 D619
1.4 FAX CONNECTION UNIT TYPE E (D621)
1.4.1 ACCESSORIES
Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list.
1.4.2 OVERVIEW
This option is used to connect up to six machines without fax hardware (FCU and G3 boards) to
only one machine with an FCU and G3 board installed. Every connected machine acts as a fax
machine. As only one machine requires the fax hardware, this achieves a significant cost
reduction. However, each of the six machines requires the Fax Connection Unit.
The machines must be on the same network. In the drawing above, [A] has the FCU (Fax Option
Type 9002 (D619)) and at least one G3 interface board installed (G3 Interface Unit Type 9002
(D619)). Another machine [B] without the fax hardware (in the same network) can be connected to
the master machine to make it capable of functioning as a fax.
The machine with the fax hardware installed is the Master machine.
The machine without the fax hardware connected to the master machine is the Slave
machine.
There are some restrictions.
The machines must be on the same network.
Every Master and Slave machine requires installation of the Printer/Scanner Unit Type 9002
(D620).
D619 30 SM
Up to six machines can be slaved to one master machine.
The fax transmissions for slave machines can be done on a G3 line only. This means the
master machine requires installation of not only the Fax Option Type 9002 (D619) but at least
one G3 Interface Unit Type 9002 (D619).
Files queued for sending or printing can cause problems during installation of this
option. Before setting up one or more remote connections with this option, always
make sure there are no files queued for either transmission or printing.
If a machine that has never been used in a remote fax connection is to slaved to a master
machine, or if the machine was previously used as a slave machine and is to be used as the
master machine, initialize the machine with the Fax Default Program (described below) to
restore the factory defaults.
SM 31 D619
1.4.4 INSTALLATION
Slave Procedure I
1. Turn the machine off and disconnect it from its power source.
2. Remove the SD card slot cover ( x1).
3. Confirm that the Printer/Scanner SD card is in Slot 1.
4. With its label turned away toward the front of the machine, insert Remote Fax Card Type 31
into SD card slot 2 (lower slot). Push it in until you hear it click and lock in place.
5. Connect the machine power cord to its power source, and then turn the machine on.
6. Enter the SP mode.
7. Do SP5-873-1 to move the fax connection application from the SD card in Slot 2 (lower slot)
to the Printer/Scanner SD card in Slot 1 (upper slot).
8. Switch the machine off.
9. Remove the remote fax SD card from Slot 2, and then store it in a safe place.
D619 32 SM
10. Re-attach the SD card slot cover, and then switch the machine on.
11. At the Ready screen, press [User Tools/Counter] on the operation panel.
12. Touch the Administrator Tools tab.
13. Make sure the two items shown above are Off.
Slave Procedure 2
1. Under the System Administrator tab, touch [Program/Change/Delete Remote Machine].
SM 33 D619
Master Machine Procedure 1
1. Turn the machine off and disconnect it from its power source.
4. With its label turned away toward the front of the machine, insert Remote Fax Card Type 32
into SD card slot 2 (lower slot). Push it in until you hear it lock in place.
5. Connect the machine power cord to its power source, and then turn the machine on.
6. Enter the SP mode.
7. Do SP5-873-1 to move the fax connection application from the SD card in Slot 2 (lower slot)
to the Printer/Scanner SD card in Slot 1 (upper slot).
8. Switch the machine off.
9. Remove the remote fax SD card from Slot 2, and then store it in a safe place.
10. Re-attach the SD card slot cover, and then switch the machine on.
11. At the Ready screen, press [User Tools/Counter] on the operation panel.
12. Touch the Administrator Tools tab.
D619 34 SM
13. Make sure the two items shown above are Off.
SM 35 D619
Master Procedure 3
1. Touch [Facsimile Features].
2. Touch [Reception Settings].
3. On the Reception Settings tab, touch [Remote Reception Settings per Line].
With Multiple Lines
1. Enter the IP address or host name of the connection machine with the line designated for
reception.
2. Do not touch [OK] on the Slave machine without a setting (this could cause an error).
3. Touch [OK] to finish the procedure.
D619 36 SM
Special Sender Setting
1. Touch [Program Special Sender], and then touch the button of the special sender that you
want to register.
2. On the Program/Change screen, touch [Forwarding to Sender] and then touch [OK].
SM 37 D619
3. On the Remote Reception Setting per Sender screen, touch [Connect] touch [ON], touch
[Remote Machine] and then touch [OK].
Dial-in Transfer Setting
1. On the Facsimile Features screen, touch the Initial Settings tab.
D619 38 SM
3. On the Box Setting screen press a button where you want to register a box.
SM 39 D619
Master Machine: Add Fax Icon for Remote Fax
Follow this procedure to add the fax icon on the Home screen on the Master machine operation
panel.
1. Press [User Tools/Counter] .
D619 40 SM
4. Touch [Remote Fax].
5. Touch an [Open] key to select the location for the remote fax icon.
6. Touch [Exit] to end.
SM 41 D619
1.4.5 INITIALIZING THE FAX DEFAULT PROGRAM
After one of the following types of machines has been designated a Slave machine for remote fax
connection, the Fax Default Program (fax operation screen after power on) must be executed to
restore the factory default settings:
An MFP machine previously operated as an independent fax but will now be designated a
Slave machine.
An MFP previously used as a Master machine and now to be designated a Slave machine.
Before executing the Fax Default Program, always review and note the user settings in
case some of this information is lost during initialization.
The procedures below show you how to initialize the settings with the Fax Default Program, and
how to check and reset settings that may have been lost by initialization.
D619 42 SM
2. Touch each tab, and then note the settings.
Density Settings
Original Setting
SM 43 D619
2. Note the settings on the Original Feed Type screen.
D619 44 SM
2. Touch the [Option Setting] button on the Transmission Mode screen.
SM 45 D619
Line Select
D619 46 SM
Fax Scan Setting Information on the Normal Fax Screen
SM 47 D619
Simplex/Duplex
D619 48 SM
3. Touch [Restore Defaults] restore the default settings.
General Notes
Here are some important points to keep in mind:
The recognition user code cannot be used for fax connection from either the Master or the
Slave machine.
Mail sending with the fax connection (send result mail, scan-to-email same information
sending) is not compatible with S/MIME.
The Slave machine may receive faxes from the Master machine line for dial-in and special
target transmissions.
A Slave machine cannot be used in a fax connection with an externally installed counter
device.
When a fax is sent using an address from the Slave machine address book, the transmission
destination is entered directly into the job log of the Master machine so it can manage the
transmission.
Fax connection transmissions are not compatible with sending to a destination folder.
The address book of a Master machine cannot be accessed from a Slave machine.
Settings for dialing "0" and area codes are stores in the settings on the Master machine.
An Activity Report records only the destinations of the senders. The main text of the
transmission is not shown.
Only two Fax Headers (TTI) can be registered for the Slave machine.
The counter on the Slave machine tallies fax TX/RX transactions
In regard to TX/RX fax image capture, the Slave machine conducts TX transactions and the
Master machine conducts RX transactions.
The quality of received messages printed on a Master and Slave machine may differ slightly.
SM 49 D619
The settings for fax send transactions are limited on the Slave machine to the following
features:
On a Slave machine, the settings for RX transactions are limited to duplex printing and output
tray selection
When user authentication is implemented, be sure to implement the same methods for all
connected machines.
D619 50 SM
2. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
The following data is transfered: TTI, RTI, CSI, Fax bit switch settings, RAM address
settings, and NCU parameter settings
Be sure to disconnect all the harnesses between the FCU and speaker unit.
If there is one or two G3 units installed, there will be more connectors ([A] shows no
G3 unit installed, and [B] shows one G3 unit installed).
Do not remove the speaker unit.
SM 51 D619
4. Disconnect the bottom edge of the IPU ( x1, x3).
D619 52 SM
3. Remove the FFC connecting the G3 unit and FCU.
SM 53 D619
6. At [A] disconnect the harness, and then attach this harness to the new board ( x1).
7. Remove the FCU [B] ( x4).
D619 54 SM
11. Locate the jumper [A] on the FCU. There are two bare pins visible next to the "ON" notation
on the board. (This is the OFF position.)
12. Remove the jumper [B].
13. Move the jumper one set of pins to the right and re-set it on the pins so that a bare set of pins
[C] is visible next to the "OFF" notation. (This is the ON position.)
If the jumper is not moved from the OFF to the ON position, the machine will return
SC672 (Controller Startup Error) when the machine is powered on.
SM 55 D619
15. Fasten the new FCU to the frame ( x3).
D619 56 SM
19. Connect the long FFC shipped with the new FCU to the new FCU board in the machine (
x 1).
20. Move Dip Switch [A] of the old FCU board from OFF to ON.
SM 57 D619
21. With the blue side up as shown, connect the other end of the FFC to the old FCU board.
22. Check:
[A] All harnesses between FCU and speaker unit connected
[B] FFC connected to FCU in the machine (blue side visible)
[C] FFC connected to the old FCU (blude side visible)
[D] DIP SW set to "ON"
23. Turn on the main power switch.
24. SRAM data transmission starts. When the transmission is completed, you will hear a beep
from the speaker.
25. When Ready appears on the copy display, turn off the main power switch
If the speaker does not emit a beep, cycle the machine off/on and and wait again.
If the second attempt fails, try again.
If the beeper does not sound after the third attempt, then you must enter the SRAM
settings manually.
26. Disconnect the long FFC from the new FCU.
27. Reattach the controller box cover and rear covers.
D619 58 SM
28. Turn on the main power switch.
29. Do SP6-101 to print the system parameter list.
30. Check the system parameter list to make sure that the data was transferred correctly.
31. Set the correct date and time with the User Tools: User Tools > System Settings > Timer
Setting > Set Date/Time.
If any of the SRAM data was not transferred, enter those settings manually.
SM 59 D619
3. TROUBLESHOOTING
If an error code occurs, retry the communication. If the same problem occurs, try to fix the
problem as suggested below. Note that some error codes appear only in the error code display
and on the service report.
0-01 DCN received unexpectedly The other party is out of paper or has a
jammed printer.
The other party pressed Stop during
communication.
D619 60 SM
Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action
0-04 CFR or FTT not received after Check the line connection.
modem training Try changing the TX level and/or cable
equalizer settings.
Replace the FCU.
The other terminal may be faulty; try
sending to another machine.
If the RX signal is weak or defective, there
may be a bad line.
Cross reference
Tx level - NCU Parameter 01 (PSTN)
Cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)
Dedicated Tx parameters in Service Program
Mode
0-06 The other terminal did not Check the line connection.
reply to DCS Try adjusting the TX level and/or cable
equalizer settings.
Replace the FCU.
The other end may be defective or
incompatible; try sending to another
machine.
Check for line problems.
Cross reference
See error code 0-04.
SM 61 D619
Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action
0-08 The other end sent RTN or Check the line connection.
PIN after receiving a page, Replace the FCU.
because there were too many The other end may have jammed, or run
errors out of paper or memory space.
Try adjusting the TX level and/or cable
equalizer settings.
The other end may have a defective
modem/FCU; try sending to another
machine.
Check for line problems and noise.
Cross reference
Tx level - NCU Parameter 01 (PSTN)
Cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)
Dedicated Tx parameters in Service
Program Mode
D619 62 SM
Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action
0-15 The other terminal is not The other terminal is not capable of accepting
capable of specific functions. the following functions, or the other terminals
memory is full.
Confidential RX
Transfer function
SEP/SUB/PWD/SID
0-16 CFR or FTT not detected after Check the line connection.
modem training in confidential Replace the FCU.
or transfer mode Try adjusting the TX level and/or cable
equalizer settings.
The other end may have disconnected, or
it may be defective; try calling another
machine.
If the RX signal level is too low, there may
be a line problem.
Cross reference
See error code 0-08.
0-17 Communication was If the Stop key was not pressed and this error
interrupted by pressing the keeps occurring, replace the operation panel or
Stop key the operation panel drive board.
SM 63 D619
Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action
0-21 EOL signal (end-of-line) from Check the connections between the FCU
the other end not received and line.
within 5 s of the previous EOL Check for line noise or other line problems.
signal Replace the FCU.
The remote machine may be defective or
may have disconnected.
Cross reference
Maximum interval between EOLs and between
ECM frames - G3 Bit Switch 0A, bit 4
0-22 The signal from the other end Check the line connection.
was interrupted for more than Replace the FCU.
the acceptable modem carrier Defective remote terminal.
drop time (default: 200 ms) Check for line noise or other line problems.
Try adjusting the acceptable modem
carrier drop time.
Cross reference
Acceptable modem carrier drop time - G3
Switch 0A, bits 0 and 1
0-29 Data block format failure in Check for line noise or other line problems.
ECM reception Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
Replace the NCU or FCU.
D619 64 SM
Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action
0-30 The other terminal did not Check the line connection.
reply to NSS(A) in AI short Try adjusting the TX level and/or cable
protocol mode equalizer settings.
The other terminal may not be compatible.
Cross reference
Dedicated tx parameters - Section 4
0-32 The other terminal sent a Check the protocol dump list.
DCS, which contained Ask the other party to contact the
functions that the receiving manufacturer.
machine cannot handle.
0-33 The data reception (not ECM) Check the line connection.
is not completed within 10 The other terminal may have a defective
minutes. modem/FCU.
0-55 FCU does not detect the SG3. FCU firmware or board defective.
SG3 firmware or board defective.
0-70 The communication mode The other terminal did not have a
specified in CM/JM was not compatible communication mode (e.g., the
available other terminal was a V.34 data modem and
(V.8 calling and called not a fax modem.)
terminal) A polling tx file was not ready at the other
terminal when polling RX was initiated
from the calling terminal.
0-74 The calling terminal fell back The calling terminal could not detect
to T.30 mode, because it ANSam due to noise, etc.
could not detect ANSam after ANSam was too short to detect.
sending CI. Check the line connection and condition.
Try making a call to another V.8/V.34 fax.
SM 65 D619
Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action
0-75 The called terminal fell back to The terminal could not detect ANSam.
T.30 mode, because it could Check the line connection and condition.
not detect a CM in response Try receiving a call from another V.8/V.34
to ANSam (ANSam timeout). fax.
0-76 The calling terminal fell back The called terminal could not detect a CM
to T.30 mode, because it due to noise, etc.
could not detect a JM in Check the line connection and condition.
response to CM Try making a call to another V.8/V.34 fax.
(CM timeout).
0-77 The called terminal fell back to The calling terminal could not detect a JM
T.30 mode, because it could due to noise, etc.
not detect a CJ in response to A network that has narrow bandwidth
JM cannot pass JM to the other end.
(JM timeout). Check the line connection and condition.
Try receiving a call from another V.8/V.34
fax.
0-79 The called terminal detected Check for line noise or other line problems.
CI while waiting for a V.21 If this error occurs, the called terminal falls
signal. back to T.30 mode.
0-80 The line was disconnected The guard timer expired while starting
due to a timeout in V.34 phase these phases. Serious noise, narrow
2 line probing. bandwidth, or low signal level can cause
these errors.
0-81 The line was disconnected
If these errors happen at the transmitting
due to a timeout in V.34 phase
terminal:
3 equalizer training.
Try making a call at a later time.
0-82 The line was disconnected Try using V.17 or a slower modem using
due to a timeout in the V.34 dedicated tx parameters.
phase 4 control channel Try increasing the TX level.
start-up. Try adjusting the tx cable equalizer setting.
D619 66 SM
Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action
0-83 The line was disconnected If these errors happen at the receiving terminal:
due to a timeout in the V.34 Try adjusting the RX cable equalizer
control channel restart setting.
sequence. Try increasing the TX level.
Try using V.17 or a slower modem if the
same error is frequent when receiving from
multiple senders.
0-84 The line was disconnected The signal did not stop within 10 s.
due to abnormal signaling in Turn off the main power switch, then turn it
V.34 phase 4 control back on.
channel start-up. If the same error is frequent, replace the
FCU.
0-85 The line was disconnected The signal did not stop within 10 s.
due to abnormal signaling in Turn off the main power switch, then turn it
V.34 control channel restart. back on.
If the same error is frequent, replace the
FCU.
0-86 The line was disconnected The other terminal was incompatible.
because the other terminal Ask the other party to contact the
requested a data rate using manufacturer.
MPh that was not available in
the currently selected symbol
rate.
0-87 The control channel started The receiving terminal restarted the control
after an unsuccessful primary channel because data reception in the
channel. primary channel was not successful.
This does not result in an error
communication.
0-88 The line was disconnected Try using a lower data rate at the start.
because PPR was Try adjusting the cable equalizer setting.
transmitted/received 9
(default) times within the
same ECM frame.
SM 67 D619
Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action
2-13 Modem initialization error Turn off the machine, then turn it back on.
Update the modem ROM.
Replace the FCU.
2-22 Counter overflow error of If error occurs frequently, change the settings
JBIG chip for resolution, paper size, compression type.
2-23 JBIG compression or Turn off the machine, then turn it back on.
reconstruction error
2-24 JBIG ASIC error Turn off the machine, then turn it back on.
2-50 The machine resets itself for a If this is frequent, update the ROM, or
fatal FCU system error replace the FCU.
2-51 The machine resets itself If this is frequent, update the ROM, or
because of a fatal replace the FCU.
communication error
D619 68 SM
Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action
2-53 Snd msg() in the manual task The user did the same operation many
is an error because the times, and this gave too much load to the
mailbox for the operation task machine.
is full.
4-10 Communication failed Get the ID Codes the same and/or the
because of an ID Code CSIs programmed correctly, then resend.
mismatch (Closed Network) or The machine at the other end may be
Tel. No./CSI mismatch defective.
(Protection against Wrong
Connections)
5-23 Print data error when printing Test the SAF memory.
a substitute RX or confidential Ask the other end to resend the message.
RX message
6-00 G3 ECM - T1 time out during Try adjusting the RX cable equalizer.
reception of facsimile data Replace the FCU.
SM 69 D619
Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action
6-08 G3 ECM - PIP/PIN received in The other end pressed Stop during
reply to PPS.NULL communication.
The other terminal may be defective.
6-21 V.21 flag detected during high The other terminal may be defective or
speed modem communication incompatible.
D619 70 SM
Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action
13-17 SIP user name registration Double registration of the SIP user name.
error Capacity for user-name registration in the
SIP server is not sufficient.
13-18 SIP server access error Incorrect initial setting for the SIP server.
Defective SIP server.
13-25 Network I/F setting error IPV4 is not active in the active protocol
setting.
IP address of the device is not registered.
13-26 Network I/F setting error at Active protocol setting does not match the
power on I/F setting for SIP server.
IP address of the device is not registered.
14-00 SMTP Send Error Error occurred during sending to the SMTP
server. Occurs for any error other than
14-01 to 16. For example, the mail address
of the system administrator is not
registered.
SM 71 D619
Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action
14-03 Access to SMTP Server Failed to access the SMTP server because
Denied (450) the access is denied.
SMTP server operating incorrectly.
Contact the system administrator to
determine if there is a problem with the
SMTP server and to check that the SMTP
server settings are correct.
Folder send destination is incorrect.
Contact the system administrator to
determine that the SMTP server settings
and path to the server are correct.
Device settings incorrect. Confirm that the
user name and password settings are
correct.
Direct SMTP destination incorrect. Contact
the system administrator to determine if
there is a problem at the destination at that
the settings at the destination are correct.
D619 72 SM
Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action
14-05 SMTP Server HDD Full (452) Failed to access the SMTP server because
the HDD on the server is full.
Insufficient free space on the HDD of the
SMTP server. Contact the system
administrator and check the amount of
space remaining on the SMTP server
HDD.
Insufficient free space on the HDD where
the destination folder is located. Contact
the system administrator and check the
amount of space remaining on the HDD
where the target folder is located.
Insufficient free space on the HDD at the
target destination for SMTP direct sending.
Contact the system administrator and
check the amount of space remaining on
the target HDD.
14-06 User Not Found on SMTP The designated user does not exist.
Server (551) The designated user does not exist on the
SMTP server.
The designated address is not for use with
direct SMTP sending.
14-07 Data Send to SMTP Server Failed to access the SMTP server because
Failed (4XX) the transmission failed.
PC not operating correctly.
SMTP server operating incorrectly
Network not operating correctly.
Destination folder setting incorrect.
Direct SMTP sending not operating
correctly.
SM 73 D619
Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action
14-08 Data Send to SMTP Server Failed to access the SMTP server because
Failed (5XX) the transmission failed.
SMTP server operating incorrectly
Destination folder setting incorrect.
Direct SMTP sending not operating
correctly.
Software application error.
14-12 Data Size Too Large Transmission was cancelled because the
detected size of the file was too large.
14-14 Security Locked File Error Update the software because of the
defective software.
14-16 Maximum Division Number When a mail is divided for the mail
Error transmission and the division number of a
mail are more than the specified number,
the mail transmission is interrupted.
Update the software because of the
defective software.
D619 74 SM
Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action
14-18 Access to MCS File Error The access to MCS file is denied due to
the no permission of access.
Update the software because of the
defective software.
14-20 SMTP Authentication error Make sure the administrator's e-mail address is
same as the SMTP authentication address or
POP before SMTP address.
14-21 Transmission error of S/MIME Register the correct user certificate and device
certificate.
14-30 MCS File Creation Failed Failed to create the MCS file because:
The number of files created with other
applications on the Document Server has
exceeded the limit.
HDD is full or not operating correctly.
Software error.
14-31 UFS File Creation Failed UFS file could not be created:
Not enough space in UFS area to handle
both Scan-to-Email and IFAX
transmission.
HDD full or not operating correctly.
Software error.
14-32 Cancelled the Mail Due to Error detected with NFAX and send was
Error Detected by NFAX cancelled due to a software error.
14-33 No Mail Address For the Neither the mail address of the machine
Machine nor the mail address of the network
administrator is registered.
SM 75 D619
Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action
14-50 Mail Job Task Error Due to an FCU mail job task error, the send
was cancelled:
Address book was being edited during
creation of the notification mail.
Software error.
14-51 UCS Destination Download Not even one return notification can be
Error downloaded:
The address book was being edited.
The number for the specified destination
does not exist (it was deleted or edited
after the job was created).
14-60 Send Cancel Failed The cancel operation by the user failed to
cancel the send operation.
14-61 Notification Mail Send Failed All addresses for return notification mail
for All Destinations failed.
14-62 Transmission Error due to the When the 0 line page exists in received
existence of zero line page pages with G3 communication, the
transmission is interrupted.
15-01 POP3/IMAP4 Server Not At startup, the system detected that the IP
Registered address of the POP3/IMAP4 server has
not been registered in the machine.
15-02 POP3/IMAP4 Mail Account The POP3/IMAP4 mail account has not
Information Not Registered been registered.
15-03 Mail Address Not Registered The mail address has not been registered.
15-10 DCS Mail Receive Error Error other than 15-11 to 15-18.
D619 76 SM
Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action
15-14 Mail Header Format Error The mail header is not standard format.
For example, the Date line description is
incorrect.
15-15 Mail Divide Error The e-mail is not in standard format. There
is no boundary between parts of the
e-mail, including the header.
15-16 Mail Size Receive Error The mail cannot be received because it is
too large.
15-18 Incomplete Mail Received Only one portion of the mail was received.
15-31 Final Destination for Transfer The format of the final destination for the
Request Reception Format transfer request was incorrect.
Error
SM 77 D619
Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action
15-42 Off Ramp Gateway Error The delivery destination address was
specified with Off Ramp Gateway OFF.
15-43 Address Format Error Format error in the address of the Off
Ramp Gateway.
15-44 Addresses Over The number of addresses for the Off Ramp
Gateway exceeded the limit of 30.
15-61 Attachment File Format Error The attached file is not TIFF format.
15-62 TIFF File Compatibility Error Could not receive transmission due to:
Resolution error
Image of resolution greater than 200 dpi
without extended memory.
Resolution is not supported.
Page size error
The page size was larger than A3.
Compression error
File was compressed with other than MH,
MR, or MMR.
15-63 TIFF Parameter Error The TIFF file sent as the attachment could not
be received because the TIFF header is
incorrect:
The TIFF file attachment is a type not
supported.
The TIFF file attachment is corrupted.
Software error.
D619 78 SM
Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action
15-64 TIFF Decompression Error The file received as an attachment caused the
TIFF decompression error:
The TIFF format of the attachment is
corrupted.
Software error.
15-71 Not Binary Image Data The file could not be received because the
attachment was not binary image data.
15-73 MDN Status Error Could not find the Disposition line in the
header of the Return Receipt, or there is a
problem with the firmware.
15-74 MDN Message ID Error Could not find the Original Message ID line
in the header of the Return Receipt, or
there is a problem with the firmware.
15-80 Mail Job Task Read Error Could not receive the transmission
because the destination buffer is full and
the destination could not be created (this
error may occur when receiving a transfer
request or a request for notification of
reception).
15-91 Send Registration Error Could not receive the file for transfer to the final
destination:
The format of the final destination or the
transfer destination is incorrect.
Destinations are full so the final and
transfer destinations could not be created.
SM 79 D619
Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action
22-00 Original length exceeded the Divide the original into more than one
maximum scan length page.
Check the resolution used for scanning.
Lower the scan resolution if possible.
Add optional page memory.
22-01 Memory overflow while Wait for the files in the queue to be sent.
receiving Delete unnecessary files from memory.
Transfer the substitute reception files to an
another fax machine, if the machines
printer is busy or out of order.
Add an optional SAF memory card or hard
disk.
22-02 Tx or RX job stalled due to The job started normally but did not finish
line disconnection at the other normally; data may or may not have been
end received fully.
Restart the machine.
D619 80 SM
Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action
SM 81 D619
3.2 IFAX TROUBLESHOOTING
Use the following procedures to determine whether the machine or another part of the network is
causing the problem.
Communication
Item Action [Remarks]
Route
General LAN 1. Connection with Check that the LAN cable is connected
the LAN to the machine.
Check that the LEDs on the hub are lit.
Between IFAX and 1. Network settings Check the network settings on the PC.
PC on the PC [Is the IP address registered in the TCP/IP
properties in the network setup correct?
Check the IP address with the
administrator of the network.]
D619 82 SM
Communication
Item Action [Remarks]
Route
Between e-mail 1. E-mail account on Make sure that the PC can log into the
server and internet the Server e-mail server.
Check that the account and password
stored in the server are the same as in
the machine.
[Ask the administrator to check.]
SM 83 D619
Communication
Item Action [Remarks]
Route
D619 84 SM
3.3 IP-FAX TROUBLESHOOTING
SM 85 D619
Request the network administrator to
increase the bandwidth.
6 Number of the specified fax correct? Check the remote fax number.
D619 86 SM
12 G3 fax is connected to VoIP gateway? Check that G3 fax is connected.
SM 87 D619
Check the settings.
9 Enable H.323/Enable SIP SW is set to on? See User Parameter SW 34 Bit 0/SW
34 Bit 1
10 IP address of local fax registered? Register the IP address of the local fax.
D619 88 SM
3.3.2 IP-FAX RECEPTION
Port number specified at remote sender Request the sender to specify the port
4
fax (if required)? number.
Specified port number correct (if Request the sender to check the port
5
required)? number.
7 Network bandwidth too narrow? Lower the start modem reception baud
rate on the receiving side.
IPFAX SW06
SM 89 D619
Cannot receive by VoIP Gateway.
IP address/host name of specified VoIP Request the remote fax to check the IP
5
Gateway correct on senders side? address/host name.
D619 90 SM
Cannot receive by Alias Fax number.
SM 91 D619
8 Local fax IP address registered? Register the IP address.
10 Network bandwidth too narrow? Lower the start modem reception baud rate
on the receiving side.
IPFAX SW06
D619 92 SM
4. SERVICE TABLES
4.1 CAUTIONS
Never turn off the main power switch when the power LED is lit or flashing. To avoid
damaging the hard disk or memory, press the operation power switch to switch the power
off, wait for the power LED to go off, and then switch the main power switch off.
The main power LED lights or flashes while the platen cover or ARDF is open, while the
main machine is communicating with a facsimile or the network server, or while the
machine is accessing the hard disk or memory for reading or writing data.
SM 93 D619
4.2 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES
System Switch
101 Change the bit switches for system settings for the
001 032 00 1F fax option
"Bit Switches - 1" : p.105 "System Switches"
Ifax Switch
102 Change the bit switches for internet fax settings for
001 016 00 0F the fax option
"Bit Switches - 2" : p.121 "I-Fax Switches"
Printer Switch
103 Change the bit switches for printer settings for the fax
001 016 00 0F option
"Bit Switches - 2" : p.129 "Printer Switches"
Communication Switch
G3-1 Switch
D619 94 SM
Change the bit switches for the protocol settings of
the optional G3 board
001 016 00 0F
"Bit Switches - 5" : "p.157 "G3-2 and G3-3
Switches""
G3-3 Switch
G4 Internal Switch
108
001 032 00 1F Not used (Do not change the bit switches)
G4 Parameter Switch
109
001 016 00 0F Not used (Do not change the bit switches)
IP fax Switch
SM 95 D619
4.2.2 SP2-XXX (RAM)
RAM Read/Write
Memory Dump
G3-1 Memory Print out RAM data for the fax board.
001
Dump p.199 "Service RAM Addresses"
G3-2 Memory Print out RAM data for the optional SG3
102 002
Dump board.
G3-3 Memory Print out RAM data for the optional SG3
003
Dump board.
D619 96 SM
4.2.3 SP3-XXX (MACHINE SET)
Service Station
101 001 Fax Number Enter the fax number of the service station.
Serial Number
102
000 Enter the fax units serial number.
Memory Lock
003 Not used
Disabled
PSTN Access Enter the PSTN access number for the G3-2
104 002
Number line.
Memory Lock
003 Not used
Disabled
SM 97 D619
PSTN-3 Port Settings
PSTN Access Enter the PSTN access number for the G3-3
105 002
Number line.
Memory Lock
003 Not used
Disabled
Transmission
004
Disabled
IPFAX Protocol
007 Select "H323" or "SIP".
Priority
D619 98 SM
FAX SW
201
001 032 00 1F
101 001 FCU ROM Version Displays the FCU ROM version.
102 001 Error Codes Displays the latest 64 fax error codes.
103 001 G3-1 ROM Version Displays the G3-1 modem version.
104 001 G3-2 ROM Version Displays the G3-2 modem version.
105 001 G3-3 ROM Version Displays the G3-3 modem version.
106 001 G4 ROM Version Not used (Do not change the settings.)
101 Initializes the bit switches and user parameters, user data in
000
the SRAM, files in the SAF memory, and clock.
Factory Setting
104 Resets the bit switches and user parameters, user data in the
000
SRAM and files in the SAF memory.
SM 99 D619
Reset All Bit Switches
105
000 Resets all the current bit switch settings.
106 Resets only the security bit switches. If you select automatic
000 output/display for the user parameter switches, the security
settings are initialized.
D619 100 SM
G3-3 Prints the protocol dump list of the last
007
(1 Communication) communication for the G3-3 line.
002 Dch
002 Printer
107 003 SC/TRAP Stored These log print out functions are for designer
005 Scanner
006 JOB/SAF
SM 101 D619
007 Reconstruction
008 JBIG
010 G3CCU
012 CCU
7 Function
D619 102 SM
110 G3-2 Modem Tests
SM 103 D619
135 IG3-2 V34 (S3000baud) - Not used
D619 104 SM
4.3 BIT SWITCHES - 1
Do not adjust a bit switch or use a setting that is described as "Not used", as this may
cause the machine to malfunction or to operate in a manner that is not accepted by local
regulations. Such bits are for use only in other areas, such as Japan.
Default settings for bit switches are not listed in this manual. Refer to the System Parameter List
printed by the machine.
No Function Comments
SM 105 D619
Example:
(1): EQM value (Line quality data). A larger number means more errors.
(2): Symbol rate (V.34 only)
(3): Final modem type used
(4): Starting data rate (for example, 288 means 28.8 kbps)
(5): Final data rate
(6): Rx revel (see below for how to read the RX level)
(7): Total number of error lines that occurred during non-ECM reception.
(8): Total number of burst error lines that occurred during non-ECM reception.
Rx level calculation
Example:
The four-digit hexadecimal value (N) after "L" indicates the RX level.
The high byte is given first, followed by the low byte. Divide the decimal value of
N by -16 to get the RX level.
In the above example, the decimal value of N (= 0100 [H]) is 256.
So, the actual RX level is 256/-16 = -16 dB
D619 106 SM
This is only used for communication
troubleshooting. It shows the content of the
Protocol dump list output after
transmitted facsimile protocol signals. Always
each communication
6 reset this bit to 0 after finishing testing.
0: Off
If system switch 09 bit 6 is at "1", the list is only
1: On
printed if there was an error during the
communication.
G3 Communication Parameters
SM 107 D619
A4: A4 (8.3"), no reduction
Width and
B4: B4 (10.1"), no reduction
reduction
A3: A3 (11.7"), no reduction
0: 0 ms/line
5: 5 ms/line
10: 10 ms/line
20: 20 ms/line
I/O rate 25: 2.5 ms/line
40: 40 ms/line
System Switch 01 - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
No Function Comments
Memory read/write by RDS (0,0): All RDS systems are always locked out.
(0,1), (1,0): Normally, RDS systems are locked
6-7 Bit 7 Bit 6 Setting
out, but the user can temporarily switch RDS
0 0 Always disabled on to allow RDS operations to take place. RDS
D619 108 SM
0 1 User selectable will automatically be locked out again after a
certain time, which is stored in System Switch
1 0 User selectable
03. Note that if an RDS operation takes place,
1 1 Always enabled RDS will not switch off until this time limit has
expired.
(1,1): At any time, an RDS system can access
the machine.
No Function Comments
No Function Comments
System Switch 05 - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 06 - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 07 - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 08 - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
SM 109 D619
System Switch 09 (SP No. 1-101-010)
No Function Comments
Printing of the error code on the 1: Error codes are printed on the error reports.
3 error report This can be used for detecting an error which
0: No 1: Yes occurs rarely.
D619 110 SM
This switch becomes effective only when
system switch 00 bit 6 is set to 1.
Conditions for printing the
1: Set this bit to 1 when you wish to print a
protocol dump list
protocol dump list only for communications with
6 0: Print for all communications
errors.
1: Print only when there is a
Note: The memory size is limited. Use this bit
communication error
switch only when some log reports are
necessary.
No Function Comments
On hook dial
5 0: On hook dial is disabled.
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
SM 111 D619
6-7 Not used Do not change the factory settings
System Switch 0B - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 0C - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 0D - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
No Function Comments
D619 112 SM
System Switch 0F (SP No. 1-101-016)
No Function Comments
11: USA
SM 113 D619
System Switch 10 (SP No. 1-101-017)
No Function Comments
No Function Comments
D619 114 SM
System Switch 12 (SP No. 1-101-019)
No Function Comments
TTI: 08 to 92 (BCD) mm
Input even numbers only.
This setting determines the print start position
for the TTI from the left edge of the paper. If the
TTI printing position in the main
0-7 TTI is moved too far to the right, it may
scan direction
overwrite the file number which is on the top
right of the page. On an A4 page, if the TTI is
moved over by more than 50 mm, it may
overwrite the page number.
No Function Comments
SM 115 D619
Interval for preventing the
machine from entering Energy
Saver mode if there is a pending
transmission file. If there is a file waiting for transmission, the
machine does not go to Energy Saver mode
Bit 5 Bit 4 Setting
during the selected period.
4-5
0 0 1 min After transmitting the file, if there is no file
waiting for transmission, the machine goes to
0 1 30 min the Energy Saver mode.
1 0 1 hour
1 1 24 hours
No Function Comments
Priority setting for the G3 line. This function allows the user to select the
1 0: PSTN-1 > PSTN-2 or 3 default G3 line type. The optional SG3 units are
1: PSTN-2 or 3 > PSTN-1 required to use the PSTN-2 or 3 setting.
D619 116 SM
System Switch 19 (SP No. 1-101-026)
No Function Comments
No Function Comments
SM 117 D619
System Switch 1D (SP No. 1-101-030)
No Function Comments
No Function Comments
D619 118 SM
0: If the SAF memory becomes full during
scanning for a memory transmission, the
successfully scanned pages are transmitted.
Action when the SAF memory
1: If the SAF memory becomes full during
has become full during
scanning for a memory transmission, the file is
1 scanning
erased and no pages are transmitted.
0: The current page is erased.
Note: This setting is effective only when
1: The entire file is erased.
Automatic Journal printout is enabled but the
machine cannot print the report (e.g., no
paper).
SM 119 D619
System Switch 1F (SP No. 1-101-032)
No Function Comments
D619 120 SM
4.4 BIT SWITCHES - 2
Do not adjust a bit switch or use a setting that is described as "Not used", as this may
cause the machine to malfunction or to operate in a manner that is not accepted by local
regulations. Such bits are for use only in other areas, such as Japan.
Default settings for bit switches are not listed in this manual. Refer to the System Parameter List
printed by the machine.
No Function Comments
0 A4
1 B4
2 A3 -
3-6 Reserved
7 Not used
SM 121 D619
I-fax Switch 01 (SP No. 1-102-002)
No Function Comments
0 200x100 Standard
1 200x200 Detail
0: Not selected
2 200x400 Fine 1: Selected
If more than one of these three bits is set to "1",
3 300 x 300 Reserve
the higher resolution has priority. For example,
4 400 x 400 Super Fine if both Bit 0 and Bit 2 are set to "1" Then The
Resolution is set for "Bit 2 200 x 400.
5 600 x 600 Reserve
6 Reserve
7 mm/inch
D619 122 SM
I-fax Switch 02 (SP No. 1-102-003)
No Function Comments
This setting determines whether the header information is printed with text e-mails
when they are received.
0: Prints only text mail.
0 1: Prints mail header information attached to text mail.
When a text mail is received with this switch On (1), the "From" address and
"Subject" address are printed as header information.
When a mail with only binary data is received (a TIFF-F file, for example), this
setting is ignored and no header is printed.
This setting determines whether only the first page or all pages of an e-mail
attachment are printed at the sending station when a transmission error occurs.
1 This allows the customer to see which documents have not reached their
intended destinations if sent to the wrong e-mail addresses, for example.
0: Prints 1st page only.
1: Prints all pages.
2-3 This setting determines the text string output for the Return Receipt that confirms
the transmission was received normally at the destination.
SM 123 D619
00: "Dispatched"
Sends from PC mail a request for a Return Receipt. Receives the Return Receipt
with "dispatched" in the 2nd part:
Disposition: Automatic-action/MDN-send automatically; dispatched
The "dispatched" string is included in the Subject string.
01: "Displayed"
Sends from PC mail a request for a Return Receipt. Receives the Return Receipt
with "displayed" in the 2nd part:
Disposition: Automatic-action/MDN-send automatically; displayed
The "displayed" string is included in the Subject string.
10: Reserved
11: Reserved
A mail requesting a Return Receipt sent from an IFAX with this switch set to "00"
(for "dispatched") received by Microsoft Outlook 2000 may cause an error. If any
setting other than "displayed" (01) causes a problem, change the setting to "01" to
enable normal sending of the Return Receipt.
This setting adds or does not add the media accept feature to the answer mail to
confirm a reception.
4 0: Does not add the media accept feature to the answer mail
1: Adds the media accept feature to the answer mail.
Use this bit switch if a problem occurs when the machine receives an answer
mail, which contains the media accept feature field.
7 0: 200 x 200
1: 400 x 400
The "1" setting requires installation of the Memory Unit in order to have enough
SAF (Store and Forward) memory to receive images at 400 x 400 resolution.
D619 124 SM
I-fax Switch 04 (SP No. 1-102-005)
No Function Comments
This setting determines whether the RTI/CSI registered on this machine or the
RTI/CSI of the originator is used in the subject lines of transferred documents.
0: Puts the RTI/CSI of the originator in the Subject line. If this is used, either the
0 RTI or CSI is used. Only one of these can be received for use in the subject line.
1: Puts the RTI/CSI registered on this machine in the Subject line.
When this switch is used to transfer and deliver mail to a PC, the information in
the Subject line that indicates where the transmission originated can be used to
determine automatically the destination folder for each e-mail.
This switch does not apply for condition 3) when the RX system is set up
for memory sending, delivery by F-code, sending with SMTP RX and
when operators are using FOL (to prevent problems when receiving
transmissions).
SM 125 D619
I-fax Switch 05 (SP No. 1-102-006)
No Function Comments
0 For example:
"1st destination + Total number of destinations: 9" in the Journal indicates a
broadcast to 9 destinations.
0: Not recorded
1: Recorded
No Function Comments
This setting determines the amount of SAF (Store and Forward) memory. (SAF
stores fax messages to send later for transmission to more than one location, and
also holds incoming messages if they cannot be printed.) When the amount of
0-7 SAF memory available falls below this setting, mail can no longer be received;
received mail is then stored on the mail server.
00-FF (0 to 1024 KB: HEX)
The hexadecimal number you enter is multiplied by 4 KB to determine the amount
of memory.
D619 126 SM
I-fax Switch 09 (SP No. 1-102-010)
No Function Comments
No Function Comments
0 1 No setting
1 0 Individual setting
1 1 Always sign
0 0 No sign
SM 127 D619
0 1 No setting
1 0 Individual setting
1 1 Always sign
No Function Comments
This setting determines whether files received with SMTP protocol are delivered
0 or output immediately.
0: Off. Files received via SMTP are output immediately without delivery.
1: On. Files received via SMTP are delivered immediately to their destinations.
D619 128 SM
4.4.2 PRINTER SWITCHES
No Function Comments
SM 129 D619
Printer Switch 01 (SP No. 1-103-002)
No Function Comments
1 0 B4
1 1 A4
Relationship between available paper sizes and printer width used in the setup protocol
D619 130 SM
Available Paper Size Printer width used in the Protocol (NSF/DIS)
B5 256 mm width
No Function Comments
SM 131 D619
Printer Switch 03 (SP No. 1-103-004)
No Function Comments
No Function Comments
Maximum reducible length when length reduction is enabled with switch 03-0
above.
[Maximum reducible length] = [Paper length] + (N x 5mm)
"N" is the decimal value of the binary setting of bits 0 to 4.
0
to Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting
4
0 0 0 0 0 0 mm
0 0 0 0 1 5 mm
0 0 1 0 0 20 mm
D619 132 SM
1 1 1 1 1 155 mm
Length of the duplicated image on the next page, when page separation has
taken place.
5 0 0 4 mm
6
0 1 10 mm
1 0 15 mm
1 1 Not used
No Function Comments
SM 133 D619
Printer Switch 07 (SP No. 1-103-008)
No Function Comments
No Function Comments
Paper size selected for printing A4 This switch determines which paper size
width fax data is selected for printing A4 width fax data,
1
0: 8.5" x 11" size when the machine has both A4 and 8.5" x
1: A4 size 11" size paper.
D619 134 SM
1: If all paper sizes in the machine require
page separation to print a received fax
Page separation message, the machine does not print the
2 0: Enabled message (Substitute Reception is used).
1: Disabled After a larger size of paper is set in a
cassette, the machine automatically
prints the fax message.
1 1 Not used
SM 135 D619
Printer Switch 0F (SP No. 1-103-016)
No Function Comments
Smoothing feature
1 1 Not used
Duplex printing
1: The machine always prints received
2 0: Disabled
fax messages in duplex printing mode:
1: Enabled
D619 136 SM
4.5 BIT SWITCHES - 3
Do not adjust a bit switch or use a setting that is described as "Not used", as this may
cause the machine to malfunction or to operate in a manner that is not accepted by local
regulations. Such bits are for use only in other areas, such as Japan.
Default settings for bit switches are not listed in this manual. Refer to the System Parameter List
printed by the machine.
No Function Comments
1 0 MH/MR/MMR
1 1 MH/MR/MMR/JBIG
1 1 MH/MR/MMR/JBIG
SM 137 D619
JBIG compression method: Reception Change the setting when
5 0: Only basic supported communication problems occur
1: Basic and optional both supported using JBIG compression.
No Function Comments
Wrong connection prevention (0,1): The machine will disconnect the line
method without sending a fax message, if the last 8
digits of the received CSI do not match the last
Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting
8 digits of the dialed telephone number. This
0 0 None does not work when manually dialed.
(1,0): The same as above, except that only the
0 1 8 digit CSI
last 4 digits are compared.
2-3
1 0 4 digit CSI (1,1): The machine will disconnect the line
without sending a fax message, if the other end
1 1 CSI/RTI
does not identify itself with an RTI or CSI.
(0,0): Nothing is checked; transmission will
always go ahead.
Note: This function does not work when dialing
is done from the external telephone.
D619 138 SM
4-5 Not used Do not change the setting.
1 0 A4 (297 mm)
1 1 Not used
No Function Comments
SM 139 D619
0: The next page will be sent even if RTN
Hang-up decision when a negative or PIN is received.
code (RTN or PIN) is received 1: The machine will send DCN and hang up
3
during G3 immediate transmission if it receives RTN or PIN.
0: No hang-up, 1: Hang-up This bit is ignored for memory
transmissions or if ECM is being used.
No Function Comments
No Function Comments
D619 140 SM
Communication Switch 0B (SP No. 1-104-012)
No Function Comments
No Function Comments
SM 141 D619
Communication Switch 0E (SP No. 1-104-015)
No Function Comments
06 to FF (Hex), unit = 2 s
Minimum interval between (e.g., 06(H) = 12 s)
0-7
automatic dialing attempts This value is the minimum time that the machine
waits before it dials the next destination.
No Function Comments
Memory transmission:
Maximum number of dialing
0-7 01 FE (Hex) times
attempts to the same
destination
No Function Comments
D619 142 SM
Communication Switch 14 (SP No. 1-104-021)
No Function Comments
1 1 Not used
SM 143 D619
Communication Switch 16 (SP No. 1-104-023)
No Function Comments
2 Not used
No Function Comments
PWD reception
0: Disables features that require PWD
2 0: Disabled
(Password) signal reception.
1: Enabled
D619 144 SM
1: The machine sets multiple PSTN dial-in
PSTN dial-in routing setting
numbers in the PSTN dial-in line and transfers
5 0: OFF
received data from each PSTN dial-in number to
1: ON
each address.
No Function Comments
IP-Fax dial-in routing selection 1: Transfers received data to each IP-Fax dial-in
5 0: Off number.
1: On IP-Fax dial-in number is a 4-digit number.
SM 145 D619
Communication Switch 1B (SP No. 1-104-028)
No Function Comments
No Function Comments
D619 146 SM
4.6 BIT SWITCHES - 4
Do not adjust a bit switch or use a setting that is described as "Not used", as this may
cause the machine to malfunction or to operate in a manner that is not accepted by local
regulations. Such bits are for use only in other areas, such as Japan.
Default settings for bit switches are not listed in this manual. Refer to the System Parameter List
printed by the machine.
4.6.1 G3 SWITCHES
No Function Comments
SM 147 D619
G3 Switch 01 (SP No. 1-105-002)
No Function Comments
No Function Comments
D619 148 SM
G3 Switch 03 (SP No. 1-105-004)
No Function Comments
SM 149 D619
6 Not used Do not change the settings
No Function Comments
0 - F (Hex); 0 - 15 bits
Training error detection If the number of error bits in the received TCF is
0-3
threshold below this threshold, the machine informs the
sender that training has succeeded.
No Function Comments
1 0 0 0 19.2
D619 150 SM
1 0 0 1 21.6
1 0 1 0 24.0
1 0 1 1 26.4
1 1 0 0 28.8
1 1 0 1 31.2
0 0 1 1 33.6
1 0 V.34
1 1 Not used
No Function Comments
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 kbps These bits set the initial starting modem
rate for reception.
0 0 0 1 2.4 Use a lower setting if high speeds pose
0 1 1 0 14.4
SM 151 D619
0 1 1 1 16.8
1 0 0 0 19.2
1 0 0 1 21.6
1 0 1 0 24.0
1 0 1 1 26.4
1 1 0 0 28.8
1 1 0 1 31.2
4-7 0 0 0 1 V.27ter
0 0 1 0 V.27ter, V.29
D619 152 SM
G3 Switch 07 (SP No. 1-105-008)
No Function Comments
SM 153 D619
0: This uses the fixed table in the ROM
for dial tone detection.
Parameter selection for dial tone
1: This uses the specific parameter
detection
6 adjusted with SRAM (69ECBEH -
0: Normal parameter
69ECDEH). Select this if the dial tone
1: Specific parameter
cannot be detected when the "Normal
parameter: 0" is selected.
No Function Comments
1 0 800
1 1 Not used
D619 154 SM
This bit set the maximum interval
between EOL (end-of-line) signals and
Maximum allowable frame interval
the maximum interval between ECM
4 during image data reception.
frames from the other end.
0: 5 s 1: 13 s
Try using a longer setting if error code
0-21 is frequent.
SM 155 D619
G3 Switch 0E (SP No. 1-105-015)
No Function Comments
3000-2250ms: 3000-50xNms
0-7 High order bit 3000 50 x Nms 0F (3000 ms) <= N <= FF (2250
ms)
00-0E(3000-3700ms: 3000+50xNms
Low order bit 3000 50 x Nms 0F (3000 ms) <= N <= 0F (3700
ms)
No Function Comments
D619 156 SM
4.7 BIT SWITCHES - 5
Do not adjust a bit switch or use a setting that is described as "Not used", as this may
cause the machine to malfunction or to operate in a manner that is not accepted by local
regulations. Such bits are for use only in other areas, such as Japan.
Default settings for bit switches are not listed in this manual. Refer to the System Parameter List
printed by the machine.
No Function Comments
SM 157 D619
G3-2 Switch 01 (SP No. 1-106-002)
No Function Comments
No Function Comments
D619 158 SM
G3-2 Switch 03 (SP No. 1-106-004)
No Function Comments
SM 159 D619
6 Not used Do not change the settings
No Function Comments
0 - F (Hex); 0 - 15 bits
Training error detection If the number of error bits in the received TCF is
0-3
threshold below this threshold, the machine informs the
sender that training has succeeded.
No Function Comments
1 0 0 0 19.2
D619 160 SM
1 0 0 1 21.6
1 0 1 0 24.0
1 0 1 1 26.4
1 1 0 0 28.8
1 1 0 1 31.2
1 0 V.34
1 1 Not used
No Function Comments
0 1 1 1 16.8
SM 161 D619
1 0 0 0 19.2
1 0 0 1 21.6
1 0 1 0 24.0
1 0 1 1 26.4
1 1 0 0 28.8
1 1 0 1 31.2
4-7 0 0 0 1 V.27ter
0 0 1 0 V.27ter
0 0 1 1 V.27ter
0 1 0 0 V.27ter
0 1 0 1 V.27ter
D619 162 SM
G3-2 Switch 07 (SP No. 1-106-008)
No Function Comments
SM 163 D619
G3-2 Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings)
No Function Comments
1 0 800
1 1 Not used
D619 164 SM
When the sending terminal is controlled
by a computer, there may be a delay in
receiving page data after the local
machine accepts set-up data and sends
Reconstruction time for the first line in CFR. This is outside the T.30
6 receive mode recommendation. But, if this delay
0: 6 s 1: 12 s occurs, set this bit to 1 to give the
sending machine more time to send data.
Refer to error code 0-20.
ITU-T T.30 recommendation: The first line
should come within 5 s of CFR.
G3-2 Switch 0B- Not used (do not change the settings)
G3-2 Switch 0C- Not used (do not change the settings)
G3-2 Switch 0E- Not used (do not change the settings)
G3-2 Switch 0F- Not used (do not change the settings)
SM 165 D619
4.8 BIT SWITCHES - 6
Do not adjust a bit switch or use a setting that is described as "Not used", as this may
cause the machine to malfunction or to operate in a manner that is not accepted by local
regulations. Such bits are for use only in other areas, such as Japan.
Default settings for bit switches are not listed in this manual. Refer to the System Parameter List
printed by the machine.
IP Fax Transport
1 Selects TCP or UDP protocol for IP-Fax
0: TCP, 1: UDP
IP Fax Gatekeeper
4 Enables/disables the gatekeeper for IP-Fax.
0: OFF, 1: ON (enable)
D619 166 SM
When "0" is selected, fax data is received
without checking the telephone number.
When "1" is selected, fax data is received
IP Fax received telephone number
only when confirming that the telephone
7 confirmation
number from the sender matches the
0: No confirmation, 1: Confirmation
registered telephone number in this
machine. If this confirmation fails, the line is
disconnected.
0 0 0 1 Level 1
0 0 1 0 Level 2
0 0 1 1 Level 3
SM 167 D619
IP Fax Switch 02 (SP No. 1-111-003)
D619 168 SM
IP Fax Switch 03 (SP No. 1-111-004)
SM 169 D619
IP Fax Switch 04 (SP No. 1-111-005)
0 0 0 1 2.4
Sets the modem bit rate for
0-3 0 0 1 1 4.8 transmission. The default is "0110"
0 1 0 0 9.6
0 1 0 1 12.0
0 1 1 0 14.4
1 0 Not used
1 1 Not used
D619 170 SM
IP Fax Switch 06 (SP No. 1-111-007)
0 0 0 1 V.27ter
4-7
0 0 1 0 V.27ter, V.29
Number of times for training Selects the number of times training is done
4
0: 1 time, 1: 2 times at the same bit rate.
SM 171 D619
Space CSI transmission setting at
When "0" is selected, frame data is enabled.
no CSI registration
5 When "1" is selected, the transmitted data is
0: Not transmitted
all spaces.
1: Transmitted
T1 timer adjustment
Bit 1 Bit 0
1 0 50 s
1 1 60 s
T4 timer adjustment
Bit 3 Bit 2
1 0 4s
1 1 5s
T0 timer adjustment
Adjusts the fail safe timer. This timer sets
Bit 5 Bit 4
the interval between "setup" data
D619 172 SM
6-7 Not used Do not change these settings.
Bit 4 Bit 3
This changes the interval for transmit
3-4 0 0 No delay re-INVITE after receiving the ACK message
1 0 2 sec
1 1 3 sec
SM 173 D619
IP Fax Switch 0A - Not used (do not change the settings)
D619 174 SM
4.9 NCU PARAMETERS
The following tables give the RAM addresses and the parameter calculation units that the
machine uses for ringing signal detection and automatic dialing. The factory settings for each
country are also given. Most of these must be changed by RAM read/write (SP2-102), but some
can be changed using NCU Parameter programming (SP2-103, 104 and 105); if SP2-103, 104
and 105 can be used, this will be indicated in the Remarks column. The RAM is programmed in
hex code unless (BCD) is included in the Unit column.
Address Function
Use the Hex value to program the country/area code directly into this
address, or use the decimal value to program it using SP2-103-001
Country Country
Decimal Hex Decimal Hex
/Area /Area
France 00 00 Asia 18 12
Germany 01 01 Japan 19 13
UK 02 02 Hong Kong 20 14
680500
Italy 03 03 South Africa 21 15
Austria 04 04 Australia 22 16
Denmark 06 06 Singapore 24 18
Finland 07 07 Malaysia 25 19
Ireland 08 08 China 26 1A
Norway 09 09 Taiwan 27 1B
SM 175 D619
Address Function
Sweden 10 0A Korea 28 1C
Switzerland 11 0B Brazil 29 1D
Portugal 12 0C Turkey 32 20
Holland 13 0D Greece 33 21
Spain 14 0E Hungary 34 22
Israel 15 0F Czech 35 23
USA 17 11 Poland 36 24
680509 PSTN dial tone reset time (LOW) FF(H), the machine
pauses for the pause
68050A PSTN dial tone reset time (HIGH) 20 ms
time (address 68050D /
D619 176 SM
Address Function Unit Remarks
SM 177 D619
Address Function Unit Remarks
D619 178 SM
Address Function Unit Remarks
Busy tone signal state time tolerance for all ranges, and number of cycles
required for detection (a setting of 4 cycles means that ON-OFF-ON or
OFF-ON-OFF must be detected twice).
Tolerance ()
680533 Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = 75% Bits 2 and 3 must always be kept at 0.
Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = 50% Bits 2 and 3 must always be kept at 0.
Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = 25%
Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = 12.5%
Bits 7, 6, 5, 4 - number of cycles required for cadence detection
SM 179 D619
Address Function Unit Remarks
D619 180 SM
Address Function Unit Remarks
See Note 3.
68054B Break time for pulse dialing 1 ms SP2-103-013
(parameter 12).
See Note 3.
68054C Make time for pulse dialing 1 ms SP2-103-014
(parameter 13).
SP2-103-018
680550 DTMF tone on time
(parameter 17).
1 ms
SP2-103-019
680551 DTMF tone off time
(parameter 18).
SP2-103-020
Tone attenuation level of DTMF -N x 0.5
680552 (parameter 19).
signals while dialing 3.5 dBm
See Note 5.
SM 181 D619
Address Function Unit Remarks
SP2-103-021
(parameter 20).
Tone attenuation value difference
The setting must be less
between high frequency tone and
680553 -dBm x 0.5 than 5dBm, and should
low frequency tone in DTMF
not exceed the setting at
signals
680552h above.
See Note 5.
SP2-103-022
PSTN: DTMF tone attenuation -N x 0.5
680554 (parameter 21). See
level after dialling 3.5 dBm
Note 5.
D619 182 SM
Address Function Unit Remarks
68055F
Do not change the
To Not used -
settings.
680564
680567
Do not change the
to Not used -
settings.
680571
SM 183 D619
Address Function Unit Remarks
SP2-103-007
Number of rings until a call is (parameter 06).
680576 1
detected The setting must not be
zero.
See Note 4.
Minimum required length of the
680577 20 ms SP2-103-008
first ring
(parameter 07).
68057B
Do not change the
to Not used -
settings.
680580
D619 184 SM
Address Function Unit Remarks
680583
Do not change the
To Not used -
settings.
6805A0
20 ms 20
6805A5 CED detection time Factory setting: 200 ms
ms
SM 185 D619
Address Function Unit Remarks
SP2-103-002
6805B4 PSTN: Tx level from the modem -N 3 dBm
(parameter 01).
D619 186 SM
Address Function Unit Remarks
SM 187 D619
Address Function Unit Remarks
NOTES
1. If a setting is not required, store FF in the address.
2. Italy and Belgium only
RAM address 68055E: the lower four bits have the following meaning.
Bit 2 - 1: International dial tone cadence detection enabled (Belgium)
Bit 1 - Not used
Bit 0 - 1: PSTN dial tone cadence detection enabled (Italy)
D619 188 SM
If bit 0 or bit 2 is set to 1, the functions of the following RAM addresses are changed.
680508 (if bit 0 = 1) or 680538 (if bit 2 = 1): tolerance for on or off state
duration (%), and number of cycles required for detection, coded as in address 680533.
68050B (if bit 0 = 1) or 68053B (if bit 2 = 1): on time, hex code (unit = 20 ms)
68050C (if bit 0 = 1) or 68053C (if bit 2 = 1): off time, hex code (unit = 20 ms)
3. Pulse dial parameters (addresses 68054A to 68054F) are the values for 10 pps. If 20 pps is
used, the machine automatically compensates.
4. The first ring may not be detected until 1 to 2.5 wavelengths after the time specified by this
parameter.
5. The calculated level must be between 0 and 10.
The attenuation levels calculated from RAM data are:
High frequency tone:
0.5 x N680552/6805543.5 dBm
0.5 x N680555 dBm
Low frequency tone:
0.5 x (N680552/680554 + N680553) 3.5 dBm
0.5 x (N680555 + N680553) dBm
SM 189 D619
4.10 DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS
D619 190 SM
4.10.2 PARAMETERS
Fax Parameters
The initial settings of the following fax parameters are all FF(H) - all the parameters are disabled.
Switch 00
Switch 01
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
Tx level
1 1 1 1 1 Disabled
SM 191 D619
Use a higher setting if there is signal
loss at higher frequencies because
of the length of wire between the
modem and the telephone exchange
when calling the number stored in
this Quick/Speed Dial.
Cable equalizer
Also, try using the cable equalizer if
Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 0, Bit 5: 0 = None
one or more of the following
Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 0, Bit 5: 1 = Low
5-7 symptoms occurs.
Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 1, Bit 5: 0 = Medium
Communication error with error
Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 1, Bit 5: 1 = High
codes such as 0-20, 0-23, etc.
Bit 7: 1, Bit 6: 1, Bit 5: 1 = Disabled
Modem rate fallback occurs
frequently.
Note: Do not use settings other than
listed on the left. If the setting is
"Disabled", the bit switch setting is
used.
Switch 02
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 0 0 0 Not used
If training with a particular remote terminal
0 0 0 1 2400 always takes too long, the initial modem rate
may be too high. Reduce the initial Tx
0 0 1 0 4800
modem rate using these bits.
0-3 0 0 1 1 7200 For the settings 14.4 or kbps slower, Switch
04 bit 4 must be changed to 0.
0 1 0 0 9600
Note: Do not use settings other than listed
0 1 0 1 12000 on the left. If the setting is "Disabled", the bit
switch setting is used.
0 1 1 0 14400
0 1 1 1 16800
1 0 0 0 19200
D619 192 SM
1 0 0 1 21600
1 0 1 0 24000
1 0 1 1 26400
1 1 0 0 28800
1 1 0 1 31200
1 1 1 0 33600
1 1 1 1 Disabled
Switch 03
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
SM 193 D619
If transmissions to a specific destination always
end at a lower modem rate (14,400 bps or lower),
V.8 protocol
disable V.8 protocol so as not to use V.34 protocol.
4 0: Off
0: V.34 communication will not be possible.
1: Disabled
If the setting is "Disabled", the bit switch setting is
used.
Compression modes available This bit determines the capabilities that are
in transmit mode informed to the other terminal during transmission.
5
0: MH only If the setting is "Disabled", the bit switch setting is
1: Disabled used.
D619 194 SM
E-mail Parameters
The initial settings of the following e-mail parameters are all "0" (all parameters disabled).
Switch 00
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
MH Compression mode
for e-mail attachments Switches MH compression on and off for files
0
0: Off attached to e-mails for sending.
1: On
MR Compression mode
for e-mail attachments Switches MR compression on and off for files
1
0: Off attached to e-mails for sending.
1: On
SM 195 D619
Switch 01
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
D619 196 SM
Switch 02
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
SM 197 D619
Switch 03 - Not used (do not change the settings)
Switch 04
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
Switch 05
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
Directr transmission
selection to SMTP server Allows or does not allow the direct transmission to
0
0: ON SMTP server.
1: OFF
D619 198 SM
4.11 SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES
Do not change the settings which are marked as Not used or Read only.
680001 to 680004(H) - ROM version (Read only)
680001(H) - Revision number (BCD)
680002(H) - Year (BCD)
680003(H) - Month (BCD)
680004(H) - Day (BCD)
680006 to 680015(H) - Machines serial number (16 digits - ASCII)
680018(H) - Total program checksum (low)
680019(H) - Total program checksum (high)
680020 to 68003F(H) - System bit switches
680050 to 68005F(H) - Printer bit switches
680060 to 68007F(H) - Communication bit switches
680080 to 68008F(H) - G3 bit switches
680090 to 68009F(H) - G3-2 bit switches: Not used
6800A0 to 6800AF(H) - G3-3 bit switches: Not used
6800D0(H) - User parameter switch 00 (SWUER_00) : Not used
6800D1(H) - User parameter switch 01 (SWUSR_01) : Not used
6800D2(H) - User parameter switch 02 (SWUSR_02)
Bit 0: Forwarding mark printing on forwarded messages 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 1: Center mark printing on received copies
(This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 2: Reception time printing
(This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 3: TSI print on received messages 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 4: Checkered mark printing
(This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 5: Not used
Bit 6: Not used
Bit 7: Not used
SM 199 D619
6800D3(H) - User parameter switch 03 (SWUSR_03: Automatic report printout)
Bit 0: Transmission result report (memory transmissions) 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 1: Not used
Bit 2: Memory storage report 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 3: Polling reserve report (polling reception) 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 4: Polling result report (polling reception) 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 5: Transmission result report (immediate transmissions) 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 6: Not used
Bit 7: Journal 0: Off, 1: On
6800D4(H) - User parameter switch 04 (SWUSR_04: Automatic report printout)
Bit 0: Not used
Bit 1: Automatic communication failure report and transfer result report output 0: Off, 1: On
Bits 2 to 3: Not used
Bit 4: Indicates the parties 0: Not indicated, 1: Indicated
Bit 5: Include senders name on reports 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 6: Not used
Bit 7: Inclusion of a sample image on reports 0: Off, 1: On
6800D5(H) - User parameter switch 05 (SWUSR_05)
Bit 0: Substitute reception when the base copier is in an SC condition
0: Enabled, 1: Disabled
Bits 1 and 2: Condition for substitute rx when the machine cannot print messages (Paper end,
toner end, jam, and during night mode)
Bit 2: 0, Bit 1: 0 = The machine receives all the fax messages.
Bit 2: 0, Bit 1: 1 = The machine receives the fax messages with RTI or CSI.
Bit 2: 1, Bit 1: 0 = The machine receives the fax messages with the same ID code.
Bit 2: 1, Bit 1: 1 = The machine does not receive anything.
Bit 3: Not used
Bit 4: Not used
Bit 5: Just size printing 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 6: Not used
Bit 7: Add paper display when a cassette is empty 0: Off, 1: On
6800D6(H) - User parameter switch 06 (SWUSR_06): Not used
6800D7(H) - User parameter switch 07 (SWUSR_07)
Bit 0 Ringing 0: Off, 1: On
Bit1: Automatic answering message 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 2: Parallel memory transmission 0: Off, 1: On
Bits 3 and 4: Not used
Bit 5: Remote control 0: Off, 1: On
D619 200 SM
Bits 6 and 7: Not used
6800D8(H) - User parameter switch 08 (SWUSR_08)
Bits 0 and 1: Not used.
Bit 2: Authorized reception
0: Only faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are specified for this feature are accepted.
1: Only faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are not specified for this feature are accepted.
Bits 3 to 7: Not used.
6800D9(H) - User parameter switch 09 (SWUSR_09): Not used
6800DA(H) - User parameter switch 10 (SWUSR_0A)
Bits 0 to 2: Not used
Bit 3: Page reduction 0: Off, 1: On
Bits 4 and 5: Not used
Bit 6: Use both e-mail notification and printed reports to confirm the transmission results 0: Off, 1:
On
Bit 7: Not used
6800DB(H) - User parameter switch 11 (SWUSR_0B)
Bits 0 and 1: Not used
Bit 2: White original detection 0: Off, 1: On (alarm and alert message on the LCD)
Bit 3: Receive rejection for 1300 Hz transmission 0: Off (receive), 1: On (not receive)
Bit 5: Not used
Bit 6: Printout of messages received while acting as a forwarding station 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 7: Not used
6800DC(H) - User parameter switch 12 (SWUSR_0C): Not used
6800DD(H) - User parameter switch 13 (SWUSR_0D): Not used
6800DE(H) - User parameter switch 14 (SWUSR_0E)
Bit 0: Message printout while the machine is in Night Printing mode 0: On, 1: Off
Bit 1: Maximum document length detection 0: Double letter, 1: Longer than double-letter (well log)
up to 1,200 mm
Bit 2: Not used
Bit 3: Fax mode settings, such as resolution, before a mode key (Copy/Fax/Printer/Scanner) is
pressed 0: Not cleared, 1: Cleared
Bits 4 to 6: Not used
Bit 7: Not used
6800DF(H) - User parameter switch 15 (SWUSR_0F)
(This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)
Bits 0, 1 and 2: Cassette for fax printout
Bit 2: 0, Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 1 = 1st paper feed station
Bit 2: 0, Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 0 = 2nd paper feed station
SM 201 D619
Bit 2: 0, Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 1 = 3rd paper feed station
Bit 2: 1, Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = 4th paper feed station
Bit 2: 1, Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 1 = LCT
Other settings Not used
Bits 3 and 4: Not used
Bit 5: Using the cassette specified by bits 0, 1 and 2 above only 0: On, 1: Off
Bits 6 and 7: Not used
6800E0(H) User parameter switch 16 (SWUSR_10)
(This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)
Bits 0 and 1: Not used
Bit 2: Paper size selection priority for an A4 size fax message when A4/LT size paper is not
available. 0: A3 has priority, 1: B4 has priority
Bits 3 to 7: Not used
6800E1(H) User parameter switch 17 (SWUSR_11)
Bit 0: Not used
Bit 1: Not used
Bit 2: Inclusion of the Add button when a sequence of Quick/Speed dials is selected for
broadcasting 0:Not needed, 1: Needed
Bits 3 to 6: Not used
Bit 7: Press Start key without an original when using the on hook dial or the external telephone,
0: displays Cannot detect original size. 1: Receives fax messages.
6800E2(H) - User parameter switch 18 (SWUSR_12)
Bit 0: TTI date 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 1: TTI sender 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 2: TTI file number 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 3: TTI page number 0: Off, 1: On
Bits 4 to 6: Not used
Bit 7: Japan only
6800E3(H) - User parameter switch 19 (SWUSR_13)
Bit 0: Not used
Bit 1: Journal format
0: The Journal is separated into transmissions and receptions
1: The Journal is separated into G3-1, G3-2, and G3-3 communications
Bit 2: Not used
Bit 3: 90 image rotation during B5 portrait Tx (This switch is not printed on the user parameter
list.) 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 4: Reduction of sample images on reports to 50% in the main scan and sub-scan directions.
(This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.) 0: Technician adjustment (printer switch 0E
D619 202 SM
bits 3 and 4), 1: 50% reduction
Bit 5: Use of A5 size paper for reports (This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.) 0: Off,
1: On
Bits 6 and 7: Not used
6800E4(H) - User parameter switch 20 (SWUSR_14)
Bit 0: Automatic printing of the LAN fax result report 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 1: Not used.
Bits 2 to 5: Store documents in memory which could not be printed from PC fax (LAN fax) driver
0 0 0 0 0 min.
0 0 0 1 1 min.
1 1 1 0 14 min.
1 1 1 1 15 min.
SM 203 D619
Bit 1: Reception mode switch timer 0: Off, 1: On (switching Fax or Fax/Tel)
Bit 2: Mode priority switch 0: Fax first, 1: Tel first
Bit 3: Dial in function (Japan Only)
Bit 4: RDS operation 0: Not acceptable, 1: Acceptable for the limit specified by system switch 03
This bit is only effective when RDS operation can be selected by the user
(see system switch 02).
Bits 5 to 7: Not used
6800EA(H) and 6800EB(H) - User parameter switches 26 and 27 (SWUSR_1A and 1B): Not
used
6800EC(H) - User parameter switch 28(SWUSR_1C): Not used
6800ED(H) - User parameter switch 29(SWUSR_1D): Not used
6800EE(H) and 6800EF(H) - User parameter switches 30 and 31 (SWUSR_1E and 1F): Not
used
6800F0(H) - User parameter switch 32 (SWUSR_20)
Bit 0: Quotation priority for a destination when there is no destination of the specified type
0: Paper output priority = Priority order: 1. IP-fax destination, 2. Fax Number, 3. E-mail address, 4.
Folder
1: Electric putout order = Priority order: 1. E-mail address, 2. Folder, 3. IP-fax destination, 4. Fax
number
Bits 1 to 7: Not used
6800F1(H) - User parameter switch 33 (SWUSR_21): Not used
6800F2(H) - User parameter switch 34 (SWUSR_22)
Bit 0: Gatekeeper server used with IP-Fax 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 1: SIP server used with IP-Fax 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bits 2 to 7: Not used
6800F3(H) - User parameter switch 35 (SWUSR_23)
Redial interval when sending a backup file
6800F4(H) - User parameter switch 36 (SWUSR_24)
Maximum number of redials when sending a backup file
6800F5-6800F8(H) - User parameter switch 37 (SWUSR_25)
Bit 0: Stop sending a backup file if the destination folder becomes full while the machine is
sending or waiting to send a fax or the backup file 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 1: Not used
Bit 2 and 3: Backup file is printed along with the TX communication failure report when a backup
file transmission failure occurs. 00: Do not print, 01: Print first page only, 10: Print whole file
Bit 4: Display the sender's information in the file name of documents that are forwarded to folder
destinations. 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
D619 204 SM
Bit 5: Limit the file names of documents that are forwarded to folder destinations to plain
characters only. 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 6 to 7: Not used
6800F9(H) - User parameter switch 40 (SWUSR_28)
Bit 0: When memory space is insufficient, the machine prints and then deletes the oldest faxes,
creating memory space for storage of new faxes. 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 1 to 7: Not used
6800FF(H) - User parameter switch 45 (SWUSR_2D)
Bit 0 and 1: File format for files transmitted to e-mail addresses and folders registered as
forwarding, destinations of backup file transmission, receivers for Personal Box, or end receivers
for Transfer Box. 0: PDF 1: PDF/A
Bit 2 to 7: Not used
680100 to 68010F(H) - G4 Parameter Switches Not used
680110 to 68012F(H) - G4 Internal Switches Not used
680130 to 68016F(H) - Service Switches
680170 to 68017F(H) - IFAX Switches
680180 to 68018F(H) - IP-FAX Switches
680190 to 6801AF(H) - Service stations fax number (SP3-101)
6801B0 to 6801B9(H) - Own fax PABX extension number Not used
6801BA to 6801C3(H) - Own fax number (PSTN) Not used
6801C4 to 6801D7(H) - Own fax number (ISDN G4) Not used
6801D8 to 6801E3(H) - The first subscriber number (ISDN G3) Not used
6801E4 to 6801EF(H) - The second subscriber number (ISDN G3) Not used
6801F0 to 6801FB(H) - The first subscriber number (ISDN G4) Not used
6801FC to 680207(H) - The second subscriber number (ISDN G4) Not used
680208 to 68021B(H) - PSTN-1 RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) - See the following note.
68021C to 68022F(H) - PSTN-2 RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) - Not used
680230 to 680246(H) - PSTN-3 RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) - Not used
680247 to 680286(H) - TTI 1 (Max. 64 characters - ASCII) - See the following note.
680287 to 6802C6(H) - TTI 2 (Max. 64 characters - ASCII) - Not used
6802C7 to 680306(H) - TTI 3 (Max. 64 characters - ASCII) - Not used
680307 to 68031A(H) - PSTN-1 CSI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII)
68031B to 68032E(H) - PSTN-2 CSI (Max.20 characters - ASCII) - Not used
68032F to 680342(H) - PSTN-3 CSI (Max.20 characters - ASCII) - Not used
680343(H) - Number of PSTN-1 CSI characters (Hex)
680344(H) - Number of PSTN-2 CSI characters (Hex) - Not used
680345(H) Number of PSTN-3 CSI characters (Hex) - Not used
SM 205 D619
If the number of characters is less than the maximum (20 for RTI, 32 for TTI), add a stop
code (00[H]) after the last character.
680380 to 680387(H) - Last power off time (Read only)
680380(H) - 01(H) - 24-hour clock, 00(H) - 12-hour clock (AM), 02(H) - 12-hour clock (PM)
680381(H) - Year (BCD)
680382(H) - Month (BCD)
680383(H) - Day (BCD)
680384(H) Hour
680385(H) Minute
680386(H) Second
680387(H) - 00: Monday, 01: Tuesday, 02: Wednesday, /// , 06: Sunday
680394(H) - Optional equipment (Read only Do not change the settings)
Bit 0: Page Memory 0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bit 1: SAF Memory 0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bits 2 to 7; Not used
680395(H) - Optional equipment (Read only Do not change the settings)
Bits 0 to 3: Not used
Bit 4: G3-2 0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bit 5: G3-3 0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bit 6 and 7: Not used
680406 to 68040A Option G3 board (G3-2) ROM information (Read only)
680406(H) - Suffix (BCD)
680407(H) - Version (BCD)
680408(H) - Year (BCD)
680409(H) - Month (BCD)
68040A(H) - Day (BCD)
68040B to 68040F Option G3 board (G3-3) ROM information (Read only)
68040B(H) - Suffix (BCD)
68040C(H) - Version (BCD)
68040D(H) - Year (BCD)
68040E(H) - Month (BCD)
68040F(H) - Day (BCD)
680410(H) - G3-1 Modem ROM version (Read only)
680412(H) - G3-2 Modem ROM version (Read only)
680414(H) - G3-3 Modem ROM version (Read only)
680420(H) - Number of multiple sets print (Read only)
680476(H) - Time for economy transmission (hour in 24h clock format - BCD)
D619 206 SM
680477(H) - Time for economy transmission (minute - BCD)
680492(H) - Transmission monitor volume 00 - 07(H)
680493(H) - Reception monitor volume 00 - 07(H)
680494(H) - On-hook monitor volume 00 - 07(H)
680495(H) - Dialing monitor volume 00 - 07(H)
680496(H) - Buzzer volume 00 - 07(H)
680497(H) - Beeper volume 00 - 07(H)
6804A8(H) - Machine code (Check ram 4)
68AFDA(H) - IP-Fax backup data 00 - 600 (H) - Not used
69A614(H) - Own e-mail address for internet fax (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69A794(H) - User code for fax e-mail account (Max. 192 characters - ASCII)
69A854(H) Password for fax e-mail account (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69A914(H) - Transmission mail size restriction for internet fax (Max. 4 bit)
69A918(H) - E-mail address for SMTP reception (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69A998(H) Destination number for reception report e-mail (Max. 4 byte)
69FB40(H) to 69FDC0(H) - SIP server address (Read only)
69FB40(H) - Proxy server - Main (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69FBC0(H) - Proxy server - Sub (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69FC40(H) - Redirect server - Main (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69FCC0(H) - Redirect server - Sub (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69FD40(H) - Registrar server - Main (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69FDC0(H) - Registrar server - Sub (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69FE40(H) - Gatekeeper server address - Main (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69FEC0(H) - Gatekeeper server address - Sub (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69FF40(H) - Arias Number (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69FFC0(H) - SIP user name (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
6A0040H(H) - SIP digest authentication password (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
6A00C0H(H) - Gateway address information (Max. 7100 characters - ASCII)
6A1C7C(H) - Stand-by port number for H.323 connection
6A1C7E(H) - Stand-by port number for SIP connection
6A1C80(H) - RAS port number
6A1C82(H) - Gatekeeper port number
6A1C84(H) - Port number of data waiting for T.38
6A1C86(H) - Port number of SIP server
6A1C88(H) - Priority for SIP and H.323 0: H.323, 1: SIP
6A1C89(H) - SIP function 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
6A1C8A(H) - H.323 function 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
6A1C8B(H) - SIP digest authentication function 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
SM 207 D619
6B9000 to 6B91FF(H) - Error code (Max. 512 byte)
6B9200 to 6BD61F - Reception results (Max. 17440 byte)
6BD620 to 6BDFA7 - Transmission error (Max. 2440 byte)
6BEBFE(H) - 6BEC1E (H) - Dial tone detection parameter (Max. 11 x 3 lines)
This initializes following order. [0x04, 0x40, 0x03, 0x60, 0x64, 0xf4, 0x01,0x64, 0x04, 0xc8, 0x00]
6BEBFE(H) Dial tone detection frequency Upper limit (High)
Defaults: NA: 06, EU: 06, ASIA: 06
6BEBFF(H) Dial tone detection frequency Upper Limit (Low)
Defaults: NA: 50, EU: 50, ASIA: 50
6BEC00(H) Dial tone detection frequency Lower Limit (High)
Defaults: NA: 03, EU: 02, ASIA: 02
6BEC01(H) Dial tone detection frequency Lower Limit (Low)
Defaults: NA: 60, EU: 90, ASIA: 90
6BEC02(H) Dial tone detection waiting time (20 ms)
Defaults: NA: 64, EU 64, ASIA: 64
6BEC03 to 6BEC04 Dial tone detection monitoring time (20 ms)
Defaults
NA F4 01
EU F4 01
ASIA F4 01
D619 208 SM
5. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS
5.1 OVERVIEW
The FCU controls all the fax communications and fax features, in cooperation with the controller
board. Also, the FCU contains the ROM, SRAM and NCU circuit.
Fax Options:
Extra G3 Interface option: This provides one more analog line interface. This allows full dual
access. Two extra G3 interface options can be installed.
Memory Expansion: This expands the SAF memory and the page memory (used for image
rotation); without this expansion, the page memory is not big enough for image rotation at 400
dpi, so transmission at 400 dpi is not possible.
SM 209 D619
5.2 BOARDS
5.2.1 FCU
The FCU (Facsimile Control Unit) controls fax communications, the video interface to the base
copiers engine, and all the fax options.
FACE3.5 (Fax Application Control Engine)
CPU
Data compression and reconstruction (DCR)
DMA control
Clock generation
DRAM backup control
Modem (FAME2)
V.34, V33, V17, V.29, V.27ter, V.21, and V.8
DRAM
The 16 MB of DRAM is shared as follows.
SAF memory: 4MB
Working memory: 4MB
Page memory: 8MB
The SAF memory is backed up by a rechargeable battery.
ROM
4MB flash ROMs for system software storage
SRAM
The 512 KB SRAM for system and user parameter storage is backed up by a lithium battery.
D619 210 SM
Memory Back-up
A rechargeable battery backs up the SAF memory (DRAM) for 12 hours.
A lithium battery backs up the system parameters and programmed items in the SRAM, in
case the base copier's main switch is turned off.
Switches
Item Description
The SG3 board allows up to three simultaneous communications when used in combination with
the FCU and optional G3 boards. The NCU is on the same board as the common SG-3 board.
This makes the total board structure smaller. But, the specifications of the SG3 board do not
change.
NCCP (New Communication Control Processor)
Controls the SG3 board.
CPU (RU30)
DPRAM (Dual Port RAM): Handshaking with the FCU is done through this block.
DMA controller
JBIG
SM 211 D619
DSP V34 modem (RL5T892): Includes the DTMF Receiver function
DCR for MH, MR, MMR, and JBIG compression and decompression
FROM
1Mbyte flash ROM for SG3 software storage and modem software storage
SDRAM
4Mbyte DRAM shared between ECM buffer, line buffer, and working memory
AFE (Analog Front End)
Analog processing
CODEC (COder-DECoder)
A/D & D/A conversions for modem
REG
Generates +3.3 V from the +5V from the FCU
D619 212 SM
5.3 VIDEO DATA PATH
5.3.1 TRANSMISSION
SM 213 D619
Memory Transmission and Parallel Memory Transmission
The base copier's scanner scans the original at the selected resolution in inch format. The IPU
processes the data and transfers it to the FCU.
When scanning a fax original, the IPU uses the MTF, independent dot erase and
threshold parameter settings programmed in the fax units scanner bit switches, not the
copier's SP modes.
Then, the FCU converts the data to mm format, and compresses the data in MMR or raw format to
store it in the SAF memory. If image rotation will be done, the image is rotated in page memory
before compression.
At the time of transmission, the FCU decompresses the stored data, then re-compresses and/or
reduces the data if necessary for transmission. The NCU transmits the data to the line.
Immediate Transmission
The base copier's scanner scans the original at the resolution agreed with the receiving terminal.
The IPU video processes the data and transfers it to the FCU.
When scanning a fax original, the IPU uses the MTF, independent dot erase and
thresholding parameter settings programmed in the fax units scanner bit switches, not
the copier's SP modes.
Then the FCU stores the data in page memory, and compresses the data for transmission. The
NCU transmits the data to the line.
JBIG Transmission
Memory transmission: If the receiver has JBIG compression, the data goes from the DCR to the
QM-Coder. Then the NCU transmits the data to the line. When an optional G3 unit (SG3) is
installed and PSTN2 is selected as the line type, JBIG compression is available, but only for the
PSTN-2 line.
Immediate transmission: If the receiver has JBIG compression, the data goes from the page
memory to the QM-Coder. Then the NCU transmits the data to the line. When an optional G3 unit
(SG3) is installed and PSTN2 is selected as the line type, JBIG compression is available, but only
for the PSTN-2 line.
Adjustments
Priority for the line used for G3 transmissions (PSTN 1/PSTN 2 or 3): System switch 16 bit 1
D619 214 SM
5.3.2 RECEPTION
First, the FCU stores the incoming data from either an analog line to the SAF memory. (The data
goes to the FACE3 at the same time, and is checked for error lines/frames.)
The FCU then decompresses the data and transfers it to page memory. If image rotation will be
done, the image is rotated in the page memory. The data is transferred to the IPU.
If the optional G3 unit is installed, the line that the message comes in on depends on the
telephone number dialled by the other party (the optional G3 unit has a different telephone
number from the main fax board).
JBIG Reception
When data compressed with JBIG comes in on PSTN-1 (the standard analog line), the data is
sent to the QM-CODER for decompression. Then the data is stored in the page memory, and
transferred to the IPU.
When data compressed with JBIG comes in on PSTN-2 (optional extra analog line), the data is
sent to the QM-CODER on the SG3 board for decompression.
SM 215 D619
5.4 FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES
5.4.1 MULTI-PORT
When the optional extra G3 Interface Unit is installed, communication can take place at the same
time through the two or three lines at once.
Available protocol
Option Available Line Type
Combinations
The base copier's scanner scans the original at the selected resolution. The IPU video processes
the data and transfers it to the controller board.
Then the controller stores the data in the page memory for the copier function, and compresses
the data in MMR (by software) to store it in the HDD. If image rotation will be done, the image is
D619 216 SM
rotated in the page memory before compression.
For transmission, the stored image data is transferred to the FCU. The FCU decompresses the
image data, then recompresses and/or reduces the data if necessary for transmission. The NCU
transmits the data to the line.
The documents can be stored in the HDD (Document Server) from the fax application. The stored
documents in the document sever can be used for the fax transmission in many times. More than
one document and the scanned document can be combined into one file and then the file can be
transmitted.
When using the document server, the SAF memory is not used.
The document is compressed with MMR and stored.
Up to 9,000 pages can be stored (1 file: Up to 1,000 pages) from the fax application.
Only stored documents from the fax application can be transmitted.
Scanned documents are given a name automatically, such as "FAX001". But it is possible to
change the file name, user name and password.
Up to 30 files can be selected at once.
The compression method of the fax application is different from the copy application. The
storing time is longer than the copier storing.
When selecting "Print 1st page", the stored document will be reduced to A4 size.
Mail Transmission
T.37 simple and full modes
This machine supports T.37 full mode. (ITU-T Recommendation, RFC2532). The difference
between T.37 simple mode and full mode is as follows.
200 x100
200 x 100 200 x 200
Resolution
200 x 200 200 x 400
400 x 400 (if available)
SM 217 D619
Function T.37 Simple Mode T.37 Full Mode
Data Formats
The scanned data is converted into a TIFF-F formatted file.
The fields of the e-mail and their contents are as follows:
Field Content
Multipart/mixed
Content Type
Attached files: image/tiff
D619 218 SM
Direct SMTP Transmission
Internet Fax documents can be sent directly to their destinations without going through the SMTP
server. (Internet Faxes normally transmit via the SMTP server.)
For example:
In this case, this feature destination e-mail address ([email protected]) is read as the SMTP server
address "gts.abcd.com", and the transmissions bypass the SMTP server.
Selectable Options
These options are available for selection:
With the default settings, the scan resolution can be either standard or detail. Inch-mm
conversion before TX depends on IFAX SW01 Bit 7. Detail resolution will be used if Super
Fine resolution is selected, unless Fine resolution is enabled with IFAX SW01.
The requirements for originals (document size, scan width, and memory capacity) are the
same as for G3 fax memory TX.
The default compression is TIFF-F format.
IFAX SW00: Acceptable paper widths for sending
IFAX SW09: Maximum number of attempts to the same destination
Secure Internet Transmission
SMTP Authentication:
User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> SMTP Authentication
POP Before SMTP:
User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> POP Before SMTP
SM 219 D619
Mail Reception
Three Types
This machine supports three types of e-mail reception:
POP3 (Post Office Protocol Ver. 3.)
IMAP4 (Internet Messaging Access Protocol)
SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)
D619 220 SM
Auth. E-mail RX
In order to limit access to mail delivery with IFAX, the addresses of senders must be limited using
the Access Limit Entry. Only one entry can be registered.
1. Access Limit Entry
For example, to limit access to @IFAX.ricoh.co.jp:
1. Conditions
The length of the Access Limit Entry is limited to 127 characters.
If the Access Limit Entry address and the mail address of the incoming mail do not match,
the incoming mail is discarded and not delivered, and the SMTP server responds with an
error. However, in this case an error report is not output.
If the Access Limit Entry address is not registered, and if the incoming mail specifies a
delivery destination, then the mail is delivered unconditionally.
SM 221 D619
Header Supported Types
Content-Transfer-
Base 64, 7-bit, 8-bit, Quoted Printable
Encoding
Field Content
Multipart/mixed
Content-Type
Text/Plain (for a text part), image/tiff (for attached files)
D619 222 SM
Field Content
Subject
--- Entry Condition
Entry
1. "CSI" ("RTI")
Fax Message No.
2. "RTI" CSI not registered +
No Subject File No.
Entry 3. "CSI" RTI not registered
SM 223 D619
Mail Type Item 1 Item 2 Item 3
RTI or CSI of
the station
Mail delivery
designated
Mail error
--- Error Message No. xxxx From CSI (RTI)
notification
E-mail Messages
After entering the subject, you can enter a message with: TX Mode> Text
An e-mail message (up to 5 lines) can be pre-registered with: User Tools> System Settings> File
Transfer> Program/Change/Delete E-mail Message
- Limitations on Entries -
Item Maximum
D619 224 SM
Message Disposition Notification (MDN)
For details: Core Technology Manual Facsimile Processes Faxing from a PC Internet/LAN
Fax Boards E-mail Options
The network system administrator can confirm whether a sent mail has been received correctly or
not. This confirmation is done in four steps.
1. Send request for confirmation of mail reception. To enable or disable this request (known as
MDN): TX Mode> Reception Notice
2. Mail reception (receive confirmation request)
3. Send confirmation of mail reception
4. Receive confirmation of mail reception
The other party's machine will not respond to the request unless the two conditions below are met:
The other party's machine must be set up to respond to the confirmation request.
The other party's machine must support MDN (Message Disposition Notification).
- Setting up the Receiving Party -
The receiving party will respond to the confirmation request if:
1. The "Disposition Notification To" field is in the received mail header (automatically inserted in
the 4th line in the upper table on the previous page, if MDN is enabled), and
2. Sending the disposition notification must be enabled (User Parameter Setting SW21 (15 [H])
Bit 1 for this model). The content of the response is as follows:
Handling Reports
- Sending a Request for a Return Receipt by Mail -
After the mail sender transmits a request for a return receipt, the mail sender's journal is
annotated with two hyphens (--) in the Result column and a "Q" in the Mode column.
- Mail Receipt (Request for Receipt Confirmation) and Sending Mail Receipt Response -
After the mail receiver sends a response to the request for a return receipt, the mail receiver's
journal is annotated with two hyphens (--) in the Result column and an "A" in the Mode column.
- Receiving the Return Receipt Mail -
After the mail sender receives a return receipt, the information in the mail sender's journal
about the receipt request is replaced, i.e. the journal is annotated with "OK" in the Result
column.
When the return receipt reports an error, the journal is annotated with an "E" in the Result
column.
SM 225 D619
The arrival of the return receipt is not recorded in the journal as a separate communication. Its
arrival is only reported by the presence of "OK" or "E" in the Result column.
If the mail address used by the sender specifies a mailing list (i.e., a Group destination; the
machine sends the mail to more than one location. See "How to set up Mail Delivery"), the
Result column of the Journal is updated every time a return receipt is received. For example,
if the mailing list was to 5 destinations, the Result column indicates the result of the
communication with the 5th destination only. The results of the communications to the first 4
destinations are not shown.
Exceptions:
If one of the communications had an error, the Result column will indicate E, even if
subsequent communications were OK.
If two of the communications had an error, the Journal will indicate the destination for the first
error only.
- Report Sample -
D619 226 SM
5.5 IP-FAX
IP-Fax Switch 01
SM 227 D619
5.5.3 SETTINGS
User parameter switch 34 (22[H]), bit 0
IP-Fax Gate Keeper usage, 0: No, 1: Yes
IP Fax Switches: Various IP-FAX settings (see the bit switch table)
D619 228 SM
6. SPECIFICATIONS
6.1.1 FCU
G3
8 x 3.85 lines/mm (Standard)
8 x 7.7 lines/mm (Detail)
8 x 15.4 line/mm (Fine) See Note1
Resolution: 16 x15.4 line/mm (Super Fine) See Note 1
200 x 100 dpi (Standard)
200 x 200 dpi (Detail)
400 x 400 dpi (Super Fine) See Note 1
Note: Optional Expansion Memory required
SM 229 D619
Data Compression: MH, MR, MMR, JBIG
G3: 33600/31200/28800/26400/24000/21600/
Data Rate: 19200/16800/14400/12000/9600/7200/4800/2400 bps
Automatic fallback
SAF
Standard: 4 MB
With optional Expansion Memory: 28 MB (4 MB+ 24 MB)
Memory Capacity: Page Memory
Standard: 8 MB (Print: 4 MB + Scanner: 4 MB)
With optional Expansion Memory: 16 MB (8 MB + 8 MB)
(Print 8 MB + Scanner: 8 MB)
D619 230 SM
6.2 CAPABILITIES OF PROGRAMMABLE ITEMS
Item Standard
Groups 100
Programs 100
Auto Document 6
Specific Senders 30
The following table shows how the capabilities of the document memory will change after the
Expansion Memory are installed.
Memory Transmission
400 400
file
Maximum number of
page for memory 1000 1000
transmission
SM 231 D619
Measured using an ITU-T #1 test document (Slerexe letter) at the standard resolution,
the auto image density mode and the Text mode.
D619 232 SM
6.3 I-FAX SPECIFICATIONS
Single/multi-part
E-mail File
MIME conversion
Format:
Image: TIFF-F (MH, MR, MMR)
SM 233 D619
SMTP-AUTH
Authentication
POP before SMTP
Method:
A-POP
D619 234 SM
6.4 IP-FAX SPECIFICATIONS
Maximum scanning
297mm x 1200mm (11.7 x 47.3)
size:
Compatible
IP-Fax compatible machines
machines:
SM 235 D619
6.5 FAX UNIT CONFIGURATION
2 FCU I/F
3 FCU GW I/F
4 Speaker
7 G3 Board 1*2
8 G3 Board 2
At least one G3 line is required for installation of Fax Connection Unit Type E
*2
(D621).
D619 236 SM
LARGE CAPACITY TRAY
RT43 (B473) / RT4010 (D613)
REVISION HISTORY
Page Dat e Added/Updated/New
None
LARGE CAPACITY TRAY
RT43 (B473) / RT4010 (D613)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2. DETAILS...........................................................................................7
2.1 OVERVIEW .................................................................................................. 7
2.1.1 LCT MAIN COMPONENTS ................................................................. 7
2.1.2 LCT DRIVE LAYOUT........................................................................... 9
2.2 PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION ............................................................ 10
2.2.1 STARTING PAPER FEED ................................................................. 10
2.2.2 FEED AND SEPARATION ................................................................ 11
2.3 PAPER LIFT ............................................................................................... 12
2.4 PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION ................................................................... 14
2.5 PAPER END DETECTION ......................................................................... 15
SM i B473/D613
EXTERNAL COVERS
Capacity Tray
B473/D613
Large
[F]
[E]
B473R001.WMF
SM 1 B473/D613
PICK-UP/FEED/SEPARATION ROLLERS
[B]
[A]
[D]
B473R002.WMF
[E]
[C]
B473R003.WMF
B473/D613 2 SM
PICK-UP SOLENOID
[A]
Capacity Tray
B473/D613
Large
B473R004.WMF
Rear cover ( x 4)
Open the transport cover (
1.2)
Bracket cover (
1.2)
[A]: Pick-up solenoid ( x 2,
x 1)
SM 3 B473/D613
PAPER END SENSOR, UPPER COVER SWITCHES
[A]
B473R005.WMF
[B]
B473R006.WMF
B473/D613 4 SM
TRAY MOTOR
Capacity Tray
B473/D613
Large
[A]
B473R007.WMF
[A]
[B]
B473R008.WMF
SM 5 B473/D613
PAPER SIZE ADJUSTMENT
[B]
[A]
[C]
B473R109.WMF
B473/D613 6 SM
OVERVIEW
2. DETAILS
2.1 OVERVIEW
2.1.1 LCT MAIN COMPONENTS
5 6 7
4
3
8
2
Capacity Tray
B473/D613
1
Large
17 9
16
10
15
11
14
12
13
B473D001.WMF
SM 7 B473/D613
OVERVIEW
B473/D613 8 SM
OVERVIEW
4 5
Capacity Tray
B473/D613
1
Large
6
7
B473D003.WMF
1. Pick-up Roller
2. Separation Roller
3. Transport Rollers
4. Feed Roller
5. Feed Motor
6. Tray Motor
7. Tray Lift Shaft
8. Tray Drive Belt
SM 9 B473/D613
PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION
[B]
[A]
[C]
B473D004.WMF
B473/D613 10 SM
PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION
[C] [B]
Capacity Tray
B473/D613
[A]
Large
B473D005.WMF
[E] [D]
The feed motor [A] switches on, then the pick-up solenoid [B] switches on and
transfers drive to the paper feed roller [C] and pick-up roller [D].
The rotating pick-up roller lowers and feeds the first sheet when it contacts the top
of the stack.
The separation roller [E], in contact with the feed roller, only allows one sheet out of
the tray.
As soon as the paper feed sensor (not shown) detects the leading edge of the
paper, it switches off the pick-up solenoid which raises the pick-up roller. The feed
roller feeds the sheet to the registration roller.
This process is repeated for each sheet.
SM 11 B473/D613
PAPER LIFT
[E]
[A]
[D]
[B]
[F]
[C]
[H]
B473D006.WMF
[G]
B473D158.WMF
Tray motor [A] Gear [B] Shaft [C] Tray belts [D] raise and lower the paper
tray [E].
After paper is set in the LCT and the upper cover is closed, if the paper height
sensor [F] is not activated, the tray motor lowers the tray and stops. When the
paper height sensor activates, the tray motor lifts the tray.
After several sheets have been fed, the paper level lowers, the actuator [G]
activates the lift sensor [H], and switches on the motor again. The motor raises
stack until the actuator de-activates the lift sensor.
This cycle repeats to maintain the correct height of the stack until the end of the
job.
B473/D613 12 SM
PAPER LIFT
[C]
[D]
[A]
Capacity Tray
B473/D613
Large
[B]
[E]
B473D108.WMF
Pressing the tray down button [A] reverses the rotation of the tray motor [B] and
lowers the tray [C].
The tray lowers until the stack sensor [D] detects the top of the stack and stops the
tray motor.
This mechanism lowers the tray by 5 cm, which gives the user enough space to
add 500 sheets of paper.
If the down switch is then pressed again, the bottom plate moves down once
again by 5 cm. This allows the customer to replenish paper in convenient
amounts and at the same position.
A lower limit sensor [E] (triggered by an actuator on the bottom of the tray) is also
provided to stop the tray motor if the stack sensor should fail.
Summary
The tray raises when:
The main power switch is turned on
When the lift sensor switches on during copying
The top cover is closed and the lift sensor switches on
The tray lowers when:
The tray down button is pressed.
The paper end sensor signals that there is no paper in the tray.
SM 13 B473/D613
PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION
[F]
[B]
[E]
[D]
[C]
B473D006.WMF
As paper is consumed from the top of the stack [A], the paper tray rises and the
actuator [B] attached to the tray passes through paper height sensor 3 [C], paper
height sensor 2 [D], and paper height sensor 1 [E] until the actuator reaches the
paper near end sensor [F].
The operation panel displays a message for each paper height until the actuator
reaches the near-end sensor, then a message warns the user that the tray is nearly
empty.
The table summarizes the relation between sensor detection and the number of
sheets remaining in the stack.
Sensors
Sheet Remaining Bars *1
Near-end P.Height 1 P.Height 2 P.Height 3
75 1 O
1500 2 P O
2500 3 P P O
3500 4 P P P O
*1
: The number of vertical bars in the paper height display on the operation panel.
O: Actuator blocking the sensor gap.
P: Sensor gap is open
B473/D613 14 SM
PAPER END DETECTION
[A]
Capacity Tray
[B]
B473/D613
Large
B473D111.WMF
The paper end sensor [A] monitors the light reflected by each sheet on top of the
stack.
When the last sheet feeds, the cutout [B] is exposed, and the paper end sensor
receives no reflected light from below because there is no paper and this signals
paper end.
SM 15 B473/D613
A3/DLT TRAY KIT (B475) /
A3/11x17 TRAY TYPE 9001 (D482)
REVISION HISTORY
Page Dat e Added/Updated/New
None
A3/DLT TRAY KIT (B475) /
A3/11x17 TRAY TYPE 9001 (D482)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2. DETAILS...........................................................................................3
SM i B475/D482
BOTTOM PLATE LIFT WIRE REPLACEMENT
[G]
[D]
B475/D482
[F]: Gear
[G]: Bottom plate lift wire
SM 1 B475/D482
BOTTOM PLATE LIFT WIRE REPLACEMENT
[E]
[D]
[B]
[A]
[C]
B475R061.WMF
B475/D482 2 SM
BOTTOM PLATE LIFT WIRE REPLACEMENT
2. DETAILS
[B]
[C]
[A]
[E]
[D] [F]
B475D101.WMF
With this option installed, only one stack of paper can be loaded.
Lift motor [A] Shaft and pulleys [B] Tray wires [C] Tray bottom plate [D].
An array of four paper height sensors [E] provide paper supply detection. As each
sensor is actuated, a message (percent of paper remaining) alerts the user about
the remaining amount of paper. When the bottom sensor [F] of the four sensors is
actuated, the paper end message is displayed.
A3/DLT Tray
B475/D482
Kit
SM 3 B475/D482
B513/B531
OUTPUT JOGGER UNIT TYPE
1075/PUNCH UNIT TYPE 1075
REVISION HISTORY
Page Dat e Added/Updated/New
None
OUTPUT JOGGER UNIT B513/PUNCH
UNIT B531
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INSTALLATION................................................................................1
SM i B513/B531
Front to Rear Adjustment ....................................................................... 23
Right to Left Adjustment......................................................................... 23
3.9 JOGGER UNIT B513 (OPTION)................................................................. 24
3.9.1 JOGGER UNIT .................................................................................. 24
3.9.2 JOGGER UNIT PCB .......................................................................... 25
3.9.3 JOGGER UNIT MOTOR .................................................................... 26
4. TROUBLESHOOTING ...................................................................27
6. DETAILS.........................................................................................29
6.1 TRAY AND STAPLER JUNCTION GATE .................................................. 29
6.2 PAPER PRE-STACKING ........................................................................... 30
6.3 JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING ..................................................... 31
6.4 STAPLER UNIT MOVEMENT .................................................................... 32
Side-to-Side ........................................................................................... 32
Rotation (1) ............................................................................................ 33
Rotation (2) ............................................................................................ 33
6.5 STAPLER ................................................................................................... 34
6.6 FEED-OUT ................................................................................................. 36
6.7 PAPER EXIT STACKING ........................................................................... 37
6.8 SHIFT TRAY............................................................................................... 38
6.8.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................... 38
Stand-by Mode ...................................................................................... 38
6.8.2 SHIFT TRAY UP/DOWN MOVEMENT .............................................. 39
Sort/Stack Mode (Shift Mode) ................................................................ 39
Staple Mode ........................................................................................... 39
6.8.3 SHIFT TRAY LOWER LIMIT DETECTION ........................................ 40
6.9 SHIFT TRAY SIDE-TO-SIDE MOVEMENT ................................................ 41
6.10 JAM CONDITIONS ................................................................................... 42
6.11 PUNCH UNIT B531 (OPTION) ................................................................. 43
6.11.1 PUNCH UNIT DRIVE....................................................................... 43
6.11.2 PUNCH WASTE COLLECTION ...................................................... 44
6.12 JOGGER UNIT B513 (OPTION)............................................................... 45
6.12.1 JOGGER UNIT MECHANICAL LAYOUT ........................................ 45
6.12.2 JOGGER UNIT DRIVE .................................................................... 46
B513/B531 ii SM
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALLATION
For details about installing the 3000 Sheet Finisher B478, please refer to the
instructions you received with the instructions or the 1. Installation in the main
machine service manual.
B513/B53131
Jogger Unit/
Punch Unit
Output
SM 1 B513/B531
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
For details about the 3000 Sheet Finisher B478 PM table, please refer to Section
2. Preventive Maintenance in the main Service Manual.
B513/B531 2 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
[D]
B513/B53131
Jogger Unit/
Punch Unit
[C]
Output
B478R502.WMF
[B]
B478R505.WMF
Front Door
1. Remove the front door screw [A] ( x 1).
2. Remove the front door [B].
Inner Cover
1. Remove the inner cover [D] ( x 3).
SM 3 B513/B531
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
[C]
[B]
[A]
B478R503.WMF
1. Remove the side table [A] ( x 2). Slide to the right to remove it.
2. Click the release lever [B] and remove the upper tray [C].
B513/B531 4 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
[E]
[D]
[B]
[A]
[J]
[G]
[H]
[I]
[F]
B478R504.WMF [C]
B513/B53131
Jogger Unit/
Punch Unit
Output
B478R501.WMF
Left Covers
1. Remove the left upper panel [A].
2. Remove the left upper cover [B] ( x 2,
x 2).
3. Remove the door and left inner cover. (See Front Door and Left Inner Cover
Replacement.)
4. Remove the rear cover [F] ( x 2).
5. Remove the left lower cover [C] ( x 4).
Shift Tray
1. If you need to lower the shift tray, support the bottom of the tray with your hand,
then pull the gear toward you [G] to release the tray and lower it.
2. Remove the shift tray [H] ( x 4).
3. Remove the shift tray rear cover [I] and front cover [J] ( x 1 each).
SM 5 B513/B531
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
3.2 ROLLERS
3.2.1 SHIFT POSITIONING ROLLER
[A]
[B]
[C]
B478R522.WMF
1. Above the shift tray, pull the roller mount [A] out.
2. Remove the rollers [B] and [C] ( x 1 each)
B513/B531 6 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
B513/B53131
Jogger Unit/
Punch Unit
Output
[C]
[B] B478R506.WMF
[A]
SM 7 B513/B531
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
[C]
[B]
[A]
[D]
B478R507.WMF
[E]
[H]
[G]
[I] [F]
B478R508.WMF
1. Open the front door and pull out the staple unit.
2. Remove the rear cover.
3. Remove the main board and all connectors ( x 8).
4. Remove the screw [A] and tension spring [B] for the tension bracket [C], and
release the tension of the timing belt.
5. Remove the pulley [D] and bushing [E] ( x 2).
6. Remove the inner cover [F] ( x 1).
7. Open the guide [G], then remove the alignment brush roller assembly [H] ( x 1).
8. Remove the alignment brush roller [I] ( x 1, bushing x 1 front/back).
B513/B531 8 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
B478R523.WMF
[B] [C]
[A]
B513/B53131
Jogger Unit/
Punch Unit
Output
[E]
[F]
[D]
B478R524.WMF
SM 9 B513/B531
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
[B] [A]
B478R525.WMF
B513/B531 10 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
3.5 SENSORS
3.5.1 STACK HEIGHT 1, 2 AND EXIT GUIDE OPEN SENSOR
[C]
[E]
[F]
[D]
[G]
B513/B53131
Jogger Unit/
Punch Unit
Output
[B]
[A] B478R509.WMF
SM 11 B513/B531
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
[D]
[B] [E]
[C]
[A]
B478R510.WMF
B513/B531 12 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
[B]
[C]
[A]
[D]
[A]
B513/B53131
Jogger Unit/
B478R511.WMF
Punch Unit
Output
[E]
B478R512.WMF
SM 13 B513/B531
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
[B]
B478R513.WMF
[A] [D]
[C]
B478R514.WMF
Entrance Sensor
1. Disconnect the finisher from the copier.
2. Remove the sensor bracket [A] ( x 1).
3. Replace the entrance sensor [B] ( x 1,
x 1).
B513/B531 14 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
[A]
[B]
B478R521.WMF
B513/B53131
Jogger Unit/
Punch Unit
Output
[C]
B478R515.WMF
[E]
[D]
B478R516.WMF
SM 15 B513/B531
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
[A]
[B]
[C]
B478R517.WMF
1. Open the front door, pull out the stapler unit, then remove the rear cover.
2. Remove the rear cover ( x 2).
3. Remove the staple waste hopper [A] ( x 1).
4. Remove the hopper holder [B] ( x 2).
5. Replace the staple waste hopper sensor [C] (
x 1).
B513/B531 16 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
[C]
[A]
B513/B53131
Jogger Unit/
Punch Unit
Output
[B]
B478R519.WMF
SM 17 B513/B531
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
3.6 STAPLER
[C]
[B]
[A]
B478R518.WMF
1. Open the front door and pull out the staple tray.
2. Remove the stapler unit harness cover [A].
3. Remove the stapler cover [B] ( x 1,
x 2).
4. Lift the stapler off of the pegs [C].
B513/B531 18 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
[A]
B513/B53131
Jogger Unit/
Punch Unit
Output
B478R531.WMF
SM 19 B513/B531
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
[B]
[A]
[C]
B478R526.WMF
1. Do the procedures to remove the front door and all covers, with the exception
of the left lower cover and top cover (labeled [C]: and [E]).
NOTE: Be sure to lower the shift tray by pulling the gear toward you. The shift
tray must be down.
2. Remove the shift tray motor. (
3.7)
3. Remove the left stay [A] ( x 3).
4. Unhook the stay at top [B].
5. Remove the shift tray mounting plate [C] ( x 2).
B513/B531 20 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
[E]
[F]
[A]
B478R527.WMF
B513/B53131
Jogger Unit/
Punch Unit
Output
[G]
[H]
B478R528.WMF
SM 21 B513/B531
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
[A]
[B]
B478R530.WMF
[D]
[C]
[E]
B478R529.WMF
B513/B531 22 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
[A]
B531R101.WMF
B513/B53131
Jogger Unit/
Punch Unit
Output
The position of the punched holes can be adjusted in two ways.
SM 23 B513/B531
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
[A]
B513I002.WMF
[B]
B513R003.WMF
B513/B531 24 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
[A]
B513/B53131
Jogger Unit/
Punch Unit
Output
B513R001.WMF
SM 25 B513/B531
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
[B]
B513R002.WMF
B513/B531 26 SM
TROUBLESHOOTING
4. TROUBLESHOOTING
If the machine logs an SC code in the display of the operation panel, see Section
4 Troubleshooting of the Service Manual. Section 4 contains a complete list of all
service codes and how to troubleshoot the problem.
B513/B53131
Jogger Unit/
Punch Unit
Output
SM 27 B513/B531
SERVICE TABLES
5. SERVICE TABLES
For details about 3000-Sheet Finisher B478 SP codes, please refer to 5. Service
Tables in the main machine service manual.
5.3 FUSES
No. Function
FU100 Protects 24 V.
B513/B531 28 SM
DETAILS
6. DETAILS
6.1 TRAY AND STAPLER JUNCTION GATE
[A]
[D]
[C] [B]
B513/B53131
Jogger Unit/
Punch Unit
B478D506.WMF
Output
Sort/Stack Mode Staple Mode
[A]
[A]
[D] [D]
B478D505.WMF B478D507.WMF
Depending on the finishing mode, the copies are directed up, straight through, or
down by the combinations of open and closed junction gates.
SM 29 B513/B531
DETAILS
[A]
[B]
[E]
[F]
[C] [D]
B478D000.WMF
This mechanism improves productivity in staple mode. It is only used when copying
on A4, LT, or B5 (all LEF).
During stapling, the copier has to wait. This mechanism reduces the wait by
holding the first two sheets of a job while the previous job is still being stapled. It
only works during the second and subsequent sets of a multi-set copy job.
The pre-stack junction gate solenoid [A] turns on 120 mm after the 1st sheet of
paper turns on the entrance sensor, and this directs the sheet to the pre-stack tray
[B]. (This sheet cannot be fed to the stapler yet, because the first set is still being
stapled.) The pre-stack paper stopper solenoid [C] turns on 350 mm after the 1st
sheet turns on the entrance sensor. The pre-stack paper stopper [D] then stops the
paper.
The pre-stack junction gate solenoid turns off 230 mm after the trailing edge of the
1st sheet passes through the entrance sensor, and the 2nd sheet is sent to the
paper guide [E]. The pre-stack paper stopper is released about 40 mm after the
2nd sheet turns on the pre-stack stopper sensor [F], and the two sheets of copy
paper are sent to the stapler tray. All sheets after the 2nd sheet go to the stapler
tray via the paper guide [E].
B513/B531 30 SM
DETAILS
[A]
[G]
[F]
[E]
[B]
[D]
[L]
[M]
B513/B53131
Jogger Unit/
Punch Unit
[I]
Output
[K]
[J] B478D508.WMF
In the staple mode, as every sheet of paper arrives in the jogger unit, it is vertically
and horizontally aligned, then the staple edge is pressed flat to ensure the edge of
the stack is aligned correctly for stapling.
Vertical Paper Alignment: About 60 ms after the trailing edge of the copy passes
the staple tray entrance sensor [A], the positioning roller motor [B] is energized to
push the positioning roller [C] into contact with the paper. The positioning roller and
alignment brush roller [D] rotate to push the paper back and align the trailing edge
of the paper against the stack stopper [E].
Horizontal Paper Alignment: When the print key is pressed, the jogger motor [F]
turns on and the jogger fences [G] move to the wait position about 7.2 mm wider
than the selected paper size on both sides. When the trailing edge of the paper
passes the staple unit entrance sensor, the jogger motor moves the jogger fences
3.7 mm towards the paper. Next, the jogger motor turns on again for 3.5 mm for the
horizontal paper alignment then goes back to the wait position.
Paper Stack Correction: After the paper is aligned in the stapler tray, the left [J],
center [K], and right [L] stack plate motors switch on briefly and drive the front stack,
center stack, and rear stack plates against the edge of the stack to flatten the edge
completely against the staple tray for stapling. When the next copy paper turns on
the stapler entrance sensor, the stack plate motor turns on and returns to its home
position. The home position is detected by stack plate HP sensor [M].
SM 31 B513/B531
DETAILS
[A]
[B]
[C]
B478D513.WMF
Side-to-Side
The stapler motor [A] moves the stapler [B] from side to side. After the start key is
pressed, the stapler moves from its home position to the stapling position.
If two-staple-position mode is selected, for the first stack the stapler moves to the
rear stapling position first, staples, moves to the front position, staples and waits at
the front. For the second stack, the stapler staples the front corner first, then moves
to the rear corner and staples.
NOTE: For continuous stapling jobs, the corners are stapled rear then front for the
odd number stacks and stapled front then rear for even number stacks.
After the job is completed, the stapler returns to its home position. This is detected
by the stapler HP sensor [C].
B513/B531 32 SM
DETAILS
[A]
[B]
[F]
[D]
B478D514.WMF
[E]
B513/B53131
Jogger Unit/
Punch Unit
Output
B478D523.WMF
B478D515.WMF
[C]
Rotation (1)
In the oblique staple position mode, the stapler rotation motor [A] rotates the
stapler units [B] 45 to counterclockwise after it moves to the stapling position.
Rotation (2)
When the staple end condition arises, the stapler motor moves the stapler to the
front and the stapler rotation motor rotates the stapler unit to clockwise to remove
the staple cartridge [C]. This allows the user to add new staples.
Once the staples have been installed, and the front door closed, the stapler unit
returns to its home position. As the stapler unit is returning to the home position,
the stapler return sensor [D] is activated, the return solenoid [E] turns on and it
assists the guide roller [F] to return to its guide (this guide directs the stapler during
rotation).
SM 33 B513/B531
DETAILS
6.5 STAPLER
[C]
[E]
[B]
[D]
[A]
B478D521.WMF
B478D516.WMF
[E]
[F]
B478D522.WMF [G]
When the aligned copies are brought to the stapling position by the positioning
roller and jogger fences, the staple hammer motor [A] starts stapling.
During stapling, the stapler trims off the excess length [B] of the staples by lowering
the cutter [C]. This excess length depends on the number of copies in the set; there
will be very little for a stack containing 100 sheets. The staple waste drops into the
tray [D] in the stapler. When the stapler unit returns to its home position, the tray
hits the shaft [E] and the tray opens. The staple waste drops into the staple waste
hopper [F]. When the staple waste hopper is full, the actuator on its base activates
the staple waste hopper sensor [G]. An SC737 (Full Finisher Staple Waste Hopper)
is displayed.
B513/B531 34 SM
DETAILS
[C]
[D]
[A]
[B]
[E]
B513/B53131
Jogger Unit/
Punch Unit
B478D518.WMF
Output
[F]
B478D517.WMF
The stapler has a staple end sensor [A], cartridge set sensor [B] and staple
hammer HP sensor [C].
When a staple end or no cartridge condition is detected, a message is displayed
advising the operator to install a staple cartridge. If this condition is detected during
a copy job, the indication will appear, and the copy job will stop.
The staple cartridge has a clinch area [D] where jammed staples collect. The
operator can remove the jammed staples from the clinch area by pressing in the
releases [E] on both sides, then lowering the bracket lever [F].
SM 35 B513/B531
DETAILS
6.6 FEED-OUT
[G] [D]
[A]
[B]
[C] [E]
[I] [H]
B478D519.WMF
[F]
B478D512.WMF
After the copies have been stapled, the stack feed-out motor [A] starts. The pawl
[B] on the stack feed-out belt [C] transports the set of stapled copies up and feeds
it to the shift tray exit roller [D]. When stapling starts, the exit guide motor [E] opens
the upper exit guide [F], which includes the upper shift tray exit roller [G], in order to
feed out the leading edge of the copy set smoothly. The exit guide motor turns on
again a certain time after stapling is complete, and the upper exit guide plate is
lowered. Then the shift tray exit roller takes over the stack feed-out.
The on-off timing of the exit guide motor is detected by the exit guide open sensor
[H].
The stack-feed-out motor turns off when the pawl actuates the stack feed-out belt
home position sensor [I].
B513/B531 36 SM
DETAILS
[A]
[B]
[E]
[C]
[F]
[D]
[H] [I]
[G]
B513/B53131
Jogger Unit/
Punch Unit
Output
B478D524.WMF
The stacking roller assembly [A] is fastened to a plate [B] on a shaft by a spring [C].
The cam [D], in contact with the bottom of the plate, is connected to the stacking
roller drag motor [E] via a timing belt.
The stacking roller drag motor and timing belt rotate the cam against the bottom of
the plate to move the rollers forward and back with each sheet ejected onto the
shift tray.
The stacking roller motor [F] drives the shaft [G] that rotates the stacking rollers
counter-clockwise as the rollers move back. The simultaneous rotation and
backward movement of the roller assembly pulls each sheet back toward the copier
to align the edges of the stack on the shift tray.
The actuator [H] is mounted on the cam and rotating with both rotating clockwise)
and detects the roller assembly home position when the actuator leaves the gap of
the return drive HP sensor [I] and signals the machine that the rollers are at the
home position. The machine uses this information to control paper feed timing and
confirm that the mechanism is operating correctly. The cam and actuator make one
complete rotation for every sheet fed out of the machine onto the shift tray.
SM 37 B513/B531
DETAILS
[F]
[A]
[G]
[B]
[C]
B478D010.WMF
The shift tray lift motor [A] controls the vertical position of the shift tray [B] through
gears and timing belts [C].
Stand-by Mode
After the main switch is turned on, or when the stack is removed from the tray, the
end of the feeler on the tray falls and its actuator [D] rotates up into staple mode
HP sensor 2 [E] (S7) and switches it on. This switches on the lift motor, which
raises the tray until the tray pushes the actuator out of the sensor [E]. Then, the lift
motor stops the shift tray; this is the home position (the actuator [D] is between the
two sensors [E] and [F].
The shift tray upper limit switch (SW1) prevents the drive gear from being damaged
if staple mode HP sensor 2 [E] fails. In case of a failure, when the shift tray pushes
up the actuator [G] and positioning rollers, the switch will cut the power to the shift
tray lift motor.
B513/B531 38 SM
DETAILS
[D]
[B]
[C]
[A]
[G]
B513/B53131
Jogger Unit/
Punch Unit
[F] [E]
Output
B478D010.WMF
Staple Mode
The shift tray moves to home position, which is when the actuator [B] is between
the staple mode home position sensors [C] and [D]. During feed-out, the shift tray
is lowered automatically at prescribed intervals. When the stack is removed from
the tray, the tray returns to the home position for stand-by mode. (
6.8.1)
SM 39 B513/B531
DETAILS
[A]
[D]
[B]
B478D010.WMF
[C]
This machine has two shift tray lower limit sensors: shift lower limit sensor [A] (S9)
for large paper (B4 and larger) and shift lower limit sensor [B] (S11) for small paper
(smaller than B4).
NOTE: Sensor [C] (S10) is not used.
When the actuator [D] enters sensor [A] while using large paper (about 1500
sheets are on the tray), a message will be displayed and copying will stop.
When the actuator [D] enters sensor [B] while using small paper (about 3,000
sheets are on the tray), a message will be displayed and copying will stop.
B513/B531 40 SM
DETAILS
[D]
[A]
[F]
[C]
[E]
B513/B53131
Jogger Unit/
Punch Unit
[B]
Output
B478D520.WMF
In sort/stack mode, the shift tray [A] moves from side to side to separate the sets of
copies.
The horizontal position of the shift tray is controlled by the shift motor [B] and shift
gear disk [C]. After one set of copies is made and delivered to the shift tray, the
shift motor turns on, driving the shift gear disk and the shaft [D]. The end fence [E]
is positioned by the shaft, creating the side-to-side movement.
When the shift gear disk has rotated 180 degrees (when the shift tray is fully shifted
across), the cut-out in the shift gear disk turns on the shift tray half-turn sensor [F]
and the shift motor stops. The next set of copies is then delivered. The motor turns
on, repeating the same process and moving the tray back to the previous position.
SM 41 B513/B531
DETAILS
B513/B531 42 SM
DETAILS
[D]
[E]
B513/B53131
Jogger Unit/
Punch Unit
Output
B531D102.WMF
The punch unit makes 2 or 3 holes at the trailing edge of the paper. The number of
holes depends on a selection made on the operation panel.
The cam [A] has 2 punches on one side and 3 punches on the other, and is turned
by the punch motor [B]. The punch motor turns on immediately after the trailing
edge of the paper passes the entrance sensor. The punches on the cam rotate
downward and punch holes in the paper.
After punching a sheet of paper, the cam returns to home position and stops.
Home position depends on whether 2 holes or 3 holes are being made, so there
are two punch HP sensors. Punch HP sensor 1 [C] is used when 2-hole punching
is selected, and punch HP sensor 2 [D] is used when 3-hole punching is selected.
When the cut-out [E] enters the slot of the punch HP in use (sensor 1 or 2-hole
punching or sensor 2 for 3/4-hole punching) the motor stops.
The knob (not shown) on the front end of the punch unit can be turned in either
direction to clear paper jammed in the punch unit.
SM 43 B513/B531
DETAILS
[A]
[B]
[C]
B531D103.WMF
Punch waste is collected in the punch waste hopper [A] positioned under the punch
unit.
When the level of the punch waste in the hopper rises as far as the hole [B] in the
hopper, the punch waste sensor [C] turns on, stops the job, and triggers a
message on the operation to indicate that the hopper is full and must be removed
and emptied.
The job resumes automatically after the hopper is emptied and returned to the
finisher.
The punch waste hopper sensor also functions as the hopper set sensor. When the
hopper is not in the finisher, or if it is not inserted completely, the spring loaded
sensor arm rotates up and to the right with the punch waste sensor away from the
hole in the hopper holder and a message is displayed. The message in this case is
the same as the hopper full message.
B513/B531 44 SM
DETAILS
B513/B53131
Jogger Unit/
Punch Unit
Output
B513D003.WMF
SM 45 B513/B531
DETAILS
[C]
[F] [B]
[A]
[D]
[G]
[H]
[J]
[I]
[E]
B513D002.WMF
At prescribed intervals, the jogger motor [A] switches on and drives the jogger
timing belt [B], gear [C] and jogger fence timing belt [D] which drives the shift
jogger fences [E] against the sides of the stack to align its edges.
At the end of the job, the jogger fence lift motor [F] switches on and raises the
fences until the actuator [G] leaves the slot of the shift jogger fence lift HP sensor
[H] and shuts off the shift jogger fence lift motor.
At the same time, the jogger motor reverses and drives the fences away from the
sides of the stack until the actuator [I] deactivates the shift jogger fence HP sensor
[J] and switches off the jogger motor.
The jogger fences remain up in the standby position until the next job starts.
B513/B531 46 SM
OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
1 2 3 4 5
6
21
8
20
9
19
B513/B53131
Jogger Unit/
Punch Unit
18 10
Output
17 11
16
15 12
13
14
B478V500.WMF
SM 47 B513/B531
OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
B513/B531 48 SM
OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
B513/B53131
stopper solenoid.
Jogger Unit/
Punch Unit
Output
S16 Stapler Tray Exit Detects jams at the staple tray exit.
S17 Positioning Roller HP Detects the home position of the positioning roller.
S18 Stack Feed-Out Belt HP Detects the home position of the stack feed-out belt.
S19 Stapler Tray Paper Detects the copy paper in the stapler tray.
S20 Jogger HP Detects the home position of the shift jogger fences.
S21 Stack Plate - Center HP Detects the home position of the center stack plate.
S22 Stack Plate Front Detects the home position of the front stack plate.
S23 Stack Plate Rear Detects the home position of the rear stack plate.
Detects the home position of the staple unit for side-
S24 Stapler HP
to-side movement.
Detects the home position of the stapler unit for 45-
S25 Stapler Rotation HP
degree rotation.
S26 Stapler Return Detects the on timing of the stapler return solenoid.
S27 Staple Waste Hopper Detects when the staple waste hopper is full.
Detects when the punch waste hopper is full and
S28 Punch Waste Hopper detects when the punch tray is set. Punch Unit
B531 (option).
Detects the cam home position for the 2-hole
S29 Punch HP 1
punch. Punch Unit B531 (option).
Detects the cam home position for 3/4 punch.
S30 Punch HP 2
Punch Unit B531 (option).
Detects the home position of the jogger unit arms
S31 Shift Jogger HP
during paper alignment. Jogger Unit B513 (option).
Detects the when both shift jogger fences are at the
S32 Shift Jogger Lift HP lowered position and ready to move against the
sides of the stack. Jogger Unit B513 (option).
SM 49 B513/B531
OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
B513/B531 50 SM
OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
1 2 3 4 5
19
18
17
16 6
15
14
13 7
12
20
21
11
22
B513/B53131
Jogger Unit/
Punch Unit
Output
10 23
B478V503.WMF
9 8
26
24
25
B478V504.WMF
SM 51 B513/B531
COVER INTERPOSER TRAY
TYPE 3260(B704) / TYPE CI4000(D614)
REVISION HISTORY
Page Dat e Added/Updated/New
None
COVER INTERPOSER TRAY B704
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2. DETAILS...........................................................................................8
2.1 OVERVIEW .................................................................................................. 8
2.1.1 MAIN LAYOUT .................................................................................... 8
2.1.2 DRIVE LAYOUT .................................................................................. 9
2.1.3 PAPER SIZE DETECTION ................................................................ 10
2.1.4 PAPER PATH .................................................................................... 13
2.2 PAPER FEED ............................................................................................. 14
Power On ............................................................................................... 14
Paper Separation and Feed ................................................................... 14
Bottom Tray Lift ..................................................................................... 14
Paper Near-end ..................................................................................... 14
Paper End .............................................................................................. 14
SM i B704/D614
EXTERNAL COVERS
[E] [A]
[D]
[C]
[F]
[B]
B470R001.WMF
B704/D614
Interposer
Cover
Tray
SM 1 B704/D614
FEED UNIT AND PICK-UP ROLLER
[A]
[B]
B470R002.WMF
B470R003.WMF
B704/D614 2 SM
FEED BELT
[E]
[A]
[D]
[B]
[C]
B470R004.WMF
[F]
B470R005.WMF
1. Position the pick-up roller unit [A] and feed belt holder [B] as shown above.
Cover
Tray
2. On the rear side, slide out the bushing, and rotate [D] until its flat side is parallel
with [E], then snap it on.
3. On the front side, rotate [F] until its flat side is parallel with [D], then snap it on.
Viewed from the bottom, the plates must be aligned.
SM 3 B704/D614
GUIDE PLATE ADJUSTMENT
[A]
[B]
[C]
B470R151.WMF
Adjust the guide plate if the holes punched in the covers or slip sheets are not
correctly aligned with holes punched in the other sheets.
1. Open the feed cover.
2. Loosen the screw [A].
3. Push the table [B] left or right to change its position, then tighten the screw.
NOTE: If you want to see the scale [C], you must remove the rear cover and
the support tray.
B704/D614 4 SM
MAIN BOARD
[A]
B470R101.WMF
B704/D614
Interposer
Cover
Tray
SM 5 B704/D614
MOTOR REPLACEMENT
[A]
[B]
B470R102.WMF
[A]
B470R104.WMF
B704/D614 6 SM
MOTOR REPLACEMENT
[A]
[C]
[B] [D]
B470R105.WMF
[E]
B470R103.WMF
Tray
SM 7 B704/D614
OVERVIEW
2. DETAILS
2.1 OVERVIEW
2.1.1 MAIN LAYOUT
1 2 3 4
5
6
B470D001.WMF
1. Support tray
2. Slip sheet tray
3. Pick-up roller
4. Feed belt
5. Separation roller
6. Grip roller
B704/D614 8 SM
OVERVIEW
2 3
1
4
B470D003.WMF
1. Pick-up Roller
2. Feed Belt
3. Bottom Plate Lift Motor
4. Feed Motor
5. Transport Motor
6. Timing Belt
7. Vertical Transport Motor
B704/D614
Interposer
Cover
Tray
SM 9 B704/D614
OVERVIEW
DLT SEF
A3 SEF
8 K SEF
B4 SEF
LG 10"x14"
F4
S6
S5 A4 SEF
LT SEF
US EXE SEF 16 K SEF
B5 SEF 8"x10"
S4
HLT SEF LT LEF
A5 SEF 16 K LEF
A5 LEF
HLT LEF
P5 P4 P3 P2 P1
S3 S2 S1
B470D901.WMF
B704/D614 10 SM
OVERVIEW
The table below lists the sensor output for each paper size.
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6
A3 0 1 1 1 1 1
B4 1 1 0 1 1 1
A4 SEF 1 0 0 1 1 0
A4 LEF 0 1 1 0 0 0
B5 SEF 0 0 0 1 0 0
B5 LEF 1 1 0 0 0 0
A5 SEF 0 0 0 0 0 0
A5 LEF 1 0 0 0 0 0
11" x 17" 1 1 1 1 1 1
10" x 14" SEF 1 1 0 1 1 1
81/2" x 14" 1 0 0 1 1 1
81/2" x 13" 1 0 0 1 1 1
81/2" x 11" 1 0 0 1 0 0
11" x 81/2" 1 1 1 0 0 0
8" x 10" 1 0 0 1 0 0
51/2" x 81/2" 0 0 0 0 0 0
81/2" x 51/2" 1 0 0 0 0 0
71/2" x 101/2"
0 0 0 1 0 0
(US Exec.)
101/2" x 71/2"
1 1 1 0 0 0
(US Exec.)
8K 1 1 1 1 1 1
16 K SEF 1 0 0 1 0 0
16 K LEF 1 1 1 0 0 0
The cover interposer tray detects all the paper sizes listed above. However, there
are some limitations on the display of the correct paper size.
North America Europe/Asia
B4 SEF 257 x 364 mm Displays 10x14*1
B5 SEF 182 x 257 Displays US Exec. *1
A5 SEF 148 x 210 Displays HLT SEF *1
A5 LEF 210 x 148 Displays HLT LEF *1
DLT SEF 11" x 17" Displays 8K LEF *2
LG SEF 81/2" x 14" Displays F4 SEF *2
LT SEF 81/2" x 11" Displays 16 K SEF *2
B704/D614
Interposer
Tray
*1
: Cannot be corrected.
*2
: B064 series: Can be corrected with SP5959 006 (Paper Size Cover Sheet).
B140 series: Can be corrected with SP5158
SM 11 B704/D614
OVERVIEW
To Select for
Loaded Display (Default) Enter
Display
81/2" x 13" 81/2" x 14" 81/2" x 13" 165
101/2" x 71/2" 81/2" x 11" 101/2" x 71/2" 173
8" x 10" 81/2" x 11" 8" x 10" 171
Europe/Asia
Execute SP5959 006 and enter the correct number for the size of the paper loaded
for feeding from the cover interposer tray.
To Select for
Loaded Display (Default) Enter
Display
11" x 17" 8K 11" x 17" 160
81/2" x 11" 16 K SEF 81/2" x 11" 166
11" x 81/2" 16 K LEF 11" x 81/2" 38
81/4" x 13" 81/2" x 13" SEF 81/4" x 13" 168
B704/D614 12 SM
OVERVIEW
1 2 3
B470D006.WMF
1. Pick-up Roller
2. Feed Belt
3. Separation Roller
4. Grip Roller
5. Transport Roller 1
6. Transport Roller 2
The paper feeds from the tray, to the feed belt, then to the grip roller and down into
the paper path to the finisher below.
B704/D614
Interposer
Cover
Tray
SM 13 B704/D614
PAPER FEED
[C]
[H]
[G]
[A]
[E]
[F]
[D]
B470D005.WMF
Power On
When paper is placed on the tray, the paper set sensor [A] in the tray actuates and
switches on the bottom plate lift motor [B]. The top of the stack raises the pick-up
roller unit until the actuator on this unit actuates the pick-up roller position sensor
[C] and switches the motor off.
Paper Near-end
Near-end is detected when the actuator [G] on the bottom plate enters the near-
end sensor [H].
Paper End
After the last sheet feeds the paper set sensor [A] goes off and signals paper out.
B704/D614 14 SM
3000-SHEET FINISHER (B706)
SR4050 FINISHER (D460)
SR4080 FINISHER (D610)
REVISION HISTORY
Page Dat e Added/Updated/New
None
3000-SHEET FINISHER
B706/D460/D610
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INSTALLATION................................................................................1
SM i B706/D460/D610
3.8 Z-FOLD JOGGER UNIT ............................................................................. 23
3.8.1 Z-FOLD JOGGER UNIT COVER....................................................... 23
3.8.2 Z-FOLD JOGGER UNIT .................................................................... 24
3.8.3 JOGGER TOP FENCE MOTOR ........................................................ 25
3.8.4 JOGGER BOTTOM FENCE MOTOR ................................................ 26
3.9 PUNCH UNIT B531 (OPTION) ................................................................... 27
3.9.1 PUNCH POSITION ADJUSTMENT ................................................... 27
Front to Rear Adjustment ....................................................................... 27
Right to Left Adjustment......................................................................... 27
3.10 JOGGER UNIT B513 (OPTION)............................................................... 28
3.10.1 JOGGER UNIT ................................................................................ 28
3.10.2 JOGGER UNIT PCB ........................................................................ 29
3.10.3 JOGGER UNIT MOTOR .................................................................. 30
4. TROUBLESHOOTING ...................................................................31
6. DETAILS.........................................................................................33
6.1 TRAY AND STAPLER JUNCTION GATE .................................................. 33
6.2 PAPER PRE-STACKING ........................................................................... 34
6.3 JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING ..................................................... 35
6.4 STAPLER UNIT MOVEMENT .................................................................... 36
Side-to-Side ........................................................................................... 36
Rotation (1) ............................................................................................ 37
Rotation (2) ............................................................................................ 37
6.5 STAPLER ................................................................................................... 38
6.6 FEED-OUT ................................................................................................. 40
6.7 PAPER EXIT STACKING ........................................................................... 41
6.8 SHIFT TRAY............................................................................................... 42
6.8.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................... 42
Stand-by Mode ...................................................................................... 42
6.8.2 SHIFT TRAY UP/DOWN MOVEMENT .............................................. 43
Sort/Stack Mode (Shift Mode) ................................................................ 43
Staple Mode ........................................................................................... 43
6.8.3 SHIFT TRAY LOWER LIMIT DETECTION ........................................ 44
6.9 SHIFT TRAY SIDE-TO-SIDE MOVEMENT ................................................ 45
6.10 STAPLING Z-FOLDED PAPER ................................................................ 46
6.11 JAM CONDITIONS ................................................................................... 47
6.12 PUNCH UNIT B531 (OPTION) ................................................................. 48
6.12.1 PUNCH UNIT DRIVE....................................................................... 48
6.12.2 PUNCH WASTE COLLECTION ...................................................... 49
B706/D460/D610 ii SM
6.13 JOGGER UNIT B513 (OPTION)............................................................... 50
6.13.1 JOGGER UNIT MECHANICAL LAYOUT ........................................ 50
6.13.2 JOGGER UNIT DRIVE .................................................................... 51
SM iii B706/D460/D610
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALLATION
For details about installing the Sheet Finisher, please refer to the instructions you
received with the instructions or the Installation Section in the main machine
service manual.
3000-Sheet
B706/D460
Finisher
/D610
SM 1 B706/D460/D610
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
For details about the Sheet Finisher PM table, please refer to the Preventive
Maintenance Section in the main Service Manual.
B706/D460/D610 2 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
[A]
[D]
[C]
3000-Sheet
B706/D460
Finisher
/D610
B706R502.WMF [B]
B706R505.WMF
Front Door
1. Remove the front door screw [A] ( x 1).
2. Remove the front door [B].
Inner Cover
1. Remove the inner cover [D] ( x 3).
SM 3 B706/D460/D610
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
[C]
[B]
[A]
B706R503.WMF
1. Remove the side table [A] ( x 2). Slide to the right to remove it.
2. Click the release lever [B] and remove the upper tray [C].
B706/D460/D610 4 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
[D] [E]
[B]
[A]
[J]
[G]
[H]
[I]
[F]
[C]
B706R504.WMF
3000-Sheet
B706/D460
Finisher
/D610
B706R501.WMF
Left Covers
1. Remove the left upper panel [A].
2. Remove the left upper cover [B] ( x 2,
x 2).
3. Remove the door and left inner cover. (See Front Door and Left Inner Cover
Replacement.)
4. Remove the rear cover [F] ( x 2).
5. Remove the left lower cover [C] ( x 4).
Shift Tray
1. If you need to lower the shift tray, support the bottom of the tray with your hand,
then pull the gear toward you [G] to release the tray and lower it.
2. Remove the shift tray [H] ( x 4).
3. Remove the shift tray rear cover [I] and front cover [J] ( x 1 each).
SM 5 B706/D460/D610
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
3.2 ROLLERS
3.2.1 SHIFT POSITIONING ROLLER
[A]
[B]
[C]
B706R522.WMF
1. Above the shift tray, pull the roller mount [A] out.
2. Remove the rollers [B] and [C] ( x 1 each)
B706/D460/D610 6 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
3000-Sheet
B706/D460
Finisher
/D610
[C]
[B] B706R506.WMF
[A]
SM 7 B706/D460/D610
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
[B] [C]
[A]
[D]
[E]
B706R507.WMF
[H]
[G]
[I] [F]
B706R508.WMF
1. Open the front door and pull out the staple unit.
2. Remove the rear cover.
3. Remove the main board and all connectors ( x 8).
4. Remove the screw [A] and tension spring [B] for the tension bracket [C], and
release the tension of the timing belt.
5. Remove the pulley [D] and bushing [E] ( x 2).
6. Remove the inner cover [F] ( x 1).
7. Open the guide [G], then remove the alignment brush roller assembly [H] ( x 1).
8. Remove the alignment brush roller [I] ( x 1, bushing x 1 front/back).
B706/D460/D610 8 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
[B] [C]
B706R523.WMF
[A]
3000-Sheet
B706/D460
Finisher
/D610
[E]
[F]
[D]
B706R524.WMF
SM 9 B706/D460/D610
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
[B] [A]
B706R525.WMF
B706/D460/D610 10 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
3.5 SENSORS
3.5.1 STACK HEIGHT 1, 2 AND EXIT GUIDE OPEN SENSOR
[E]
[C]
[F]
[D]
[G]
3000-Sheet
B706/D460
Finisher
/D610
[B]
[A] B706R509.WMF
SM 11 B706/D460/D610
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
[D]
[B]
[C] [E]
[A]
B706R510.WMF
B706/D460/D610 12 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
[B]
[C]
[A]
[D]
[A]
B706R511.WMF
3000-Sheet
B706/D460
Finisher
/D610
[E]
B706R512.WMF
SM 13 B706/D460/D610
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
[B]
B706R513.WMF
[A]
[D]
[C]
B706R514.WMF
Entrance Sensor
1. Disconnect the finisher from the copier.
2. Remove the sensor bracket [A] ( x 1).
3. Replace the entrance sensor [B] ( x 1,
x 1).
B706/D460/D610 14 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
[A]
[B]
B706R521.WMF
3000-Sheet
B706/D460
Finisher
/D610
[C]
B706R515.WMF
[E]
[D]
B706R516.WMF
SM 15 B706/D460/D610
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
[A]
[B]
[C]
B706R517.WMF
1. Open the front door, pull out the stapler unit, then remove the rear cover.
2. Remove the rear cover ( x 2).
3. Remove the staple waste hopper [A] ( x 1).
4. Remove the hopper holder [B] ( x 2).
5. Replace the staple waste hopper sensor [C] (
x 1).
B706/D460/D610 16 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
[C]
[A]
3000-Sheet
B706/D460
[B]
Finisher
/D610
B706R519.WMF
SM 17 B706/D460/D610
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
3.6 STAPLER
[C]
[B]
[A]
B706R518.WMF
1. Open the front door and pull out the staple tray.
2. Remove the stapler unit harness cover [A].
3. Remove the stapler cover [B] ( x 1,
x 2).
4. Lift the stapler off of the pegs [C].
B706/D460/D610 18 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
[A]
3000-Sheet
B706/D460
Finisher
/D610
B706R531.WMF
SM 19 B706/D460/D610
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
[B]
[A]
[C]
B706R526.WMF
1. Do the procedures to remove the front door and all covers, with the exception
of the left lower cover and top cover (labeled [C]: and [E]).
NOTE: Be sure to lower the shift tray by pulling the gear toward you. The shift
tray must be down.
2. Remove the shift tray motor. (
3.7)
3. Remove the left stay [A] ( x 3).
4. Unhook the stay at top [B].
5. Remove the shift tray mounting plate [C] ( x 2).
B706/D460/D610 20 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
[E]
[F]
[A]
B706R527.WMF
3000-Sheet
B706/D460
Finisher
/D610
[G]
[H]
B706R528.WMF
SM 21 B706/D460/D610
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
[A]
[B]
B706R530.WMF
[D]
[C]
[E]
B706R529.WMF
B706/D460/D610 22 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
[B]
[A]
3000-Sheet
B706/D460
Finisher
/D610
B706R101.WMF
SM 23 B706/D460/D610
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
[A]
B706R103.WMF
1. Open the front door and pull out the stapler tray unit.
2. Remove the Z-fold jogger unit cover ( x 2).
3. Remove the Z-fold jogger unit [A] ( x 4, = x 4,
x 2).
B706/D460/D610 24 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
3000-Sheet
B706/D460
Finisher
/D610
B706R102.WMF
1. Open the front door and pull out the stapler tray unit.
2. Remove the Z-fold jogger unit cover ( x 2).
3. Remove the motor bracket [A] ( x 2, timing belt x 1).
4. Remove the jogger top fence motor [B] ( x 2, = x 1,
x 1).
SM 25 B706/D460/D610
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
[A]
B706R104.WMF
1. Open the front door and pull out the stapler tray unit.
2. Remove the jogger bottom fence motor [A] ( x 2, timing belt x 1, = x 1,
x 1).
B706/D460/D610 26 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
[A]
B531R101.WMF
3000-Sheet
B706/D460
Finisher
/D610
The position of the punched holes can be adjusted in two ways.
SM 27 B706/D460/D610
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
[A]
B513I002.WMF
[B]
B513R003.WMF
B706/D460/D610 28 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
[A]
3000-Sheet
B706/D460
Finisher
/D610
B513R001.WMF
SM 29 B706/D460/D610
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
[B]
B513R002.WMF
B706/D460/D610 30 SM
TROUBLESHOOTING
4. TROUBLESHOOTING
If the machine logs an SC code in the display of the operation panel, see Section
4 Troubleshooting of the Service Manual. Section 4 contains a complete list of all
service codes and how to troubleshoot the problem.
3000-Sheet
B706/D460
Finisher
/D610
SM 31 B706/D460/D610
SERVICE TABLES
5. SERVICE TABLES
For details about 3000-Sheet Finisher B706 SP codes, please refer to 5. Service
Tables in the main machine service manual.
5.3 FUSES
No. Function
FU100 Protects 24 V.
B706/D460/D610 32 SM
DETAILS
6. DETAILS
6.1 TRAY AND STAPLER JUNCTION GATE
[A]
[D]
[C] [B]
3000-Sheet
B706/D460
Finisher
B706D506.WMF
/D610
Sort/Stack Mode Staple Mode
[A]
[A]
[D] [D]
B706D505.WMF B706D507.WMF
Depending on the finishing mode, the copies are directed up, straight through, or
down by the combinations of open and closed junction gates.
SM 33 B706/D460/D610
DETAILS
[A]
[B]
[E]
[F]
[C] [D]
B706D000.WMF
This mechanism improves productivity in staple mode. It is only used when copying
on A4, LT, or B5 (all LEF).
During stapling, the copier has to wait. This mechanism reduces the wait by
holding the first two sheets of a job while the previous job is still being stapled. It
only works during the second and subsequent sets of a multi-set copy job.
The pre-stack junction gate solenoid [A] turns on 120 mm after the 1st sheet of
paper turns on the entrance sensor, and this directs the sheet to the pre-stack tray
[B]. (This sheet cannot be fed to the stapler yet, because the first set is still being
stapled.) The pre-stack paper stopper solenoid [C] turns on 350 mm after the 1st
sheet turns on the entrance sensor. The pre-stack paper stopper [D] then stops the
paper.
The pre-stack junction gate solenoid turns off 230 mm after the trailing edge of the
1st sheet passes through the entrance sensor, and the 2nd sheet is sent to the
paper guide [E]. The pre-stack paper stopper is released about 40 mm after the
2nd sheet turns on the pre-stack stopper sensor [F], and the two sheets of copy
paper are sent to the stapler tray. All sheets after the 2nd sheet go to the stapler
tray via the paper guide [E].
B706/D460/D610 34 SM
DETAILS
[A]
[G]
[F]
[E]
[B]
[D]
[L]
[M]
3000-Sheet
B706/D460
[I]
Finisher
/D610
[K]
[J] B706D508.WMF
In the staple mode, as every sheet of paper arrives in the jogger unit, it is vertically
and horizontally aligned, then the staple edge is pressed flat to ensure the edge of
the stack is aligned correctly for stapling.
Vertical Paper Alignment: About 60 ms after the trailing edge of the copy passes
the staple tray entrance sensor [A], the positioning roller motor [B] is energized to
push the positioning roller [C] into contact with the paper. The positioning roller and
alignment brush roller [D] rotate to push the paper back and align the trailing edge
of the paper against the stack stopper [E].
Horizontal Paper Alignment: When the print key is pressed, the jogger motor [F]
turns on and the jogger fences [G] move to the wait position about 7.2 mm wider
than the selected paper size on both sides. When the trailing edge of the paper
passes the staple unit entrance sensor, the jogger motor moves the jogger fences
3.7 mm towards the paper. Next, the jogger motor turns on again for 3.5 mm for the
horizontal paper alignment then goes back to the wait position.
Paper Stack Correction: After the paper is aligned in the stapler tray, the left [J],
center [K], and right [L] stack plate motors switch on briefly and drive the front stack,
center stack, and rear stack plates against the edge of the stack to flatten the edge
completely against the staple tray for stapling. When the next copy paper turns on
the stapler entrance sensor, the stack plate motor turns on and returns to its home
position. The home position is detected by stack plate HP sensor [M].
SM 35 B706/D460/D610
DETAILS
[A]
[B]
[C]
B706D513.WMF
Side-to-Side
The stapler motor [A] moves the stapler [B] from side to side. After the start key is
pressed, the stapler moves from its home position to the stapling position.
If two-staple-position mode is selected, for the first stack the stapler moves to the
rear stapling position first, staples, moves to the front position, staples and waits at
the front. For the second stack, the stapler staples the front corner first, then moves
to the rear corner and staples.
NOTE: For continuous stapling jobs, the corners are stapled rear then front for the
odd number stacks and stapled front then rear for even number stacks.
After the job is completed, the stapler returns to its home position. This is detected
by the stapler HP sensor [C].
B706/D460/D610 36 SM
DETAILS
[A]
[B]
[F]
[D]
B706D514.WMF
[E]
3000-Sheet
B706/D460
Finisher
/D610
B706D523.WMF
B706D515.WMF
[C]
Rotation (1)
In the oblique staple position mode, the stapler rotation motor [A] rotates the
stapler units [B] 45 to counterclockwise after it moves to the stapling position.
Rotation (2)
When the staple end condition arises, the stapler motor moves the stapler to the
front and the stapler rotation motor rotates the stapler unit to clockwise to remove
the staple cartridge [C]. This allows the user to add new staples.
Once the staples have been installed, and the front door closed, the stapler unit
returns to its home position. As the stapler unit is returning to the home position,
the stapler return sensor [D] is activated, the return solenoid [E] turns on and it
assists the guide roller [F] to return to its guide (this guide directs the stapler during
rotation).
SM 37 B706/D460/D610
DETAILS
6.5 STAPLER
[C]
[E]
[B]
[D]
[A]
B706D521.WMF
B706D516.WMF
[E]
[F]
B706D522.WMF [G]
When the aligned copies are brought to the stapling position by the positioning
roller and jogger fences, the staple hammer motor [A] starts stapling.
During stapling, the stapler trims off the excess length [B] of the staples by lowering
the cutter [C]. This excess length depends on the number of copies in the set; there
will be very little for a stack containing 100 sheets. The staple waste drops into the
tray [D] in the stapler. When the stapler unit returns to its home position, the tray
hits the shaft [E] and the tray opens. The staple waste drops into the staple waste
hopper [F]. When the staple waste hopper is full, the actuator on its base activates
the staple waste hopper sensor [G]. An SC737 (Full Finisher Staple Waste Hopper)
is displayed.
B706/D460/D610 38 SM
DETAILS
[C]
[D]
[A]
[B]
[E]
3000-Sheet
B706/D460
B706D518.WMF
Finisher
[F]
/D610
B706D517.WMF
The stapler has a staple end sensor [A], cartridge set sensor [B] and staple
hammer HP sensor [C].
When a staple end or no cartridge condition is detected, a message is displayed
advising the operator to install a staple cartridge. If this condition is detected during
a copy job, the indication will appear, and the copy job will stop.
The staple cartridge has a clinch area [D] where jammed staples collect. The
operator can remove the jammed staples from the clinch area by pressing in the
releases [E] on both sides, then lowering the bracket lever [F].
SM 39 B706/D460/D610
DETAILS
6.6 FEED-OUT
[G] [D]
[A]
[B]
[C] [E]
[I] [H]
B706D519.WMF
[F]
B706D512.WMF
After the copies have been stapled, the stack feed-out motor [A] starts. The pawl
[B] on the stack feed-out belt [C] transports the set of stapled copies up and feeds
it to the shift tray exit roller [D]. When stapling starts, the exit guide motor [E] opens
the upper exit guide [F], which includes the upper shift tray exit roller [G], in order to
feed out the leading edge of the copy set smoothly. The exit guide motor turns on
again a certain time after stapling is complete, and the upper exit guide plate is
lowered. Then the shift tray exit roller takes over the stack feed-out.
The on-off timing of the exit guide motor is detected by the exit guide open sensor
[H].
The stack-feed-out motor turns off when the pawl actuates the stack feed-out belt
home position sensor [I].
B706/D460/D610 40 SM
DETAILS
[A]
[B]
[E]
[C]
[F]
[D]
[H] [I]
[G]
3000-Sheet
B706/D460
Finisher
/D610
B706D524.WMF
The stacking roller assembly [A] is fastened to a plate [B] on a shaft by a spring [C].
The cam [D], in contact with the bottom of the plate, is connected to the stacking
roller drag motor [E] via a timing belt.
The stacking roller drag motor and timing belt rotate the cam against the bottom of
the plate to move the rollers forward and back with each sheet ejected onto the
shift tray.
The stacking roller motor [F] drives the shaft [G] that rotates the stacking rollers
counter-clockwise as the rollers move back. The simultaneous rotation and
backward movement of the roller assembly pulls each sheet back toward the copier
to align the edges of the stack on the shift tray.
The actuator [H] is mounted on the cam and rotating with both rotating clockwise)
and detects the roller assembly home position when the actuator leaves the gap of
the return drive HP sensor [I] and signals the machine that the rollers are at the
home position. The machine uses this information to control paper feed timing and
confirm that the mechanism is operating correctly. The cam and actuator make one
complete rotation for every sheet fed out of the machine onto the shift tray.
SM 41 B706/D460/D610
DETAILS
[F]
[A]
[G]
[B]
[C]
B706D010.WMF
The shift tray lift motor [A] controls the vertical position of the shift tray [B] through
gears and timing belts [C].
Stand-by Mode
After the main switch is turned on, or when the stack is removed from the tray, the
end of the feeler on the tray falls and its actuator [D] rotates up into staple mode
HP sensor 2 [E] (S7) and switches it on. This switches on the lift motor, which
raises the tray until the tray pushes the actuator out of the sensor [E]. Then, the lift
motor stops the shift tray; this is the home position (the actuator [D] is between the
two sensors [E] and [F].
The shift tray upper limit switch (SW1) prevents the drive gear from being damaged
if staple mode HP sensor 2 [E] fails. In case of a failure, when the shift tray pushes
up the actuator [G] and positioning rollers, the switch will cut the power to the shift
tray lift motor.
B706/D460/D610 42 SM
DETAILS
[C]
[A]
[G]
[F] [E]
3000-Sheet
B706/D460
Finisher
/D610
B706D010.WMF
Staple Mode
The shift tray moves to home position, which is when the actuator [B] is between
the staple mode home position sensors [C] and [D]. During feed-out, the shift tray
is lowered automatically at prescribed intervals. When the stack is removed from
the tray, the tray returns to the home position for stand-by mode. (
6.8.1)
SM 43 B706/D460/D610
DETAILS
[A]
[D]
[B] B706D010.WMF
[C]
This machine has two shift tray lower limit sensors: shift lower limit sensor [A] (S9)
for large paper (B4 and larger) and shift lower limit sensor [B] (S11) for small paper
(smaller than B4).
NOTE: Sensor [C] (S10) is not used.
When the actuator [D] enters sensor [A] while using large paper (about 1500
sheets are on the tray), a message will be displayed and copying will stop.
When the actuator [D] enters sensor [B] while using small paper (about 3,000
sheets are on the tray), a message will be displayed and copying will stop.
B706/D460/D610 44 SM
DETAILS
[D]
[A]
[F]
[C]
[E]
3000-Sheet
[B]
B706/D460
Finisher
/D610
B706D520.WMF
In sort/stack mode, the shift tray [A] moves from side to side to separate the sets of
copies.
The horizontal position of the shift tray is controlled by the shift motor [B] and shift
gear disk [C]. After one set of copies is made and delivered to the shift tray, the
shift motor turns on, driving the shift gear disk and the shaft [D]. The end fence [E]
is positioned by the shaft, creating the side-to-side movement.
When the shift gear disk has rotated 180 degrees (when the shift tray is fully shifted
across), the cut-out in the shift gear disk turns on the shift tray half-turn sensor [F]
and the shift motor stops. The next set of copies is then delivered. The motor turns
on, repeating the same process and moving the tray back to the previous position.
SM 45 B706/D460/D610
DETAILS
B706D004.WMF
B706D005.WMF
Here is the operation sequence for jogging and stapling Z-folded sheets:
{ The lower jogger fence lifts to receive the Z-folded sheets.
| The top fence moves down, to the horizontal position.
} A sheet of paper goes into the stapler tray.
~ The positioning roller turns when each sheet is fed to the stapler tray.
Each sheet is fed down against the lower jogger fence to align the bottom edge.
After the set number of sheets come in, the jogger top-fence motor switches on and
lowers the top fence against the top of the stack. This aligns the stack for stapling.
The bottom fence motor lowers the aligned stack to the stapling position.
The stapler staples the stack.
B706/D460/D610 46 SM
DETAILS
3000-Sheet
B706/D460
Finisher
/D610
8. In staple mode, the stapler tray entrance sensor does not turn off when the
upper transport motor has fed paper 1.5 times the papers length after it turned
on.
9. In staple mode, the stapler tray paper sensor does not turn off within 250
pulses of the stack feed-out motor after it started.
10. In staple mode, the shift tray exit sensor does not turn off within 1,260 ms after
the stack feed-out motor started.
SM 47 B706/D460/D610
DETAILS
[D]
[E]
B531D102.WMF
The punch unit makes 2 or 3 holes at the trailing edge of the paper. The number of
holes depends on a selection made on the operation panel.
The cam [A] has 2 punches on one side and 3 punches on the other, and is turned
by the punch motor [B]. The punch motor turns on immediately after the trailing
edge of the paper passes the entrance sensor. The punches on the cam rotate
downward and punch holes in the paper.
After punching a sheet of paper, the cam returns to home position and stops.
Home position depends on whether 2 holes or 3 holes are being made, so there
are two punch HP sensors. Punch HP sensor 1 [C] is used when 2-hole punching
is selected, and punch HP sensor 2 [D] is used when 3-hole punching is selected.
When the cut-out [E] enters the slot of the punch HP in use (sensor 1 or 2-hole
punching or sensor 2 for 3/4-hole punching) the motor stops.
The knob (not shown) on the front end of the punch unit can be turned in either
direction to clear paper jammed in the punch unit.
B706/D460/D610 48 SM
DETAILS
[A]
[B]
[C]
3000-Sheet
B706/D460
Finisher
/D610
B531D103.WMF
Punch waste is collected in the punch waste hopper [A] positioned under the punch
unit.
When the level of the punch waste in the hopper rises as far as the hole [B] in the
hopper, the punch waste sensor [C] turns on, stops the job, and triggers a
message on the operation to indicate that the hopper is full and must be removed
and emptied.
The job resumes automatically after the hopper is emptied and returned to the
finisher.
The punch waste hopper sensor also functions as the hopper set sensor. When the
hopper is not in the finisher, or if it is not inserted completely, the spring loaded
sensor arm rotates up and to the right with the punch waste sensor away from the
hole in the hopper holder and a message is displayed. The message in this case is
the same as the hopper full message.
SM 49 B706/D460/D610
DETAILS
1 2
B513D003.WMF
B706/D460/D610 50 SM
DETAILS
[C]
[F] [B]
[A]
[D]
[G]
[H]
[J]
[I]
[E]
3000-Sheet
B706/D460
Finisher
/D610
B513D002.WMF
At prescribed intervals, the jogger motor [A] switches on and drives the jogger
timing belt [B], gear [C] and jogger fence timing belt [D] which drives the shift
jogger fences [E] against the sides of the stack to align its edges.
At the end of the job, the jogger fence lift motor [F] switches on and raises the
fences until the actuator [G] leaves the slot of the shift jogger fence lift HP sensor
[H] and shuts off the shift jogger fence lift motor.
At the same time, the jogger motor reverses and drives the fences away from the
sides of the stack until the actuator [I] deactivates the shift jogger fence HP sensor
[J] and switches off the jogger motor.
The jogger fences remain up in the standby position until the next job starts.
SM 51 B706/D460/D610
OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
1 2 3 4 5
6
21
20
8
22
9
19
18 10
17 11
16
12
15
23
13
B706V900.WMF
14
B706/D460/D610 52 SM
OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
3000-Sheet
M13 Stack Plate Front
B706/D460
stapling.
Finisher
/D610
Presses down the rear corner of the edge for
M14 Stack Plate Rear
stapling.
M15 Stapler Rotation Rotates the stapler 45 degrees for oblique stapling.
M16 Staple Hammer Drives the staple hammer.
Drives the punch shaft and roller. Punch Unit B531
M17 Punch
(option).
Drives the entrance rollers, the middle and upper
M18 Upper Transport
transport rollers, and upper tray exit roller.
Drives the shift jogger fences against the sides of
the sheets to align the stack, then reverses to return
M19 Shift Jogger
them to the home position. Jogger Unit B513
(option).
Raises the shift jogger fences after aligning the
stack, then reverses and lowers them when
M20 Shift Jogger Lift
returning to the home position. Jogger Unit B513
(option).
M21 Jogger Top Fence Moves the top jogger fence.
M22 Jogger Bottom Fence Moves the bottom jogger fence.
BOARDS
Main Controls the finisher and communicates with the
PCB
copier.
PCB Stapler Controls the stapler unit.
Punch Passes signals between the punch unit and the
PCB
finisher main board. Punch Unit B531 (option).
PCB Jogger Controls the shift/jogger unit B513 (option).
SM 53 B706/D460/D610
OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
B706/D460/D610 54 SM
OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
3000-Sheet
B706/D460
Finisher
SW2 Front Door Safety Cuts the dc power when the front door is opened.
/D610
Switches the current job off and on to allow time for
SW3 Emergency Stop
the operator to remove paper from the shift tray.
SM 55 B706/D460/D610
OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
1 2 3 4 5
19
18
17
16 6
15
14
13 7
12
20
21
11
22
10 23
B706V503.WMF
9 8
26
24
25
B706V504.WMF
B706/D460/D610 56 SM
9-BIN MAILBOX
CS390 (B762) / CS4000 (D616)
REVISION HISTORY
Page Dat e Added/Updated/New
None
9-BIN MAILBOX B762/D616
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2. DETAILS...........................................................................................4
2.1 OVERVIEW .................................................................................................. 4
2.1.1 MAIN COMPONENT LAYOUT ............................................................ 4
2.1.2 DRIVE LAYOUT .................................................................................. 5
2.1.3 PAPER PATH ...................................................................................... 6
2.2 BASIC OPERATION ..................................................................................... 7
2.2.1 PAPER PATH ...................................................................................... 7
2.3 OVERFLOW DETECTION ........................................................................... 8
2.3.1 OVERVIEW ......................................................................................... 8
2.3.2 DETECTION TIMING .......................................................................... 9
2.4 PAPER MISFEED DETECTION TIMING ................................................... 10
2.4.1 A4 SIDEWAYS (LEF) 1ST BIN TRAY ........................................... 10
2.4.2 A4 SIDEWAYS (LEF) 2ND ~ 9TH BIN TRAY ............................... 10
SM i B762/D616
COVERS AND TRAYS
CAUTION
Switch the machine off and unplug the machine before starting and
procedure in this section.
[D]
[C]
[A]
9-Bin Mailbox
B762/D616
[B]
B471R001.WMF
[A]: Trays
Grip each tray by the front and lift out.
[B]: Front cover ( x 2)
[C]: Rear cover ( x 3)
[D]: Top cover
SM 1 B762/D616
SENSORS
1.2 SENSORS
[A]
[D]
B471R003.WMF
[B]
[C]
B471R104.WMF
B762/D616 2 SM
MAIN MOTOR AND CONTROL BOARD
[C]
[B]
[D]
9-Bin Mailbox
B762/D616
[A] B471R002.WMF
SM 3 B762/D616
OVERVIEW
2. DETAILS
2.1 OVERVIEW
2.1.1 MAIN COMPONENT LAYOUT
B471D003.WMF
1. Bins (x 9)
2. Vertical Transport Rollers (x 5)
3. Turn Gates (x 8)
4. Exit Rollers (x 9)
The trays are 1 to 9 (bottom to top). The numbers are clearly marked on the side of
the unit. The top tray does not require a turn gate. When the top tray is selected for
output, all turn gates remain closed, leaving only the top bin open.
B762/D616 4 SM
OVERVIEW
2
1
3
9-Bin Mailbox
B762/D616
B471D002.WMF
1. Main Motor
2. Main Timing Belt
3. Timing Belt
SM 5 B762/D616
OVERVIEW
5
4
6
1
7
B471D970.WMF
The solenoid for the junction gate (7) is part of the mailbox.
B762/D616 6 SM
BASIC OPERATION
[C]
[B]
[A]
[D]
9-Bin Mailbox
B762/D616
B471D004.WMF
[E]
B471D105.WMF
The unit is mounted on top the finisher and connected to the finisher by a 14-pin
connector. When the leading edge of the paper passes and activates the entrance
sensor of the finisher, the mailbox main motor switches on and the mailbox vertical
transport rollers [A] begin to turn. The exit roller [B] feeds the paper out to the
selected tray [C].
A solenoid [D] opens and closes the junction gate [E]. When a solenoid switches
on, the gate opens and directs to the paper to the tray.
NOTE: When the top tray (bin 9) is selected, all solenoids are off and closed,
allowing the paper to pass to the top tray (bin 9 does not require a
solenoid).
When the last sheet is fed out, it switches off the vertical transport sensor, and both
the mailbox main motor and the junction gate solenoid of the selected bin switch
off. The mailbox normally feeds paper at 372 mm/s, about the same speed as the
finisher. (The finisher speed is 370 mm/s.)
SM 7 B762/D616
OVERFLOW DETECTION
[A]
[B]
B471D005.WMF
An overflow sensor [A] and actuator [B] are above the exit of each paper tray. The
actuator, mounted on a swivel arm, remains in contact with the top of the stack.
The actuator rises as the stack becomes higher until it activates the sensor. Then,
a tray full message appears on the operation panel and the job halts. If the paper is
removed before the tray is full, the job continues.
B762/D616 8 SM
OVERFLOW DETECTION
Between Sheets
Full (High)
B471D010.WMF
When the mailbox exit sensor goes high for the prescribed time (T), the machine
determines that the tray is full. The value of T is calculated, regardless of paper
9-Bin Mailbox
size, as follows:
B762/D616
T (s) = (60/s x max. size ppm) x 3 s
After the tray full sensor switches on, if it remains on for the feeding of eight
additional sheets, then this notifies the machine that the tray is full.
T is calculated as shown below. For example, for a minimum ppm of 12 prints
(regardless of paper size), the value T is 15 s. Then, if the sensor detects paper for
15 s or more, the machine stops the copy job.
SM 9 B762/D616
PAPER MISFEED DETECTION TIMING
Main Motor
(Main Unit)
J1
Exit Sensor
*1
Main Motor
(Mailbox)
Turn Gate
(SOL 1)
B471D011.WMF
Main Motor
(Main Unit)
J1
Exit Sensor
*1
Main Motor
(Mailbox)
Turn Gate
(SOL 2) J2
J3
Vertical Transport
Sensor *1
B762/D616 10 SM
PAPER MISFEED DETECTION TIMING
J1 Timing: After the leading edge of the sheet activates the mailbox exit sensor,
a misfeed is detected if the sensor does not switch off within:
X+0.5 s
Where X = The amount of time prescribed for the paper size to pass
the sensor. (X = 1.74 s for A4 Sideways for example)
J2 Timing: After the mailbox paper exit sensor is activated, the machine
determines that the paper has not yet fed and detects a misfeed if the
vertical transport sensor does not activate within the time prescribed
for the paper size (1.94 s for A4 paper, for example)
9-Bin Mailbox
the sensor. (X = 2.26 s for A4 Sideways for example)
B762/D616
SM 11 B762/D616
BOOKLET FINISHER & FINISHER
SR3020/SR3030/SR4010/
SR4020/SR4030/SR4060
B804/B805/D373/D374/D611
R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY
P a ge Date A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew
None
BOOKLET FINISHER & FINISHER
B804/B805/D373/D374/D611
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SM i B804/B805/D373/D374/D612
2.1.1 GENERAL LAYOUT .......................................................................... 22
2.1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS .......................................................... 24
2.1.3 SUMMARY OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ................................. 28
2.1.4 DRIVE LAYOUT ................................................................................. 38
2.2 JUNCTION GATES ..................................................................................... 40
2.2.1 PROOF MODE .................................................................................. 40
2.2.2 SHIFT MODE ..................................................................................... 40
2.2.3 STAPLE MODE ................................................................................. 41
2.3 PRE-STACKING ......................................................................................... 42
2.4 TRAY MOVEMENT MECHANISM .............................................................. 44
2.4.1 UPPER TRAY .................................................................................... 44
2.4.2 LOWER TRAY (B804 ONLY) ............................................................. 46
2.5 CORNER STAPLING .................................................................................. 49
2.5.1 STACKING AND JOGGING............................................................... 49
2.5.2 STAPLER MOVEMENT ..................................................................... 50
2.5.3 CORNER STAPLING ......................................................................... 52
2.6 BOOKLET STAPLING (B804 ONLY) .......................................................... 53
2.6.1 BOOKLET PRESSURE MECHANISM .............................................. 53
2.6.2 BOOKLET STAPLING AND FOLDING .............................................. 54
2.6.3 BOOKLET STAPLING AND FOLDING MECHANISMS ..................... 60
2.7 UPPER TRAY OUTPUT ............................................................................. 63
2.7.1 FEED OUT ......................................................................................... 63
2.7.2 FEED OUT STACKING...................................................................... 64
2.8 PUNCH UNIT B702 (FOR B804/B805) ....................................................... 65
2.8.1 OVERVIEW OF OPERATION............................................................ 65
2.8.2 PUNCH MECHANISMS ..................................................................... 67
2.8.3 PUNCH HOPPER MECHANISM ....................................................... 70
2.9 FINISHER JAM DETECTION ..................................................................... 72
B804/B805/D373/D374/D612 ii SM
Read This First
Safety and Symbols
Replacement Procedure Safety
Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the
replacement procedures in this manual.
1.1 COVERS
B804/B805/
D373/D374/
Finisher/
Finisher
Booklet
D612
1. Open the front door [D].
2. Small upper cover [A] ( x1)
3. Upper cover [B] ( x2)
4. Front door bracket [C] ( x1)
5. Front door [D]
6. Front left side cover [E] ( x2)
7. Cover [F]
8. Paper exit cover [G] ( x2)
9. Rear cover [H] ( x2)
SM 1 B804/B805/D373/D374/D612
Covers
B804/B805/D373/D374/D612 2 SM
Main Unit
B804/B805/
D373/D374/
Finisher/
Finisher
Booklet
D612
1. Front door, front left side cover, rear cover, upper cover (
"Exterior Cover")
2. End fence ( 1.1.2 "Upper Tray, End Fence")
3. Upper tray exit mechanism [A] ( x4,
x3)
4. Upper tray limit sensor [B] ( x1,
x1)
5. Upper tray limit switch [C] (
x2)
SM 3 B804/B805/D373/D374/D612
Main Unit
B804/B805/D373/D374/D612 4 SM
Main Unit
B804/B805/
D373/D374/
Finisher/
Finisher
Booklet
1. Small upper cover, upper cover ( 1.1.1 "Exterior Cover")
D612
2. Upper tray paper height sensor bracket [A] ( x1)
3. Upper tray paper height sensor [B] staple mode (S08) (
x1)
4. Upper tray paper height sensor [C] non-staple mode (S09) (
x1)
1. Rear cover, Upper covers, Front door, Cover, Paper exit cover ( 1.1.1 "Exterior
Cover")
2. Inner cover [A] ( x2)
SM 5 B804/B805/D373/D374/D612
Main Unit
3. Exit guide plate [B] ( x1, Link and spring,
x1, x1)
4. Upper tray exit sensor [C] (S6) (
x1)
1. Exit guide plate. ( 1.2.5 "Exit Guide Plate, Upper Tray Exit Sensor")
2. Guide plate [A] (hook x 2)
3. Sensor bracket [B] ( x1)
4. Proof tray full sensor [C] (S11) (
x1)
B804/B805/D373/D374/D612 6 SM
Main Unit
B804/B805/
D373/D374/
Finisher/
Finisher
Booklet
2. Sensor bracket [A] ( x1)
D612
3. Finisher entrance sensor [B] (S1) (
x1)
SM 7 B804/B805/D373/D374/D612
Stapler Unit
B804/B805/D373/D374/D612 8 SM
Stapler Unit
B804/B805/
D373/D374/
Finisher/
Finisher
Booklet
D612
1. Open the front door [A].
2. Pull out the stapling unit [B].
3. Positioning roller [C] ( x1, timing belt x1)
SM 9 B804/B805/D373/D374/D612
Fold Unit
B804/B805/D373/D374/D612 10 SM
Fold Unit
Support the fold unit with your hand to prevent it from falling.
B804/B805/
D373/D374/
Finisher/
Finisher
Booklet
D612
1. Read the DIP SW settings on the decal [A] attached to the back of the new folding unit.
2. Check the DIP SW settings on the main board [B] of the finisher.
3. If these settings are different, change these settings to match the settings printed on the
decal attached to the folding unit.
Set DIP switches 1 to 4 (the switch set on the right). Do not touch the other DIP
switches.
SM 11 B804/B805/D373/D374/D612
Fold Unit
B804/B805/D373/D374/D612 12 SM
Fold Unit
B804/B805/
D373/D374/
7. Fold unit exit sensor bracket [E] ( x1)
Finisher/
Finisher
Booklet
D612
8. Fold unit exit sensor [F] (S31) (
x1)
If you intend to correct the horizontal and vertical skew for the fold unit at the same
time, do those adjustments first, then replace the sensor. ( 1.4.5 "Folding
Horizontal Skew Adjustment" or "Fold Vertical Skew Adjustment")
1. Remove the stapler unit ( 1.4.1 "Fold Unit")
SM 13 B804/B805/D373/D374/D612
Fold Unit
2. Guide plate [A].
3. Stay [B] ( x4)
4. Left plate [C] ( x4)
5. Sensor bracket [D] ( x1)
6. Stack present sensor [E] (S32) (
x1)
The fold unit is adjusted for optimum performance before the finisher is shipped
from the factory. Do this adjustment only if the edges of folded booklets are not
even.
1. Switch the copier on and enter the SP mode.
2. Europe, Asia: Use SP6-134-001 (this is for A3 paper). North America: Use SP6-134-005
(this is for DLT paper).
If the original setting of SP6-134-001 or -005 is not "0", then you must do the
vertical skew adjustment ( 1.4.6 "Fold Vertical Skew Adjustment") after you
finish this horizontal skew procedure.
3. Use the 10-key pad to input "-2" (mm) for the SP value. (Press to enter the minus
sign.)
4. Press [#] then exit the SP mode.
B804/B805/D373/D374/D612 14 SM
Fold Unit
5. Open the front door and pull the stapler unit [A] out of the finisher.
6. Open the guide plate [B].
7. Loosen the adjustment screw [C] and then tighten until it stops. (Do not over tighten.)
8. Remove the lock screw [D].
9. Raise the tip [E] of the adjustment screw very slightly and allow it to descend under its
own weight.
B804/B805/
D373/D374/
Finisher/
Finisher
Booklet
D612
10. Push the stapler unit into the finisher and close the front door.
11. Do a folding test.
Switch the copier on.
Put one page of A3 or DLT paper in the ARDF.
On the copier operation panel, select booklet stapling.
Press [Start]. One sheet is folded.
12. Remove the sheet from the lower tray.
13. Hold the folded sheet with the creased side pointing down and face-up (the same way
that it came out of the finisher).
14. Referring to the diagram, determine if the skew is + [F] or - [G].
SM 15 B804/B805/D373/D374/D612
Fold Unit
15. Open the front door of the finisher and pull the stapler unit [H] out.
16. Open the guide plate [I].
17. Turn the adjustment screw [J] to correct the amount of skew you measured from the test
sheet.
For + skew [F], turn the adjustment screw (clockwise).
For skew [G], turn the adjustment screw to the left (counter-clockwise).
Every click in the +/ direction adjusts the fold position by 0.1 mm by moving the
bottom fence [K].
18. Raise the tip of the adjustment screw [J] and allow it to lower under its own weight.
19. Attach and tighten the lock screw [L].
20. Push the stapler unit into the machine, close the front door, then turn the copier on.
21. Europe, Asia: Do SP6-134-001 (this is for A3 paper). North America: Do SP6-134-005
(this is for DLT paper).
22. Reset it to "0".
23. Do the test again.
24. If the result is satisfactory, this completes the adjustment. -or- If some skew remains,
repeat this adjustment.
After doing this adjustment, adjust for vertical skew, if necessary. ( 1.4.6 "Fold
Vertical Skew Adjustment")
B804/B805/D373/D374/D612 16 SM
Fold Unit
The fold unit is adjusted for optimum performance before the finisher is shipped
from the factory. Do this adjustment only if the edges of folded booklets are not
even.
1. Switch the copier on.
2. Do a folding test.
Switch the copier on.
Put one page of A3 or DLT paper in the ARDF.
On the copier operation panel, select booklet stapling.
Press [Start]. One sheet is folded.
3. Hold the folded sheet with the creased side pointing down, and face-up (the same way
B804/B805/
D373/D374/
Finisher/
Finisher
Booklet
that it came out of the finisher).
D612
4. Referring to the diagram, determine if the skew is positive [A] or negative [B].
5. Measure the amount of skew.
6. Enter the SP mode
Europe, Asia: Use SP6-134-001 (this is for A3 paper).
North America: Use SP6-134-005 (this is for DLT paper).
7. Enter one-half the measured amount of skew. Example: If the measure amount of skew
is -1.2 mm, enter -0.6 mm
The range for measurement is 3.0 mm to +3.0 mm in 0.2 mm steps for every
notch adjustment.
8. Exit the SP mode and do the test again (steps 2 to 5).
9. Repeat this procedure until the skew is corrected.
The illustration below shows the effects of +/- adjustment with SP6113. (The vertical
arrows show the direction of paper feed.)
SM 17 B804/B805/D373/D374/D612
Fold Unit
B804/B805/D373/D374/D612 18 SM
Booklet Stapler Unit
B804/B805/
D373/D374/
Finisher/
Finisher
Booklet
D612
1. Open the front door.
2. Pull out the stapler unit ( 1.2.2 "Positioning Roller").
3. Harness cover [A] ( x2)
4. Booklet stapler support stay [B] ( x4,
x2, = x4)
5. Stapler [C] ( x4)
SM 19 B804/B805/D373/D374/D612
Booklet Stapler Unit
B804/B805/D373/D374/D612 20 SM
Booklet Stapler Unit
B804/B805/
D373/D374/
2. Attach the special tool [A] and reattach the booklet stapler stay.
Finisher/
Finisher
Booklet
D612
This tool is included with the stapler spare part.
3. Turn the gear [B] with your finger until it stops.
4. Tighten the screws to attach to the booklet stapler motor.
5. Remove the stay again and remove the special tool.
6. Reattach the booklet stapler stay.
7. Push the stapler unit into the machine.
SM 21 B804/B805/D373/D374/D612
Component Layout
B804/B805/D373/D374/D612 22 SM
Component Layout
*1: B804 Only
Paper direction
The operation of the proof tray and stapler junction gates direct the flow of the paper once it
enters the finisher:
Proof tray
B804/B805/
D373/D374/
Finisher/
Finisher
Booklet
D612
Copies are sent to the proof tray (12) when neither sorting nor stapling are selected for the
job.
Upper tray
The upper tray (11) receives copies that are sorted and shifted and also receives copies that
have been corner stapled. Corner stapling is provided on both the B804 and the B805.
Pre-stack tray
The pre-stack tray (5) has a switchback mechanism to increase the productivity of stapling.
( 2.3 "Pre-Stacking) Pre-stacking is done for corner stapling in the B804/B805 and for
booklet stapling in the B804.
Lower tray
The lower tray (7) receives copies that have been center folded and stapled (booklet
stapling). Booklet stapling is not provided on the B805.
SM 23 B804/B805/D373/D374/D612
Component Layout
B804/B805/D373/D374/D612 24 SM
Component Layout
B804/B805/
D373/D374/
Finisher/
Finisher
Booklet
D612
8. Positioning Roller Motor (M14)
1. Upper Tray Lift Motor (M21)
9. Lower Tray Full Sensor Front (S34)*1
2. Lower Transport Motor (M3)
10. Lower Tray Full Sensor Rear (S33)*1
3. Entrance Motor (M1)
11. Main Board (PCB1)
4. Front Door Safety Switch (SW1)
12. Upper Tray Full Sensor (S20) *2
5. Pre-Stack Tray Exit Sensor (S2)
13. Upper Tray Full Sensor (S19)
6. Stapling Edge Pressure Plate
14. Booklet Stapler Board (PCB2)*1
Solenoid (SOL4)
15. Booklet Pressure Roller Solenoid (SOL5)
7. Positioning Roller Solenoid (SOL3)
*1
SM 25 B804/B805/D373/D374/D612
Component Layout
B804/B805/D373/D374/D612 26 SM
Component Layout
Stacker/Stapler - B804/B805
B804/B805/
D373/D374/
Finisher/
Finisher
Booklet
D612
7. Jogger Fence Motor (M15)
1
1. Stack Present Sensor (S32)* 8. Jogger Fence HP Sensor (S15)
1
2. Stack Junction Gate HP Sensor (S27)* 9. Corner Stapler Movement Motor (M6)
3. Stack Feed Out Belt HP Sensor (S16) 10. Stapling Tray Paper Sensor (S14)
4. Feed Out Belt Motor (M5) 11. Corner Stapler EH530 (M20)
1
5. Booklet Stapler EH185R Rear (M23)* 12. Corner Stapler Rotation Motor (M13)
6. Booklet Stapler EH185R Front 13. Corner Stapler HP Sensor (S17)
1
(M22)* 14. Stapler Rotation HP Sensor (S18)
15. Stack Junction Gate Motor (M17) *1
SM 27 B804/B805/D373/D374/D612
Component Layout
In the table below a number that appears in bold text (M8, etc.) denotes a
component that is on the 2000/3000 Sheet Finisher B804 only.
B804/B805/D373/D374/D612 28 SM
Component Layout
Boards (PCB)
PCB1 Main Board The main board that controls the finisher
PCB2 Booklet Stapler Board A separate board that controls booklet finishing.
PCB3 Punch Unit Board The board that controls the punch unit.
Motors
Finisher Entrance Drives 1) the finisher entrance rollers, 2) and the punch
M1
Motor waste transport belt of the punch unit.
B804/B805/
D373/D374/
pre-stack tray entrance roller.
Finisher/
Finisher
Booklet
D612
Drives paper feed rollers forward and reverse in the
M3 Lower Transport Motor pre-stack tray for the switchback, and drives the other
rollers in the lower transport area.
Drives the feed out belt that moves the stapled stacks
M5 Feed Out Belt Motor
out of the stapling tray after stapling.
SM 29 B804/B805/D373/D374/D612
Component Layout
are part of the paper feed path and feed the stack
toward the bottom fence of the fold unit. When the idle
roller is retracted, the stacks falls a very short distance
(3 mm) onto the fold unit bottom fence below. These
rollers remain unclamped while the bottom fence
positions the stack for folding and while the stack is
folded by the fold rollers.
Drives the fold plate that pushes the center of the stack
M11 Fold Plate Motor
into the nip of the fold rollers to start the fold.
Rotates forward and drives the fold rollers that fold the
stack and feed it out of the fold unit, reverses to feed the
M12 Fold Roller Motor
fold once more into the fold unit, and then rotates
forward again to feed the fold out of the fold unit.
Positioning Roller
M14 Drives the positioning roller in the stapling tray.
Motor
B804/B805/D373/D374/D612 30 SM
Component Layout
B804/B805/
D373/D374/
Finisher/
Finisher
Booklet
Drives the mechanism that raises and lowers the exit
D612
M19 Exit Guide Plate Motor
guide plate.
M24 Punch Drive Motor Fires the punches that punch the holes in the paper.
Sensors
SM 31 B804/B805/D373/D374/D612
Component Layout
B804/B805/D373/D374/D612 32 SM
Component Layout
B804/B805/
D373/D374/
the proof tray exit when the copier is switched on.
Finisher/
Finisher
Booklet
D612
The top of the stack in the proof tray increases until it
nudges the feeler of this sensor. The sensor then
S11 Proof Tray Full Sensor
signals that the proof tray is full and the job halts until
some paper is removed from the proof tray.
SM 33 B804/B805/D373/D374/D612
Component Layout
back against the end fence of the upper tray to keep the
bottom of the stack aligned.
Stapler Rotation HP Controls the angle of the position of the corner stapler
S18
Sensor during oblique stapling.
B804/B805/D373/D374/D612 34 SM
Component Layout
B804/B805/
D373/D374/
the home position (HP is the reference point).
Finisher/
Finisher
Booklet
D612
Detects the home position of the punch unit and
S23 Punch HP Sensor controls the vertical movement of the punches when
they fire.
SM 35 B804/B805/D373/D374/D612
Component Layout
This rear sensor is the lower sensor of the lower tray full
Lower Tray Full sensor pair. Two actuators are attached to the actuator
S33
Sensor - Rear arm that touches the top of stapled and folded booklets
as they feed out. The on/off combinations of the two
B804/B805/D373/D374/D612 36 SM
Component Layout
sensors are used to detect when the tray is full and stop
the job. (The lower tray is stationary. At tray full, the job
halts until booklets are removed from the lower tray.)
B804/B805/
D373/D374/
Solenoids
Finisher/
Finisher
Booklet
D612
Opens and closes the proof tray junction gate. When
Proof Junction Gate the solenoid switches on, it opens the gate and paper is
SOL1
Solenoid diverted to the proof tray. When this gate is closed, the
paper goes straight to the upper tray. I
Stapling Edge Operates the pressure plate of the stapling unit. The
SOL4 Pressure Plate pressure plate presses down the edge of stack in the
Solenoid stapling tray so it is tight for stapling.
SM 37 B804/B805/D373/D374/D612
Component Layout
Switches
Front Door Safety The safety switch cuts the dc power when the front door
SW1
Switch is opened.
B804/B805/D373/D374/D612 38 SM
Component Layout
B804/B805/
D373/D374/
Finisher/
Finisher
Booklet
D612
SM 39 B804/B805/D373/D374/D612
Junction Gates
The positions of the proof tray and staple tray junction gates determine the direction of paper
feed after paper enters the finisher.
Proof tray junction gate [A] opens. Staple tray junction gate [B] remains closed.
The proof tray junction gate directs paper to the proof tray above.
Proof tray junction gate [A] remains closed. Staple tray junction gate [B] remains closed.
With both junction gates closed, the paper goes to the upper tray.
B804/B805/D373/D374/D612 40 SM
Junction Gates
Proof tray junction gate [A] remains closed. Staple tray junction gate [B] opens
The staple tray junction gate directs the paper to the staple tray below for jogging and
B804/B805/
D373/D374/
Finisher/
Finisher
Booklet
stapling.
D612
SM 41 B804/B805/D373/D374/D612
Pre-Stacking
2.3 PRE-STACKING
This example describes what happens to Set 2 during the feed and stapling cycle of sets
that contain three pages.
[A]: While the Set 1 is being stapled in the staple tray [1], the 1st sheet of Set 2 [2] feeds
to the pre-stack tray, and the 2nd sheet of Set 2 [3] enters the finisher.
[B]: The pre-stack junction gate opens and the 1st sheet of Set 2 [4] switches back to
the top of the pre-stack tray as the 2nd sheet of Set 2 [5] starts to descend.
[C]: As the 2nd sheet of Set 2 continues to descend, the 1st sheet of Set 2 is fed from
the pre-stack tray. At this time the leading edges [6] of both sheets are even.
[D]: The trailing edges of the 1st and 2nd sheets of Set 2 pass the junction gate [7] as
the 3rd sheet of Set 2 [8] enters the finisher.
[E]: The 1st and 2nd sheets of Set 2 [9] switch back together into the top of the pre-stack
and wait for the 3rd of Set 2 sheet to arrive.
[F]: The stapling of Set 1 in the staple tray [10] is completed.
[G]: Set 1 [11] exits the staple tray.
[H]: The three sheets of Set 2 [12] feed together into the stapler tray for stapling.
Pre-stacking is only done for A4, B5, and LT paper.
B804/B805/D373/D374/D612 42 SM
Pre-Stacking
In one-staple mode, one sheet goes to the pre-stacking tray. Then two sheets go to the
stapler tray at the same time.
In two-staple mode and booklet mode, three sheets go to the pre-stacking tray. Then four
sheets go to the stapler tray at the same time.
B804/B805/
D373/D374/
Finisher/
Finisher
Booklet
D612
SM 43 B804/B805/D373/D374/D612
Tray Movement Mechanism
The B804 (shown above) has only one upper tray full sensor (the higher sensor at
[H]).
The B805 has two upper tray full sensors (the upper and lower sensor at [H]). On
the B805 the upper sensor detects tray full for heavier paper (A3, DLT, B4, LG, 12 x
18), and the lower sensor detects tray full for lighter paper (A4, LT, etc.).
The tray full capacity is 2,000 sheets (B804) for A4, LT and 3,000 sheets (B805) for
B804/B805/D373/D374/D612 44 SM
Tray Movement Mechanism
A4, LT.
Five sensors and one switch control the operation of the upper tray lift motor [A].
Upper Tray Raising and Lowering
B804/B805/
D373/D374/
Finisher/
Finisher
Booklet
D612
Straight Through ON Non-staple mode operation: During
operation, tray lift is controlled only by
sensor [F]. When the actuator leaves
Shift ON sensor [F], the tray lowers until the
actuator reactivates sensor [F].
Tray Full
SM 45 B804/B805/D373/D374/D612
Tray Movement Mechanism
When the actuator on the tray activates the upper tray full sensor [H] the tray lift
B804 motor [A] switches off. Operation resumes after some copies are removed from
the tray. Upper Tray Capacity: 2,000 sheets (A4, LT)
The operation of the upper tray full sensor is the same as the B804. Capacity:
1,500 sheets for A3, B4 or other large paper.
B805
An additional upper tray full sensor (below sensor [H]) allows more sheets to
stack on the upper tray. Capacity: 3,000 sheets (A4, LT)
The lower tray sensor actuator arm [A] rests on the top of the stack of stapled booklets as
they are output to the lower tray. A flap depressor [B] keeps the open ends of the booklets
down.
The front lower tray full sensor (S34) [C] and rear lower tray full sensor (S33) [D] detect
when the lower tray is full of booklets.
The front lower tray full sensor is mounted higher than the rear lower tray full
sensor.
The lower tray is stationary. When it becomes full, the stapling and folding job stops
until booklets are removed from the tray.
B804/B805/D373/D374/D612 46 SM
Tray Movement Mechanism
If the lower tray is not installed (this is detected if the front and rear sensors remain
OFF), the machine will not operate in the booklet staple and fold mode. When
booklet mode is selected, the tray full message appears on the operation panel.
The combinations of the two actuators and two sensors as the actuator arm rises
determines the number of booklets that the lower tray can hold before the job stops.
The tray full detection depends on the size of the paper and the number of sheets in one
stapled and folded booklet.
In the table below, the conditions ( Ready Full 1, Full 2 Full 3: See the illustration on
the previous page) refer to the states of the sensors described on the previous page.
Ready ON OFF
Full 1 ON ON
B804/B805/
D373/D374/
Finisher/
Finisher
Booklet
D612
Full 2 OFF ON
SM 47 B804/B805/D373/D374/D612
Tray Movement Mechanism
Full 1 3 Cnt
15
Full 2 5 Cnt
Cnt
13
Full 3 7 Cnt 4 Cnt 2 Cnt 2 Cnt 2 Cnt
Cnt
A4 (LT)
16
Full1
Cnt
10 10 15 20 15 10
Full 2 8 Cnt 8 Cnt
Cnt Cnt Cnt Cnt Cnt Cnt
Full 3
Examples:
After the copier makes a booklet with 1 sheet of A3/DLT paper, the machine checks every
100 ms for the Full 1 condition. If the Full 1 condition occurs 3 times, the machine detects
that the tray is full.
After the copier makes a booklet with 5 sheets of A4/LT paper, the machine checks every
100 ms for the Full 2 condition. If the Full 2 condition occurs 20 times, the machine detects
that the tray is full.
B804/B805/D373/D374/D612 48 SM
Corner Stapling
B804/B805/
D373/D374/
Finisher/
Finisher
Booklet
D612
[A]: Jogger Fence Motor (M15)
[B]: Jogger Fences
[C]: Positioning Roller
[D]: Jogger Fence HP Sensor (S15)
[E]: Stapling Edge Pressure Plate Solenoid (SOL4)
[F]: Pressure Plate
At the beginning of the job, the jogger fence motor (M15) [A] switches on and moves the
jogger fences [B] to the standby position (7.5 mm from the sides of the selected paper size).
When each sheet passes the pre-stack tray exit sensor (S2) and enters the stapling tray:
The jogger fence motor switches on and moves the jogger fences to within 5.5 mm of
the sides of the selected paper size.
The positioning roller solenoid (SOL3) switches on for the time prescribed for the paper
SM 49 B804/B805/D373/D374/D612
Corner Stapling
size. This pushes the positioning roller [C] onto the sheet and pushes it down onto
bottom fence. This aligns the edge of the stack.
Next, the jogger fence motor:
Switches on again and moves the jogger fences to within 2.6 mm of the sides of the
stack to align the sides of the stack.
Reverses and moves the fences to the standby position (7.5 mm away for the sides)
and waits for the next sheet.
The jogger fence HP sensor [D] switches off the jogger motor at the end of the job.
After the last sheet feeds:
The stapling edge pressure plate solenoid [E] (SOL4) switches on and pushes the
pressure plate [F] onto the stack to press down the edge for stapling.
The corner stapler staples the stack.
B804/B805/D373/D374/D612 50 SM
Corner Stapling
The stapler performs horizontal and rotational movement in each of the four staple modes:
Front 1 staple
Rear 1 staple
Rear diagonal staple
Rear/Front 2 staples
The stapler movement motor [A] drives a timing belt that moves stapler [B] left and right on
its stainless steel rail.
The stapler rotation motor [C] rotates the stapler into position for diagonal stapling at the
rear.
The stapler movement motor switches on and moves the stapler the standby stapling
position. (This is the stapling position for the paper size selected for the job.)
The stapler movement motor switches off and the stapler waits for the signal to fire (or
swivel and for diagonal stapling).
If the stack is to be stapled at two positions:
B804/B805/
D373/D374/
The stapler movement motor moves the stapler to the front position and staples the
Finisher/
Finisher
Booklet
D612
front.
The stapler movement motor moves the stapler to the rear and the stapler staples the
rear.
If the stack is stapled at the rear with a diagonal staple, the staple moves to the rear. When it
is time for stapling, the rotation motor rotates the stapler to the correct angle and holds the
stapler in that position while the stapler fires.
The stapling positions can be fine adjusted with SP6-133-001.
SM 51 B804/B805/D373/D374/D612
Corner Stapling
Staple firing is driven by the stapler motor [A] inside the stapler unit. The stapler hammer [B]
fires the stapler [C].
The cartridge set sensor [D] detects the cartridge at the correct position.
The staple end sensor [E] detects the staple end condition.
B804/B805/D373/D374/D612 52 SM
Booklet Stapling (B804 Only)
B804/B805/
D373/D374/
Finisher/
Finisher
Booklet
D612
[A]: Booklet Pressure Roller Solenoid (SOL5)
[B]: Booklet Pressure Roller Arm
[C]: Booklet Pressure Roller
As soon as the edges are aligned by the positioning roller and the jogger fences, the stack
feed out belt moves.
In booklet mode, immediately after the edges are aligned by the positioning roller and jogger
fences, the booklet pressure solenoid switches on and the booklet pressure roller presses
down on the stack until booklet stapling is finished. This prevents the stack from shifting
during stapling.
SM 53 B804/B805/D373/D374/D612
Booklet Stapling (B804 Only)
Overview
B804/B805/D373/D374/D612 54 SM
Booklet Stapling (B804 Only)
B804/B805/
D373/D374/
1:
Finisher/
Finisher
Booklet
D612
The last sheet of the stack [1] enters the stapling tray. The jogger fences [2] jog the last
sheet into position (based on the width of the selected paper size) and then retract and stop
1 mm away from the sides of the stack.
2:
The pressure plate [3] and booklet pressure roller [4] press down on the sheet. The stack
feed out belt switches on and the pawl [5] on the feed out belt catches the bottom of the
stack and raises it. The stapling tray sensor [6] detects the trailing edge of the paper stack.
3:
The feed out belt [7] raises the stack to the prescribed stapling position and stops. The
jogger fences move to the sides of the stack and the booklet staplers [8] staple the stack.
SM 55 B804/B805/D373/D374/D612
Booklet Stapling (B804 Only)
4:
The jogger fences remain 1 mm away from the sides of the stack. The feed out belt [1]
raises the stack until the top of the stack is 10 mm past the leading edge pressure roller [2]
and stops. The leading edge pressure roller descends and applies pressure to the top of the
stack. The stack junction gate [3] (normally open) closes. The pressure roller [4] and
pressure plate [5] retract.
5:
The feed out belt [6], transport rollers [7], [8], and clamp rollers [9] rotate and feed the stack
past the closed stack junction, over the top and down toward the bottom fence [10]. At the
same time, the fold unit bottom fence descends from its home position and stops 10 mm
below the fold position.
6:
The rollers feed the leading edge of the stack to within 3 mm of the stack stopper of the
bottom fence [13]. The fold unit entrance sensor [11] detects the stack and opens the clamp
rollers [12]. The stack drops 3 mm onto the fold unit bottom fence [13]. At this time, the first
sheet [14] of the next stack feeds to the stapling tray.
B804/B805/D373/D374/D612 56 SM
Booklet Stapling (B804 Only)
B804/B805/
D373/D374/
Finisher/
Finisher
Booklet
D612
7:
The bottom fence [1] raises the stack to the prescribed fold position [2].
8:
The fold plate [3] moves to the left and advances 1/3 its maximum horizontal stroke and
exerts 20 kg (44 lb.) of pressure at the fold rollers [4].
9:
With the fold plate pushing the stack into nip of the fold rollers [5], the fold rollers begin to
rotate and fold the stack as it feeds out.
SM 57 B804/B805/D373/D374/D612
Booklet Stapling (B804 Only)
10:
When the fold rollers [1] feed the stack 10 mm past the nip, the fold plate retracts until it no
longer touches the stack. The fold unit exit sensor [2] detects the folded edge of the stack
and stops the fold rollers.
11:
The rotation of the fold rollers [4] reverses and feeds the folded edge back until only 3 mm of
the fold [5] remains at the nip.
12:
The fold rollers [6] rotate forward once again feed out. The fold unit exit sensor [7] once
again detects the edge of the fold.
You can do SP6-136-001 to increase the sharpness of the fold. The number of
forward and reverse feeds can be set in the range of 2 to 30. The machine repeats
Steps 11 and 12. For more, please refer to Section "Service Tables".
B804/B805/D373/D374/D612 58 SM
Booklet Stapling (B804 Only)
B804/B805/
D373/D374/
Finisher/
Finisher
Booklet
D612
13:
With the feed of the stack halted, the fold plate [1] retracts. The fold plate HP sensor (not
shown) detects the fold plate and stops it at its home position.
14:
The fold rollers [2] and fold unit exit rollers [3] begin to rotate together and feed out the
folded booklet to the lower tray.
15:
Once the trailing edge of the stack passes the fold unit exit sensor [4], the clamp rollers [5]
close to be ready to feed the next stack. The fold unit bottom fence [6] descends. The
bottom fence HP sensor [7] stops the bottom fence when it detects the actuator on the
bottom fence.
SM 59 B804/B805/D373/D374/D612
Booklet Stapling (B804 Only)
Booklet Stapler
[A]: Feed Out Belt Pawl. Raises the stack to stapling position.
[B]: Booklet Stapler EH185R Rear
[C]: Booklet Stapler EH185R Front
Stack Junction Gate
[D]: Stack Junction Gate Motor. Drives a timing belt and stack junction gate cam.
[E]: Stack Junction Gate Cam. Opens and closes the stack junction gate.
[F]: Stack Junction Gate. The stack junction gate motor and stack junction gate cam close
the stack junction gate. The feed out belt pawl raises the stapled stack and sends it over the
top and down to the fold unit.
[G]: Leading Edge Pressure Roller. Presses down on the leading edge of the stack after
booklet stapling.
B804/B805/D373/D374/D612 60 SM
Booklet Stapling (B804 Only)
[H]
B804/B805/
D373/D374/
Finisher/
Finisher
Booklet
D612
Clamp Roller
[A]: Fold Roller Motor. Drives the stationary clamp drive roller { as well as the fold rollers
(see next page).
[B]: Clamp Rollers.
{ Clamp Roller Drive. Rotated by the fold roller motor, this stationary roller feeds the stack
down with the retracting roller closed.
| Clamp Roller Retracting. Opened and closed by the retraction motor [C].
[C]: Clamp Roller Retraction Motor. Operates the clamp roller cam that retracts the retracting
clamp roller. The clamp rollers feed the stack to within 3 mm of the bottom fence when
closed and then open to drop the stack onto the bottom fence.
[D]: Clamp Roller HP Sensor. Controls the rotation of the clamp roller retraction motor and
cam that open and close the retracting clamp roller.
[E]: Clamp Roller Cam. Forces open the spring loaded retracting clamp roller.
Bottom Fence
[F]: Bottom Fence. Raises the booklet stapled stack to the fold position.
[G]: Bottom Fence HP Sensor. Detects the actuator on the bottom fence and stops it at the
home position after folding.
[H]: Bottom Fence Lift Motor. Raises the bottom fence and stapled stack to the fold position
prescribed for the paper size.
SM 61 B804/B805/D373/D374/D612
Booklet Stapling (B804 Only)
Fold Plate
[A]: Bottom Fence Stack Stoppers. Catches the stack after it is released by the clamp rollers.
[B]: Fold Plate Motor. Drives the timing belt and gears that move the fold plate.
[C]: Fold Plate Cam. Controls the movement of the fold plate to the left (into the nip of the
fold rollers) and right (toward the fold plate home position).
[D]: Fold Plate HP Sensor. Controls operation of the fold plate motor.
[E]: Fold Plate. Moves left and pushes the stack into the nip of the fold rollers and then
moves right to retract.
Fold Rollers
[F]: Fold Roller Motor. Drives forward to feed out the stack at the fold and then reverses to
feed the fold in to sharpen the crease, and then drives forward again to feed out the folded
stack. This reverse/forward cycle is done once.
B804/B805/D373/D374/D612 62 SM
Upper Tray Output
B804/B805/
D373/D374/
Finisher/
Finisher
Booklet
D612
[A]: Feed Out Belt Motor
[B]: Stack Feed-Out Belt
[C]: Pawl
[D]: Exit Rollers
[E]: Exit Guide Plate Motor
[F]: Exit Guide Plate
[G]: Exit Guide Plate HP Sensor
[H]: Upper Tray
After the stack is stapled, the feed out belt motor [A] switches on and drives the feed out belt
[B].
The pawl [C] attached to the feed out belt catches on the stack and lifts the stack toward the
feed out slot.
The exit guide plate [F] remains open as the stack emerges at a prescribed distance away
from the exit roller.
Next, the exit guide plate closes and the exit roller feeds the stack out.
The opening and closing of the exit guide plate is controlled by the rising and falling of a link
driven by a rotating cam attached to the shaft of the exit guide plate motor [E].
SM 63 B804/B805/D373/D374/D612
Upper Tray Output
The feed out belt motor stops 300 ms to prevent the stapled stack from rising too high.
Next, the feed out belt motor switches on again, then the pawl actuates its home position
sensor and switches off the motor.
There are two output pawls on the feed out belt to improve the productivity of the feed out
operation.
Upper/proof exit motor [A] drives feed roller [B] and stacking sponge roller [C].
Stacking sponge roller motor [D] moves the sponge roller forward and back with link [E].
The position of the stacking sponge roller [C] is controlled by the stacking sponge roller
motor which is switched on and off by the stacking roller HP sensor [F].
B804/B805/D373/D374/D612 64 SM
Punch Unit B702 (For B804/B805)
B804/B805/
D373/D374/
Finisher/
Finisher
Booklet
D612
This punch unit corrects for paper skew and then positions the punch unit to punch holes at
the correct position. Each sheet is punched one at a time.
Paper feeds out of the copier. The finisher entrance sensor [A] detects the leading edge of
the sheet.
The finisher entrance roller [B] stops rotating briefly while the copier exit rollers continue to
rotate. This buckles the paper against the finisher entrance roller to correct skew. The
finisher entrance roller [C] starts to rotate again and feeds the sheet into the finisher.
These SP codes adjust the skew operation in the punch unit:
SP6130. This SP corrects the punch hole alignment. To do this, it corrects the skew of
each sheet by adjusting the amount of time the finisher entrance roller remains off while
the exit roller of the machine remains on. For more, see Section "Service Tables".
SP6131. This SP determines whether the finisher entrance roller stops to correct skew
when paper enters the finisher. You can use this SP to disable the skew correction. For
more, see Section "Service Tables".
SM 65 B804/B805/D373/D374/D612
Punch Unit B702 (For B804/B805)
These operations (skew correction before punching, and punch unit position correction)
increase the accuracy of the punch alignment.
:
The trailing edge of the sheet passes the finisher entrance sensor [A].
The paper position slide unit [B] moves the paper position sensor [C] forward to the edge of
the paper.
The paper position sensor detects the position of the paper edge and sends this information
to the punch unit board. The machine uses the detected position of the paper edge to
calculate the correct position for punching.
The upper transport motor switches on and rotates the feed rollers [D] the prescribed
distance to position the paper under the punch unit.
:
Using the result of the position calculation, the punch unit control board moves the punch
unit [E] to the adjusted punch position.
The paper position slide unit and its paper sensor, move back to the paper position slide
home position sensor [F], and the punch unit fires the punches to make the holes.
:
The feed rollers [G] feed the punched paper out of the punch unit and into the paper path.
B804/B805/D373/D374/D612 66 SM
Punch Unit B702 (For B804/B805)
B804/B805/
D373/D374/
These SP codes adjust the punch hole alignment:
Finisher/
Finisher
Booklet
D612
SP6-128 Adjusts the punch positions in the direction of paper feed.
SP6-129 Adjusts the punch position perpendicular to the direction of feed.
For more, see Section "Service Tables".
SM 67 B804/B805/D373/D374/D612
Punch Unit B702 (For B804/B805)
The finisher entrance motor (M1) [A] drives the finisher entrance rollers [B] that feed paper
from the copier into the finisher. The finisher entrance sensor (S1) [C] detects paper when it
enters the finisher, and detects paper jams.
The paper position slide sensor motor (M7) [D] extends and retracts the paper position slide
that holds the paper position sensor (S27) [E]. The paper position sensor detects the
position of the paper edge. The detected position of the paper is used to calculate and
position the punch unit for punching.
The paper position slide HP sensor (S22) [F] detects the paper position slide when it retracts
and stops the paper position slide motor so the slide stops at its home position.
B804/B805/D373/D374/D612 68 SM
Punch Unit B702 (For B804/B805)
The punch movement motor (M9) [A] extends and retracts the punch unit to position it at the
correct position for punching.
The punch movement HP sensor (S21) [B] detects the position when it retracts, switches off
the punch position movement motor, and stops the punch unit at its home position.
The punch drive motor (M24) [C] fires the punches that punch holes in the paper below.
B804/B805/
D373/D374/
Finisher/
Finisher
Booklet
D612
[A]: Punch Drive Motor (M24)
[B]: Punch Encoder Wheel
[C]: Punch Encoder Sensor (S24)
[D]: Punch HP Sensor (S23)
The punch drive motor (M24) [A] turns the small, notched encoder wheel [B] through the gap
in the punch encoder sensor [C] (S24). The sensor output is used to control the punch
timing.
SM 69 B804/B805/D373/D374/D612
Punch Unit B702 (For B804/B805)
The timing for 2-hole punching [E] is different from 3-hole punching [F].
When the punch unit is at the punching position, the punch motor turns until the encoder
detects the starting position for 2-hole or 3-hole punching.
This is the 1 position in the diagrams (the top diagram is for 2-hole punching, and the
bottom diagram is for 3-hole punching).
Then, the punch drive motor turns counter-clockwise to the 2 position. This movement
punches the holes in the paper.
Then, the punch drive motor turns clockwise to the 1 position, to be ready for the next sheet
of paper.
B804/B805/D373/D374/D612 70 SM
Punch Unit B702 (For B804/B805)
The finisher entrance motor (M1) [A] drives the timing belt and gears that rotate the punch
waste belt [B].
The punchouts fall from the punch unit onto the belt. The belt moves the punchouts to the
front and dumps them in the punch waste hopper [C].
The punch hopper full sensor [D]:
Signals that the hopper is full when it detects the top of the stack of punchouts that have
collected in the hopper.
It also detects when the punch hopper is set properly.
B804/B805/
D373/D374/
Finisher/
Finisher
Booklet
D612
SM 71 B804/B805/D373/D374/D612
Finisher Jam Detection
B804/B805/D373/D374/D612 72 SM
Finisher Jam Detection
B804/B805/
D373/D374/
exit sensor late
Finisher/
Finisher
Booklet
even after enough time to feed 1650 mm.
D612
The fold unit entrance sensor goes not go ON
Fold unit
after enough time has elapsed to feed 1.5 times
entrance
the length of the stack after the leading edge of
sensor late
the stack reaches the stack present sensor
(S26)
Booklet (S32).
R8 to Staple
Fold unit exit The fold unit exit sensor does not go ON after
R12 (B700
sensor late enough time has elapsed for the stack to feed
Only)
(S31) 1.5 times its length from the fold position.
Fold unit exit After the fold unit exit sensor goes ON, it does
sensor lag not go OFF after enough time has elapsed to
(S31) feed 442.9 mm.
SM 73 B804/B805/D373/D374/D612
MULTI-FOLDING UNIT
FD5000 (D454) / FD4000 (D615)
R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY
P a ge Date A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew
None
MULTI-FOLDING UNIT D454/D615
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SM i D454/D615
1.3.6 JOGGER FENCE MOTOR ................................................................ 22
1.3.7 1ST STOPPER UNIT ......................................................................... 23
1.3.8 POSITIONING ROLLER MOTOR ...................................................... 25
1.3.9 1ST STOPPER MOTOR .................................................................... 26
1.3.10 JOGGER FENCE HP SENSOR ................................................... 27
1.3.11 POSITIONING ROLLER HP SENSOR......................................... 28
1.3.12 1ST STOPPER PAPER SENSOR ............................................... 28
1.3.13 1ST STOPPER HP SENSOR....................................................... 29
1.3.14 REGISTRATION SENSOR .......................................................... 30
1.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS: 2ND STOPPER ........................................ 31
1.4.1 2ND STOPPER UNIT ........................................................................ 31
1.4.2 2ND STOPPER MOTOR ................................................................... 33
1.4.3 2ND STOPPER HP SENSOR............................................................ 34
1.4.4 2ND STOPPER PAPER SENSOR .................................................... 35
1.4.5 BYPASS EXIT PAPER SENSOR ...................................................... 36
1.5 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS: 3RD STOPPER ........................................ 37
1.5.1 3RD STOPPER UNIT ........................................................................ 37
1.5.2 3RD STOPPER MOTOR ................................................................... 38
1.5.3 3RD STOPPER PAPER SENSOR .................................................... 39
1.5.4 3RD STOPPER HP SENSOR............................................................ 40
1.5.5 DIRECT-SEND JG (JUNCTION GATE) HP SENSOR ....................... 41
1.5.6 REGISTRATION ROLLER HP SENSOR ........................................... 42
1.5.7 FOLD PLATE HP SENSOR ............................................................... 43
1.5.8 ENTRANCE JG (JUNCTION GATE) HP SENSOR ........................... 44
1.5.9 TOP TRAY EXIT SENSOR ................................................................ 44
1.5.10 ENTRANCE SENSOR.................................................................. 45
1.5.11 TOP TRAY EXIT SENSOR .......................................................... 46
1.6 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS: MAIN 1 ..................................................... 47
1.6.1 TOP TRAY FULL SENSOR (E) ......................................................... 47
1.6.2 TOP TRAY FULL SENSOR (R) ......................................................... 48
1.6.3 VERTICAL PATH PAPER SENSOR .................................................. 48
1.6.4 HORIZONTAL PATH PAPER SENSOR ............................................ 49
1.6.5 HORIZONTAL PATH EXIT SENSOR ................................................ 50
1.6.6 DISCHARGE BRUSH 1 ..................................................................... 51
1.6.7 DISCHARGE BRUSH 2 ..................................................................... 51
1.6.8 DISCHARGE BRUSH 3 ..................................................................... 52
D454/D615 ii SM
1.6.9 PSU ................................................................................................... 52
1.6.10 FIRST FOLD UNIT ....................................................................... 53
1.6.11 DYNAMIC ROLLER HP SENSOR ............................................... 56
1.7 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS: MAIN 2 ..................................................... 57
1.7.1 BYPASS ENTRANCE PAPER SENSOR ........................................... 57
Reinstalling the bypass entrance paper sensor ..................................... 59
1.7.2 FIRST/ SECOND/ THIRD FOLD ROLLER......................................... 59
1.7.3 FOURTH / FIFTH FOLD ROLLER ..................................................... 62
1.7.4 CREASE ROLLERS .......................................................................... 66
Crease Rollers: Idle Rollers ................................................................... 66
Crease Rollers: Drive Rollers ................................................................ 68
1.8 FOLD ADJUSTMENTS ............................................................................... 71
1.8.1 FINE FOLD ADJUSTMENT ............................................................... 71
Before You Begin .................................................................................. 71
FM1 Z-Folding ....................................................................................... 72
FM2 Half Fold ........................................................................................ 74
FM3 Letter Fold-out ............................................................................... 77
FM4 Letter Fold-in ................................................................................. 79
FM5 Double Parallel Fold ...................................................................... 81
FM6 Gate Fold ...................................................................................... 83
1.9 SKEW ADJUSTMENT ................................................................................ 86
1.9.1 MANUAL ADJUSTMENTS BY SERVICE TECHNICIAN ................... 86
Before You Begin .................................................................................. 86
Front and Rear ...................................................................................... 87
Skew Correction Reference Diagrams and Table ................................. 88
General Procedure ................................................................................ 90
Stopper Adjustment Procedures............................................................ 93
2. DETAILS ........................................................................................ 96
2.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................................. 96
2.1.1 MOTORS, ROLLERS ........................................................................ 96
2.1.2 JUNCTION GATES, JUNCTION GATE SOLENOIDS ....................... 97
2.1.3 STOPPERS, STOPPER MOTORS .................................................... 98
2.2 PAPER PATH ............................................................................................. 99
2.2.1 PAPER REGISTRATION ................................................................... 99
2.2.2 PRE-STACKING .............................................................................. 100
SM iii D454/D615
2.2.3 JUNCTION GATES .......................................................................... 106
Entrance Junction Gates ..................................................................... 106
Direct Send Junction Gate .................................................................. 108
Bypass Junction Gate ......................................................................... 110
Exit, Reverse, and Top Tray Junction Gates ....................................... 111
2.3 PAPER FOLDING ..................................................................................... 113
2.3.1 FLEX-NIP FOLDING ........................................................................ 113
2.3.2 STOPPER LOCATIONS .................................................................. 114
2.3.3 FOLDING METHODS ...................................................................... 115
FM1 Z-Folding ..................................................................................... 116
FM2 Half Fold ...................................................................................... 117
FM3 Letter Fold-out ............................................................................. 118
FM4 Letter Fold-in ............................................................................... 119
FM5 Double Parallel Fold .................................................................... 120
FM6 Gate Fold .................................................................................... 121
Fold Adjustments with SP Codes ........................................................ 123
2.3.4 CREASE ROLLERS ........................................................................ 124
2.4 TRAY FULL ............................................................................................... 125
2.5 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ................................................................. 126
2.5.1 TRANSPORT SENSORS ................................................................ 126
2.5.2 OPERATION SENSORS ................................................................. 127
2.5.3 MOTORS, SOLENOIDS .................................................................. 128
2.5.4 PAPER TRANSPORT MOTORS ..................................................... 129
2.5.5 FOLD MOTORS ............................................................................... 130
2.5.6 MOTORS, SOLENOIDS AROUND THE TOP TRAY ....................... 131
2.5.7 MOTORS, SENSORS TOP ............................................................. 132
2.5.8 MOTORS, SENSORS BOTTOM ..................................................... 133
2.5.9 SENSORS AROUND TOP TRAY .................................................... 134
2.5.10 FOLD MOTORS, SENSORS, SOLENOIDS ............................... 135
2.5.11 BOARDS, SWITCHES, FAN ...................................................... 137
2.5.12 COMPONENT LIST ................................................................... 138
D454/D615 iv SM
Read This First
Safety, Conventions, Trademarks
Conventions
Common Terms
This is a list of symbols and abbreviations used in this manual.
Screw
Connector
E-ring
C-ring
= Harness clamp
JG Junction Gate
This information provides tips and advice about how to best service the machine.
General Safety Instructions
For your safety, please read this manual carefully before you use this product. Keep this
manual handy for future reference.
Safety Information
Always obey the following safety precautions when using this product.
Safety During Operation
In this manual, the following important symbols and notations are used.
Switches and Symbols
Where symbols are used on or near switches on machines for Europe and other areas, the
meaning of each symbol conforms with IEC60417.
Responsibilities of the Customer Engineer
Reference Material for Maintenance
Maintenance shall be done using the special tools and procedures prescribed for
maintenance of the machine described in the reference materials (service manuals,
technical bulletins, operating instructions, and safety guidelines for customer
engineers).
In regard to other safety issues not described in this document, all customer engineers
shall strictly obey procedures and recommendations described the CE Safety Guide.
Use only consumable supplies and replacement parts designed for use of the machine.
Always disconnect the power plug before doing any maintenance procedure. After
switching off the machine, power is still supplied to the main machine and other
devices. To prevent electrical shock, switch the machine off, wait for a few seconds,
then unplug the machine from the power source.
Before you do any checks or adjustments after turning the machine off, work
carefully to avoid injury. After removing covers or opening the machine to do checks
or adjustments, never touch electrical components or moving parts (gears, timing
belts, etc.).
After turning the machine on with any cover removed, keep your hands away from
electrical components and moving parts. Never touch the cover of the fusing unit,
gears, timing belts, etc.
Installation, Disassembly, and Adjustments
After installation, maintenance, or adjustment, always check the operation of the
machine to make sure that it is operating normally. This ensures that all shipping
materials, protective materials, wires and tags, metal brackets, etc., removed for
installation, have been removed and that no tools remain inside the machine. This
also ensures that all release interlock switches have been restored to normal
operation.
Never use your fingers to check moving parts causing spurious noise. Never use
your fingers to lubricate moving parts while the machine is operating.
Special Tools
During Maintenance
General
Never remove any safety device unless it requires replacement. Always replace
safety devices immediately.
Never do any procedure that defeats the function of any safety device. Modification
or removal of a safety device (fuse, switch, etc.) could lead to a fire and personal
injury. Always test the operation of the machine to ensure that it is operating
normally and safely after removal and replacement of any safety device.
For replacements use only the correct fuses or circuit breakers rated for use with
the machine. Using replacement devices not designed for use with the machine
could lead to a fire and personal injuries.
Organic Cleaners
During preventive maintenance, never use any organic cleaners (alcohol, etc.)
other than those described in the service manual.
Make sure the room is well ventilated before using any organic cleaner. Use organic
solvents in small amounts to avoid breathing the fumes and becoming nauseous.
Switch the machine off, unplug it, and allow it to cool before doing preventive
maintenance. To avoid fire or explosion, never use an organic cleaner near any part
that generates heat.
Wash your hands thoroughly after cleaning parts with an organic cleaner to
contamination of food, drinks, etc. which could cause illness.
Clean the floor completely after accidental spillage of silicone oil or other materials
to prevent slippery surfaces that could cause accidents leading to hand or leg
injuries. Use My Ace Silicone Oil Remover (or dry rags) to soak up spills. For more
details, please refer to Technical Bulletin Silicone Oil Removal (A024-50).
Ozone Filters
Always replace ozone filters as soon as their service life expires (as described in
the service manual).
An excessive amount of ozone can build up around machines that use ozone filters
if they are not replaced at the prescribed time. Excessive ozone could cause
personnel working around the machine to feel unwell.
Power Plug and Power Cord
Before servicing the machine (especially when responding to a service call), always
make sure that the power plug has been inserted completely into the power source.
A partially inserted plug could lead to heat generation (due to a power surge caused
by high resistance) and cause a fire or other problems.
Always check the power plug and make sure that it is free of dust and lint. Clean it if
necessary. A dirty plug can generate heat which could cause a fire.
Inspect the length of the power cord for cuts or other damage. Replace the power
cord if necessary. A frayed or otherwise damaged power cord can cause a short
circuit which could lead to a fire or personal injury from electrical shock.
Check the length of the power cord between the machine and power supply. Make
sure the power cord is not coiled or wrapped around any object such as a table leg.
Coiling the power cord can cause excessive heat to build up and could cause a fire.
Make sure that the area around the power source is free of obstacles so the power
cord can be removed quickly in case of an emergency.
Make sure that the power cord is grounded (earthed) at the power source with the
ground wire on the plug.
Connect the power cord directly into the power source. Never use an extension
cord.
When you disconnect the power plug from the power source, always pull on the
plug, not the cable.
Always dispose of used items (developer, toner, toner cartridges, OPC drums, etc.)
in accordance with the local laws and regulations regarding the disposal of such
items.
To protect the environment, never dispose of this product or any kind of waste from
consumables at a household waste collection point. Dispose of these items at one
of our dealers or at an authorized collection site.
Points to Confirm with Operators
At the end of installation or a service call, instruct the user about use of the machine.
Emphasize the following points.
Show operators how to remove jammed paper and troubleshoot other minor problems
by following the procedures described in the operating instructions.
Point out the parts inside the machine that they should never touch or attempt to
remove.
Confirm that operators know how to store and dispose of consumables.
Make sure that all operators have access to an operating instruction manual for the
machine.
Confirm that operators have read and understand all the safety instructions described in
the operating instructions.
Demonstrate how to turn off the power and disconnect the power plug (by pulling the
plug, not the cord) if any of the following events occur: 1) something has spilled into the
product, 2) service or repair of the product is necessary, 3) the product cover has been
damaged.
Caution operators about removing paper fasteners around the machine. They should
never allow paper clips, staples, or any other small metallic objects to fall into the
machine.
Safety Instructions for this Machine
1. The installation must be done by trained service technicians.
2. This machine weighs 316 kg. (695 lb.). At least four persons are required to remove the
machine from its pallet and position it for installation.
3. To prevent fire hazards never use flammable solvents around the machine.
4. Never place any object on the machine.
5. If anything falls into the machine, turn off the main power switch on the right side of the
machine, then disconnect the power cord from the power source.
6. Locate the machine on a sturdy flat surface where it will not be exposed to excessive
vibration.
7. To avoid fire hazard, confirm that the ventilation ports are not blocked, so air can flow
freely.
8. Gas generated by the molten glue can irritate the eyes, throat, and nose. The machine
should always be used in a well ventilated room.
9. To avoid the dangers of fire and electrical shock, make sure that the machine is never
exposed to:
Excessive high temperatures and/or humidity
Dust
Water
Direct sunlight
Open flame
Corrosive gases
Trademarks
Microsoft, Windows, and MS-DOS are registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and /or other countries.
PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.
PCL is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
PowerPC is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and may be
trademarks of their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights involved with
those marks.
Exterior and Inner Covers
Multi-Folding
D454/D615
Unit
1. Open the front door [A].
3. Cross-piece [A] ( x 2)
SM 1 D454/D615
Replacement and Adjustment
D454/D615 2 SM
Exterior and Inner Covers
Multi-Folding
Release the hooks [C] to remove the inner upper cover.
D454/D615
Unit
1.1.4 FRONT DOOR
1. Top cover (
p.2)
2. Inner upper cover (
p.3)
SM 3 D454/D615
Replacement and Adjustment
D454/D615 4 SM
Exterior and Inner Covers
Multi-Folding
D454/D615
Unit
2. Rear lower cover [A] ( x 3)
SM 5 D454/D615
Replacement and Adjustment
3. Release the hook [A], and remove the top tray [B] ( x 1).
D454/D615 6 SM
Exterior and Inner Covers
Multi-Folding
D454/D615
Unit
1. Open the front door [A]
2. Pull out the folding unit drawer [B].
SM 7 D454/D615
Replacement and Adjustment
D454/D615 8 SM
Electrical Components: Rear Side
Multi-Folding
D454/D615
Unit
3. Top tray exit motor bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1, x 2)
SM 9 D454/D615
Replacement and Adjustment
D454/D615 10 SM
Electrical Components: Rear Side
Multi-Folding
D454/D615
Unit
SM 11 D454/D615
Replacement and Adjustment
D454/D615 12 SM
Electrical Components: Rear Side
Multi-Folding
D454/D615
5. Crease motor [A] ( x 2, x 4)
Unit
SM 13 D454/D615
Replacement and Adjustment
D454/D615 14 SM
Electrical Components: Rear Side
Multi-Folding
D454/D615
Unit
3. Registration roller release motor bracket [A] ( x 1, x 2)
SM 15 D454/D615
Replacement and Adjustment
D454/D615 16 SM
Electrical Components: 1st Stopper
Multi-Folding
D454/D615
Unit
3. Fold plate motor bracket [A] ( x 3, x 1, x 2)
SM 17 D454/D615
Replacement and Adjustment
D454/D615 18 SM
Electrical Components: 1st Stopper
Multi-Folding
D454/D615
Unit
3. 1st fold motor [A] ( x 1, x 4)
SM 19 D454/D615
Replacement and Adjustment
D454/D615 20 SM
Electrical Components: 1st Stopper
Multi-Folding
D454/D615
Unit
3. 2nd fold motor bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1, x 3)
SM 21 D454/D615
Replacement and Adjustment
D454/D615 22 SM
Electrical Components: 1st Stopper
Multi-Folding
D454/D615
4. Drawer stopper [A] ( x 1)
Unit
5. Belt tension bracket [A] ( x 2)
SM 23 D454/D615
Replacement and Adjustment
6. Release two clamps [A].
7. Disconnect two connectors [B].
12. Hold the 1st stopper unit [A], and then remove it ( x 2).
D454/D615 24 SM
Electrical Components: 1st Stopper
The 1st stopper unit cannot hang the folding unit drawer without the two screws.
If you remove the 1st stopper unit without any support, the 1st stopper unit can
fall and be broken.
Multi-Folding
D454/D615
Unit
2. Positioning roller motor bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1, x 2)
SM 25 D454/D615
Replacement and Adjustment
D454/D615 26 SM
Electrical Components: 1st Stopper
Multi-Folding
D454/D615
Unit
3. Jogger fence timing belt bracket [A] ( x 2)
SM 27 D454/D615
Replacement and Adjustment
D454/D615 28 SM
Electrical Components: 1st Stopper
Multi-Folding
D454/D615
2. 1st stopper HP sensor bracket [A] ( x 1)
Unit
3. 1st stopper HP sensor [A] (hooks)
SM 29 D454/D615
Replacement and Adjustment
D454/D615 30 SM
Electrical Components: 2nd Stopper
Multi-Folding
D454/D615
Unit
3. Remove two screws [A] at the rear side of the folding unit drawer.
4. Remove the spring [A] for the solenoid spring [B] for the guide plate.
5. Remove the arm [C] for the guide plate.
SM 31 D454/D615
Replacement and Adjustment
9. Move down the 2nd stopper unit [A] a little bit ( x 2).
D454/D615 32 SM
Electrical Components: 2nd Stopper
10. Open the jam removal door [A], and then remove the 2nd stopper unit [B].
Multi-Folding
D454/D615
Unit
2. 2nd stopper motor [A] ( x 1, x 1, x 2)
SM 33 D454/D615
Replacement and Adjustment
D454/D615 34 SM
Electrical Components: 2nd Stopper
Multi-Folding
D454/D615
Unit
3. 2nd stopper paper sensor [A] ( x 1)
SM 35 D454/D615
Replacement and Adjustment
D454/D615 36 SM
Electrical Components: 3rd Stopper
Multi-Folding
D454/D615
Unit
4. Drawer stopper [A] ( x 1)
SM 37 D454/D615
Replacement and Adjustment
9. Hold the 3rd stopper unit [A], and then remove it ( x 2).
The 3rd stopper unit cannot hang the folding unit drawer without the two screws.
If you remove the 1st stopper unit without any support, the 3rd stopper unit can
fall and be broken.
D454/D615 38 SM
Electrical Components: 3rd Stopper
Multi-Folding
D454/D615
Unit
3. 3rd stopper paper sensor [A] ( x 1)
SM 39 D454/D615
Replacement and Adjustment
D454/D615 40 SM
Electrical Components: 3rd Stopper
Multi-Folding
D454/D615
Unit
4. Direct-Send JG HP sensor [A] (hooks)
SM 41 D454/D615
Replacement and Adjustment
D454/D615 42 SM
Electrical Components: 3rd Stopper
Multi-Folding
D454/D615
Unit
4. Fold plate HP sensor [A] (hooks)
SM 43 D454/D615
Replacement and Adjustment
D454/D615 44 SM
Electrical Components: 3rd Stopper
Multi-Folding
1. Entrance sensor bracket [A] ( x 1)
D454/D615
Unit
2. Entrance sensor [A] (hooks, x 1)
SM 45 D454/D615
Replacement and Adjustment
D454/D615 46 SM
Electrical Components: Main 1
Multi-Folding
D454/D615
2. Paper exit cover [A] ( x 1)
Unit
3. Top tray full sensor (E) bracket ( x 1)
SM 47 D454/D615
Replacement and Adjustment
D454/D615 48 SM
Electrical Components: Main 1
Multi-Folding
D454/D615
Unit
3. Horizontal path paper sensor [A] (
x 1)
SM 49 D454/D615
Replacement and Adjustment
D454/D615 50 SM
Electrical Components: Main 1
Multi-Folding
D454/D615
1.6.7 DISCHARGE BRUSH 2
Unit
1. Top tray (
p.6)
SM 51 D454/D615
Replacement and Adjustment
1.6.9 PSU
2. PSU [A] ( x 6, x 4)
D454/D615 52 SM
Electrical Components: Main 1
Multi-Folding
D454/D615
Unit
3. Remove two guide plates [A] (each x 2)
SM 53 D454/D615
Replacement and Adjustment
4. Registration roller transport motor bracket [A] (
p.16 "Registration Roller Transport
Motor")
5. Registration roller release motor bracket [B] (
p.15 "Registration Roller Release
Motor")
6. Fold plate motor bracket [C] (
p.17 "Fold Plate Motor")
7. Timing belt of the 1st plate motor [D]
D454/D615 54 SM
Electrical Components: Main 1
Multi-Folding
D454/D615
Unit
9. Disconnect four harnesses [A] on the rear side.
SM 55 D454/D615
Replacement and Adjustment
11. Lower guide plate [A], keep the upper guide plate [B] up a little and remove the first fold
unit ( x 3, snap fit [C] x 1)
D454/D615 56 SM
Electrical Components: Main 2
Multi-Folding
D454/D615
Unit
4. Disconnect the bypass entrance paper sensor harness [A] from the connector [B] (= x
2).
5. Remove the clip [A] for the bypass entrance guide plate.
SM 57 D454/D615
Replacement and Adjustment
6. Push the bypass entrance guide plate [A] to the rear, then slide it to the left, and remove
it.
D454/D615 58 SM
Electrical Components: Main 2
Put the harness of the bypass entrance paper sensor through the hole [A] in the rear frame
of the drawer.
Multi-Folding
D454/D615
1. First fold unit (
p.53)
Unit
2. Tension bracket [A] (spring x 1, x 1)
3. Rear bracket [B] ( x 3)
SM 59 D454/D615
Replacement and Adjustment
D454/D615 60 SM
Electrical Components: Main 2
Multi-Folding
D454/D615
Unit
11. Third fold roller with the guide plate [A]
12. Remove the guide plate [B].
13. Second fold roller [C].
14. Remove the gear [A] ( x 1), and then the first fold roller [B].
SM 61 D454/D615
Replacement and Adjustment
D454/D615 62 SM
Electrical Components: Main 2
8. Remove the spring [A] and the tension bracket [B] ( x 1).
Multi-Folding
D454/D615
Unit
9. Left lower bracket ( x 6)
10. Lift up the hook [A] to release the guide plate shaft [B].
11. Move the guide plate shaft [B] to the front side (arrow direction), and then remove the
guide plate [C].
SM 63 D454/D615
Replacement and Adjustment
D454/D615 64 SM
Electrical Components: Main 2
20. 1st fold motor [A] (
p.19)
21. FM6 pawl HP sensor bracket [B]
22. FM6 pawl cam gear [C]
23. Release the tension bracket [D], and then remove the transmission pulley gear [E] (pin x
1)
Multi-Folding
D454/D615
24. Remove the entrance guide plate [A] at the 2nd fold unit ( x 4).
Unit
25. Hold the fourth fold roller cam [A] at the rear of the drawer unit.
26. Pull the fourth fold roller [B] to the front side .
27. Keep the FM6 pawl [C] open, and then remove the fourth fold roller .
Hold the holder [A] when pulling the fourth fold roller [B] in the direction.
SM 65 D454/D615
Replacement and Adjustment
D454/D615 66 SM
Electrical Components: Main 2
Multi-Folding
D454/D615
Unit
There are two types of tension brackets at the crease roller area. The difference
between these brackets is the number of screw holes ([A]: one hole, [B]: two holes).
Attach a bracket [A] with one hole to the crease roller frame with one hole.
Attach a bracket [B] with two holes to the crease roller frame with two holes.
SM 67 D454/D615
Replacement and Adjustment
D454/D615 68 SM
Electrical Components: Main 2
Multi-Folding
D454/D615
Unit
9. Crease roller pulley gears [A] ( x 1 each)
SM 69 D454/D615
Replacement and Adjustment
D454/D615 70 SM
Fold Adjustments
Multi-Folding
D454/D615
FM3 1st 0504 Adjust Letter Fold-out Position 1 6753
Unit
2nd 0505 Adjust Letter Fold-out Position 2 6754
*1: These numbers are the same for Operators and Skilled Operators.
SM 71 D454/D615
Replacement and Adjustment
FM1 Z-Folding
User Tool Adjustment (Operator, Skilled Operator)
The following standard adjustment of "S" can be done by the operator or skilled operator in
the User Tools mode. Only "S" can be adjusted by the operator, as shown in the table below.
A3 SEF S 2 mm 2 to 25 mm
B4 SEF S 2 mm 2 to 17 mm
A4 SEF S 2 mm 2 to 17 mm
DLT S 2 mm 2 to 20 mm
LG S 2 mm 2 to 17 mm
LT SEF S 2 mm 2 to 17 mm
Other S 2 mm 2 to 17 mm
Pitch Adj. 1 mm
Engine SP Adjustment
The following fine adjustment of "S" and "L" can be done by the customer engineer in the SP
mode. "L" can be adjusted only for the paper sizes listed in the table below.
D454/D615 72 SM
Fold Adjustments
A3 SEF S 0 mm 4 mm L 0 mm 4 mm
B4 SEF S 0 mm 4 mm L 0 mm 4 mm
Multi-Folding
D454/D615
Unit
A4 SEF S 0 mm 4 mm L 0 mm 4 mm
DLT S 0 mm 4 mm L 0 mm 4 mm
LG S 0 mm 4 mm L 0 mm 4 mm
LT SEF S 0 mm 4 mm L 0 mm 4 mm
12"x18" S 0 mm 4 mm L 0 mm 4 mm
8-Kai S 0 mm 4 mm L 0 mm 4 mm
Other S 0 mm 4 mm L 0 mm 4 mm
SM 73 D454/D615
Replacement and Adjustment
A3 SEF S 0 mm 10 mm
B4 SEF S 0 mm 10 mm
A4 SEF S 0 mm 10 mm
DLT S 0 mm 10 mm
LG S 0 mm 10 mm
LT SEF S 0 mm 10 mm
Other S 0 mm 10 mm
Pitch Adj. 1 mm
Notes
No folding adjustment can be done for 13"x19.2", 13"x19", 12.6"x19.2"
Engine SP Adjustment
The following fine adjustment of "S" can be done by the customer engineer in the SP mode.
D454/D615 74 SM
Fold Adjustments
13"x19.2" S 0 mm 4 mm
Multi-Folding
D454/D615
13"x19" S 0 mm 4 mm
Unit
12.6"x19.2" S 0 mm 4 mm
12.6"x18.5" S 0 mm 4 mm
13"x18" S 0 mm 4 mm
SR A3 (320x450 mm) S 0 mm 4 mm
SR A4 (225x320 mm) S 0 mm 4 mm
226x310 mm S 0 mm 4 mm
310x432 mm S 0 mm 4 mm
A3 SEF S 0 mm 4 mm
B4 SEF S 0 mm 4 mm
A4 SEF S 0 mm 4 mm
B5 SEF S 0 mm 4 mm
DLT S 0 mm 4 mm
LG S 0 mm 4 mm
SM 75 D454/D615
Replacement and Adjustment
LT SEF S 0 mm 4 mm
12"x18" S 0 mm 4 mm
8-Kai S 0 mm 4 mm
Other S 0 mm 4 mm
D454/D615 76 SM
Fold Adjustments
Multi-Folding
D454/D615
Unit
Size Setting Default Range Setting Default Range
Pitch Adj. 1 mm
Engine SP Adjustment
The following fine adjustment of "S2" and "L" can be done by the customer engineer in the
SP mode.
SM 77 D454/D615
Replacement and Adjustment
A3 SEF L 0 mm 4 mm S2 0 mm 4 mm
B4 SEF L 0 mm 4 mm S2 0 mm 4 mm
A4 SEF L 0 mm 4 mm S2 0 mm 4 mm
B5 SEF L 0 mm 3 mm S2 0 mm 3 mm
DLT L 0 mm 4 mm S2 0 mm 4 mm
LG L 0 mm 4 mm S2 0 mm 4 mm
LT SEF L 0 mm 4 mm S2 0 mm 4 mm
12"x18" L 0 mm 4 mm S2 0 mm 4 mm
8-Kai L 0 mm 4 mm S2 0 mm 4 mm
Other L 0 mm 4 mm S2 0 mm 4 mm
D454/D615 78 SM
Fold Adjustments
Multi-Folding
D454/D615
Unit
Size Setting Default Range Setting Default Range
Pitch Adj. 1 mm
Engine SP Adjustment
The following fine adjustment of "L1" and "L2" can be done by the customer engineer in the
SP mode.
SM 79 D454/D615
Replacement and Adjustment
A3 SEF L1 0 mm 4 mm S1 0 mm 4 mm
B4 SEF L1 0 mm 4 mm S1 0 mm 4 mm
A4 SEF L1 0 mm 4 mm S1 0 mm 4 mm
B5 SEF L1 0 mm 4 mm S1 0 mm 4 mm
DLT L1 0 mm 4 mm S1 0 mm 4 mm
LG L1 0 mm 4 mm S1 0 mm 4 mm
LT SEF L1 0 mm 4 mm S1 0 mm 4 mm
12"x18" L1 0 mm 4 mm S1 0 mm 4 mm
8-Kai L1 0 mm 4 mm S1 0 mm 4 mm
Other L1 0 mm 4 mm S1 0 mm 4 mm
D454/D615 80 SM
Fold Adjustments
Multi-Folding
D454/D615
Unit
Size Setting Default Range
A3 SEF S1 0 mm 10 mm
B4 SEF S1 0 mm 10 mm
A4 SEF S1 0 mm 10 mm
DLT S1 0 mm 10 mm
LG S1 0 mm 10 mm
LT SEF S1 0 mm 10 mm
Other S1 0 mm 10 mm
Pitch Adj. 1 mm
Engine SP Adjustment
The following fine adjustment of "S1" and "S2" can be done by the customer engineer in the
SP mode.
SM 81 D454/D615
Replacement and Adjustment
A3 SEF S1 0 mm 4 mm S2 0 mm 4 mm
B4 SEF S1 0 mm 4 mm S2 0 mm 4 mm
A4 SEF S1 0 mm 4 mm S2 0 mm 4 mm
B5 SEF S1 0 mm 4 mm S2 0 mm 4 mm
DLT S1 0 mm 4 mm S2 0 mm 4 mm
LG S1 0 mm 4 mm S2 0 mm 4 mm
LT SEF S1 0 mm 4 mm S2 0 mm 4 mm
12"x18" S1 0 mm 4 mm S2 0 mm 4 mm
8-Kai S1 0 mm 4 mm S2 0 mm 4 mm
Other S1 0 mm 4 mm S2 0 mm 4 mm
D454/D615 82 SM
Fold Adjustments
Multi-Folding
D454/D615
A3 SEF S1, S2 2 mm 2 to 12 mm
Unit
B4 SEF S1, S2 2 mm 2 to 12 mm
A4 SEF S1, S2 2 mm 2 to 12 mm
DLT S1, S2 2 mm 2 to 12 mm
LG S1, S2 2 mm 2 to 12 mm
LT SEF S1, S2 2 mm 2 to 12 mm
Other S1, S2 2 mm 2 to 12 mm
Pitch Adj. 1 mm
Engine SP Adjustment
The following fine adjustment of "S1", "S2", and "S3" can be done by the customer engineer
in the SP mode.
SM 83 D454/D615
Replacement and Adjustment
A3 SEF S1 0 mm 4 mm
B4 SEF S1 0 mm 4 mm
A4 SEF S1 0 mm 4 mm
B5 SEF S1 0 mm 4 mm
DLT S1 0 mm 4 mm
LG S1 0 mm 4 mm
LT SEF S1 0 mm 4 mm
8-Kai S1 0 mm 4 mm
Other S1 0 mm 4 mm
A3 SEF S2 0 mm 4 mm
B4 SEF S2 0 mm 4 mm
A4 SEF S2 0 mm 4 mm
B5 SEF S2 0 mm 4 mm
DLT S2 0 mm 4 mm
D454/D615 84 SM
Fold Adjustments
LG S2 0 mm 4 mm
LT SEF S2 0 mm 4 mm
8-Kai S2 0 mm 4 mm
Other S1 0 mm 4 mm
A3 SEF S3 0 mm 4 mm
Multi-Folding
B4 SEF S3 0 mm 4 mm
D454/D615
Unit
A4 SEF S3 0 mm 4 mm
B5 SEF S3 0 mm 4 mm
DLT S3 0 mm 4 mm
LG S3 0 mm 4 mm
LT SEF S3 0 mm 4 mm
12"x18" S3 0 mm 4 mm
8-Kai S3 0 mm 4 mm
Other S1 0 mm 4 mm
SM 85 D454/D615
Replacement and Adjustment
The illustration above shows the positions of the three stoppers inside the machine. The
positioning of the stoppers is critical because this determines the types of folding.
D454/D615 86 SM
Skew Adjustment
Multi-Folding
D454/D615
Two examples are shown below.
Unit
Example 1: High (Stopper Too Far From The Nip)
The black arrow shows the direction of paper feed from right to left. When the skew sheet is
opened the Front edge is longer than the Rear edge.
SM 87 D454/D615
Replacement and Adjustment
The black arrow shows the direction of paper feed from right to left. When the skew sheet is
opened the Front edge is shorter than the Rear edge.
D454/D615 88 SM
Skew Adjustment
Multi-Folding
D454/D615
Unit
SM 89 D454/D615
Replacement and Adjustment
General Procedure
1. Retrieve the first folded paper from the top of the multi-folder. The first sheet is on the
bottom of the stack.
2. If a fold is skewed, spread the paper out in the direction of paper feed shown in the
diagrams above.
3. Carefully measure the distances between the folds between L1, L2, L3.
4. Compare the Front and Rear measurements.
5. Refer to the table below to determine where the paper is skewing and what type of
adjustment is required.
D454/D615 90 SM
Skew Adjustment
L1 L2 L3 S1 S2 S3
Multi-Folding
D454/D615
F Short F Short --- Lower F Raise F ---
Unit
FM5 F Long F Long --- Raise F Lower F ---
SM 91 D454/D615
Replacement and Adjustment
Table Key
You must refer to the "Skew Correction Reference Diagrams". The following abbreviations
are used in the table above.
S1, S2, S3 Refers to Stopper 1, Stopper 2, Stopper. In the diagrams these are
annotated as: {, , } respectively.
Raise F Raise the front end of the stopper fence. For more, see below.
Lower F Lower the front end of the stopper fence. For more, see below.
D454/D615 92 SM
Skew Adjustment
This means you must lower the front end of stopper 2.
Then, compare the L3 measurements.
In this example, imagine that L3 is longer at the front than at the rear.
Look at the table, in the row for FM1, and the column for L3.
F Long means Front measurement longer than Rear
F Short means Rear measurement longer than Front
L3 is longer at the front, so we have an F Long situation again.
Then look at the next line, below F Long. It says Raise F on S3.
This means you must raise the front end of stopper 3.
Multi-Folding
D454/D615
Unit
3. The illustration above shows the location for each stopper adjustment.
Each stopper is equipped with two screws.
The black plastic screw is the Set screw and the metal silver screw is the
Adjustment screw.
SM 93 D454/D615
Replacement and Adjustment
D454/D615 94 SM
Skew Adjustment
6. Fasten the Set screw in the hole of the diagonal cutout near the hole where you
removed it.
Multi-Folding
D454/D615
The diagonal cut may be above or below the original hole, depending on which
Unit
stopper you are adjusting.
The photo above shows the Set screw for Stopper 2.
7. Tighten the Set screw so the plate holds the adjustment.
SM 95 D454/D615
Details
2. DETAILS
2.1 OVERVIEW
The illustration above shows the roller groups and their related motors.
D454/D615 96 SM
Overview
Multi-Folding
D454/D615
Unit
The illustration above shows the paper path junction gates and the solenoids and motors
that operate them.
SM 97 D454/D615
Details
The illustration above shows the stoppers and the motors that operate them.
D454/D615 98 SM
Paper Path
Multi-Folding
D454/D615
Unit
When paper is fed to the pre-stacker, the position of each sheet in the paper path is adjusted
to correct skew:
Leading edge of the sheet hits the registration roller and stops.
The upstream rollers continue to rotate 5 mm.
The leading edge of the paper buckles against the stationary registration roller to correct
skew.
The registration roller starts rotating again after the paper has been straightened in the
paper path.
SM 99 D454/D615
Details
2.2.2 PRE-STACKING
D454/D615 100 SM
Paper Path
Multi-Folding
D454/D615
Unit
The dynamic roller [A] raises after the leading edge of the paper passes the TE stop pawl [B].
The TE stop pawl returns to its home position [C] after the trailing edge of the sheet passes.
After the trailing edge of the paper passes the dynamic roller, the positioning roller [D] starts
to rotate and feeds the paper as far as stopper 1 [E].
SM 101 D454/D615
Details
The dynamic roller [A] lowers when the leading edge reaches stopper 1 [B] within the time
prescribed for feeding for the size of the paper selected for the job.
The TE stop pawl [C] presses on the 1st sheet to prevent the leading edge of the 2nd sheet
from hitting it. The operation sequence for stacking the 2nd and 3rd sheets is the same as
that of the 1st sheet.
D454/D615 102 SM
Paper Path
Multi-Folding
D454/D615
Unit
The dynamic roller [A] raises after the leading edge of the 3rd (and last sheet) passes the TE
stop pawl. The position roller [B] rotates twice only after the last sheet has been pre-stacked.
SM 103 D454/D615
Details
After the last sheet has been pre-stacked, the TE stop pawl [A] lowers and the sheets are
jogged vertically (top to bottom).
Next, with the TE stop pawl pressing down on the trailing edges of the stacked sheets, the
stack [B] is jogged horizontally (front to back).
D454/D615 104 SM
Paper Path
Multi-Folding
D454/D615
Unit
Finally, after all three sheets have been pre-stacked and jogged, the fold blade [A] pushes
the stacked sheets into the nip of the fold rollers [B].
SM 105 D454/D615
Details
D454/D615 106 SM
Paper Path
There are two junction gates in the paper path at the entrance of the multi-folder.
Both junction gates remain at their home positions when paper is fed straight through the
multi-fold unit to the next unit downstream.
Multi-Folding
D454/D615
Unit
When folding is selected, the lower entrance junction gate raises and guides the paper to
the fold units below:
Upper entrance junction gate remains at default position.
Lower junction gate rotates up and guides paper down.
SM 107 D454/D615
Details
The junction gate rotates to the right and paper is sent downstream without passing stopper
2. This is down for FM2 mode only when the paper is folded into equal halves.
The illustration above shows the actual location and appearance of the direct send junction
gate.
D454/D615 108 SM
Paper Path
For all fold modes other than FM2 (Half Fold) the direct send junction gate remains at its
home position.
For FM2 the direct send junction gate motor rotates the junction gate [B] to position [C].
After the job is finished the motor rotates the junction gate back to its home position [A].
Multi-Folding
D454/D615
Unit
For the other fold modes (FM1, FM3 to FM6) the junction gate remains at its home position
and does not touch the paper.
SM 109 D454/D615
Details
When FM1 (Z-fold) or FM6 (Gate Fold) is selected, the bypass junction gate raises and
allows paper to pass to folder unit 2.
For fold modes other than FM1, FM6 the bypass junction gate remains at it default position.
Paper passes over the top of the bypass junction gate and into the bypass paper path.
D454/D615 110 SM
Paper Path
These three junction gates are shown above at their default positions.
Multi-Folding
D454/D615
Unit
For straight-through paper feed the junction gates remain at their home positions. Paper
passes straight through the multi-folder to the next peripheral unit downstream.
All three junction gates operate to guide folded paper to the top tray:
Exit junction gate rotates left
Reverse junction gate raises
Top tray junction gate lowers
This sequence guides the folded paper to the top tray.
SM 111 D454/D615
Details
Note: Only Z-folded paper is allowed to exit the multi-folder and pass downstream to other
peripheral units. In this case, the junction gates remain at their default positions. The exit
junction gate sensor (5) guides the paper toward the multi-folder exit above.
D454/D615 112 SM
Paper Folding
Multi-Folding
D454/D615
stopper and stops. However, the upstream rollers continue to rotate. This causes the paper
Unit
~ to bulge and flex toward the nip of the rotating fold rollers on the left. When the paper
reaches the rotating rollers it feeds into the nip. The rollers catch the paper, pull it into the nip,
and form the fold.
In this machine:
There are three fold stoppers placed at strategic positions in the fold path.
Not all the stoppers are used for folding. Only the stoppers needed for the type of
folding are used.
When two or more sheets are fed together, a fold assist plate { pushes the flexed paper
toward the rotating fold rollers. The fold plate is used only when more than one sheet of
paper is fed at a time. Up to three sheets can be fed.
SM 113 D454/D615
Details
The illustration above shows the stopper locations. Note the locations of Stopper 1, Stopper
2, and Stopper 3.
D454/D615 114 SM
Paper Folding
FM1 Z-Folding
Multi-Folding
D454/D615
FM3 Letter Fold-out
Unit
FM4 Letter Fold-in
SM 115 D454/D615
Details
FM1 Z-Folding
D454/D615 116 SM
Paper Folding
Multi-Folding
D454/D615
Unit
In Fold Method 2 (FM2):
The leading edge of the paper is stopped by Fold Stopper 1.
The paper flexes toward the nip of fold rollers { and | which performs the first fold and
feeds the folded edge of the paper into the nip of fold rollers | and }.
Fold rollers | and } feed the paper into the exit path.
Fold Stoppers 2, and 3 are not used.
SM 117 D454/D615
Details
D454/D615 118 SM
Paper Folding
Multi-Folding
D454/D615
Unit
In Fold Method 4 (FM4):
The leading edge of the paper is stopped by Fold Stopper 1.
The paper flexes toward the nip of fold rollers { and | which performs the first fold.
Fold Stopper 2 stops the paper and flexes it into the nip of fold rollers | and }.
Fold rollers | and } perform the second crease and feed the folded paper in exit path.
Fold Stopper 3 is not used.
FM3 and FM4 follow the same sequence but the resultant fold is different:
In FM3 Fold Stopper 1 is positioned high so a short length of paper is allowed to feed
before flexing toward the nip starts.
In FM4 Fold Stopper 1 is positioned low so a long length of paper is allowed to feed
before flexing toward the hip starts.
This positioning of Fold Stopper 1 accounts for the difference in folding at the next nip.
SM 119 D454/D615
Details
D454/D615 120 SM
Paper Folding
Multi-Folding
D454/D615
Unit
In Fold Method 6 (FM6):
The leading edge of the paper is stopped by Fold Stopper 1.
The paper flexes toward the nip of fold rollers { and | which performs the first fold.
Fold Stopper 2 stops the paper and flexes it into the nip of fold rollers | and }.
Fold rollers | and } perform the second fold and feed the folded paper to Stopper 3.
Fold Stopper 3 stops the paper and flexes it into the nip of fold roller ~ and .
Fold roller ~ and form the third crease and feed the folding paper into the exit path.
All three stoppers are used with this method.
A mechanism is provided to prevent the leading edge from catching and folding over on itself
[A] when the 3rd fold is done.
SM 121 D454/D615
Details
[A] After the 2nd fold the sheet(s) are sent to the 3rd stopper for the last fold.
The leading edge of the sheets(s) hit stopper 3 and the upstream rollers continue
[B]
rotate (equivalent to 18 mm of feed) to flex paper toward the fold rollers.
The edge of the FM6 pawl is raised to flatten the leading edge so it cannot bend
[C]
back on itself as the paper enters the nip of the fold rollers.
[D] When the 3rd fold starts the FM6 pawl returns to its home position.
D454/D615 122 SM
Paper Folding
Multi-Folding
D454/D615
FM4 LT Fold In 1st 0506 6755
Unit
2nd 0507 6756
*1: These numbers are the same for Operators, Skilled Operators.
*2: The ranges for these SP codes are the same: [-4 to +4 / 0 / 0.2 mm]
SM 123 D454/D615
Details
The amount of pressure exerted by the crease rollers can be adjusted. This can be done to
eliminate splitting that can occur with coated paper and other types of media. The
adjustment is a manual adjustment done on springs.]
Adjustment range
R1 R2 R3 R4
Default Load 26 N 45 N
A projection fixed in slot and attached to a spring shortens the length to roller can be lowered.
There are four crease rollers. Springs at the front and rear ends of each roller can be
adjusted.
D454/D615 124 SM
Tray Full
A pair sensors are used to detect the tray full condition. At the start of every job:
Tray full sensor (Emitter) [A] emits a signal to tray full sensor (Receptor) [B].
As long as the signal remains unbroken the multi-folder will continue to operate and
feed folded paper to the top of the unit [C].
Multi-Folding
D454/D615
When the top of the stack grows high enough to interrupt the signal between the tray full
Unit
sensors [D], this will signal the machine to shut down the line temporarily.
After the operator removes the stack from the top tray, folding and paper exit will
resume.
SM 125 D454/D615
Details
D454/D615 126 SM
Electrical Components
Multi-Folding
D454/D615
Unit
SM 127 D454/D615
Details
D454/D615 128 SM
Electrical Components
Multi-Folding
D454/D615
Unit
1. Horizontal Transport Motor 7. 2nd Fold Motor
SM 129 D454/D615
Details
1. Entrance JG Motor
4. Stopper 3 Motor
5. Stopper 1 Motor
7. Stopper 2 Motor
D454/D615 130 SM
Electrical Components
Multi-Folding
D454/D615
Unit
1. Horizontal Transport Motor
3. Reverse JG Solenoid
4. Exit JG Solenoid
6. Entrance JG Solenoid
SM 131 D454/D615
Details
5. Registration Sensor
D454/D615 132 SM
Electrical Components
Multi-Folding
D454/D615
Unit
1. Registration Roller Release Motor
SM 133 D454/D615
Details
2. Entrance JG HP Sensor
6. Entrance Sensor
D454/D615 134 SM
Electrical Components
Multi-Folding
D454/D615
Unit
1. Stopper 2 Motor 8. Stopper 1 HP Sensor
SM 135 D454/D615
Details
6. Bypass JG Solenoid
7. Crease Motor
D454/D615 136 SM
Electrical Components
Multi-Folding
D454/D615
Unit
1. Main Board
3. PSU
4. PSU Fan
5. Breaker Switch
SM 137 D454/D615
Details
Motors
D454/D615 138 SM
Electrical Components
Motors
Multi-Folding
D454/D615
Motor
Unit
Operates the direct send junction gate to the
M Direct-Send JG Motor
Stopper 2.
SM 139 D454/D615
Details
Sensors
S Top Tray Full Sensor (E) Detects when the top tray is full.
S Top Tray Full Sensor (R) Detects when the top tray is full.
D454/D615 140 SM
Electrical Components
Sensors
Multi-Folding
D454/D615
Unit
Checks for the presence of paper at power
on. Also checks for jams during paper
feed. Used to create timing for registration
S Registration Sensor
buckle adjustment during paper feed.
Detects the condition of the stacked
sheets during multi-sheet folding.
SM 141 D454/D615
Details
Sensors
Switches
SW Breaker Switch -
D454/D615 142 SM
Electrical Components
Solenoids
Multi-Folding
D454/D615
fold crease unit.
Unit
Operates the pawl that prevents bending of
SOL LE Stop Pawl Solenoid the leading edge while the paper is being
folded in the 2nd fold unit.
Boards
Supplies the 24V power for the operation of the motors and
PCB PSU
solenoids, and the 5V power for the main board and sensors.
SM 143 D454/D615